yz VOL. 82 APRIL, 1959 TRANSACTIONS OF THE ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA INCORPORATED ADELAIDE PUBLISHED AND SOLD AT THE SOCIETY'S ROOMS KINTORE AVENUE, ADELAIDE Price: Two Pounds Two Shillings Anare photo SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON, kr., 0.B.E., B.E., D.SC., F.B.S. PROFESSOR SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON, Kt., O.B.E., B.E., D.Sc., F.R.S. 1882-1958 The basic biographic data concerning Sir Douglas Mawson are in them- selves remarkable. He was born in Bradford, Yorkshire, in 1882, and came to Australia with his parents as a child. He graduated as B.E, from the University of Sydney in 1901 and, after two years’ geological work in the New Hebrides, as B.Sc. in 1905. In 1905 he came to the University of Adelaide as lecturer in mineralogy and petrology and was awarded the D.Sc. degree in 1909. In 1907- 1909 he was in Antarctica with the Shackleton expedition, and he led expeditions organised by himself to Antarctica in 1911-14, in 1929 and in 1931. It must also be added that his own expeditions were notable for scientific planning and results, and that Mawson himself displayed superlative courage and endurance. Shortly after his return from Antarctica in 1914 he volunteered for army service. He was commissioned as a Staff Officer, and one of his assignments took him to Russia, where he was concerned with the supply of munitions to the eastern front. He was knighted in 1914, and in 1920 he became Professor of Geology and Mineralogy in Adelaide. He was elected a Fellow of the Royal Society of London in 1923 and in 1935-1937 he was President of A.N.Z.A.A.S. He received numerous honours both State and academic from many countries. These facts alone indicate a remarkable life and remarkable achievement, but they give a quite inadequate picture of the man himself. Combined with the reat explorer and scientist and the inspiring leader and teacher was a very Fiat gentle man. It is possible here to deal with only one or two aspects of his widespread activities, and particularly those associated with the Royal Society of South Australia. Mawson became a Fellow of the Society in 1905, served as a Councillor in 1941-1942, Vice-President in 1923-1924 and again in 1925-1926, and President in 1924-1925 and again in 1944-1945. He was awarded the Verco Medal in 1931, It was fitting that his election as an Honorary Fellow in 1955 was made in his fiftieth year as a member of the Society. Shortly after Mawson first came to Adelaide he was attracted by the good exposures and striking nature of the rocks of the Barrier Ranges and the Broken Hill area. The Society recognised the importance of his work in this region by publishing two memoirs, “Chiastolites from Bimbowrie, South Australia” and “Geological Investigations in the Broken Hill Area”, This form of publication, much more elaborate than the Transactions and now discontinued, was reserved for works of special merit. His work in the neighbourhood of Olary included the first investigation of the Radium Hill deposit and gave him a special interest in the minerals of uranium and other rare metals; an interest he retained actively for the rest of his life. This same interest also first took him to the Flinders Ranges, where he did a great deal of work on the Mount Painter minerals. Visits to the Barrier and Flinders Ranges, originally undertaken for their mineralogical interest, had:shown Mawson that these regions also gave wonderful exposures of Proterozoic glacial rocks. His Antarctic experiences had given him a profound interest in glaciology and it was early in the 1920's that he started his systematic work on the rocks of the Adelaide System in the Flinders Ranges. For thirty years this work continued and a series of papers published in the Transactions of this Society must be regarded as classical contributions to a subject of outstanding geological interest. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82. 2 MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY The fundamental interests of Mawson are shown by his insistence on the importance of the physico-chemical aspects of geology. Apart from his purely stratigraphic papers most of his work is supported by chemical data. He also encouraged most of his students to become proficient in chemical work. Although Mawson’s contribution to the publications and the official work of the Society has been of outstanding importance, his less formal participation in the meetings of the Society must not be overlooked. He frequently exhibited specimens of unusual interest and entered into discussions with enthusiasm. In this his interests and knowledge were by no means confined to geological sub- jects but ranged widely. He had a particular knowledge and love of trees and his advice was often sought by his friends. Those who worked with and knew Douglas Mawson could uot fail to recog- nise the quality of greatness, but they are also grateful to have known a very human and modest and kindly man. A.R.A. BIBLIOGRAPHY 1903. (With T. G. Taytor.) The Geology of Mittagong. Jour. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 87, pp. 306-350. 1904. Preliminary Note on the Geology of the New Hebrides. Rept. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 10, p. 213. 1904. (With T. H. Lasy.) Preliminary Observations on Radioactivity and the Occurrence of Radium in Australian Minerals. Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 38, pp. 382-389. 1905. The Geology of the New Hebrides. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W. (3), pp. 400-485. 1906. (With F. Cuapman). Halimeda-limestones of the New Hebrides. Qrly. Jour, Geol. Soc., 62, pp. 702-711. 1906. Mineralogical Notes. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 80, pp. 67-70. 1906. The Minerals and Genesis of the Veins and Schlieren Traversing the Aegirine-Syenite in the Bowral Quarries. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.W., 381, pp. 580-607. 1906. On Certain New Mineral Species Associated with Carnotite in the Radio- active Ore-body near Olary. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 80, pp. 188-193. 1907. Geological Features of Part of Eyre Peninsula. Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 31, pp. 71-76. 1907. Mineralogical Notes. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 31, pp. 119-124. 1907. (With W. T. Cooxe.) The Phosphate Minerals from Elder Rock. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 31, pp. 65-70. 1907. The Wadella Springs and Associated Bog Iron Ore Deposit. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 31, pp. 77-78. 1909. Map Incorporating Route Survey of Coast Line and Hinterland of Portion of South Victoria Land. Reproduced in “The Heart of the Antarctic”. Heinemann. 1909. Notes on the Gem-bearing Gravels at Barossa. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 38, pp. 141-144. 1911. The Australasian Antarctic Expedition. Geog. Jour. (June), pp. 1-12. 1911. Chiastolites from Bimbowrie, South Australia. Mem. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 2 (3), pp. 189-210. 1912. Geological Investigations in the Broken Hill Area. Mem. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 2 (4), pp. 211-319. . The Home of the Blizza . Auroral Observations at Cape Royds Station, Antarctica, Trans. Roy. SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON 3 . Pre-Cambrian Areas in the North-Eastern Portion of South Australia and the Barrier, New South Wales. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 13, pp. 188-191. . Lecture on: Proposed Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sei, 13, pp. 395-100. . The Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-1914. Geog, Jour. (Sept.), pp. 257-286. . Contribution to the Discussion on the “Past and Present Relations of Antarctica”. Rept. Brit. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., Section D, 1914 Meeting. . The Antarctic Expedition. Pub. in “Addresses Delivered before the Canadian Club”. Montreal. . The Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-1914. Scottish Geog. Mag., 31, pp. 337-360. . The Australasian Antarctic Expedition, 1911-1914: Summary of Results. Scottish Geog. Mag., 31, pp, 476-477. Ay 2 vols. London: Heinemann. Soc. $. Aust., 40, pp. 151-212. . A Contribution to the Study of Ice Structures. Repts. Brit. Ant. Exp., 1907-09. Geology, 2, pp. 3-24. . Mineral Notes. Trans. Roy, Soc. $. Aust., 40, pp- 262-266. . Petrology of Rock Collections from the Mainland c af South Victoria Land. Repts. Brit. Ant. Exp., 1907-09. Geology, 2, pp, 201-237. . A Lecture on Some Features of the Antarctic Ice-Cap. Abstracts of Prac. Geol. Sac. London, 1026, pp. 83-84. . A Discussion on the Antarctic Ice-Cap and its Borders. Abstracts of Proc. Geol. Soc. London, 1027, pp. 2-8. . Maequarie Island, a Sanctuary for Australasian Sub-Antarctic Fauna. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc, A’sia (5.4. Branch), 20, pp. 1-15, . Australasian Antarctic Expedition: Report on the Progress of the Publica- tion of the Scientific Results. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 15, pp. 1-6. . The Current Geographical Outlook. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 15, Section E, pp. 1-16. . Leben und Tod am Sudpol. Brockhaus, Leipzig. . Macquarie Island and its Future. Proc. Roy, Soc. Tas., pp. 40-54. (With F. Coapman.) The Tertiary Brown-coal Bearing Beds of Moor- lands. Trans. Roy. Soc, $, Aust. 46, pp. 131-147, Igneous Rocks of the Mt. Painter Belt. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 47, pp. 376-387. . Macquarie Island and its Future. Australian Zoologist, 3 (3), pp. 92-102. . Notes on the Geological Features of the Meadows Valley. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust.. 47, pp. 371-375. Australasian Antarctic Expedition: Report of the Progress of the Publica- tion of the Scientific Results. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv, of Sci., 17, p. 139. . Evidence and Indications of Algal Contributions in the Cambrian and - Pre-Cambrian Limestones of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 49, pp. 186-190. (With F. Caapman.)} Notes on Certain South Australian Fossiliferous Terrestrial Formations of Recent Age. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 49, pp. 91-95. MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY . Records of the Aurora Polaris. A’sian Ant. Exp., 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series B, 2 (1), pp. 1-191. . Some Aspects of Forestry in South Australia. Commemoration Address: University of Adelaide. The Hassell Press, pp. 1-30. . Additions to the South Australian Mineral Record. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust., 50, pp. 25-30. . A Brief Resumé of Present Knowledge Relating to the Igneous Rocks of South Australia, Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 18, pp. 229-274. (With P. S. Hossretp.) Relics of Aboriginal Occupation in the Olary District. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, pp. 17-24. . Varve Shales Associated with the Permo-Garboniferous Glacial Strata of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, pp. 160-162. . Wooltana Basic Igneous Belt. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 50, pp. 192-200. . Geological Notes on an Area along the North-Eastern Margin of the North- Eastern Portion of the Willouran Range. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, pp. 386-390. . The Paralana Hot Spring. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 51, pp. 391-397. . Report of Glacial Research Committee: the Finke River Glacial Beds. Repts. Aust. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., pp. 97-99. . Unsolved Problems of Antarctic Exploration and Research. Problems of Polar Research. Amer. Geog. Soc. Spec. Publ., No. 7, pp. 253-266. . South Australian Algal Limestones in Process of Formation. Qrly. Jour. Geol. Soc., 85 (4), pp. 613-623. . The Antarctic Cruise of the “Discovery”, 1929-1930. Geog. Rev., 20 (4), pp. 534-554. . The Occurrence of Potassium Nitrate near Goyder’s Pass, MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia. Min. Mag., 22 (128), pp. 231-237. (With C, T. Maprcan.) The Pre-Ordovician Rocks of the MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia. Qrly. Jour. Geol. Soc., 86, pp. 415-428. . The Home of the Blizzard. Rev. ed. Jondon: Hodder and Stoughton. . The B.A.N.Z. Antarctic Research Expedition, 1929-31. Geog. Jour., 80, 101-131. . The Geology and Glaciation of some Islands of the Southern Ocean and the new-discovered Antarctic Mainland. Qrly. Jour. Geol., Soc., 89, pp. 113-115. Glacial Phenomena Committee. South Australia. Rept. Aust. and N.Z. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 21, pp. 464-465. The New Polar Province. Roy. Inst’n. of Great Britain, pp. 1-18. . The Arltunga and Karoonda Meteorites. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, pp. 1-6. . The Kerguelen Archipelago. Geog. Jour., 83, pp. 18-29. . The Munyallina Beds: a Late-Proterozoic Formation. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 58, pp. 187-196. . Wilke’s Antarctic Landfalls. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. A’sia (S.A. Branch), 84, pp. 70-113. (With F. Coapman.) The Occurrence of a Lower-Miocene Formation on Bougainville Island. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 59, pp. 241-242. . Some Historical Features of the Discovery of Enderby Land and Kemp Land. Geog. Jour., 86, pp. 526-530. . Sir Tannatt William Edgeworth David. Obituary Notices of the Royal Society of London, 4, pp. 493-501. . South Australian Participation in Antarctic Exploration. Proc. Roy. Geog. Soc. A’sia (S.A. Branch), pp. 1-6. 1935. 1936. 1936. 1937. 1938. 1938. 1938. 1938. 1938. 1939. 1939. 1939. 1939. 1940. 1940. 1940. 1940. 1940. 1940. 1940, 1941. 1941. 1942, 1942. 1943. 1943. SIR DOUGLAS MAWSON 5 The Unveiling of Antarctica. Rept. Aust. and N.Z. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., pp. 1-37. Centenary Address No. 7: Progress in Knowledge of the Geology of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, lvi-lIxv. Antarctic Exploration. Pub. in “Centenary History of South Australia”. Roy. Geog. Soc. of A’sia (S.A. Branch), pp. 338-350. The most Northerly Occurrence of Fossiliferous Cambrian Strata yet Re- corded in South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 61, pp. 181-186. Cambrian and Sub-Cambrian Formations at Parachilna Gorge. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), pp. 255-262. Charles Chewings: Obituary Notice. Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond., 94, p. 117. Further Discoveries of Sapropelic deposits in the Coorong Region of South Australia. Pub. in “Oil Shale and Cannel Coal”. The Inst. of Petro- leum, pp. 50-52. The Mount Caernarvon Series of Proterozoic Age. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), pp. 347-351. Walter Howchin: Obituary Notice. Proc. Geol. Soc. Lond., 94, pp. 118-122. The Cambrian Sequence in the Wirrealpa Basin. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63 (2), pp. 331-347. The First Stage of the Adelaide Series: as Illustrated at Mount Magni- ficent. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63 (1), pp. 69-78. Introductory Remarks. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series B, 5, pp. 11-16 and 107-109. The Late Proterozoic Sediments of South Australia. Rept. Aust. N.Z. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., 24, pp. 80-88. The Adelaide Series. Aust. Jour. Sci., pp. 25-27. Catalogue of Rocks and Minerals Collected in Antarctic Lands. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 4 (13), pp..405-432. Hydrological Observations. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 2 (4), pp. 103-125. Marine Biological Programme and other Zoological and Botanical Activi- ties A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 2 (5), pp. 127-167. Notes and Exhibits: Tillite and other Rocks from Hallett Cove, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 64 (2), p. 362. Record of Minerals of King George Land, Adelie Land and Queen Mary Land. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 4 (12), pp. 371-404. Sedimentary Rocks. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14, Scientific Repts., Series A, 4 (11), pp. 347-367. Middle Proterozoic Sediments in the Neighbourhood of Copley. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65 (2), pp. 304-311 The Wilpena Pound Formation and Underlying Proterozoic Sediments. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 65 (2), pp. 295-303. Geographical Narrative and Cartography. A’sian Ant. Exp. 1911-14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 1, pp. 1-364. The Structural Character of the Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soe. S, Aust., 66 (2), pp. 262-272. Macquarie Island: Its Geography and Geology. A’sian. Ant. Exp. 1911- 14. Scientific Repts., Series A, 5, pp. 1-194. (With L. W. Parkin.) Some Granitic Rocks of South-Eastern South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 67 (2), pp. 233-243. MEMOIR AND BIBLIOGRAPHY . The Nature and Occurrence of Uraniferous Mineral Deposits in South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68 (2), pp. 334-357. (With W. B. Datiwirz.) Palaeozoic Igneous Rocks of Lower South- Eastern South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 68 (2), pp. 191-209. (With E. R. Secnrr.) Granites of the Tintinara District. Trans. Roy. S. Aust., 69 (2), pp. 263-276. (With W. B. Datiwitz.) Scapolitized Dolomites of Yankaninna. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69 (2), pp. 212-216. (With E. R. Seenrr.) Porphyritic Potash-soda Micro-granites of Mount Monster. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69 (2), pp. 217-222. (With W. B. Datuwirz.) The Soda-rich Leucogranite Cupolas of Umberatana. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 69 (1), pp. 22-49. (With E. R. Secnrr.) Barium-rich Aplitic Gneisses of Broken Hill. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 70 (2), pp. 277-293. The Geological Background of South Australia. Handbook of Aust. N.Z. Assoc. for the Adv. of Sci., pp. 5-11. Introductory Note to A. B. Edwards: The Moorumbunna Meteorite. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 70 (2), pp. 348-349. . The Adelaide Series as Developed along the Western Margin of the Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 71 (2), pp. 259-280. Australia’s Antarctic Territory. Australia, 1949: The Herald Year Book, Melbourne. pp. 266-267. . The Elatina Glaciation: a Third Recurrence of Glaciation Evidenced in the Adelaide System. Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 78, pp. 117-121. The Late Precambrian Ice-Age and Glacial Record of the Bibliando Dome. Jour. and Proc. Roy. Soc. N.S.W., 82, pp. 150-174. (With E. R. Szcnrr.) Purple Slates of the Adelaide System. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 72 (2), pp. 276-280. Sturtian tillite of Mount Jacob and Mount Warren Hastings, North Flinders Ranges. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 72 (2), pp. 244-251. Basaltic Lavas of the Balleny Islands. A.N.A.R.E. Report. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 73 (2), pp. 223-231. . Occurrence of Water in Lake Eyre, South Australia. Nature, 166, pp. 667-669. (With R. C. Spricc.) Subdivision of the Adelaide System. Aust. Jour. of Sci., 13 (3), pp. 69-70. . Professor Thomas Harvey Johnston: Bibliography, List of Titles of the Published Works of Thomas Harvey Johnston, M.A., D.Se., late Professor of Zoology at the University of Adelaide (with Biographical Introduc- tion). Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 75. . Programme of Australian Antarctic Exploration. Nature, 172, p. 479. . The Willunga Basin: Introductory and Historical Notes. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 76, pp. 108-113. . The Réle of Geology in the Activities of the Royal Society of South Aus- tralia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Aust., 77, pp. xii-xiv. Symposium: Australia and I.G.Y. in Antarctica. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., 69, . 5-9, pp . Knee Moulded Pots from the New Hebrides. Records S.A. Museum, 18 (1), pp. 83-86. . Sturtian Glacial Horizon in the MacDonnell Ranges. Aust. Jour of Sci., 19, pp. 162-163. . Australites in the Vicinity of Florieton, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 81, pp. 161-163. THE DISTRIBUTION AND FIELD RELATIONS OF THE GRANITIC ROCKS OF PORT ELLIOT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY D.R. BOWES Summary Two closely-spaced intrusive phases of granite are postulated. The first intrusion was contaminated by assimilation of country rock of the roof and is now seen as a porphyritic granite. The second granite, an even-grained type, intruded the porphyritic granite but did not reach the meta- sedimentary roof and so remained uncontaminated. THE DISTRIBUTION AND FIELD RELATIONS OF THE GRANITIC ROCKS OF PORT ELLIOT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. by D. R, Bowes* [Read 10 April, 1958] SUMMARY Two closcly-spaced intrusive phases of granite are postulated, The first in- Gusion was contammated by assimilation of country rack of the roof and is now seen as a porphyritic granite, “The second granite, an evén-grained type, in- truded the porphyritic granite but did not reach the meta-sedimentary 100t and so remained uncontaminated. The granitic rocks of Port Elliot, some 50 miles south of Adelaide, were investigated by Browne (1920) who described two main types of granite, por- bliyeitte and even-grained, and discussed their general distribution and field relations, Investigations uf the granite mass at Rosetta Head, 6 miles west of Port Elliot, led the present author to postulate successive phases of granite intrusion and the formation of the porphyritic granite by contamination of the cven- grained type seen at Port Elliot (Bowes, 1954), The granitic rocks at Port Elliot were also mapped at 24 in. =1 mile (Fig. 1) and the following wre the salient points which emerged from this work. The porphyritic granite, which makes up the major part of the cliffs at Part Elliot, is similar to the granite at Rosetta Head and Granite Island (Browne op. cit.) although the felspar phenocrysts are generally smaller and less abun- dant. Numerous angular xenoliths of meta-greywacke are found and some show metasomatic effects similar to these seen on Granite Island (Kleeman, 1937). The roof of the intrusion is not exposed although it is possible that the large meta-greywacke mass on the western side of Green Bay (Fig. 1) may be a roof pendant. The even-grained outcrops are localized in two areas, viz. in the vicinity of Green Bay and at about 600-700 yards N.N.E. of Commodore Point. There is no suggestion of angularity in the shape of any of the masses of even-graincd granite, most of the boundaries being arcuate, and ne xenoliths cf country rock are present, The junction between the two granites is never knife-sharp and it was found virtually impossible to decide between which crystals the contact passes. Neither granite shows a reduction of grain sizc against the other and some individual crystals at the margin give the appearance of having grown across what may have been an original junction, - The aplite dykes and scherl rock pipes cut across both granitic types. it is postulated that the first granite intrusion, at the Tevel exposed, was contaminated near its roof by the assimilation of meta-sediments to produce the porphyritic granite, the magmatic character of which is indicated by the presence of angular disoriented xenoliths. It has been suggested that a similar mechanism produced the porphyritic granite at Rosetta Head and Granite Ishind (Bowes op. cit.) although the larger and more abundant felspar phenocrysts in these places probably resulted from the assimilation of albite- and chlorite-rich rocks, * Department of Geology, University of Glasgow. Trans. Roy. Soe. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82, 8 D. R. BOWES The even-grained granite outcrops near Green Bay (Fig. 1) are postulated as representing the tabs of small cupola-like masses intruded into the porphyritic granite. This second granite intrusion, which contains no meta-greywacke xenoliths, did not reach the roof of the first intrusion and so remained uncon- taminated. Lack of chilled margins around the even-grained granite, the diffi- culty of delineating the precise line of contact and the absence of xenoliths of porphyritic granite in the even-grained granite suggest that the earlier intrusion was still hot, possibly a crystal mush with residual magma, when the later in- trusion occurred. The aplite dyke injection and schorl rock formation followed the intrusion of the even-grained granite and it is postulated that they were associated with the late stages of its cooling. REFERENCES. Bowes, D, R., 1954. The Metamorphic and Igneous History of Rosetta Head, South Aus- Australia. Trans, Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 77, pp. 182-214. Browne, W. R., 1920. The Igneous Rocks of Encounter Bay, South Australia. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 44, pp. 1-57. Kuirreman, A. W., 1937. The Nature and Origin of the so-called Diorite Inclusions in the Granite of Granite Island. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust., 61, pp. 207-220. 9 PORT ELLIOT GRANITIG ROCKS OF VITVuLSNY HLNOS ‘LOITI LYOd 3O SHDOY DILINVUD FHL inhineec ba SLINVES SILIdAHdHOd FI SLINVYS CaNIVYS- NSAS ir J aLivatoa ANILSAVEL YVAN VL Widy75 “W0s — N3931— sam “t ays— LN1lOd AYOCOWNOD SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE. BY H.WOMERSLEY Summary This paper, the second of a series on certain families of Mesostigmata-Trigynaspida (Acarina) paraphagic upon millipedes, cockroaches and Passalid beetles from Australia and New Guinea, deals with the family Fedrizziidae. Twenty species in all are recognised, including two from the Island of Buru, and fifteen are described as new. Two new genera Neofedrizzia and Parafedrizzia are erected. The species Toxopeusia(Fedrizzia) strandi Oudeinans, 1927, from Buru is regarded as a valid species not conspecific with grossipes Canestrini, 1884 from Queensland. Toxopeusia vitzthumi Onds., 1927, also from Burn, is also considered a valid species and placed in the genus Neofeclrizzia but differing from the other known species. Canestrini's Fedrizzia luevis from Queensland is shown to be a species of Neofedrizzia. SOME ACARINA FROM AUSTRALIA AND NEW GUINEA PARAPHAGIC UPON MILLIPEDES AND COCKROACHES AND ON BEETLES OF THE FAMILY PASSALIDAE. by H. Wowersiey South Austrahan Museum [Read 8 May, 1958} SUMMARY This paper, the second of a serics on certain, fayuilies of Mesostigmata- Trigynaspida {Acarina) paraphagic upon millipedes, eorkrpaches and Passalid beetles from Australia and New Guinea, deals with the family Pedrizziidae. Twenty species in all are recognised, inchiding two drom the Island of Buru, and fitteen are described as new, ‘Two new genera Neofedrizzia and Parafed- rizgid are erected. The species Toxopeusiu( Pedrizzi) atreneli. OQudemans, 1927, from Buru js regarded as a valid species not conspecific with grussipes Canesteini, 1884 from Queensland. Toxepeusia vitzthumi Ouds., 1927, also trom Buru, ig also eun- sidered a valid species and placed in the genus Neofedrizzia but ditfering from the other known species. Canestrini’s Fedrizzia laevis from Queensland is shown to he a specics of Neofedrizzia. Pt, 2.—The family FEDRIZZLDAE, ( Mesostigmata-Trigynaspida. ) Taxopeusiidac, Oudemans, 1927, Ent. Ber. 7(156): 297. (Type genus and species Toxopeusia strandi Ouds., 1927.) Fedrizziidae. Trigdrdh, 1937. Arkiv. f. Zool., 29B(11): 5. (Type genus and species Fedrizzia vrossipes Canestrini, 1884, ) The species belonging to this family are to be found associated with Carabid beetles principally of the family Passalidac. They are small round to oval strongly sclerotised mites with flatish venter and more raised convex dorsum. The dorsal shield is entire and furnished usually with numerous pores and fine setae, generally so minute and upstanding that only their bases are to be seen and are difficult to distinguish fromm pures, In most specics the anterior of the dorsal shield overlaps the gnathosoma as a hyaline cresceut- or sickle-shaped portion devoid of pores or selae except the one pair of vertical sctac. In Neo- jedrizxia scutata n. sp., however, this hyaline portion is extended backwards and expanded laterally to form a shield, devoid of pores and with only some minute setae laterally, which covers about two-thirds of the body before it merges with the posterior of the dorsal shield. Anteriorly the shield underlaps the venter to form a camerostoime, is confluent marginally with the ventral shicld and underlaps again posteriorly to contour the ventral and anal shields. The gnathosoma arises within the camerostome; there ure three pairs of hypostomal setae and the labial cornicles are hyaline and thumb-like with a subapical ad- pressed claw-like process; the palpi are 5-segmented, the basal segment is broad with a pair of lung setae on the inner lamella, the specialised tarsal seta is 2- tined; mandibles with both chelicerae dentate, the movable digit with long hyaline processes two. of which ace blade-like and serrate, the others filamentous: Trans. Roy, Soc. 8. Atist. (1959), Vol. 82. 2 TT. WOMERSLEY within the postero-lateral angles of the camerostome is a triangular scleratised plute (the “ayillac” plates of Sellnick in Ht.) of unknown function, The legs are short, 6-segmented; [ is slender, antennaeform without tarsal caruncle and claws; ILIV are stout, the tarsi with pretarsus, caruncle and indistinct claws, femora of leg TV may be clongate without lamellae (Pedrizzia) or short and swollen with lamellae and with a stout curved spine at the posterior Inner corner (Neofedrizzid) or similac but without the stout curved spine (Parafed- rizzia ). fn the female sex the ventral shields consist of & tritostermum with paired laciniass a single (rattsverse jugular shield separated [rom the anterior margin of the sternal shield by a transverse suture and furnished with cne pair of setae and one pair of pores; a sternal shield which is coalesced with the endopodal shields of coxae [ and is much wider than long, the greatest width being across the postero-lateral arzms which extend between coxac I and IL, it is furnished with three pairs of setac and one pair of pores, the anteriar pair of setae (sternal setao Il) are in the anterolateral angles, the other two pairs (sternal setae It and IV) form a transverse rmwy cluse to the posterior margin; titppetl to the pos- terioy margin of the sternal shicld is the sternogynial shield which is shaped sumewlhat like an mverted bell-jar and is furnished with only one pair of pores in the untero-lateral angles; at the posterior apex of the sternogynial shicld is the small reduced mesogynial shield; the latigynial shields are long, narrow aud strap-like flanking the sternogynial shield from the mesogynial shield to the antery-lateral comers of the sternozynial shield; the ventral shield is Js ge covering most of the venter, medially it extends forward on each side of the sternugynial shield and between this shield and coxae IIL and IV with the endopodal shields to which it is coalesced, between the outer margins of the bit and coxac LU-IV it eatends forwards and is coalesced with the exopadal shields, peritremal shiclds and anteriorly with the underlap of the dorsal shield where it forms the camerostome. on the outer body murgins it is coalesced or confluent with the dorsal shield, posterior of coxae LV its margins converge in- wards fur some distance and are separated from the underlap of the dorsal shield by a somewhat diagonal suture, its posterior margin is wide: and trans- verse separated from the anal shicld by a transverse suture, it jas few if any setae and its surface is in must spectes of Pedrizzia covered by a urid of fine transverse striae eroxsecl hy short longitudinal ones, in other species it is quite smooth; the anal shield is wide and triangular with the stat opening in the posterior angle ane usually with a few short setae besides a pair of longer paranal sclae; the stigmata are situated between coxae ID and IV and the peri- tremes reach coxae 1; outside of the peritremes oppusite coxae UL is the atrium of a large duct. the outer edge of the atrium being strongly selerctised. In the mule the jugular shield may Le present und separated as in the female. or it may be absent. When absent (Neofedrizzin) there is in front of the auterior margin of the sternal shield a pair of anteriorly directed processes of wiknown function; the rest o£ the ventral shields except the anal are all coalesced to form a sterno-venttal shield with the genital orifice near the antevior margin betweer coxue LE or between coxae If and III, the surface may be furnished with a grid of fine striae as in the females of some Fedrizzia, or it may be smooth; when a grid is present a forwardly curved line indicates fusion of the ventral and sternal portion; tle anal shield is similar te that of the female; in Parafedrizzia the anal shield is not demarcated, being coalesced with the rest, as it isalso ovalesced with the ventral shield in the female of this genus. Hitherto the only genus included in the family lus been Fedrizzia Canes- trin}, 1884 (= Toxopeusia Ouds.. 1927) with F. gressipes Cunest., S84, as type. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 13 In this paper eight species of Fedrizzia s. str. are recognised of which six are described as new. Two new genera Neofedrizzia, with eleven species, nine of which are new, and Parafedrizzia with one new species are erected. Of the previously known species Fedrizzia (Toxopeusia) strandi Ouds., 1927, from the Island of Buru has generally becn considered as the same as grossipes from Diagram to illustrate main measurements uscd: L, length of idiosoma; W, width of idiosoma; 1, length of jugular shield; 2, length of sternal shield; 3, length of sternogynial shield; 4, distance of apex of sternogynial from anterior margin of anal shield; 5, distance from apex of sternogynial to apex of anal shield; 6, distance of apex of sternogynial from end of body; 7, length of anal shield; A, width of jugular shield; B, anterior width of sternal shield; C, width of sternal shield at narrowest part between coxae II; D, greatest width of sternal shield across postero-lateral arms; E, anterior width of sternogynial shield; I’, width between coxae Il; G, width between points of angles between coxae IIT and IV; H, width between coxae: IV; I, width of anal shield. 14 H. WOMERSLEY Queensland. It is now regarded as a separate and valid species. Fedrizzia laevis Canest., 1884, from Queensland is recognised as a valid species of Neo- fedrizzia, as is also Toxopeusia vitzthumi Ouds., 1927, from the Island of Buru. Drs, Camin and Gorirossi in their 1955 paper had before them an unde-~ serihed species in which the sternagynial shicld was rounded and not tapering as in grossipes and in which the male lacked the jugular shield. On these char- acters they suggest that their material belongs to a new and undescribed genus. ie would now seem that they have a species of Neofedrizzia as diagnosed in $ paper. That the rounded or tapering character of the sternogynial shield is not a good generic one is shown in the present studies by the occurrence of both forms in both Fedrizzia and Neofedriazia. For the discovery of several features in the morphology of these mites such as the pair of pre-sternal processes in front of the anterior margin of the sternal shield in those species (genus Neofedrizsia) in which the jugular shields are absent in the male, and also the presence in the postero-lateral angles of the camerostome of a small well sclerotised triangular plate, as well as for other help and advice [ wish to record my grateful thanks to Dr. Sellnick. Geographically species of this family will probably be found to occur in the tropical and semi-tropical regions wherever beetles of the family Passalidae and its allies occur. So Far, however, species bave been or are now described from the Mohiceas. New Guinea, and the rain forest arca of castern Australia, The following species are dealt with in this paper:— Gonus Feprrzzia 5. str. Canest,, 1584, grossipes Canest., 1884. Queensland, Australia. sp. ef. “rossipes Canest., 1884 (Sellnick in lit.) Queensland, Australia. sellnicki sp. nov. Queensland, Ausiralja. carabi_ sp, nov. Aiyura, New Guinea, derricki sp. nov. Queensland, Australia. oudemansi Sp. DOV. New South Wales, Australia, bornemisszai sp, nov. Queensland, Australia, strandi (Ouds., 1927) Is. of Buru, Moluccas. Genus NEOrEDIZZIA nov. gayi sp. nov. Queensland, Australia. canestrini sp. nov. Queensland, New South Wales, Australia, cynala sp. nov. New South Wales, Australia. camini sp. nov. New South Wales, Australia. govirossiag sp. Nov. Queensland, Australia. tragardhi sp. nov. New South Wales, Queensland, Australia, brooksi sp, nov. Queensland, Australia. vidua sp. nov. Queenslimd, Australia. scutala sp. nev. Bulolo, New Guinea. laevis (Canest., 1884) Queensland, Australis. vitzthumi (Ouds., 1987) Is. of Buru, Moluceas: Genus. PanarEDRIZZ1A nov. buloloensis sp, nov, Bulolo, New Guinea Key to the genera vf the family Fedrizziidae 1. Jugular shields coalesced medially to form @ transverse shield separated from the sternal shield in both sexes, Sternogynial shield rounded posteriorly to bell-jar shape with tapering sides and apical AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA PRDRIZZIDAR 15 knob, A triangular anal shield present or not, One of the two long setao cm basal segment of palpi with 6-9 long branches, other nude, Femora of legs U-IV elongate and truncheon like or short and wide but without a strong curved spine at posterior angle. 2 Such jugular shields absent in male being eoalesced with sternal shields in fesne of sternal with a pair of free or basully fixed forwardly directed processes and the basal part of tritosteraym bulbous. Sterno- gynial shield evenly rounded or bell-jar shaped. Anal shield present. Both long setae on basal palpal segment only shortly ciliated. Femora of legs H-IV short and broadly swollen with lamellae and with a strong curved spine at posterior angle. Genus Neofedrizzia nov. Type N. gayi sp. nov, 2. Anai shield absent, coalesced with ventral shield in both sexes. Elongate species widest behind middle in line of coxae LV. Femora IIL and 1V short and swollen with lamellae, but with only a straight normal scta at posterior corner. Genus ie rade nay, Type P. buloloensis sp. nov. Anal shield present m both sexes. Rounded species. Femora III and IV elongate, loner than wide and truncheon like, without lamellae, Genus Fedrizzia Canest., 1854. Type F. grossipes Canest., 1884, Genus Freprrzzia Canestrini, 1884 Canestini, G., 1884, Acari nnovi vo poco noti Il, Acari dell’Australin—Atti del. KR. Institute Veneto 11(6): p, TUT. Type F. grossipes Canest., 1884. =YToxopeusia Ondemans, A. C., 1927. Acarol, Aanteekeninjen, LXXNVIT. Bot Bey 7 (156): 227; Fauna Buruana, Acari, in Treubia 7, Suppl, 2: p. 60. As differentiated in the preceding discussion and diagnosis of the family and as in the key to genera, Fedrizzia prossipes Canestrini, 1684 Fedrizzia grassipes Ganest., 1884. Atti del R. Inet. Veneto T1(6): p. 707, pl 8, figs, 1-2. This species was originally described by Canestrini from specimens found on beetles “allied to the European Geotrupes’ from Queensland collected by the late Prof, F. Pulle of the University of Padova, Later, in 1927, and more fully in 1928, Oudemans described the genus Toxopeusia with strandi sp, nov, as type, from “in fungi” from the Island of Bury. This genus is now accepted as synonymous with Canestrini’s Fedrigzia. In his figures and descriptions of gtossipes Canestrini shows a moderately elongate oval form which however differs considerably in the ratio of length to width as given by the quoted dimen- sions, from that shown by his figure. The dimensions quoted in the deseription are: length in both sexes 900, width of male 520p, of fenisle 530, which gives u ratio of approximately 1-70: 1-0 for length to width. In the figures, assum ing the length to be correct the width would be approximately 620, for the male and 630, for the female or a ratio of length to width of approximately 1-44:1-0, This consideration suggests that the dimensions given in the text should have been 620, and 630) respectively. I am very greatly indebted to my colleague Dr, Max Sellnick of Hamburg who has examined the types of both male and female of grossipes which were 16 H. WOMERSLEY sent to him by Dr. Valle Parma, for the following measurements of these speci- mens: Type @: length of idiosoma 918,, width 6124 (which gives a ratio of length to width 1:5:1-0). Type 3: length of idiosoma 900.2, width 594u (which gives a ratio of Jength to width of 1-51: 1-0). These measurements confirm the view expressed above that the widths given by Canestrini were probably an errur in printing. Other dimensions of the type specimens for which I am also deeply in- debted to Dr, Sellnick are: Female. Jugular shield (tetartosternum) 120, wide by 28» deep anbdialty. Sternal shield, length medially 84,, width anteriorly 1004, width between coxae If (i.e. narrowest part) 88, maximum width of postero-lateral arms 304p., Sternogynial shield, 124y, long by 160, wide anteriorly, distance of posterior vdge from anterior of anal shield 306, and from posterior edge of body 4586p. Ventral shield, distance between coxae ILI 196u, between angles between coxae IIT and IV 296% and between coxae [IV 176p, Anal shield, eae wide by 135. long (deep) (ratio of width: Iength -4: 1-0), Male. ugular shield (tetartosternum) 80% wide by ? long. terno-ventral: width between antero-lateral angles 1204, between angles between cuxae I and coxae III 288.; between angles between coxae III and coxae IV 280p, width between coxae IL 84y, between coxao TIL 188 and between coxae IV 172, distance from anterior border to anterior edge of genital orifice 60y, genital orifice 524 long by 72, wide, Anal shield: 3202 wide by 125, long (ratio of width: length = 2-5: 1-0). Fedrizzia sp. cf. grossipes Canest., 1854 Text fig. 1 A-K Some few years ago I sent to my friend and colleague, Dr, Max Sellnick, of Hamburg, some material of several specics of Fedriszta s.J. of which he very kindly made dissections and studied them. Amongst this material were a number of specimens from a Passalid beetle from Imbil, Queensland (coll. J. F. Gay, 11th Sept., 1946) which, after compari- son with the type male and female of F. grossipes Canest. received hy him from Dr. Valie Parma, he considered (in lit.) to be conspecific therewith. A study of Sellnick’s dissections and of other entire specimens and a comparison of their detailed measurements with those given to me by him of the types of grossipes convinces me that the Imbil specimens ure specifically distinct therefrom. In the present study it is shown that the many species of the genera Fedrizzia and Neofedrizzia ave very constant in certain specific characters as follows: {1} overall size which varies but little and which does not differ much between sexes; (2) the shape, whether morc or less rounded or more elongate; (3) the dimensions of the anal shield. However, in deference to Dr. Sellnick’s opinion as expressed in correspim- dence I refrain for the present from giving a specific name to this species, com- paring it with grossipes Canestrini. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 17 Fig, 1—edrizzia sp. cf, yrossipes Cancst., 1884, A-F, H-K Female: A, yentral view; B, venter (after Sellnick) showing camorostome, axillar plates and ornamentation; C. tritos- ternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial, and Jatigynial shields, enlarged; D, latigynial shields separated from sternogynial; E, chelicerae; F, gnathosoma and palpi; H, leg I; I, Jeg TU; J, leg Tt; K, leg IV; G, Male, tritosternum, jugular and. sternal shields. 1 male from Aulacocyclus sp. (Passalidae) from Dalby, Queensland, 25th Dec., 1952 (coll. H. Geary). Also 1 male from Mastochilus dilatus Dalm., Washpool Crk., near Tenterfield, N.S.W., 8th Oct, 1956 (coll. G. F. Bornemissza). Description—Female (from Imbil),—Broadly oval to roundish in shape. Length of idiosoma 1160p, width &70p. 18 H. WOMBRSLEY Dorsum with numerous small pores or setae bases—if the latter than the setae aré exceedingly minute and upstanding. Venter—Base of tritosternum wider than long in the ratio of 10 : 9; jugular shielt as figured, 146. wide by 42. long, with rounded anterolateral corners, anterior margin straight and only indented medially, the single pair of setae 25 long enrved backwards and 61): apart, the one pair of lyriform pores T5y apart and nearer to the posterior than to the anterior border: sternal shield with the anterior margin transverse and 105, wide, sides contouring the edges af coxae IL and continuing between coxae IT and U1 to a maximum width of 366u between the ends of the postero-lateral arms, narrowest part just behind anterior qargin 99p, posterior inurgin straight medially for 150, then curving posteriorly fora width of 45, before running obliquely forwards to the tips of the postetu- lateral arms of the shield, shield with three pairs of setae and one pair of lyri- form pores, the setae are all short ca. 10» long, the anterior pair of setae are 47 behind the anterior margin and 70. apart, the other two pairs form a trans- vers¢ row near the posterior border, the medial pair 38. apart and 28, from each lateral, the single pair of pores are behind the anterior pair of setac 38 in Cront- of the posterior margin and 75, apart; the sternagynial shield is some- what like an inverted bell-jar or cone with more or less pronounced apox, it is 1f1p long by 1694 wide anteriorly, ratio of width to length = 1-2: 1-0, with the pair of Iyrilorm pores in the antcro-lateral angles 126, apart; latigynial shields Jong and strap-like. widening just beyond the middle to the anterior end; meso- gynial shield small and reduced; ventral shield as in the generic diagnosis, tts Posterior margin transverse, straight and 400, wide, furnished with many minute setae and pores; anal shield triangular 400, wide by 14, long, ratio of width to length = 2°86: 1-0. Gnathosoma as in generic diagnosis. Legs—I 440y long, IL 480n, LU 510u, TV stout 812» (femur clongate expanl- ing gradually to 164, wide at apex), Male (from Smbil),—Of the same size and shape as the female. Darsum as in female, Venter—Jugular shield smaller and narrower than in the female and fitting into a median depression of the anterior margin of the sternal shield, the setue and pores are near the anterior margin, the setae 36« apart; sterno-ventral shield as figured and in the genus, anterior margin 132 wide with a wide and fairly deep excavation, the width across the arms between coxae Uf and IL 352”, and between these and the untero-lateral corners it narrows tn 1034, it carries an- teriorly oF the posterior of the genital orifice three pairs of minute setac and two pairs of pores, the anterior two pairs of setae are in front of the orilice and equidistant apart while the third pair is just posterior of the middle of the orifice. the anterior pores are in the antero-luteral angics and the second anterior of the Uvird pair of setae; the rest of the shield behind the orifice has a number of pores and a few minute sctae; the genital orifice is larze 75 long by 103. wide and is placed in a line between cpxac I and IM; the anal shield is ay in the female, 408). wide by 139. Jong. Fedeizzia sellnicki sp. nov. Text fiz. 3 A-t Types—Holotype female and allotype male from a Passalid beetle from Mt. Lamington, Queensland, 1946 (cull, 7}, represented by three slides of dissec- tions of each sex made by Dr. M. Sellnick and now in the South Austrslian Museum. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZUDAE 19 Other Material—Thrce females from a Passalid from Mt. Glorious, Queens- land, 6th February, 1951 (coll. E. H. Derrick); two females and two males from a Passalid from Dalby, Queensland, 28th February, 1925 (coll. H. Geary), Description—Female holotype—Of the same general facies and size as in Brosipes Canest. Length of idiosoma 1195,, width 928,, ratio length to width = 1:28: 1-0. SS af — s “See, ° . | A t X/ , = si a een “ L f . fs = a. eS we fo he We fC a ; ‘ rf ¥ | te eal = 5 - om \¢ i Py ' a x | SS XS \ } ah we . a. Ny, tha le ms, ' i Te eee etd ( Ny ‘PA A ae J ; 3 Fig, 2.—Fedrizzta sellnicki sp. nov., A-IT Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, stermogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, chelicerae; D, gnathosoma and palp; E, leg 1; F, leg IL; G, leg M1; H, leg IV; 1, Male tritosternum, jugular and sternal shields, Dorsum—Shield entire, covering the whole of the dorsum and underlapping venter as in other species. Venter—Base of tritosternum slightly longer than wide; jugular shicld as figured 150» wide and 47, long (deep) with rounded antero-lateral corners, a0 H. WOMERSLEY anterior margin straight except for a median depression, with one pair of setac ca. 30x long curved backwards and 6], apart and with one pair of lyriform pores 75. apart and slightly nearer the posteriur than the anterior margin; sternal shield with the anterior margin transverse and 122, wide, sides con- touring the edges of coxae II and continuing between coxae IT and Il to a maximum width of 366, between the ends of the postero-lateral arms, narrowest just behind anterior margin 94, posterior margin lightly convex medially for a width of 1694, then curving posteriorly for a width of 47 on each side before running obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms of the shield, shield with threc pairs of minute setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the anterior pair uf setae im line with the narrowest part in the mid-line of coxae Il and 65, apart, the other two pairs form a transverse row along the posterior margin with the median pair 42 apart and 35, from the laterals, the single pair of pores posterior of the anterior pair uf setae; the sternogynial shield_is bell-jar shaped with the anterior margin wider than the length, 164 by 117, ratio width to length = 1-4: 1-0, with a pair of lyriform pores in the antero- lateral angles; latigynial shields slender and strap-like; mesogynial shield re- duced: ventral shield as in the generic diagnosis, its posterior margin transverse and 460, wide, with a few pores and at least one pair of setae apically; anal shield triangular 450, wide 185 long, ratio width to length = 243: 1-0, with a few pores and minute setae posteriorly besides the pair of longer paranal setae. Gnathosoma as in generic diagnosis. Legs—Similar to grossipes Canest., 1 650, long, U 545p, IT 508., IV 870. (femur long and gradually expanding to 174, wide at apex). Male allotype om Imbil), Of the same general facies and size as in the female. Doersum as in the female. Venter—Juguhir shield smaller and narrower than in female LU3y by 42 and fitting into the excavated anterior margin of the sternal shield, the single pair of recurved setae are on the anterior margin and 51, apart, the single pair of pores are more posterior and 56, apart; sterno-ventral shield as figured and as in the genus, anterior margin 155.4, narrowest between midline of coxae II 103, and widest across the postero-lateral arms 366y, anterior of the genital orifice it carries a pair of minute setae in the antero-lateral angles 126 apart and another 56, apart a little way in front of the orifice and about in line with the middle of coxac I, and a third pair in line with the posterior edge of the orifice und 1644 apart, a pair of peres lie about LQ in front of the second pair af setae and the same width apart and a second pair of pores lie 10, behind the third pair of setae and 188, apart, the rest of the shield posterior of the genital orifice carries a number of fairly large pores and many minute setae, the genital orifice is large 108, wide by 85» long and is situated in a line between coxae IE and TNT; the anal shield is triangular as in the female and of the same dimensions. Gnathoasoma and Legs as iu female. Fedrizzia carabi sp, nov, Text fig. 3 A-I Typés—Holotype female, one paratype female. allotype male and one paratype $., male from a Carabid beetle from under a log at Aiyura, New Guinea, at 5,000 July, 1954 (Coll, H-W.). AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZILDAE al Deseription—Female holotype—Of the same vencral facies of other species of oe genus; rather small, length of idiosoma 835, width 638, ratio length to width = 1-31: 1-0. Dorsum—Shield entire covering the whole body and under-lapping ven- trally as in other species. Fig. 3—ledrizzia carabi sp. noy. A-H Female; A, venter; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and chelicerae; D, palp; E, leg I; F, leg WW; G, leg Il]; H, leg IV; 1, Male, tritosternum, jugular and sternal shields, Venter—Tritosternum with rather broad conical base and paired ciliated laciniae; jugular shields coalesced medially to form a single transverse crown- like shield, 105, wide anteriorly but narrower posteriorly where it contours the antcrior margin of the sternal shield, 38» long, with one pair of curved fine a2 H. WOMERSLEY setae in anterior margin and 52, apart, and one pair of lyriform pores more posterior: sternal shield coalesced with the endopodal shields of coxae LU, an- terior iurgin almost straight 108, wide, sides curving inwards slightly in mid- line of cexae IL to 894 wide and then outwardly around coxae II to a width of 282, between coxac I and IU, length of shield 103,, posterior margin straight tor 127, then with a posterior projection 24, wide on each side and thereafter rimning obliquely forward to the apices of the postero-lateral arms between coxae il and III, with three pairs of setae and two pairs of pores, the anterior pair of setae in line with middle of coxac I, the others in a transverse row near the posterior margin, the inner pair 52, apart, and 19, from the laterals; sternogynial shield shaped like an inverted hell-jar with straight anterior margin }41p. and 141, long, ratio width to length = 1-0: 1:0, with one pair of pores in the antero-lateral angles; latigynial shiclds long and strap-like opatnnrins the sides of the sternogynial shield and partly hidden under the inner edges of the anterior arms of the ventral shield, mesogynial shield very much reduced; ventral shield large, occupying most of the venter as in other species, the trans- verse posterior margin 330, wide, externally of the peritreme between coxse MJ and I there is a duct or gland opening with the outer edge bow-shape and well sclerotised; the anal shield is triangular with transverse anterior margin 330, wide, and the length 150, ratio width to length = 2-2: 1:0. Giuthosoma, chelicerae and palpi as in other species. Legs=I 410, long, U-IV stout and thick but not strikingly so as in grossipes, Il 410, long, LU 376p, TV 4504, with the femur S98, across at apex. Male allotype—OF the same general facies as the female: length of idiosoma §35., width 638 pn. Dorsum as in female. Venter—Generally as in other species of the genus. Jugular shield separated from sternal as figured 98, wide by 24) long, with one pair of setae on anterior margin 70u apart, and one pair of pores; sterna-yentral shield anteriorly slightly wider 122, than the jugular shield with lightly concave anterior margin, it mar- rows to 103, between coxae HW and then expands to 282u across the arms between coxae I and If; the genital orifice is fairly large TO». wide by 56 long, and hes between coxae IT and TH; the anal shield is large, triangular with anterior marcin 350, wide and its length 150p. Legs—As in the female, I1-1V stout and thick, but 1Y not so markedly su as in groxsines and sellnicki. Rentrks—TVhis species is one of the smaller of the genus so far known and can he separated as in the key to the specius. The specimens are in the collections of the South Australian Museum. Fedrizzia derricki sp, nov, Text fig. 4 A-T Types—The holotype female, allotype male and two paratype males from Atherton, Queensland. The holotype and allotype were collected from Passalids, April, 1945 (D. L. Collis) and the two paratype males from a Megisthantey sp. (Acarina), 28th March, 1945 (D. L. Collis). Description—Female holotype—A. medium sized species with Hye general facies eg Fens: Length of idiosoma 928n, width 660.e, ratio of Tenth to width = 1-4: 1-0), Dorsum—As in other species with the shield entire and under-lapping the yenter; with few if any minute setae. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZNDAT 23 Venter—Lritosternum with rather broad basal piece and paired ciliated laciniae; jugular shields coalesced medially to form a single transverse shield 117». wide iy 32 long, with the anterior margin medially excavate to fit the posterior margin of the tritostcernum, posterior margin straight and shorter than Fig. 4.—Fedriazia derricki sp. nov. A-H Female: A, venter; B, tritostermum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and chelicerae; D, palp; E, lex I; F, leg I: G, leg U1, H, leg IV; J, Male, tritosternum, jugular and sternal shields. anterior as figured, with a pair of setac 504 apart on anterior margin, and a pair of lyriform pores; sternal shield coalesced with the endopodal shields of coxae II, anterior margin straight and 90, wide, the lateral margins narrow between coxae IT to $2y and then curve around. coxae II to a width across the postero-lateral arms between coxae Il and III of 258,, the length of the shield 24 H. WOMERSLEY is 77, the posterior margin is straight medially for about 1544, when it {s pro- duced slightly posteriorly for a width af ca. 36% on each side where it runs forward obliquely to the tips of the pestera-lateral arms, it carries tree pairs of setae and ? two pairs uf pores (the anterior pair cannot be seen), the anterior setae (sternal setae 11) are minute, the other two pairs longer and in a trans- verse ruw near the posterior margin, the medial pair 274 upart and separated from the laterals by 30.; the sternogynial shield is broadly bell-shaped as figured, 154», wide anteriorly and 126. Jong, ratio of width to length = 1:22: 1-0, it is lightly reticulate and carries one pair of lyriferm pores in the antero-lateral angles; the latizynial shields are strap-like and contour the lateral margins of the ptemnidgynial shield, being partially hidden under the inner margins of the anterior inter-coxal arms af the ventral shield; the mesogynial shield is yery small as figured: ventral shield large, occupying most of the ventral surface, coalesced with other shiclds as in the genus, and with a straight transverse posterior border 260, with a number of pores; anal shield triangular 260, wide anteriorly by 127, Jong (deep), ratio width to length = 2-04: 1-0; the peri- tremal shield is coalesced with the exopodal shields and only separated from outer extension of the ventral shicld by a fine line, the stigmata lie between coxne THT and IV and the peritreme runs forward to cyuxae 1; on the outer exten- sions oF the ventral shield, fairly close to the peritreme in region of coxae IT is the atrium of a large gland of which the outer edge is well chitinised and lipike, Guathosame arising within the camcrostome formed by the anterior under- lap wf the dorsal shield; hypostome, palpi and cheliccrae as in other species. fegs—As in other species, | 520» long, antennaeform, angulate, with broad base, without caruncle or cliws; M1-LV thick and. stout but not noticeably so as in gfossipes, with short pretarsus, caruncle, and claws, IL 440,, TL 440., 1V 436 long, I-IV 6-seemonted, Male allotype—General facies antl size as in female, Dersum as in female. Venter—Trilosternur as in femule; jugular shicld narrower than the anterior width of sternal, 94n wide by 37, long with the posteriur border shorter than anterior, fitting into the evenly excavate anterior margin of sternal, with a pair of setae 40, long and 49, apart anteriorly und a pair of lyriform pores posteriorly; anterjoy margin of sterno-ventral shield evenly concave 117 wide, shield caaloseed with endopodal and ventral shields, although a fine line run- ning fomwvard from coxae IV to almost coxae 11 and extending anteriorly ta a short distance from the genital orifice indicates fusion of the ventral shield with the sternal cum endopodal shields of coxac LH and TU, the posterior margin of the ventral shivld is straight, transverse and 260« wide: the anal shicld is 280, wide by 127, long; genital orifice between coxae I and TH 70. wide by Bly loug and 474 from anterior margin. Gnathosoma as in female. Legs as in female. Remarks—t am indebted to Dr. Sellnick for indicating the separation of this species from vrossipes and the types are each represented in the Suuth Aus- tralian collection by four slides of dissections made by him. The two para- type males are entire mounts. The species is dedicated to Dr. EF, H, Derrick from whom | have received over the years much interesting material. Fedrizzia oudemansi sp, nov. Text fix. 5 A-I Types—Holotype female and allotype male and a paratype of each sex from Mastochilus dilatus Dalm. from under a eucalyptus log at Glen Innes, New South AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 23 Wales (coll. G. F. Bornemissza, 9/10/56). One male from Mastochilus dilatus Dalm. from Washpool Crk. near Tenterfield, N.S.W., 8/10/56 (G.F.B.). Description—Female holotype—A rather small species with the general facies as in other specics of the genus. Length of idiosoma 777, width 580x, ratio of length to width = 1-34: 1-0, Fig. 5.—Fedrizzia oudemansi sp. nuy, A-H Female: A, ventral view; B, tritusternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and. chelicerae; D, gnatho- soma and palp; E, lew I; F, leg U1; G, lew 11; H, leg IV; I, Male tritosteruuin, jugular and sternal shields. Dorsum-—Shield entire, covering the whole of the dorsum and under-lapping ‘venter as in other species. Venter—Base of tritosternum about as wide as long, with a pair of ciliated laciniae; jugular shield as figured, 94 wide by 324 long (deep), crown-shaped, anterior margin convex but with a median concavity for the base of the trito- sternum, with one pair of long, 47, curved setae in the anterior margin and 26 H. WOMERSLEY 42, apart, with one pair of lyriform pores 37~ apart; stemal shield with the anivrioy margin transverse and 84y, wide, sides contouruyg the edges of coxae II and continuing between coxue Il and Lil ta a maximum width of 2204 be tween the ends of the postero-lateral arms, narrowest just behind anterior margin to 75, posterior margin straight medially for a length of 141, then extending posteriorly for 23 on each side before running obliquely and sharply forwards ty the tips of the posterolateral arms, shield with three pairs of setae and a pait «iF lyritorm pores; the anterior pair of setae are minute in the antero-lateral angles and 45y apurt, the second and third pairs of setae are lone to 194 and fui a transverse posterior row with the medians 6]» apart and 21» from the laterals, the pores are midway between the anterior and median posterior setae; sternogynial shield wider than long 1504 by 1417p, ratio of width to length = 1-28: 1:0, with lightly convex but converging sides, anteriorly the margin is transverse forming outwardly produced angles with the lateral margins, the shield earries one pair of lyriform pores. in the antero-lateral angles and Mu, apatt; Jatigynial shields slender and strap-like contouring the sternogynial shield and partly hidden under the inner edges of the ventral shield; mesogynial shield reduced: ventral shield as in the generic diagnosis, its posterior margin 400, wide and straight, with a few pores and minute setae; anal shield triangular with anterior margin 3522 wide and the length 1764, with a pair of paranal setae ak long and with a few pores and minute setae, ratio of width to length = B2s 10. Cruthosoma as. in gevieric diagnosis. Legs—Similar in general ta other species of the genus; 1 390u long, antennae- form and somewhat angulate, IT and [fl 348n, TV 3704, LV with femur not much longer than wide, but widening gradually to apex without any strong basal spine. Male allotype—Of the same general facies as the female, Length of idiosoma 720, width 534), Dorstim as in fernale, Venter Jaguar shield smaller and narrower than in female, 70% wide by 25, long with a single pair of setac anteriorly 30, long and 52. apart, with one pair of lyriform pores 50. apart; sternal, genital-ventral shields cvalesced to form the sterno-ventral shield as figured und as in the genus, antovior margin 88. wide, narrowing between coxae II to 74y, and widest across the postero- lateral arms between coxae IL and coxae LI to 206., the anterior setae lie in the antero-lateral angles 50, apart, the second pair of setae lie just in front of the genital orifice and are 52. apart, the pores lie 14 in frant of the secund pair of setae, other setae and pores as far as can be seen as fizured, the genital orlfice lies between coxae IL and III, it is 382 long by 47p wide, the anal shield is shaped as in the female with a transverse anterior margin 385,, and its length 17d, the pair of long paranal sctae 33u. Cnathosoma as in female. Legs—As in female, 1 352, long, If and HL 325.2, IV 348p, Fedrizzia bornemisszai sp, nov, ‘Veat fig, 6 A-T Types—Holotype female, allotype male and paratype of cach sex from Mas- tochilus diletus Dalm. from under a eucalyptus lug at Hampton, Queensland, 8/11/56 (coll. G, F, Bornemissza). Description—Femele holotype—A fairly large species with the general facies as in other species of the genus. Length of idiosoma 928,, width 730p, ratio length to width = 1-27: 1-0. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 27 Dorsum—Shield entire covering the whole dorsum and wnder-lapping on to the venter, with many very fine short setae and pores, and with fine roughly transverse widely spaced lines, otherwise smooth, Venter—Tritosternum with short base about as wide as long, and a pair of long ciliated laciniae; jugular shield wider than anterior width of sternal shield, fi Fig. 6.—Fedrizzia bornemisszai sp. noy. A-H Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and Iatigynial shields enlarged; C, mandible and cheliccrac; D, pulp; E, leg I; F, leg 11; G, leg HI; Ht Fae I, Male tritosternum, jugular and sternal ields, somewhat crown-shaped, width 130,, length (depth) 38, with one pair of setae behind the anterior margin 55, apart and 25, long, a pair of lyriform pores 55» apart, posterior margin straight and 110, wide; sternal shield as gured, anterior margin 110y lightly concave for whole length, sides contouring coxae IT with the shield narrowest in mid-line of coxae II to 94, and widest to 242u between the points of the postero-lateral arms between coxae {I and Ill, with three pairs of setae and one pair of pores, the anterior pair of setae 25 H. WOMERSLEY ure minute and placed some distance, 251, back from the middle of the anterior margin und 69» apart, the other two pairs of setae are also shurt and form a transverse row close to the posterior margin, of these the medians are 50), #part and 27, from the laterals, the pores are situated 14a behind the anterior setae and a similar distunce apart; the sternogynial shield as figured, wider than long, 1434 by 116, ratio width ta length = 1:23: 1-0; the surface is ornatnented with a strong reticulation, the anterior margin is straight and the antero-lateral corners project shortly laterally, the sides are convex as figured, the pores are in the antero-lateral angles and 130) apart; the latigynial shields are narrow and strap-like and contour the lateral margins of the sternogynial shield being partly hidden under the inner edge of the portious of the ventral shield lying between the coxue and the sternogynial shield; mesogynial shield small and reduced; yentral shield as in other species of the genus and with the surface ornamented with a fine grid of transverse lines cut by short longitudinal Jines, its posterior margin aligns the anterior margin of the unal shield and is 376, long, it is also furnished with 2 number of fairly large pores and some very minnte setae; the anal shield is triangular, 376. wide anteriorly and 176, long, ratio width to length = 2-21 < 1-0, with the surface, as in the ventral shield, the long paranal setae are 25u long. Gnathosoma as in the generic diagnosis, Legs—Generally as in other species, | antennaeform and 533, long, I-IV stout, Il 464u, TL 487,, 1V 730u, femur of leg IV truncheon-like, 258, long and 162, wide at apex. Male allotype—Of the same general facies as the female. Length of idiosoma O04, width 730pz. Doarsum as in female. Venter—Jugular shield crown-shaped, smaller than in female, 94y wide by 33p long (deep), with the setae ca, 23, long and 33, apart. with one pair uf Jyriform pores; sternal, genital and ventral shields coalesced to form the sterno-ventral shield as figured and as in the genus, anterior margin 131m, the sides contouring coxae [I-[V with the widest sternal portion between coxae IL and {Hf and 305y between the postero-lateral arms; genital orifice large, situated between coxae I, Gla wide hy 53p Jong; posterior margin aligned with anterior margin of anal shield and 376 wide, surface of shield with some large pures, minute setae and with a fine grid or mesh of transverse striations with short lonigstuctnal cross lines; anal shield triangular, 376. wide and 126. long as in temale. Gnathasoma as in other species, Legs as in female, 1 520 long, Li 464y, LL 4874, IV 696p. Remurks—As in the key this species belongs to the grossipes, sellnicki, derricki group in having the mesh or grid-like surface of the ventral shields in both sexes. The other two known species, carabi and endemansi, have smooth nan- ummamental ventral shields. Fedrizzia strandi (Oudemans, 1927) Torenensia. strandi Ouds,, 1927. Ent. Ber, 7 (156), p. 227; LO26, Piven BoruariieAcut in Treubia, 7, Suppl. 2, pp. 60-66, Avs, GY-81. The genus Toxopeusia with sirandi as type has generally been regarded by asaralogists as synonymous with Fedrizzia Canestrini with grossipes Cancest, from Queensland as the type. That the two genera are synonymous is un- doubted but frum the specific features of the species of Fedrizziidae as brought out in the present study strandi wenld appear to be a validly different species from the Australian forms. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZILDAE ao Toxepeusia strandi was very fully described and figured hy Oudemans in 1928 trom two femules from “Station 12, Burn, 4-7 Feb., 1922; eoll. L. J. Toxo- eus'; the habitat was given with a query. A male specimen from “Wai Eno is Wai Temun, 700-1000m., 3rd Noy., 1922" is described as the male of the same species, For the female the only dimensions given are length of idiosoina 857p, width 630, (ratio of length to width = 1-36:1-0). interpolating from his figures, however, the anal shield is 408, wide by 150 long. or a ratio of width to length of 2-72: 1-0; the sternogynial shield is wider anteriorly than long, approximately 163. by 115, or ratio width to length of 1-42: 1-0. Thus in dimensions strand is a broader species than gressipes with an anal shield three times as wide as long as compared with an anal shield only slightly more than twice as wide as long in grossipes. Other features shown in his de- seription and figures of strandi in which this species differs from any vf those found in Australia and New Guinea can be mentioned, Firstly he speaks of the pair of vertical setae as being wide apart and show them as being wider apart than in any other species. Behind these setae he describes and figures an eye-like organ on the dorsal surface; no such organ which is probably a pore has been observed in other species, On the ventral surface the pair of setae on the jugular shield (tetartosternum) are shown as in the antero-lateral angles, and not near to or Nanking the base of the tritosterpum. The tritesternum is stated to have no base, but the drawings, Figs. 70 and 75, show this as is usual in species of this genus, and over-lapped partially by the jugular shield. On the above considerations ax well as from geographical locatinn, the females. of strandé Ouds, must be regarded as a yalid species, not synonymous with grossipes Canestrimi, 1884, Whether the male described by Oudemuns as the same species is so, seems somewhat uncertain. His specimen was much smaller, idiasoma 730, long by 590 wide, or a ratio of 1-237; 1-0, than the females; the anal shield with a ratio of width to length of 2-7: 1-0. In the absence of definite hosts, and in the fact that the male and females were from different localities, the size suggests possibility that the male may not be conspecific with the female. Kev to the species of Fedriszia Canest., 1884, s, str. (largely based on females) 1. Larger species with length of idiosoma greater than 1000, Q Smaller species, length of idinsuma loss than 1000p. 3 z, Sternogynial shield with the lightly convex sides gradually converg- ing to the apex, 169, wide anteriorly by 141, long (ratio width to length = 1-2:1-+0); anal shield 400, wide by 140, long (ratio width to length = 2°86:13-0); femur of leg IV 2-23 times as long as it is wide at apex. Length of idivsoma 11@0,, width 870e (ratio length to width = 1:33: 1-0). Ventral shield with mesh or grid. F. sp. cf. grassipes Canest.. 1584, Sternogynial shield with sides medially almost straight and parallel before curving inwards to the apex, wider anteriorly than long 164, by 117 (ratio width to length = 1-4: 1-0): anal shield 450, wide by 185, lung (ratio width to longth = 2-43: 1-0); femur of leg IV 2-4 times as long as wide at apex, Length of idiosoma 1195p, width 928, (ratio length to width = 1-25: 1-0). Ventral shield with mesh or grid, F, sellnicki sp. nov, #8 he H. WOMERSLEY Anal shield more than 300, wide anteriorly. 4 Anal shield small, 260» wide by 127p long (ratio of width to length = 2-04;1-0); sternogynial shield of nearly uniform width for first half of its length, then sides curving in to apex, 154, wide anteriorly and 126p long (ratio width to length = 1-22; 1-0); femur of leg IV twice as long as it is wide at apex. Length of idiosoma 928», width 660 Geen length to width = 1-4:1-0). Ventral shields with mesh or grid. F. derricki sp, nov. Anal shield less than 3604 wide, with ratio of width to length less than 2-5: 1-0. 5 Anal shield greater than 380, wide. 6 Ventral shields with fine mesh or grid. Anal shield 324, wide by 135.4 long, ratio width to length = 2-4; 1-0; sternogynial shield wider anteriorly than Iong, 1604 by 124y, ratio width to length = 1-3: L-0; femur of leg LV twice as Jong as wide at apex. Length of idiosoma 918», width 612,, ratio of length to width = 1-5: 1-0. F, zrossipes Canest., 1854. Ventral shields smooth, without mesh or grid. Anal shield 330, wide and 150, long, ratio of width to length = 2-2; 1-0; sternogynial shield as wide anteriorly as it is long, 141p; femur of leg IV chovtar and not so massive, only one fourth as long aguin us it is wide at apex. . Length of idiosoma 8353p, width 638,, ratio length to width = 1-31 ; 1-0. F. carabi sp. nov. Ventral shields without grid or mesh. Anal shield 3824 wide by 176 Jong, ratio -width to length = 2-2: 1-0; sternogynial shield wider anteriorly than long 150. by 117p, ratio width to length = 1-28; 1:0; fernur of leg IV not much thicker than ITI, about 1-3 times as long as wide at apex. Length of idiosoma 777p, width 580u, ratio length to width = 1-34: 1-0. F, oudemansi. sp. nov, Ventral shields with mesh or grid. 7 A more broadly rounded species, length of idiosoma 928,, width 730, ratio of length to width = 1:27: 1-0. Sternal setae [I-IV very minute. Anal shield 406. wide by 139, long, ratio width to length = 2-9:1-0; stermmogynial sbield reticulate wider anteriorly than long, 143, by 116p, ratio width to length = 1-23: 1-0, sides almost parallel medially before curving to the apex; leg IV massive as in grossipes, femur more than twice as long as wide at apex, F. bornemisszai sp. nov, A less broadly rounded species, length of idiosoma 857, width 630 ratio of length to width = 1-36: 1-0. Sternal setae longer. Anal shield 408. wide by 150, long, ratio of width to length = 2°72; 1-0; sternogynial shield ? smooth, wider anteriorly than Jong ca. 163, by 1J5p, ratio 1-42: 1-0, with gradually converging sides; leg TV not so massive, femur ca. 1-6 times as long as wide at apex. F, strandi Ouds., 1927. Genus Ntorrprizzia nov, The species. of this genus while having the general facies of the family differ from both other genera Fedrizzia Canestrini s. str. and Parafedrizzia gen. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDREZZLIDAE al nav, in that a free jugular shield is absent in the male, In that sex in frant of the anterior margin of the sternal shield there is a pair of stout antcriorly directed provesses vf unknown function which overlie the bulbous base of the tritosternum. In both sexes the two long setae on the second segment of the palpi ure only shortly ciliated or barbed: The femora of legs IIT antl FV are shurt and wide with a prominent thick curved spine at the posterior corners in both males ind females, The anal shield is present as in Fedrizzia, The body form may be somewhat rounded with curved sides ac more elongate with the sides somewhat straightcr. Type Neofedrizzia gayt sp. nov. Neofedrizzia gayi sp. nay, Text fir. 7 A-K Types—Ilolotype female, allotype male, two paratype females and one para- type male from a Passiic buetle tn rotten log frum Imbil, Queensland, 11th Sept., 1946 (F. J. Gay). Three females and five males also from a Passalid at Yurraman, Queensland, 29th Auy., 1935 (A.R.P.). Deseription—Holotype female—A moderately large heavily chitinisedl species with the general facies of Fedriazia s. str., broadly oval with rounded sides. Length of tdiosoma 12104, width 850p, Dorsum—Shield covering all the dorsum and under-lapping ventrally and anteriorly to form the anterior margin of the camivrostome, marginally it is con- fluent with or coalesced with the outer edge of the large ventral shield as far hack as the posterior edge of coxae 1V then under-lapping the venter in a wide strip contouring and separated by a suture from the posterior part of the ventral and from the anal shield: dorsally a more hyaline sickle-shaped part is move or less demarcated by a line from the rest and overlaps the gnathosuma; this portion carries only the pair of vertical setae 47 long and 94% apart, but the rest of the dorsal shield fs furnished with numerous pores but no perceptible setae. Venter—Tritosternum as figured with an elongate basal part 70» lon, und with paired ciliated laciniae to 140, long; jugular shields coalesce medially to form a single crown-shaped shield 146. wide andl 66» long (deep) with the posterior margin 108. wide, with one pair of recurved setae on anterior margin flanking base of tvitosternum 38» apart and ca, 23. long, with one pair of lyriform pores subposteriorly; sternal shield coalesced with the endopodal shields of coxae 1, 108, wide anteriorly, narrowing to 984 in midline of coxae II then contouring coxac IT to a width of 3204 across the postero-lateral arms between coxae I] and WIL, the shield is 146. long (deep), the posterior margin is only lightly coneave for its whole width of 256. before running obliquely forwards to the tip of the arms, with three pairs of setae and ? one pair of pores. the anterior pair of setae (sternal setae TL) are more or less in the antero- lateral angles and in trout of the pores which are rather wider apart, the other two pairs of setae (sternal setac DL and LV) lie in a transverse row near the posterior margin the medians being 654 upart und 19. from the laterals, all three pairs of setae are short, ca, Lly, long; sternogynial shield longer than wide, 146. by 126 anteriorly with lightly convex converging sides and rounded apex, with one pair of lyriform pares near the antero-lateral corners, in line with the pores the shield is somewhat wider than the anterior maryin; lutigynial shields strap-like contouring the sides of the sternogynial and largely lying beneath the faner edges of the ventral shield (see Tig, 7 Ib and J): mesogynial shield re- duced and covered by apex of sternogynial shield; ventral shiek! large occupy- 32 H, WOMERSLEY ing most of the ventral surface, marginally confluent or coalesced with the dorsal shield from the apex backwards to the region of voxae IV where it curves in- wards to the antero-lateral corners of the anal shield and is contoured by that part of the under-lapping dorsal shield, between the antero-lateral corners of the anal shield it has a straight transverse margin separated by a suture from the transverse margin of the anal shield, antero-laterally it is coalesced with Fig, 7—Neofedrizzia gayi g. et sp. nov. A-H, J-K, Female: A, ventral view; B, tritastarnam, jugular, sternal, sternogynisl and Jatigynial shields enlarged; C, chelicerav; D, palp; E_ leg 1; F, leg UI; G, leg III; A, leg IV; J, latigynial and mesogynial shields; K, atrimn of duct between coxae IL and 1; I, Male tritosternum, pre-sturnal appendages and sternal shield. peritremal and exopodal shields of coxae IL-IV, medially it extends. forwards as two arms as far as posterior margin of the sternal shield and between the sternogynial shield and the coxae on each side, with the endopodal shields of which it is coalesced, the posterior margin is 520 wide and it is furnished with numerous pores and a few minute inconspicuous setae; from the posterior edge of coxae IV a fine line runs obliquely backwards and outwards towards the AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDHIZZUDAT 33 bady edge which it does not reach, from coxae ILL another fine line runs back- wards and then curves forwards but does not reach the body edge, in the ont- side junction of coxae Uf and U1 is the atrium of a large duct the inner edges of which are strongly sclerotised; the peritremal shield is coalesced with the endopodal and ventral shields, with the stigmata lying between coxze LI and IV and the peritreme running forward as figured to come 1; the anal shield is large, triangular, 520. wide on the transverse anterior margin and 220, long (deep) with anus in the posterior angle, it carries many pores and 2 pair long paranal setae 70p. Gnathosoma—Much as in species of Fedrizzia; chclicerac as figured, fixed digit with two strung and one smaller tooth, movable digit with a strong sub- basal tooth and subapically with minute denticles, with many hyaline processes tw OF which are blade-like and serrate, the others filamentous; palpi as figured, trochanter large and broad with an inncr lobe anteriorly and two long harhed selae, xpecialised scta on tarsus two-tined; the mouth parts together with leg I avise within the camerostome, which in the lateral angles has a triangular sclerotised plate (the “axillar” plate of Sellnick in Tit.). Legs—All shorter than the body and 6-segmented, 1 slender and antennae- form, strongly angled, tarsus without caruncle or claws, 552, long; IJ-IV shorter and stout, tarsi with caruncle and paired claws, LL 508 long, TIL 508, IV 557p, the femora of II-[V are shart and hroad, with distinct hyaline lamellae, un If and IV the outer posterior angle of the femora carries a strong curved posteriorly directed spime characteristic of the genus, Allotype male—Ot the same sive and general facies us in the female, Dormtm as in female. Venter—Tritosternum with a large bulbous basal part, 840 long by S44 wide, and a pair of cilfated Iaciniae 140, long; no jugular shield; in front of the deeply caneave anterior margin of the sternal shield and lying above the base of the tritostermim fg a pair of free anteriorly directed processes curved inwardly to ome another and upically bilobed, these processes of unknown function are 4p Jong and 33, wide as figured: the rest of the ventral shields except the anal are coalesced into a single shield the anterior sternal margin of which is 150, wide and deeply concave, sternal sctae I are long, 70x and 70» apart and lie in the untero-lateral angles, sternal setae IL and Il are minute, IL 53» from I and 334 apart, U0 6lje From ID and close t the genital orifice and 84u apart, between the bases of setae 1 are a pair of round pores 33. apart and a second pair of pores (lyriform) lie slightly posterior of setue TT and 61 apart, while a third pair of pores also lyriform are about in ]Ine with setae If] and 145, apart; the genital orifice is between coxae If and I, 94) wide by 47p long, and around the posterior half on each side is a series of 8-9 pores; the anal shield is of the site shape and dimensions as ii the female. Ghathosoma and Legs as in female. Neofedrizzia canestrinii sp, ny, ‘Text fg. S A-1 Types—Holotype female, allutype male. nine paratype females and four para- type males fram a Passalid Aulacocyelus edentulus Mcl. from Hinchinbrook Island, N, Queensland, 9th Sept, 1956 (G. F. Bornernissza), Other muteriadi—1 male trom A, edentulus Mel., Hampton, Queensland, 3rd October. 1956 (or -I.); 2 mules from ‘Tambourine, P date (A. M. Lea); 1 male on Passalid, Atherton Tableland, Queensland, 28th March, 1945 (D. J. Coilis); 1 nale from A. edentulus, Wilson's Downfall near Tenterfield, New South Wales, 8th Oct,. 1956 (C.F.B,). 34 H. WOMERSLEY Description—Holotype female—With the generic facies, but a rather small roundish species, Length of idiosoma 812», width 638u. Dorstum—Dorsal shield entire, covering the whole body and under-lapping venter as in other species; it is smooth except for some fine longitudinal striae circumferencially, and is furnished with many round small pores or the bases of minute setae, Fig. &8&—Neofedrizzia canestrinii sp. nov. A-H Female; A, ventral view; B, tritostermun, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and Jatigynial shields enlarged; C, cheliccrae; D, gnathosoma and palpi; E, leg I; F, Tew Il; G, leg 101; H, leg IV; I, Male tritosternum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield. Venter—Tritosternum with elongate base 47 long and 25, wide, with paired ciliated laciniae to ca. 110u long; jugular shield as figured, crown-shaped, 132. wide by 47p long firsD) and the posterior margin 104» long, with one pair of recurved setae flanking the base of the tritosternum, ca. 19 long and 30 apart, with one pair of lyriform pores 11» in front of posterior margin and 36p apart; sternal shield as figured, 104, wide anteriorly, the sides only narrowing slightly from anterior angles, then coalescing with the endopodal shields. of coxae I AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GCUINEA PEDRTZZIIDAE SN) contouring coxae IT and then running between coxae II and Ul to a maximum width between apices of postero-lateral arms af 282,, pamelor margin straight medially for 143, then sloping slightly Natkwards or 47» before numningg obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-luteral arms, with Ubree pairs of setae all very short, the first pair (sternal setae IL) 164 hehind the anterior margin and 44u apart, the second and third pairs of setue (sternal setae IT wud IV) in a transverse row near the posterior margin, the medians 44, apart and 33, from the laterals, with one pair of lyriform pores 77» apart and 16. behind sternal sctue IT, length (depth) of shield 66,; sternogynial shield as figured, wider anteriorly than it is long, 124, by 99p, ratio of Jength to width = 1-0: 1-25, with ruunded sides, which expand slightly behind anterior comers to a width of 137y; latigynial shields strap-like, contouring sides of sternogynial and some- what hidden under inner edges of ventral shield as in other species; mes ial shield reduced and obscured by the inner anterior margin of the ventral shield and the bases of the latigynial shields; ventral shield large and covering most ot the venter as in other species, its transverse posterior margin 400x, with a number of round pores and minute setae as figured, the claviform processes are present beneath the shield but inconspicuous: anal shield large trianvular, 400p. wide by 9lp long (deep), ratio width to leneth = +-4: L-0, with many ronnd pores and a few minule setae besides the paranal setae of 52 lenvth; the peri- tremal shield and peritreme us in other species. Gnalhosoma as in the type and other species of the yenus- Legs all shorter than the body, I antennaeform, 4324 long, LW and ILL 400p, IV 423q. Allotype male—Facies, shape and dimensions as in the femate- Dorsum as in female. Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous basal part, 47» long and 47p wide with subapical division, and paired ciliated laciniae ca. 110. long; pre-sternal pro- cesses as figured, blunt and steutly horn-shaped curved inwards, each 27p long by 16p thick medially, sterno-ventral shield as figurcd, anterior margin concave umd 99. wide, genital orifice wider than long 604 by 55p, and situated bemyeen coxae II and IIL, no pores marginally around the posterior half of the opening but there is a slight bulge on each side in the mid-line; anal shicld of the same shape and dimensions as in the female. Gnathosoma and Legs us in the female, Neofednizzia cynota sp. nny. Text fig. 9 A-T Types—Holotype female, allotype male, anc paratype female and two paratype males from Mastuchitus dilatus Dalm. from Wison’s Downfall, near Tenterfield, New South Wales, 8th Oct. 1958 (C.F. Bornemissza), Also 2 males and 1 female from same host from Washpool Crk., near Tenterfield, 8/10/56 (G.F.B.), Deseription—Holotype female—Only u moderately rounded species, Length of idinsoma 895,, width 638, ratio of length to width = 1-4: 1-0. Dorsum—Shicld covering entire body wid under-lapping venter ay in other species, with many small rounded pores and minute setae, surface smooth. Venter—Tritosternum with clongate basal part 47» long by 23. wide, and with paired ciliated laciniae to ca. 120u; jugular shield crawn-shaped as fi 113, wide by 49. long (deep), posterior margin 824, with a pair of recurved setae On anterior margin flanking base of tritosternum 30, apart and 33, long, with one pair of lyriform pores 11pm in Front of posterior margim and 38, apart; sternal shield as figured, anterior margin 82, sides narrowing slightly just behind 36 Tl, WOMERSLEY angles and then contouring coxae IL to run between coxae II and ILI to a maxi- mum width of the postero-lateral arms of 247, posterior margin strate medially for 110, and then sloping backwards slightly for 44 on each side before running obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms, with three pairs of setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the setae are all 20, long, the anterior setae (sternal setae 11) are 19» behind the anterior margin and 44, apart; Fig. 9—Neofedrizzia cynota sp. nov, A-H Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged: GC. chelicerae: D, palp; E, leg L F, leg I; G, leg U1; H, Jeg IV; 1, Male tritosternum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield, sternal setae Ul and 1V form a transverse row near the posterior margin with the medians 44, apart and 25, from the laterals, the pores are 60 apart and 22, behind setae Il; sternogynial shield as figured, only a little longer 118, than wide anteriorly, its sides widen just in line with the pores to 124» and then con- verge gradually in a rounded curve to the rounded apex, the pores are 96. apart and lie 28, behind the anterior margin; the latigynial shields are strap- like and contour the sides of the sternogynial shield as in other species; the mesogynial shield is reduced and obscured; the ventral shield is as in other species furnished with a number of round pores and a few minute setae, its transverse posterior margin is 352, wide; the anal shield is triangular, 352,n AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 37 wide by 160, long (deep) giving a ratio of width to length of 2-2:1°0, the paianal setae are 56, long. Gnathoasoma as in other species. Leys—All shorter than body, I antennaeform, 464, long, ULE 383,, IV 406u. Allotype tmale—Of the samme facies, size and dimensions as the female, Dorsum as in female, Venter—Tritostermum with a bulbous basa) part, 66» wide by 66p long, and with paired ciliated laciniae ca. 120y long; pre-sternal processes short and stumpy and apically truncate, 232 long by 23, wide, bent inwards; sterno-ventral shield as in other species, anterior margin concave and 112. wide with blunt_antero- lateral corners, genital orifice as figured lying between coxae IL, 55. long by 35» wide, with a short series of pores around the posterior margin as figured, sternal setae I long 30, and situated in the antero-lateral angles of the shield, anterior of these and behind bases of pre-sternal processes is a pair of small lyriform pores; anal shield of the same shape and dimensions as in the female. Gnathosome and Legs—As in female, Remarks—Distinguished from other species as in the following key. Neofedrizzia camini sp. nov. ‘Test fg. 10 A-K Types—Holotype female. allotype male and one paratype of each sex from Mastochilus dilatus Dalm. froin a rotten eucalypt Jog from Glen Innes, New South Wales, 9th Oct., 1956 (G, BF. Borneniissze ). Other material—1 male, Upper Williams River, N.S.W., Oct., 1926 (A. M. Lea und E, W, Wilsow); 1 male in ? moss and lichen, Waratah, Tusmania (00 date): 1 male ona beetle, Mt. Clorious, Queensland, 6th Feb., 1951 (E. H. Derrick). Description—Holotype female--A rathor oval elangate species, of the generic facies. Length of idiosoma 1160p, width 770p, ratio length to width = 1-5; 1-0. Dorstum—Dorsal shield entire, covering the whule body and under-lapping venter as on other species, Surface smooth with numerous small pores and sume minute setae. Venter—Tritosternum with elongate basal part 66. long by 33, wide and a pair of ciliated laciniae ca. 120p long; jugular slield crown-shaped as figured, 150, wide by Gy deep, posterior margin 112, wide, with a pair of fine recurved setae Hanking base of tritosternum 53, long and their bases 30p apart, with one pair of lyriform pores 47» apart and 16, in front of posterior margin; sternal shicld as figured, anterior margin 112y, sides contouring coxa¢e I and running between coxae Ll and LL to form the postero-lateral arms with a width of 305p, the posterior margin 258, is straight medially for 144, and laterally slopes slightly backwards for 57). on each side before running obliqucly forwards ta the tips of the posteru-lateral arms, with three pairs of setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the setae are all finc and ca, 27% long, the first pair (sternal setac IL) lic in the anterv-lateral angles 22, behind the anterior margin and 47 apart, the others form a Lransyerse row near the posterior margins with the medians 60, apart and 30, from the laterals, the pores are 91 apart and 30, behind setae El; sternogynial shicld as figured, slichtly longer than wide on anterior margin 144, by 132, the sides expand to a width oF 151p in line with the pores and then curve more ur less evenly to form a rounded shape, the pores lie 41). behind the anterior margin and 110» apart; latigynial shields narrow and strap-like contouring the sternogynial shield as in other species; the meso- 38 H. WOMERSLEY gynial shield is reduced and obscured; the ventral shield is large and coalesced with other shields as in other species, its transverse posterior margin is 510p wide, the surface shows many small pores and some fine minute setae; the anal shield is large and triangular, 5104 wide by 244» long (deep), giving a ratio of width to length of 2-09: 1-0, the paranal setae are 40, long. Fig. 10.—Neofedrizzia camini sp. nov. A-K, Female; A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial, lateral shields and claviform processes enlarged; C, tritostermum; D, tectum; E, inandible and chclicerae; F, palp; G, lez 1; H, leg II; I, leg TIT; J, leg IV; K, dorsxl shield; L, Male tritostermum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield. Gnathosoma—As in other species. shege—All shorter than body, I antennaeform 590, long, IL and III 464p, TV 520u. Allotyne male—Of the same shape and dimensions as in the female. Dorstum—As in female, Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous basal part 704 long by 70u wide, and a pair of ciliated laciniae ca. 120, long; pre-sternal processes short and stumpy AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIDAL 39 curved inwards and with truncate apices, 424 long by 254 wide; sternn-ventral shield as in other species, anterior margin concave 140. wide with blunt truncate antero-lateral corners, genital orifice lying between coxae UI as figured 66. long by 66, wide with a series of seven or eight pores around the posterior half, sternal setae 1 38, long and situated in the antere-lateral angles of the shield, other pores and small setae are present, some af which probably represent sternal setae TL-IV and their respective pores; anal shield ot the same shape and dimensions as in the Female. Gnathosoma and Legs—As in the female. Remarks—Distinguished from other species as in the tollowing key. The species is named after Dr, J. II, Camin who has contributed much to the study of the comparative morphology of the Mesostigmala. Neofedrizzia gorivossiae sp, nov. Text fig, 11 A-L Types—Holotype female, allotype male and seven paratype females from Mas- tochtlus dilatus Dalm. from rotting eucalypt log. Hampton, Queensland, Sth November, 1956 (G, F. Bornemissza). Description—Holotype female—A moderately large oval species widest in line of coxae INC and then tapering somewhat belore becoming rounded pvsteriorl from line of anterior margin of anal shield. Length of idiosotna 1020,., wid 696u; giving a ratio of length to width of 1:46; 1-0. Dersum—Dorsal shicld covering all the body and under-lapping venter as in other species, with many small round pores, anxl sume minute setae. Venter—Tritosternum with elongate basal part, 32« long by 28, wide, with a pair of ciliated laciniae to 140, long; jugular shield crown-shaped as figured 132u wide by 47» long (deep), posterior margin 19.1, with a pair of anterior recurved setae ca. 37. long Hanking the base of the tritosternum and their bases 30x apart, and LO» in front of posterior margin; sternal shield as figured, an- terior margin 99» wide, sides contouring coxae ILE and running between coxae Ti and UT to form the untero-lateral corners of the posterc-lateral arms with a maximum width of 275y, the posterior margin is straight medially for a width of 124% then bends lightly backwards for Wy on each side before running obliquely forwards to join the tips of the postero-lateral arms, with three pairs of setae and one pair of lyrifurm pores, the anterior pair of setae (sternal setae 11) are ca. 25, long, 554 apart and lie 20, behind the anterior margin, the other two pairs of setae (sternal setae ITl and 1V) form a posterior transverse row with the medians 474 apart and 33, from the laterals, these sctae are alse ea. 254 long, the pores are 70, apart and 23, behind sternal setae II; sternogynial shield as figured, antcrior margin 108,, length 131», the sides expand slightly to a width of 131, in line of the pores to eurve and cunverge to a broadly rounded apex. with one pair of lyriform pores 103, apart and 334 behind anterior margin; latigynial shields strap-like and contouring sides of sternogynial shields as in other species; nssoeyatal shield reduced and obscured; ventral shield large, Occupying most of the venter and coalesced with all other shields exc the anual, its posterior margin is transverse, 404» wide and separated from the anal by a suture, it carries a number of pores and: a few minute setae; anal shield large, triangular, 404, wide anteriorly and 202, long (deep) giving a ratio of width to length of 20+ 1-0, it is furnished with a number of pores and some fine minute setae, as well as a pair of paranal setae 56u long. Gnathosoma—Ag in other specics. 40 H. WOMERSLEY Legs—All shorter than body, I antennaeform, 5224 long, II and III 430p, IV 464p. Allotype male—Of the same shape and dimensions as in the female. Dorsum—As in the female. Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous base 85.2 wide and 70 long, with a pair of ciliated laciniae 140» long; pre-sternal processes as figured, curved in- ae “ Fig. Bie Waofeditelis Horivossiae sp. noy. A-K, Female: A, ventra)] view; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and Jatigynial shields enlarged; C, tritosternum; D, tectum; EF, mandible and chelicerac; F, palp; G, leg I; H, leg Il; I, leg II; J, leg IV: K, dorsal shield; L, Male tritosternum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield. wards, 471 long by 23p. wide and with parallel sides and truncate apex; sterno- ventral shield as in other species, anterior margin 136. wide, deeply and widely excavated for the pre-sternal processes and base of tritosternum, sternal setae I in antero-lateral angles and 47u long, antero-lateral angles of shield blunt, sternal setac LL also moderately long ca. 23 and 52, apart and 33 behind setae I in line with a pair of small lyriform pores 70, apart, 70, behind these is a pair of AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZITIDAF. al larger lyriform pores 132, apart, otherwise 4 few round pores and several minute setae, the genital orifice is 70x wide by 66), long and lies mainly hetween caxae 111, the posterior half is margined by a series of about ten pores. on each side; the anal shield is as in the female. Gnathosoma and Legs—As in the female. Remarks—This species can be separated as in the key. It is named in honour of Dr, Flora Gorirossi, joint author with Dr. Camin vf their valuable contributions on the comparative morphology of the Meso- stigmata. Neofedrizzia tragardhi sp. nov. ‘Toxt fig. 12 A-K Types—Hovlotype female, allotype maie, nine paratype females and five para- type males fram Mastochilus dilatus Dalm. from a eucalyptus log, at Washpool Creek, near Tenterfield, New South Wales, 8th Oct., 1956 (G. F. Bornemissza ). Deseription—Holotype female—A large elongate oval species widest anteriorly ut the middle and in line with coxae DT. Length of idivsoma 1369u, greatest width 905, width across anterior margin of anal shield 744, ratio of length to width = 1-51: 1:0, Dersum—Shield covering entire body and uoder-liypping on to venter as in other species, furnished with numerous small round pores and some obscure minute setae, on the hyaline anterior portion with a pair of vertical setae 47, long and 94) apart. Venter—Tritosternum with elongate basal part 46 long hy 32» wide, and a pair of ciliated laciniae ca. 160. long; jugular shield as figured, crown-shaped, 164, wide by 56u long (deep) and the posterior margin 127, with a pair of very long 90, setae anteriorly and flanking base of tritosternum with their bases 38u apart, with a pair of lyriform pores 10» in front of posterioy margin and 52 apart; sternal shield as figured, anterior margin straight, 127, wide, sides at Grst slightly narrowing then contouring coxae JL to extend between coxae Il and II) to form the postero-lateral arms with a width of 345,, posterior margin straight medially for 170. then sloping backwards for 60, on each side before running obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms, with three puirs of setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the first pair of setae (sternal setac I[} are very long and slender, 234 behind anterior margin, 80% long and TOs apart; the other two pairs (sternal setae IIT and IV) form a transverse row near the posterior margin, they are only about half the length of setue IT 33, with the medians 75, apart and 23). from the laterals, the pores are 33,4 behind setae [1 and 99, apart; sternogynial shield as figured, anterivr margin trins- verse and 141, wide, the sides expand to a width of 152, in line of the lyriform pores, then curve and converge to the rounded apex, the length of the shield is 146n, the ane pair of pores is 384 behind the anterior margin and 113; apart; the Jaticynial shields ure strap-like and cumtour the sternogynial shield as in other species; the mesogynial shield is reduced and obseured: the ventral shield is large, cualeseed with the other shields except the anal and occupies most of the venter, its posterior margin is transverse and 615» wide, it is furnished with many small round pores and a few minute setae; the anal shield is large. with the anterior margin 615, wide and its length (depth) 302, giving a ratio om length to depth of 2-04: 1-0; the paranal setae are 83u long. Gnathosoma as in the cther species, + Legs—All shorter than body, I antennacform, 638 long, Il and UI 5890p, 626n. 42 H. WOMERSLEY Allotype male—Similar in shape and size to the female. Dorsum as in female. Venler—Tritosternum with bulbous base 70a wide by 61, long, and paired ciliated laciniae 160, long; pre-sternal appendages short and stumpy, 33 long by 19, wide with truncate apex and turning inwards towards one another; sterno- ventral shield as in other species; anterior margin deeply concave and 160,» wide, sternal setae J strong in the blunt antero-lateral angles and 42, long, 56, behind Fig. re TR es ge anee tragardhi sp. noy, A-l, Female; A, ventral view: B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, stornogynial and lateral shiclds and claviform processes enlarged: C, dorsal shield; D, atrium of duct between coxace II and III; E, gnathosoma and palp: F, Jeg I: GC, leg 11; H, leg III; I, leg IV; J-K, Male: J, bitosternbits K, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield, these and 85, apart is a pair of small lyriform pores, while 94», behind these and 164 apart is a pair of larger lyriform pores, there are also other indistinct pores and minute setae, the genital orifice is 70n long by 66, wide and lies be- AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FPEDRIZZAUDAE 43 tween coxae IIT, its basal half has a series of about eight pores on cach side; the anal shield is as in the female. Remarks—Other specituens are 10 females and 3 males from Mastechilus dilatus Dalm. from Wilson's Downfall, New South Wales, Sth Oct., 1956 (G, P. Bornemissza ); 3 Female and 4 males on a Passalid in rain forest at Eubenungee, near Innisfail, Queensland, 11th Dec., 1945 (J. C. Bracks). This species is remarkable for the long jugular and sternal setae and can be scparated as in the key. It is dedicated to the noted Acarologist, the late Prot. f, Trigardh, who laid the bases for the modern study of the comparative morphology of the Mesostigmata, Neofedrizzia vidua sp. nov, ‘ext fig. 13 A-K Types—Holotype Female, allotype male, one paratype femule and three para- type males fom a beetle from Mt. Glorious, Queensland, 6th February, 1957 {E. WL. Derrick). Description—Holotype female—A large and almost round species of the general facies of the genus, Length of idiosoma 1392u. width 1020p, giving a ratio of length to width of 1:36: 1-0. Dorsum—As in other specics with the shield covering the whule dorsum and under-lapping ventrally as in other species, with numerous small round pores and perhaps a lew minute sctae, Jaterally running backwards and out- wards beneath the cuticle can be seen in this (and im some of the other species) an irregular series of larger round dises which might be pores but do not open ta the surface. Venter—Tritosternam with clongate basal part, 70x long by 33x wide, with a pair of ciliated laciniae 1504 long; jugular shield crown-shaped, 174p wide hy 70. long (deep) and 13) wide on the posterior margin, with a pair uf short recurved setac 32u long flanking the tritostomal base on the anterior margin, with one pair of lyriform pores 19 in front of posterior margin and 52. apart; sternal shield as figured, anterior margin 13lp wide, length of shield 117), sides crintouting coxae IF then running between coxae Il and Til te form the posteriu lateral arms with a width of 3764, posterior margin medially transverse for 180. then sloping backwards lightly for 75. on each side’ before nimnin ibliquely forward to the tips uf the postero-literal arms of the shield, wit three pairs of very short ca. 10-12» setae and one pair of lyriform pores, the anterior setae (sternal setae IT) are 284 from the anterior margin and 56u apart, the other two pairs form a transverse row near the posterior margin with the medians 60 apart and 35» from the laterals. the pores ave 36p from setac IL aml 103» apart; sternogynial shield as figured, as wide anteriurly as lone 146n, the sides widen out in line with the pores to a width of 169, and then converve in a fairly even curve to the posterior apex, with the lyriform pores 37, from the anterior margin and 117» apart; mesogynial shield reduced and obscured: lutigynial shields strap-like and contouring sternogynial shield as in other specics; ventral shield Jarge occupying most of the yenter and coalesced with other shields except the anal, with a transverse posterior margin 696% wide, with a number of rormded pores and a few minute setae: anal shield large, triangular, 696. wide ou the anterior transverse margin and 336». Jong (deep) tiving a ratio of width to length of 2-07: 1-0, paranal setae 85. long. : Gnathosuma as in other species, ; Legs—As in other species, 1 6604, H and ITI 522y, 1V 600p. Ad H. WOMERSLEY Allotype male—Of the same shape and dimensions as the female, Dorsum as in the female. Venter—Tritosternum with bulbous basal part 70, long by 75y, and a pair of ciliated Jaciniae 150 long; pre-sternal processes short and stumpy, turned in towards one another, 47. long and 23, wide with truncate apex; sterno- Fig. 13.—Neofedrizzia vidua sp. nov. A-I, Female: A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, sternal, sternogynial and Iatigynial shields and clayiform processes enlarged; C, dorsal shield; D, ynathosoma and palpi; E, chelicerae; F, leg I; G, leg 1G, H, leg III; 1, leg IV; J-K, Male: J, pre-sternal processés and sternal shield; K, tritosternum. ventral shield as in other species, anterior margin concave, 131, wide, with blunt obliquely truncate antero-lateral angles, sternal setae I 50, long, a pair of small lyriform pores 56 behind setae I and 90, apart, another pair of long lyriform AUSTRALIAN AND NE\Y GUINEA FEDRIZZ0DAR 45 pores 9. behind the Jast and 207, apart, several other rounded pores and minute setac, genital orifice between coxae IL and Lil and 94. wide by T5y long with a series of six pores on each side around the basal half; anal shield as in the female with some pores and minute setae as well as the pair of paranal setae 55p long, on the under-lap of the dorsal shield around the anal shield are a mimber of small setae. Guathosuma and Legs—As in female. Neofedrizzia brooksi sp. nev. Teat fg. i4 A-y T'ypes—Holotype male, allotype female and one paratype male from a Passa- lid, 7 rain eet Enbanangee, near Innisfail, Queensland, 11th December, 1945 (J. G. Brooks), Pilea! Penida allotype—A moderately large species, with the general facies of the family, but the sides medially rather straight than rounded and sliglitly tapering backwards. Length of idiosoma 1276u. width 870u, ratio lenvth to width = 1:47 1-0. Dorswm—Shield covering, ull the dorsum, and under-lapping the venter anteriorly to form the front margin of the camerostome, laterally confluent or coalesced with the large ventral shield and under-lapping from coxac IV te the end, the margins contouring the edges of the ventral and anal shiclds; iu Front of camerostome with a pair of setae 56, long and ciliated, Venter—Tritosternum with base 70 lang and subdivided, with paired cili- ated laciniae 140, long; jugular shield united medially to form a erown-like single shield, 164, wide by 56. long. posterior margin 132, and straight. with a prur of yanuinvedt setae 474 long and 38, apart on the anterior margin flanking the: base pf tritosternum, with a pair of lyriform pores subposteriurly; sterna shield coalesced with endopodal shields of coxae II, 1404 wide anteriorly, scarcely narrowing ta mid-line af coxae I and contouring coxae II to expand to a width of 402, for the postcro-lateral arms between coxae II and TI, posterior margin straight medially for abont 2284, and then running sliehtly backwards fur about 95p on each side after which it turns sharply forwards to’ the extreme tips of the postera-lateral arms, with three pairs of setae to S62 long and ? 2 pairs of pores, the anterior setae are in the antero-lateral corners and 70 apart, the other two pairs (sternal setae [1] and Vv} form a transverse posterior row in which the median pair are ca, 60u apart and ea. 30. from the laterals; sterna- gynial shield as figured, anterior margin straight and 132, wide, sides expanding slightly to 141. immediately behind anteriwr corners, then evenly rounded to apex, length of shield 126, with one pair of |vriform pores in antero-lateral angles; latigynial shields strap-like, widening a little in apical third, and can- tuuting sides af sternogynial shield; mesogynial shield small, behind it are faint indications of broad vaginal sclerites; ventral shield coalesecd with other shields, except anul, as in other species, posterior margin straight, transverse and 5204 wide; anal shield larye, triangular, 520, wide ‘by 250». long, ratio width to Jength 2-08; 1:0; parunal setae missing, Gnathosoma—ITypostome, labial cornicles, chelicerae and palpi as in other species of the génus. Legs—As in other species, I 4754, IC 42, ITT 420u, 1V ST5ys. Male holotype~With the general facies and size of the female, Dorsum—As in female, Venter—Tritosternuna with a bulbous basal part O88 lone by 75, wide and subdivided near apex, with paired ciliated laciniae 1404 long; no jugular shield: 46 H. WOMERSLEY in front of anterior sternal margin with a pair of anteriorly directed processes AT pe long and 24, wide turned outwards and apparently fixed basally; sternal, al, ventral and exopodal shields coalesced, anterior margin medially 47y, and 70», apart, ste apart, HI 47. from IL Vig, 14.—Neofedrizzia brooksi sp, noy, A-T, Feinale: A, ventral view; B, tritosternuiu, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields and clavitorm processes enlarged; C, dorsal shield; D, gnathosoma and palp; E, chelicerae; F, leg I; G, leg I]; H, leg TIM; 1, leg TV; J, Male tritostcrnum, pre-sternal processes and sternal shield. the genital orifice and 160, apart, with their attendant pores 188, apart; the yenital orifice is rather small, situated hetween coxae LI and coxae III, 10» wide y 38, long, on the postero-lateral corners are a series of tubercles; anal shield as in female, 520. wide and 250, long, with numerous pores and a pair of long paranal setae. Gnathosoma and Legs—As in female. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW CUINEA FEDRIZAILDAK 47 Neofedrizzia scutata sp. nov. Text fe. 15 A-J Types—Lolotype and 2 paratype females from a Passalid at Bulolo, New Guinea, Sept. 3rd, 1954 (coll, HLW,). Description—Yemale holotype—A large species uf the general facies of other members. of the genus. Length of idiosoma 1276u, width 963, ratio length to width 1-32; 1-0. Dorsum—Shield entire and under-lapping venter as in other species ap- parently withont setae or pores. Venter—Tritosternum with moderate thick basal part and paired ciliated laciniae; jugular shields coalesced medially to form a single crown-like trans- verse shield 146, wide by 52» long, with almost straight posterior margin, and the antcrior margin indented medially to accommodate base of tritosternum, with a pair of long setae anteriorly and 47 apart, and a pair of lyriform pores mare pusterior, sternal shield anteriorly slightly wider t posterior margin of jugular shield 117,, sides nurrowing between coxae I to 108u, and then vurving round coxae Il to form the postero-lateral arms with a width of 329,. between coxae IT and IJ, length of shield 113,, posterior margin straight for 1264, then produced posteriorly for a width of 27p on each side, after which it runs obliquely forwards to the tips of the postero-lateral arms, furnished with three pairs of long 33« setae and ? two pairs of Iyriform pores, the anterior pair of setae (sternal sctac EL) are about in line with the middle of caxae TT, the other two pairs (sternal setae IIT anc TV) form a transverse row near the posterior margin, the median pair 52» apart and 42» trom each lateral svta, the anterior pair of pores could not be seen; sternovynial shield as figured like an inverted cone with only lightly curved sides, 211), wide anteriorly and 160. lang, with a pair of pores in the antero-lateral corners; the mesogynial shield reduced as figured; latigynial shields strap-like and contouring sides of sterno- gynial shield and rather hidden under the edges of the surrounding anterior arms of the ventral shield; ventral shield large and coalesced with other shields as in other species, the posterior straight transverse margin is 784» wide and from its lateral ends a fine diggonal line runs inwards and forwards to the inside of acetabula IV: the anal shield is separated from the ventral by a trans- verse suture 764 wide anteriorly and 267), long, it carrics a pair of setae sub- medianly and subanteriorly and a pair of longer paranal setae, as well as a number of pores. Gnathosoma—Mouthparts, palpi, chelicerae and hypostome as in other species; Jablal cornicles two-segmented with apical segment and blunt hyaline numb-like body with a smal] adpressed claw-like process subapically, Legs—I 6-segmented, antennacform, fairly slender and angulated, tarsus without caruncle ur claws, I[-1V stouter, IV with curved spine at posterior angle, all tarsi with short pretarsus, caruncle and indistinct claws, T 600. long, IT 464, IH 523u, IV S78p. Male—Unknown, Remarks—This species is described from the type specimens only. It is by far the largest of the species ut present known and differs from the others is indicated in the key, Neofedrizzia laevis (Canest,, 1884) Fedrizzia_laeoty Canestrini, 1884. Acazi dellAustealia Atti Ist. Veneta, 2 Ser VI, py. 706-709, Tav. VILL, ig. 3. This species is only known from a single male found in “a collection of sects from Queensland made by the late Prof. Pulle of the University of Padova. 48 H. WOMERSLEY A free translation of Canestrini’s description is as follows: “Laneth 0-91 mm, width 0-66 mm. Known from a single specimen of the male only. It differs from the male of F. grossipes in that the genital aperture is placed somewhat further back between the third pair of legs; it is semicircular or almost circular. Also it differs in the epistome (tectum) which is in the form of a dentate spine approaching that of the Uropodids. The shape of the body is oval, posteriorly rounded. All the animal appears smooth; under a high laghifiosicre (Zeiss. Ocul. 2, Obj. D) it has very short setae in contrast to the two Jonger ones found on the anal shield on each side of the anal aperture.” Frum the above the ratio of the lenyth to width of the idiosoma is 1-38: 1-0. Interpolating from Canestrini’s figure of the ventral surface, the anal shield has a width of 425. and a liength of 190, giving a ratio of width to length of 2-93:1-0. The femur of leg I'V is shown as short and broad, but the laminae and posterior strong curved spine are uot observable. He notes and stuns in his figure that the genital orifice is placed far back between the third or even the third and fourth coxae. It is not clear in his figure whether there is a jugular shield present or not although it could quite wasily be absent, This would seem to be a valid species of Neofedriasta, differing significantly in the position of the male genital orifiee. In none of the many specimens ex- amined during the course of this study have any males showing such a back- ward position of the genital orifice been seen. Neofedrizzia vitzthumi (Ouds,, 1927) Toxopeusia vitzthumd Ouds., 1927, Ent, Ber., 7, 156, p. 228; 1424, Payna Buriiana, Acari, in Treuhia., 7, suppl. 2, pp. 66-70, figs. 62-98. This species was very fully described and figured from a single specimen (or ? specimens) from “in fungi", Wai Eno bis Wai Temun, Buru, at 700-1000m.; 3rd Nov., 1922 (coll, L. J. Toxopeus), Only the female sex was found, Although placed by Oudemans. along with sfrandi in his genus Toxopeusia (Fedrizzia) it is readily seen from his drawings (1928) in spite of the lack of the male, that this species belongs to the new genus Neofedrizzia on the follow- inv features; (1) the femora of leg IV is short. and stout, with laminae, and prob- ably with the posterior curved spine although this is not obvious in the figure, 2) the sternogynial shield has the antero-lateral corners curved inwards, ayd 3) only one of the two long, setae on the first [ree segment of the palp is ciliated and that shortly so. According to the description, the idiosoma is 745u long by 570% wide giving a ratio of length to width of +3: 1-0; interpolating from Oudeman’s figures the anal shield is 409» wide by 145, or.a ratio of width to length of 2-42 1-0; the stenivgynial shield has the antero-lateral corners rounded inwardly so that the widest part is slightly behind the anterior margin aad is 92,4, the anterior margin is 80, the sides are straight and parallel and the posterior rouncled, it is L08u. Jong, oF a ratio of anterior width to length of 0-73 = 1-0. The species is otherwise quite distinct from the other specics known from Australia and New Guinea as described in the present paper, and can he dis- tinguished as in the key. ; Remurks—OFf the above species of Neofedrizzia it seems likely that N. laevis (Canest.) on the more pusterior position of the genital orifice of the male, will nitimately require a new genus, but io the absence of the female it seems better AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA TEDRIZZUDAL 49 at present to retain it in Neofedrizzia. Neofedrizzia scutata sp. nov. is also an anomalous species within the genus. Apart from the unique dorsal scute, it is intermediate between I'edrizzia and Neofedrizzia in the shape of the sterno- Fig. 15.—-Nevfedrizzia seutata sp. nov, A-K, Female: A, ventral view; B, tritosternum, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; C, ynathosoma and palp; D, camerostome showing axillar plates; E, chelicerae; F, darsum; G, leg T; H, leg Il; I, leg Wl: j, leg IV; K, labial cornicle. gynial shield, which has the antero-lateral angles outwardly produced as in Fedrizzia and not cvenly rounded as in all other species of Neofedrizzia. As our knowledge of the family increases this species will most likely require a new generic name. Hi. WOMERSLEY Key to the species of Neofedrizzia gen. nov. Male genital orifice between coxae III or between coxae [J and IV. Length of idiosoma 910u. width 660, ratio length to width = 1:38:1-0. Anal shield ca. 425. wide by 190, long, ratio width to Jength = 2:93+1-0. Anterior hyaline portion of dorsal shield small and erescentic. Female unknown. N. laevis (Canest., 1884), Where known mules with genital orifice between coxae LI or be- tween coxac I and HI. 2 Anterior hyaline portion of dorsal shield large, expanded laterally and posteriorly to about the level of anterior margin of anal shield, to form u distinct scute without pores or setae except the verticals. Sterno- gynial shield conical with lightly convex converging sides, wider an- teridrly than long, 211, by 160, ratio width to length = 1-32: 1-0, the antero-lateral augles are acute as in Fedrizzia, Anal shield 784, wide by 267, long, ratio width to length = 2-93:1-0, Idiosoma 1276, long by 963, wide, ratio length to width = 1-32: 1-0. Male unknown, N. scutata sp. nov. Anterior hyaline portion of dorsal shield small, crescent- or sickle- shaped, not extending backwards beyond level of anteriur edge of camerostome. Antero-lateral angles of sternogynial shield not acute, evenly rounded, 3 Anterior margin of sternogynial shield equal to or longer than the shield. 4 Anterior margin of sternogynial shield shorter than the shield. 6 Sternozynial shield as wide across anterior margin as it is Tong, 146p, with its sides and posterior eyenly rounded. Stemnal setae Il, IE and IV minute, Anal shield 696. wide by 336, long, ratio width to Jength = 2:07: 1-0. Pre-sternal processes of male stout and short with truncate apex, and curved inwards; genital orifice with about 7 pores surrounding posterior half. Length of idiosoma 1392,, width 1020, ratio length to width = 1°36: 1-0. N. vndua sp. nov. Anterior margin of sternogynial shield distinctly longer than the shield. 5 Pre-sternal provesses of male curved outwards and bluntly pointed apically; male genital orifice Hanked posteriorly by about 8 pores on each side, Sternogynial shield of female 132, wide on anterior margin by 126 long, ratio width to length = 1:05: 1-0, Anal shield 520. wide by 250. long, ratio width to length = 2-08:1-0. Length of idiosoma 1276, width S70, ratio length to width = 1-47: 1-0. N. brooksi sp. nov. Pre-sternal processes of male short, bluntly rounded apically and curved inwards to one another; genital orifice of male without any pores flanking it on posterior half. Sternogynial shield evenly rounded Iater- ally and posteriorly 124 wide anteriorly and 99p long, ratio of width to length = 1:25:10. Anal shield 4062 wide by 139, long, ratio width to length = 2-92:1-0, Length of idicsoma 812,, width 638,, ratio length to width = 1-27; 1-0. N. canestrinit sp. nov. “1 10. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 5) Sternogynial shield with straight parallel sides and broad rounded posterior, the anterior margin is 80n, and its length 109; ratio width to Jength = 0-73:1-0. Anal shield 409, wide by 145, long, ratio of width to length = 2:42: 1-0. Idiosoma 745, long by 5704 wide, ratio of Jength to width = 1-3: 1-0. Male unknown. N. ciizthumi (Ouds., 1927), Sternogynial shield not shaped as above. 7 Pre-sternal processes of male basally free, ut least twice as long as wide, inwardly curved and bilobed apically. Sternogynial shield, 146, long by 126. wide on anterior margin, ratio width to length = 0-86:1-0, with sides lightly convex and converging to a narrow rounded posterior. Anal shield 5204 wide by 220 long, ratio width to length = 2-36:1-0. Length of idiosoma 1210,, width §50,, ratio length to width = 1-42: 1-0, N. gayi sp. nov. Pre-sternal processes of male not as above, short and stont, bluntly truncate apically, curved inwards. A small species, length of idiosoma $93,, width 638, ratio of length to width I-4:1°0. Sternogynial shicld 103, wide on antericr margin by 118». long, ratio of width to length = 0-87:1-0, Anal shield 352, wide by 160, long, ratio width to Tength - 2:2: 1-0, N, cynote sp. nov. Large species, length of idiosoma 1000, or more. 9 Large, somewhat elongate species. idiosoma 1369p long, 905, wide, ratio length to width 1-5: 1-0. Sternal setae [ and II very long and slender, IIL and IV long but shorter than 1 and LL, Sternogynial shield with lightly convex converging sides and romded apex, slightly longer than it is wide on anterior margin, 1462 by 14], ratio width te length = 0:96: 1-0, Anal shield 615, wide by 302, long, ratio width to length = 2-04; 1-0. N, tragardhi sp. nov. Smaller species, length of idiosoma LOO, to 1200.. 1 Sternum of female with setae [I-IV fine and slender and modeyr- ately long. Sternogynial shield bowl-like with evenly rounded sides, 132, wide anteriorly by 144, long, ratio width to length = 0-92; 1-0. Anal shield 310, wide hy 244, long, ratio width to length = 2-09: 1-0. Pre-sterna] processes of male, short, stout, apically truncate, about -as long as wide, and bending inwards to one another, Idiosoma 1160. long, 770n wide, ratio length to width = 1-5: 1-0. N, cantint sp, nov. Sternal setae shorter and not so fine. Sternogynial shicld longer in proportion to width, anterior margin LO8m, length 13i,, ratio length to width = 0-82: 1-0, with lightly convex sides. Anal shield 404). wide by 202 long, ratio width to length 2-0: 1-0. Pre-sternal pro- cesses of male somewhat longer than wide, stout, apically trancate and only very slightly converging to one another, Idiosoma 10204 long, 696. wide, ratio width to length 1-46: 1-0. N. gorirossiae sp. nov. Genus PARAFEDRIZZIA nov. Separate juyular shield (tetartosternum) present in both sexes, consequently the male without the pre-sternal processes of Neofedrizzia. Sternogynial shield 52 H, WOMERSLEY al female widest across the anterior margin with outwardly directed antero- lateral corners as in Fedrizzia, sides. not evenly rounded, bell-jar shaped with apical knob. One of the two long setae on basal segment of palpi in both sexes with &8 Jong branches, the other nude. Femur of Jegs U-1V short and broad with lamellae as in Neofedrizzia but without the strong curved spine at the posterior corner. Anal shield coalesced with ventral shicld in both sexes. Type Parafedrizzia buloloensis sp, noy. Parafedrizzia buloloensis sp. nov. Text fic. 16 A-K Types—Uvlotype female, allutype male and six paratypes of each sex from a Passalid in a rotten log at Bulolo, New Guinea, 3rd Sept. 1954 (coll, H.W,). Deseription— Female holotype—A strongly chitinised dark brownish species, of oveid shape but widest pusterior af the middle in line with coxae 1V, Length af idiosoma 970p, width 680, ratio length to width = 1-42 1-0. Dorsum—Shield entire uid covering the whole of the dorsal surface, an- teriorly of coxae TV underlapping the venter and coalesced with ventral and éxopodal shields, and anteriorly forming a camerostome, posteriorly of coxac IV it underlaps as a rather broad strip separated from the ventri-unal shield by a distinct strip of cuticle; dorsally the shield is furnished with numerous circular pores, a number of lyriform pores and many minute setae, on the anterior fnargin is a pair of vertical setae, 117. long, ciliated and 117» apart, on each sidu of these are two short setac and a similar pair in between, on the dist is an oval area with fewer setae outlined by a line of inwardly curved creseent- like markings as figured. Venter—Tritosternum with base not much longer than broad as figured, with paired ciliated laciniac; jugular shield (tetartosternum) as figured, crown- shaped, 117p wide by 47» long (deep) with one pair of slender setae anteriorly, Sf. apart and about 50 long, with a pair of lyriform pores 42« apart; sternal shicld as figured, anterior margin straight 89, wide, sides contouring coxae IL with shield narrowest in mid-line of coxae [1 to 804, then expanding between coxae I] and IIL to a width of 289, for the postero-lateral arms, posterior margin strat medially for a width of 188. then curving posteriorly for 30% on each side betore running obliquely forwards to tip of postero-lateral arms, with three pairs of sctac and one pair of lyriform pores, sternal setae [1 47 lung and 47) apart in the antero-lateral angles, HI and [V shorter 284 lang in a_transverse rew near posterior margin, with the medians 42, apart and 25» frum the laterals, pores 33, behind setae TI and 52, apart, length of shield 94; sternogynial shield hell-jar shaped, anterior margin 179p, length 132y, ratio width to length = 1-35=1-0, sides sinuous and converging tu apex us figured, with one palr af lyrifarm pores 10. behind anterior margin and 80x apart; latigynial shields strap- like contouring sides of sternogynial and partly hidden under inner edges of ventral shield; mesogynial shield reduced and partly obscured: yentral shield large, eoalesced with the endopodal, exopodal and anal shields and occupying most vf the venter with many small pores and small but obvious sctac; the stip of under-lapping dorsal shicld contouring the margins of the ventri-anal shield carries a row of about 5 fine setae on each side about 24, long, the anus is situated in the pusterior angle of the yentri-anal shicld with the paranal setue very minute; the peritreme is thin and reaches to coxae 1, with the stigma situ- ated between coxae ILL and IV, Guathosoma—As in the other genera of the family; Isbial cornicles swollen with a small adpressed claw-like appendage; mandibles and chelicerae as figured. AUSTRALIAN AND NEW GUINEA FEDRIZZIIDAE 53 Legs—As in species of Neofedrizzia, but the femora of legs I-IV without any strong curved spine ut the posterior basal angle, I long 464. and antennae- form, angulate, I-IV stouter with claws and caruncle, IT 440u, TIT 440p, TV 464p. Male allotype—Of the same general facies as in the female. Length of idio- soma 986u, width 696,. Dorsum—As in the female. Venter—Tritostermim similar to that of female; jugular shield crown-shaped, 1134 wide by 47» long (deep) with an anterior pair of slender recurved setae, Fig. 16.—Parafedrizzia buloloensis g, ct sp. noy, A-J, Female: A, ventral view; B, dorsum; C, tritosternun, jugular, sternal, sternogynial and latigynial shields enlarged; D, chelicerag; E, gnathosoma; F, palp; G, leg [; H, leg IT; £, ley WI; J, leg LV; K, Male tritosternum, jugular and sternal shields. rather wide apart 60y, and ca. 50y long, with one pair of lyriform pores 44, apart; sternal, ventral and anal shields coalesced together with cndopodal and exopodal and the underlap of the dorsal shield as far back as posterior of coxae, and then sepurated from the under-lapping dorsal shield by a narrow strip of cuticle; with the genital orifice situated between coxae I] and wider than long 54 AH. WOMERSLEY 94, by 66n, without any pores around the posterior half; with setae and pores as in Fig. 16 K; anterior width 108,, narrowest to 85p between coxae 1! and widest between tip of lateral arms between coxae LU and ILL to 262,. Cnathosoma—As in female. Legs—As in female, [ 464, long, antennaeform, IT 406, TI] 406m, TV 464y. REFERENCES Casuy, J. H., and Gonmoss:, F. E., 1955. A Revision of the Suborder Mesostigmata (Acarina) based on New Interpretations of Comparative Morphological Data, Publ. No. Il, Chicago Acad. Sei, Jan. 17th, 1955, pp. 1-79. Cawrstrings, G., 1884. Acari dell Australia, Atti Ist, Veneto 2, ser, VI, pp, 703-723, Evans, GC. Q., 1955, A Review of the Laclaptid Paraphages of the Myriapoda with descrip- tions of three new species ( Adarina-Laelaptidae). Parasitology 45 (3-4), pp. 352-368. Ovupesrans, A. C,, 1927, Ent. Ber., 7 (156), p. 227; 1928, Fauna Buruana, Acari, in Treubia, 7, suppl. 2, pp, 60-70, TrAcarny, 1., 1937. Zur Systematik der Mesostigmata. Arkiv, £. Zool, 29B (11), p. 3. Tricarpu, 1, 1946. Outlines of a new classification of the Mesostigmata (Acurina) based on comparative. morphological data, Kungl. Vysiografiska Sallskapets Handlingar, N.F.Bol., 57 (4), pp. 1-37. Turk, FY, A., 1948. Insecticalous Acari from Trinidad B.W.1. Proc. Zool, Soc. London, 118 (1), pp. 82-125. Turk, F. A, 1953. A Synonymic Cutalogue of Brilish Acari, Pt. 1, Ann. May, Nat. Hist. (12), € (1), pp. 1-99. VirztHum, HL. Graf, 1945. “Acarina” in Bronns’, Klassen und Ordmmygen des Tierreich, 5 (4). oki Since this paper has been in press the following record has been noted. “Fedrizzia gloriosa n, sp, Dark brown, quite oval, size about twice that of the other two (Known) species. Margin of body with equidistant minute sctae. Mandibles in both sexes with small chelae, larger chela with penicillate process. All femora except first with wide marginal scale. “Length 1250., width 800z, “Habitat on coleopteron of the family Passalidae. Australia, ‘N.S.W.’. Coll. Cl. Froggatt.” The above is a free translation of the brief description published by Berlese. “Brevi diagnosi di generi et specie nuovi di Acari’, Redia 6 (2): 376, 1910. In view of our present knowledge of this family, such a brief description is specifically unrecognisable, pending a re-examination of Berlese’s types which are probably in the Berlese collection in Florence. All that can be said at this stage is that on the description of the femora of the legs it is probably a species of Neofedrizzia. Tt may be one of the larger species of this genus described in the present study. LARGE ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM HALLETT COVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY H. M. COOPER Summary This paper records the occurrence at Hallett Cove, South Australia, of large stone implements both primitive in type and in manufacture, some forms of which are described and discussed. Reference is made to their similarity with material cultures discovered upon other long-abandoned native camp-sites in South Australia and also in Asia. It is suggested that at least some of these implements may represent one of the earliest periods in the succession of stone cultures employed by primitive man during his occupation of Australia and termed Kartan. LARGE ARCHAEOLOGICAL STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM HALLETT COVE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. by H. M. Cooper’ [read 8 May 1938] SUMMARY ‘This paper vecords the nccurrence at Hallett Cove, Swuth Australia, of Jarge stone implements both primitive in type and in manufacture, some forms of which are described and discussed, Reference is made to their similarity with material enltures discovered, upon other long-abandonect native: camp-sites in Sonth Australia and also m Asia. Tt is suggested that at least some of these implements may represent one of the earliest periods in the succession of stone cultures employed by primitive man during his oceupation of Australia and termed Kartan, INTRODUCTION In 1934 the author discovered large stone implements of crude manufacture upun cultivated land, recently ploughed, in a field below Hallett Cove Railway Siding, about ten miles south of Adelaide, re-cxamined and referred to by Tin- dale (1937). The area under cultivation has been extended considerably during recent years exposing, apparently, the whole extent of the former camp-site, with the exception of the’ western extremity where owing to the shallowness or ahsence of any surface soil, due possibly to erosion, implements and waste material lay exposed. ‘Thirty subsequent examinations have been carried out, a total of more than 270 large implements being, feund. Successive ploughings provided favourable conditions for collecting. The camp-site, about 200 {cet above sea-level, is situated upon land gradu- ally sloping towards the adjacent coastal cliffs and is bounded upon its southern side by a steep gully along the bottom of which runs a small stream fed by a permanent spring and swollen during the wet season by waters draining of hilly country further inland, Siltstone outcrops are exposed near this spring and also where the stream reaches the sea in its descent over several diminutive waterfalls. Both outcrops exhibit similar material to that employed in making the most efficient of the implements, A well-defined camp-site, exposed by ploughing and somewhat similar in situation to that below the railway siding, exists close by wpon high ground above the southern side of the intervening ully already described. It yielded identical but fewcr implements and may 2 considered a part of the larger one. The surface of this field below the railway siding, at its easterm or upper end, consists of a compact red-brown earth which tends to become sandy in nature as it slopes towards the gully, The soil at the western end, where the main camp-site exists, is much lighter in colour, having an admixture of Kunkar Travertine, frequently nodular in form which it overlays in places tou a very shallow depth. The surfaces of many of the implements are covered, wholly or in part, with a hard coating of calcareous matter (apparently derived from close association with the underlying Kunkar Travertine bed) which in places tends to mask the outline of secondary trimming. Additional implements were * Hon, Associate m Anthropology, South Australian Museum, Adelaide. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8, Aust. (1955), Val, $2. o6 H,M. COOPER discovered, more sparingly, at several places upon the high ground facing Hallett Cove, more especially at its southern extreme above Field River. The camp helow the raihvay siding, however, judged by the abundance of finished material and discarded waste, denotes the main point of occupation hercabouts during this perind. It possessed by present indications, moredver, the essential requirements of a primitive people—a commanding view, a well-drained loca- tion anda permanent water supply. DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS The figured ypecimens, described herein, represent the principal types Found upen the main camp-site below Hallett Cove Railway Siding and adjoining fields. Tleve exist. in addition, many other large implements, roughly worked and nondesvript in form which merely constitute a miscellaneous group of chopping tools supplementary to those represented by the drawings. An examination of the 270 and more large archaeological implements dis- covered upon this camp-site indicates a standard of preparation ranging from the rudest attempts at primary and secondary faking to secondary chipping. both simple and stepped, of a tolerably high order. The graduated improvement im stone working mav indicate that this material culture persisted at Hallett Cove for a consideralle period of time, It is somewhat difficult 1o conceive any reason or need for the employment of so much inferior material in the preparation of Hhese implements eencrally and although the siltstones more compact in texture respunded tolerably well it was difficult ta control the direction of flakes it was desired te remuve in the course of trimming those shaly in texture. - Fine-grained quartzite pebbles. which fake with an excellent conchoidal fracture and were highly prized and used almost exclusively by the recently extinet Kaurna (Adelaide) Tribe, lie exposed at the font of the sea cliffs imme- diately below the camp-site. Tindale (1957, 1) suggests, however, that access ta this pebble bank may have becn impossible in Kartan times owing to the existence of a talus which covered them. An excursion to the borders of the sea at that time by Hallett Cove camp dwellers in search of food, therefore, may have entailed a considerable journey, This section of the coast-line at present is undergoing serious erosion from seawards. A few small implements and discarded cores, mostly of quartzites and Murindian in type, the most recent South Australian culture (Hale & Tindale, 1930) were found upon the Iallett Cove site but are eusily recugnisahle. They are displayed as surface material at many places along the coast and wre uttrihut- ahle ta the Kawna people. The archaeological large specimens from Hallett Cove, gured hercin, indi- vate the former existence of a culture consisting mainly of general purpose chopping tool implements, semi-uniface in technique, and in addition a few which served as cleavers, saws or knives, skin scrapers and pounders. It is possible, therefare, that hunting, fighting and dumestic weapons were corce- spondingly simple, being confined to roughly made spears, clubs, bark shields and some crudely muunted tools such 2s those described elsewhere in this paper. Pitting, bruising and battering. which are apparent upon the surfaces of many chupping implements, suggest their casual use as hammers when the need arose, ‘This occurs frequently upon pebble choppers of the Kangaroo Island Industry (Cooper, 1943), Twenty-five hammerstones of considerable size, many heavily battered or broken, also upper and nether millstones were found at ihe Hallett Cove site. LARGE STONE [IMPLEMENTS PROM PLALLETT COVE 37 They consist mostly of water-worn stones and angular blocks of indifferent matcrial which would suffice, however, to meet the cardinal needs of primitive man al this stage, including the trimming of the heavy, massive stone members of his archaeological implement culture, in which tho fundamental principle of weinht and bulk, as a means to an end, luxl not yet given way to lightness, sharpness and a wider assurtment of types, The existence of many small ham- merstones found in assoclation with more recent cultures indicates, apart from other functions, a simple adjustment made necessary by the introduction and prepuration of this series of new implements greatly reduvedl in size. There is at the present time little infonnation available with which to de- termine, with accuracy, the age of the large stone implements of South Aus- tralia, all of which are tentatively und broadly assiyned to the Kartaw Culture (Tindale, 1937). The approximate age of the Tartangan Culture, however (Hale and Tindale, 1930), consisting of small, well-executed implements, ap- parently much more recent, has been ascertained following Carbon 14 dating of stratified material from ‘Tartanga and Cape Murtin, the respective dates being 6020 -- 150 B.P. and 8700 + 120 B.P. (Tindale, 1957, 3). In the absenve of any time dating figures a few observations may be made in the meantime which, when considered collectively, indicate that a cansider- able period of time must have elapsed upon Kangaroo Island —the Kartan Cuiture type Jocality —sinee the industry Hourished and later ceased to exist there as also upon the mainland. Captain Matthew Flinders, I.N., who dis- covered this ishand in March, 1802, found it uninhabited, with the native animals totally fearless in the presence of man. Its typical pebble chopper industry, exposed by ploughing, was concentrated, but unly su fur as the present cuust- line indicates, xround the banks and fringes of inland swainps and creeks In former heavily timbered country, now cleared. No skeletal material los been recovered. Examinations of favourable situations amid extensive series of recent sand-dunes, facing the shores in many places, have failed so far to reveal the evistence of any camping grounds there. This would indi¢ate that the island's large stone implement culture probably predated their formation, The period and entry path of Kangaroo Island's former dwellers as well as those of their departure—or local extinction—are unknown, The Kanyeroo Island pebble industry is represented at the Hallett Cove site by some examples, such as Fig, 8, and at other scattered places including Artipenia Water and elsewhere (Cooper, 1943). Types similar to Figs. 5. 6, 7 and 14 appear upon Kangaroo Island, the adjacent mainland and further north, It is probable, therefore, that most if not all of this material is related to the same archaeological! origin, although not necessarily to any one particular period. Some former camps, if of sufficient antiquity, may now Jie submerged within ce present confines of the waters in the adjoining straits and the Culf of St. ‘jeent. The #sistence at Hallett Cove ef many smal! pieces of slate, some showin evidence of wear and capuhle of scraping skins to serve as cloaks, althou h devoid of any regularity in shape, could indicate that at least a portion of the Kartan oecupalion may have coexisted with a time of rigorous climatic condi- tions, such as during the last Glacial Periud. They may be eavly and crude equivalents of the beautifullyanade, slender slate scrapers used by the recently extmet tribes of the Adelaide and adjoining regivns. , During April, 1953, the author discovered upon the eroded summit of a red sand-dune, west of Port Augusta, a native hearth of burnt stones apparently quite recently uncovered. Twelve well preserved teeth, including molars and incisors, lay nearby in association with fragmentary hones, some showing evi- 5S H.M, COOPER dence of fire and others reduced to powder by complete disintegration. Mr. 1. FH. Finlayson, Hon. Curator of Mammals, South Australian Museum, who kindly examined the material, concludes that almost all can be reconciled with a small phase of Diprotodon, Owen, eg. D, minor. Large stone implements, sume similar to certain types figured in this paper, were scattered about upon the adjoining surface. Whilst not ignoring a possibility that the presence of the teeth and bones in this situation may be coincidental, the evidence of their existence amidst such surroundings is significant and suggests the site of an wneient tribal feast, or at least the place of its preparation, ff sufficient firm evidence is later forthcoming which confirms the cowtem- porancity of early man with Diprotodon, some of the thinner, heavy implements of the Kartan Culture, including large saws, cleavers and choppers, would prove cfficient working tools for employment in the preliminary prepanition of their hides and flesh. Movius (1944) in his detailed sutvey of stratified material in Asia describes several types of large, crudcly trimmed implements assigned by him to the Pleistocene Period which are identical with others figured in this paper, In stratified deposits discovered there the massive block and pebble chopper indus- trins, dependent upon weight for efficiency im use, tend te appear at mitch eatlier periods than the later groups of small artefacts with Heir specialised series of many types as represented in South Australia by the Murundian, Mudu- kian, Pirrian and Tartagan Cultures (ale and Tindale, 1930). The possible retention and continued manufacture by natives in subsequent pethats of one or two implement types of the Kartan people, tu perform certain waek bio heavy for their small artefacts, such as chopping throuzh boughs and branches for the framework of their shelters, justifies some consideration. A few of the Kartan-mad¢ implements, indeed, may have been used either in their original state or with the addition of more advanced trimming. ‘The tempor- ury overlappiny of some differing types, associated with twa succeeding cul- tures, terminating with the extinction of the older, and also improvisation, such as that referred to above, have been noted in South Australia and elsewhere. Such instances, although of interest, appear to be merely of transient significance, in ny way Interrupting the establishment of the incoming stone culture. Although the extent of the antiquity of the Hallett Cove implements and Hie Rartan Culture ay a whole remains indeterminate, indications including those discussed above, suggest a period considerably earlier than the Tartangan dating of 8700+ 12 B.P. Fnuinre investigations, indeed, may reveal that this early heavy implement industry was one of Jong duration, necessitating its eventual division into separate periods or even into additional cultures. Although the stone implements of the Kartan Culture may appear ty) us massive. rough and chimsy in comparison with the symmetry and beauty of the Pirri point, the polished axe-head and the microlith which followed alter them, there is no reason for supposing that these imperishable products, de- veloped by primitive man, failed in the accomplishment of all that the maker required of them in meeting the simple needs of his humble environment. They represent, too, a great advance since the day when his ancestor sought ty perecive upon the ground in some primeval forest, a random piece of rock with which to fashion laboriously, iu defuult uf anything better, a clumsy spear tio vetiph-hewn club. The inventiveness of man, such as thut associated with the development of this early culture. as with sv many others—primitive thengh it muy seem to Os LAKGE STONE IMPLEMENTS FROM HALLETE COVE a) when judged by civilised standards—represents, nevertheless, an essential part of that vital strneture, founded upon trial anid errur, perseverance and success $0 Necessary in his endless struggle for survival. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS It is desired to acknowledge, with appreciation, the assistance afforded by the following: Mr, A, E. Stone, Hallett Cove, for permission te carry oul a pru- longed and detailed examination of land below the railway siding whereon the main collection uf implements wis made; Miss M. P. Boyce, Artist, South Aus- talian Muscum, for the excellent drawings, Pigs, 1-21 ( Fig, 22 was drawn hy the author) accompanying this paper; Dr, B. Daily, Curator of Fossils and Minerals in the same institution, fur myst helpful aiteion in identifying Certain rocks employed by the natives; and Me. V, P. Daly, Wilmington, for permission to search his fields adjoining the banks of Beautiful Valley Creck. REFERENCES, Coorgn, H. M., 1943. Large stone implements from South Australia. Ree. & Aust. Mins, Adelaide, 7, pp. 343-369, Haur, I, M., and Trspacy, N. B., 1930, Notes on some human reqiains in the Lower Murray Valley, South Australia. Ree, 5, Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 4, pp. 145-218. Movius, H. L., 1944, Early man and Pleistocene stratigraphy in Southern and Basten Asia. Papers of the Peabody Museum of American Archaeulugy and Etbnology, Harvard Uni- versity, XIX, 3, Tinvace, N, B., 1937, Relationship of the extinat Kanguroa Tslaucl Culture with Cultures of Australia, Tasmania. and Malaya. Ree. $. Anst, Mus. Adelaide, 6, pp. 39-60, ‘Tinware, N. B., 1957, 1, Culture succession in South Eastern Australia from Late Plois- tocent to the Present, Ree, $. Aust. Mus., Adelaide, 13, pp. 1-49. TixpaLe, N. B., 1957, 2. A dated Tartangyn implement site Ere Cape Martin, South-Bust of South Australia. ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust,, Adelaide, 80, pp. 109-123, DESCRIPTION OF FICURED SPECIMENS The inset sealé ig the equivalent of six inclws, Pigs, 1-17 are all semi-unifuee trimmed implements Hig. 1.—A large highly putinated and weathered flat block with rough primary flaking along the frontal edge and twa sides of its buse margin. Weight 4 Tbs. Fig. 2.—Large triangular block with secondary trimming confined to one straight chopplug edge along its forward inargin. It represents a type well established upon this camp-site although casual blocks of any snitahle shape were used in its construction. Fig, 3—Roughly trimmed from an irregular water-worn block arotind its base periphery except at the rear where the original cartes has been retained fur convenionoe in use, Weight 5.4 Ibs. Figs. 1, 2, 3 and many others appear to be exanuples uf two-handed. chopping implements intended for working in the direction of the operator, ‘The largest Mallett Cove example weighed 6 ths. Figs, 4, 5 and 6—Filat blocks, the latter two discoidul, All exhibit tolerubly good secondary stepped trimming, Fig. 7,—A well-defined trimmed core in which the margin of the Hat working hase has been worn to such an extent hy use and retouching as to be overhung by its apex. Its original form was possibly “horsehuof™ in shape, Vide Cooper, 1943. Figs, 8 and 9.—Two pebbles with rounded and flat bases respectively; some stepped sveaul- ary Wining. Examples in this group are similar to the more poorly executed spevi- mens existing in the Kangaroo Island pebble chopper Industry (Guaper, 1943). Fig. LO.—Flat-hased block with well-defined secondary. stepped faking. “Slug” shapudl, Figs. 11 and 12.—Represent a type with working margius rmghly triangular in shape and ending in a Bripedbieed pointed extremity, Also made [vom pebbles. Fig, 12 is Min. in thickness; made fram) a stone with upper and lower irregular faces. 60 H. M. COOPER Fig, 13—A large cleaver or saw; it is a thin flake implement. Length Sin,; thickness Lin. Cleavers or saws are relatively rare here. Figs. 14 and 15.—Two substantial Hake chopping or scraping adzes with well developed percussion bulbs and striking platforms, both of which have been retained. Figs. 16 and 17—Appear to be smaller examples of types represented by Figs. 13 and 11. Figs, 18-22.—These five implements, representative of many others, display such crudeness in preparation that they appear to have escaped general notice and it was only the recurrence of so many similar cxamples which finally drew attmtion to their existence. There seem to be at least two types, Figs. 18, 19 and 22, serving as pounders and Figs. 20 and 21 for some form of scraping. They are finished, with few exceptions, from smooth yellowish soft siltstones of the Pre-Cambrian Marinoan Series, such as those present in the bed and upon the banks of the litle strear previously referred to, No methodical preparation is indicated, althongh a little extremely rough primary uimming has been attempted in order to produce the desired shape. the natural form of the stone, with a little Making here and there, is all that is evident in many cases, There are indications that at least some of the implements in these two groups were fastened to_a crude form of wooden handle or withy because certain individuals exhibit a slight grooving due to possible wear whilst in others flakes have been roughly removed as if to make the haft more secure. The improvisation of some rough method of handgrip in certain cases, by means of gum or kangaroo hide, might also be considered, The softness and shaly nature of the stone often employed suggest their unsuitability for any purpose which involved undue stress. One possible use would haye been in the prepara- tion of skin cloaks as proposed above—Figs. 18, 19 and 22 for pounding and softening; Figs. 20 and 21 as scrapers, This group, with few exceptions, exhibits intense patination, severe weathering and patches of calcareous coating. Examples indicated by Figs. 20 and 21, if mounted and employed for cutting and scraping, would have been more efficient if hafted broadside on. An examination of the base of Fig. 18 discloses heavy wear upon one end of the working edge only, indicating that it was held in such a manner that pounding and hammering were concentrated upon that particular area. During Noyember, 1957, the author found two isolated implements upon cultivated land alongside the banks of Beautiful Valley Creek, Wilmington, 200 miles north of Hallett Cove. One was similar to Fig. 3, the other being identical with Fig, 22, both in shape and in softness of material. It is possible, therefore, that this latter type may have considerable distribution. LL OM. Goxprets Sih ee owe Il. M. Coorer =“ ~S Wess 5 ih H. M. Coorer PLATE 4 ———— THE KANMANTOO GROUP IN THE STRATHALBYN-HARROGATE REGION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY A. W. KLEEMAN AND B. J. SKINNER Summary This paper presents the results of structural mapping of the Kanmantoo Group in the area north and south of Kanmantoo township. The mapping shows that the Nairne Fault does not exist. The Kanmantoo Group lies conformably on the Marinoan series of the Adelaide System and the whole succession was folded in post-Kanmantoo time. THE KANMANTOO CROUP IN THE STRATHALBYN-HARROGATE REGION, SOUTH AUSTRALIA, by A. W. Kieeman anp B, J, Skinnun® [Read 12 Tune 1958] SUMMARY This paper presents the results of structural mapping of the Kanmantoo Group in the area north and south of Kanmantoo township, The mapping shows that the Nairne Fault does not exist. ‘Yhe Kanmantoy Croup lies conformably on the Marinoxn series of the Adclaide System and the whole succession was folded in past-Kaumanitoo time. INTRODUCTION The area described in this paper lies on the eastern side of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, trom Strathalbyn in the south to Harrogate in the north. In this region a vast thickness of generally fine-grained, dark prey rocks outcrop, Originally sandstones, greywackes and siltstones, they have been metamorphosed into micaceous quartzites, arkoses, quarty-felspar-mica schists and andalusite-stauro- lite schists. This group of rocks lies to the east of, and stratigraphically above, & series of rocks which are correlated with the rocks of the Adelaide System, typically exposed on the western slopes of the Mt. Lofty Ranges (Sprigg, 1942, 1946; Howchin, 1929). Woolnough (1908), in referring to the racks he saw on the eastern slopes of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, coined the name Barossian and misled by their meta- morphism, believed them to be Archaean in age, Howchin, on the other hand, considered all of the rocks east of the core of the ranges to belong to the Ade- jaide System and correlated the Barossian of Woolnough with the upper portion of the Adelaide System. In 1953 Sprigg and Campana gave the name Kanmantoo Group to the upper portion of the post-Archaean sequence in the eastern Mt. Lofly Ranges. Although the name Barossian has precedence, it is not advocated on the grounds that its reintroduction would cause unnecessary confusion. The Kanmantoo Group, as generally understood from the definition by Sprigg and Campana (1953), consists of greywackes and micaceous quartz- ites with minor siltstones and shales in contrast to the quartzite, shale, limestone association of the Adelaide System. Sprigg and Cumpina stated that the Kan- mantoo Group Jay conformubly above Lower Cambrian Strata, which in turn lay above the Adelaide System. However, for the whole distance from Birdwood to near Macclesfield, the Kanmantoo Group was supposed to be thrown against the Adelaide System by a fault, generally called the Nairne Vault (Sprigg et al., 1951). The normal sequence of beds could supposedly be seen in the Maccles- field Syncline und also in the Angaston region. We do not propose to deal with the Angaston area in this paper. In 1956 Campana and Horwitz disagreed with the fault hyopthesis of Sprigg, mainly on the basis of mapping on the Milang and Yankalilla Sheets, and sug- gested that the boundary between the two groups of rocks was a transgression * Geology Department, University of Adelaide. Trans. Roy, Soc, 8, Aust. (1959), Vol. B% 63 AL W. KLEBMAN ann B. J, SKINNIEK and that Uhe Kanmantoo Croup was laid down directly on the eraded surface of the Adelaide System rocks. To attempt to resolve these conflicting hypotheses, and tu further an interest in the Nairne Pyritic Formation, we have studied the Kanmantoo Group in the grea dullined in the map (Fig. L). This map is on a relatively small scale, but the more detailed maps ure lodged in the Geology Department, University of Adelaide. Much of the mapping hus been very detailed and a complete presen- tation of the data could only he effected on a scale uf 2 inches to the mile, THE NAIRNE PYRITIC FORMATION Pyrite and pyrrhotite bearing schists and quartzites outcrop for at Icast 65 miles along tlie regional strike. These beds have heen the subject of a more detailed study (Skinner, 1958) and are believed tu be true sedimentary de- posits and not subsequent replacements of favourable horizons. The pyritic sediments as a whole have been called the Nairne Pyritic Formation though two main sulphide bearing units and several minor ones exist within the formation, We have followed the pyritic beds from near Harrogate tu within a few miles of Strathalbyn. Over this whole distance the pyritic beds can be traced by the characteristic “boxwork” in the weathered and ironstained outcrops, The width of the pyritic bands varies greatly. At Shephard [ill the main or lower band is 400 feet wide and another band, about 1500 feet higher im the sequence, is only about 50 feet thick. The lower band persists strongly for about 8 miles to the south, but 2 miles south of Barker Creek it pinches out, and after several reappearances finally disappears ut a point uorth-east of Tinpot, The upper bund reaches a thickness of 200 feet and can be traced us a strong horizon to beyond Tinpot, about 2 miles furthee south than the lower band. [t then thins out lo a width of only a few feet and cannot be traced with certainty for about half a mile, It reappears as a thin horizon and then thickens to about 200 feet agai, & miles north of Strathalbyn. After about a mile it ayain becomes thin, and remains so until it finally disappears 14 miles north of Strathalbyn, The breaks in continuity are due fo patches of allavium and deep svuil cover, as well us thimning of the beds. Both the upper and lower bands can be followed as continuons horizons from Harrogate to near Tinpot with only minor breaks due to allavium in creeks. They are always conformable with the other sediments and mineralogical studies suggest that the sulphide and silicate minerals are compatible phases. This leaves no doubt that the pyrites is an original sedimentary deposit. At places a third or even a fourth band uppeurs either hetween the two main bands or above the upper band. These minor bands are never greater than 10 feet thick and are very limited in distribution, North of flarrogate, White (1956) (see also White and Thatcher, 1957) followed the Nairne Pyritic Formation till it meets the Bremer Fault to the east of Birdwood. He alsa mapped it east of the Bremer Fault, sauth of Rockleigh. Two bands of pyritic schist re-appear just to the west of the Bremer Fault south- east of [Jarrogate, and are believed to be the Nairne Pyritic Formation. Neav Macclesfield, pyritic beds were first met in 2 tributary of the Angas River a mile south of the town. In the ereek sections the beds still retained mueb of their original pyrite, but on the hill slopes only the weathered rock emild be seen. From here the rocks can be traced south, with several smull breaks, till they pass under the Recent (und Tertiary) cover south-west of Strathalbyn, This pyeitic bed dips to the west and must obviously Jie un the west limb of an uuticline, as was confirmed by structural mapping in the core KRANMANTOGO GROUP ba AES SUE me re 5 ee STRUCTURAL MAP J, A | er ‘Fe OF THE | —_— ij f STRATHALBYN—HARROGATE |“ je REGION , A - = = i | { yg ™N ey ff, ‘ Hl x : j. 1 gs ae va \ \ cay } \ : | ' ee Ae BONNE 4, a a aa! * SHEPHS =D + ee | | 1 4 \ ! \ \ f : «, Nairn | > ban pe ne f eas ee : \ SSS E gor! % z I Callington [ 1 ~ | E rR I, ~ ah / \j- t Doe wo ee | “ Paty f eff oodchester t = ear | ey A |) I Aver ano Fermary cover I Freed Anosiuste schis? fi ==] Newrne lyritic Farmetian b= EO Aeectesticld marbie = | ; E | digcetest reid & Mt Bat ker peachy Quer ipite (base of Sturtiar) Fault Crust pone Structure frend bine ip af beading Birect:on of tineations 735? Dei ACS 6£ A. W. KLEEMAN asp B, J. SKINNER of the anticline. There is little doubt that this is the Nairnce Pyritic Formation, The gap in outcrop around the nose of the Strathalbyn anticline is small, The wide extent, the continuity and excellence of outcrop make the Nairme Pyritic Formation an excellent marker horizon in mapping the structures of the Kanmantuo Group. It is the only satisfactory marker hurizon in the group, and appears to separate two series of rocks of somewhat differing litholagy. Con- sequently, it is convenient to diseuss the rocks above and below the Naitne Pyritic Formation separately. THE NOCKS BELOW THE NATRNE PYRITIC FORMATION Over most of the area mapped the beds immediately below the Naime Pyritie Formation are massive cross-bedded micaccous quurtzites and arkoses. The Barker Creek cuts a magmifivent section through these beds. Here the cross hedding is on a large scale, the individual units being ybeut 2 to 3 foet thick in many instances. The quartzite of Mt. Barker Summit appears ta be only «t local Jens uf pure: quartzite near the base of this formation, Simall out- crops of glassy quartzite south of ML, Barker Summit also appear to be local lenses Tear the base of the massive cross-bedded quartzite. Below the massive cross-bedded quartzite, which is at least 2000 feet thick i) Barker Greek, there are quarty-felspar-mica schists, mica schists, bands otf andalusite and andalusite-staurolite schists (“Paringite” of Woolnough), thin quartzites anal a few lenses of marble and of cule-silicates- These rocks do not oni- crop well and underly a great belt of fertile agricultural Jand between Mt. Barker town and Mucclesfield. Below this sequence comes a prominent group of quarts- ites which Sprigg and Wilson (1954) placed ut the base of the Sturtian Series, Near Macclesfield the Nairne Pyritic Pormation is underlain by about 1100 fect of juartz-felspar-micu schists (impure arkoses) followed by a thin band of quartzite, some of it micaceous, known as the Macclesfield Quartzite. Below this ugrin comes more qnartz-felspar-mica schist follawed by mica schists andl andalusite-stancolite schists. The micaceous quartzite und arkoses are not sb conspicuously current bedded, nov are they as thick as in the Barker Creek section, hut they are undoubtedly the same horizon. There is, on the other hand, a strong development of tle andalusite-staurolite schist forming the core of the Strathalhyn Anticline, whilst a similar thickness of andalusite-staurolite schist is not found in the Barker Creek, It is possible that the thickening of these rocks in the core of the anticline is due to their plasticity during tectonic defurmation rather than a sedimentary thickening since they are much contorted jn the core of the fold. There is no evidence to sugwest that the Macclesfield Quartzite lies at the same horizon as the quartzite of Mt. Barker Summit, [1 is, in fact, probable that the Macclesfield Quartzite occurs near the middle of the micaceous quartzite horizon and the Mt, Barker quartzite at the base, but the position is compli- cated by a thickening of the micaceous quartzite horizan as it gees north. Caleareous beds are found at several levels below the Nuimne Pyritic Forma- tiuw, but none can be traced far alowg the strike, In the northern part of the area there is a cale-silicate hand —a diopside-seapalite rock—near the base of the micaceous quartzite horizon, Lt occurs on the Callington read south of Mt. Barker Summit, but can only be traced a few hundred yards. South of Macclesfield in the east limb of the Macclesfield Syncline, there is a small vut- crap of calo-silicate rock a few hundred feet below the Nuirne Pyrttic Forma- tion and ubove the micaceous quartzite. The position of this cale-silicate cor- responds roughly with the Macclesfield Marble which has been mapped on the west limb of the Macclesfield Syucline. On the west limb of the syncline the KANMANTOO CROUP 65 marble is first seen south of Paris Creek, emerging from below Tertiary sands and laterites, and can be traced easily to about 2 miles north of Paris Creek where it is again chseured by sands and laterites. It is seen again just west of the township of Macclesfield as a small outcrop. Another marble band occurs at the base of the Marinoan as defined by Sprigg and Wilson (Echunga Sheet), It, tuv, can be seen only in Bull Greck west of Paris Creek and in three places in the north. We have seen this in several places, but we have not extended our map- ping far enough down into the Marinoan to correlate its varity nceurrences, There is nv evidence to suggest that there are any continuous marble beds in the area investigated. Rather, the evidence suyeests that the marble beds occur as small lenses, possibly at definite horizons, but nat with sufficient cer- tainty to allow safe correlation over large distances, Extensive cale-silicate horizons occur in the Woodside region but all of these are below the vross-bedded micaceous sandstone and we have not mapped them. THE ROCKS ABOVE THE NAIRNE PYRITLIC FORMATION The sediments above the pyritic formation are in general more micaceous and finer-grained than these below. The original sediments may fairly be de- scribed as fine-grained greywackes and sillstones with minor shales, The bulk of the rocks are quartz-felspar-mica schists, representing the greywackes and siltstones. The shales, however, have produved schists containiny, micas, :nela- lusite, staurolite, felspars and quartz. The andalusite schists are often very conspicuous as they sometimes contain andalusite crystals up tu an ineh in length, The development of large andelusite crystals is confined tn the cores of the folds. On the limbs of the folds the andalusite schists are generally fine- grained and inconspicuous. The first notable andalusite sehist occrirs about 7000 feet above the lowest pytite band. The base of this bed can be mapped for several miles in the nose and un the western limb of the syncline near Dawesley. It is obvious that the undalusite schist ig greatly thickened in the nose of this syneline because the outcrop is much a along the road than it is further to the north or suuth. In the Barker Creek section only a few narrow bands of andalusite aud anda- lusite-staurolite schist are met. It is possible that in the area east of Dawesley these schists reach their maximum development and that to the south they grade laterally into mica schists. Higher in the sequence these peraluminous eds grade up into normal mica schists and then into fine-grained quarte-felspur- mica schists which persist to the top of the expused section, Small bands, how- ever, aré found at several places in the Barker Creek and, as in the Dawesley Svneline, they have been greatly thickened and contorted in the Callimuton Syneline. It is with the structurally thickened audalusite schists that the Calling- tun-Kanmaritvo mines are associated, The andalusite schists above and below the Nairne Pyritic Furmation cannot he distinguished in hand-specimen, They are always incurupetent relative to the quartz-felspar-mica schists and tha quartzites, and consequently show ex- treme contortion and thickening in the noses of the folds. On the limbs they are thin beds which make poor oulerops and consequently they are nut satis factory marker horizons, METAMORPHISM The zreywackes and siltstones which form the bulk of the rocks in the Kanmautoo Croup lave recrystallised to fine-grained quartz-felspar-micu schists. All of these rocks show the original bedding, and where foliation is present it 66 AL W, KLEEMAN ann TO J. SEINNER generally follows the bedding. As in the Tungkillo-Palmer area (Kleeman and White, 1957) the mica flakes often have a preferred orientation which differs from the bedding plane, but this rarcly develops a foliation plane at an angle to the bedding. In the more micaceous rock types, however, originally shales, the hedding is often obscured by axial-plane foliation. , The peraluminous sbales have recrystallised to mica schists in which anda- lusite, staurolite, kyanite, carnet and sillimanite occur. Sillimanite is only known from wear Harrogate in a sillimanite-andalusite-muscovite-bintite rock and kyanite in a similar assemblage from Shephard Hill, Andalusite and staurolite, hoth together and separately, vcewr over the whole arca wherever rocks of a suitable composition occur, White (1956) has shown that the sillimanite- muscovite asscmublage is stahle in the area north-east of Harrogate, and it is probable that there is a general increase in the grade of metamorphism from the S.S.W. to the N.N.E. This is burne out by the absenee of andalusite and stau- rolites € the south-west of Paris Creek west of the mapped area, However, andulusite, stuurolite and garnet are to be fatind only a few miles north-west of Strathalbyn, ‘The prominent ancalusite crystals in the andalusite schist give the rack a more highly metamorphosed appearance than the surrounding fine-grained quartz-felspar-mica schists. The copper mines of the Kanntantoo-Callington area are associated with andalusitc and andalusite-staurolite schists and this led Dickinson (1942) to suggest that the copper mineralisation was associated with “highs” of metamorphism, There seems, however. nv evidence to support this. The quartz, grains in both the andalusite schists and the cnartz-felspar-mica schists are approximately the same size, and the coarse-grained Jook uf the former rock is due solely to the large andalusile crystals and very obvious stau- rolite and garnet crystals. The difference in appearance between the andalusite schists and quartz-telspar-mica schists is therefore due to small differences in original composition and has nothing to do with degree of metamorphism. We believe that mineralisation in the Kanmantoo Group, other than the Naive Pyritic Formation, is always associated with the andalusite and anda- lusite-staurolite schists and is locelized by shearing or extreme contortion within the incompetent andalusite and staurolitc-andalusite schists. ‘The Kanmantoe- Callington mines are the most prominent group, but many others do accur. The most tutstanding of the other mincs is the Wheal Ellen Mine, 5 miles north of Strathalbyn. The mineralisation here is confined to a thin hand of gurnet- staurolite and andslusiteanica schists enclosed in a massive scries af fine- grained quartz-mica-felspar schists. Although the silicate minerals here are the same as those feand in the Kanmantog Mines area, there is na spectacular de- velopment of large crystals since the Wheal Ellen is on the limb of a Jarge syncline. Sprigg and Wilson (1954) have mapped the Wheal Ellen as occur- ring in a pyritic schist. The pyrite in this case is associated with the later mineralisation and the rocks bear no resemblance to the Nairne Pyritic Forma- Gian nor do they appear to be in any way associated with the Nairne Pyritie Formation. Jt is unfortunate that Sprigz and Wilson did not satisfactorily Jiterentiate between the two verv different rock types on their map, STRUCTURE The Kanmantou Group lies un the eastern limb of the “Mt. Lofty anticli- novium” (Campana, 1955). This structure is overturned te the west due to lateral compression from the east. Our mapping has shown no recognisable break in deposition between the Adelaide System and the Kanmantoo Group and KANMANTOO: GROUP oF demonstrates that the two have folded together as one unit. The east limb of the anticlinorium between the Archaean core of the ranges and the Bremer Fault is diversified ly two synclines and an anticline. The Bremer Fault is be- lieved by Kleeman and White (1956) to be the sheared west limb of another anticline and a further succession of synclines and antiolines occur to the east if the Bremer Fault. The structures east of the Bremer Fault will sot be dis- cussed Further in this paper. The syneline nearest to the Archaean core —the Macclesfield Syncline — is well shawn by the uuterop of the Macclesfield Quartzite at the top of the Adcluide System and by the quartzites at the base of the Sturtian Series lower down in the Adelaide System. The Macclesfield Quartzite is broken in the trough of the syncline and there is the suggestion of one, perhaps twe, minor anticlines modifying the major syncline. The major anticline —the Strathalbyn Anticline —is shown by the fold in the Sturtian quartvites near Mt, Barker town, and by the presence uf the Naime Pyritic Formation on both Jirabs of the fold near Strathalbyn. Unfortunately the pyritic horizons have not been traced completely around the nose of the fuld owing to cover of later rocks, but structural mapping confirms the auticlinat structure. Along the main road frum Macclesfleld to Strathalbyn several minor anliclines and synclines have been seen. In this areu there are several reversals of plunge, measurements varying between 30° S$. and 20° N. No marker hori- yon of any value can be traced over the axis of this anticline. Numerous bands of andalusite-staurolite schist were found but they do not outcrop well and are only seen where gully erosion has stripped the soil cover. The Macclesfield Quartzite dics out on tHe westera limb of the Strathalbyn Anticline. Sprigg and Wilsan (loc, cit.) in their mapping of the Echunga Sheet show this quartzite cut off at the “Nairn Fault” but it can in fact be traced across the mapmed position of the fault, A similar quartaite u few feet thick can be seen further suuth but it ceases te be a mappable horizon. Grasso and McManus (1954) mapped the Callington Syncline west of Callington and extending north to Kanmantoo township. ‘Vheir mapping showed complex. folding: and the complete absence of usable marker beds, In this area the structures are very well shown by air photographs. We have traced the syriclinal axis further to the north to within 2 or 3 miles south uf Iarrogate where its location becomes mere difficult. A big band of andalusite-taurolite schist which served as a marker horizon un the western limb of the syneline east and north-east af Dawesley could not he identified on the eustern limb. Moreover, us a consequence of the steep phmge (40-50°) and tight overturmed folding all beds dip to the east and the two limbs are distinguished only by a change of 20-30° in strike. There is little doubt that the fold axis passes a short distance to the east of Harrogate and what is most probably the same syticlinal structure is represented by two synclincs and an anticline in the Naime Pyritic Formation north-east of Hnads (ill (see Mannum Sheet —Wite and Thatcher, 1957). Mast of Callington the Kanmanton beds pass under alhiyiuen of the Bremer Valley but further to the north, near “Lucenbrae”, a series of tight folds — am- plitude about 500 feet —indicate another anticline. This is, moreover, sug vested by an outcrop of the Nairne Pyrite Horizons about 38% miles north of “Lucernbriue". Here the pyritic heds pass into a minor syncline before helng cul aff by the Bremer Fault. Traced to the south they become fivolved fn the tight folding and probably turn back northward before heing lost under allu- vium. This whole belt of folding merges into the Bremer Fault south-east of Harrogate. 68 A. W. KLEEMAN ano B. J. SKINNER In the vicinity of Shephard Hill the west limb of the Callington Syncline is bent into a subsidiary anticline and syncline, This structure dies away ta the south but hecomes more prominent in the Adelaide System beds to the north near Mt. Charles. THE BOUNDARY BETWEEN THE ADELAIDE SYSTEM AND THE KANMANTOO GROUP When the Kanmantoo Group was first defined the boundary between the Adelaide System and the Kanmanton in the eastern Mt, Lofty Ranges was considered to be a fault—named the Nairne Fault (Sprigg, op. ait,}. The rocks inside the Macclesfield Syneline were considered to be Kanmantuw resting on the Macclesfield Marble and separated from the bulk of the Kanmantoo Group by the Nairne Fault. Much of the mapping was based on a supposed lithological difference between the Adelaide System and Kanmantoo rocks, The Adelaide System rocks are dominantly slatey and when metamorphosed form miva schists which do not make good outcrops. The Kanmantoo rocks are dominantly grey- wackes which form quartz-felspar-mica schists, and these form cuomspicudus slabhy wuterops, On going eastward in the Mt. Lofty Ranges the change in outcrop pattern is quite marked and the “Nairne Fault” largely coincides with this line. Frum a point west of Shephard Hill to a point cast of Macclesfield the “Nairne Fault” follows more or less closely the Thats of a thick series of cross-bedded tmicaceous quartzites which outerop in the typical Kanmuntoo style —although we would prefer to place them in the top of the Adeliude System (Marinoan Series),* To the south of Macclesfield the Nairne Fault was helieved to cut off the Macclesfield Quartzite. From this point the fault in its further passage southward lay between Kanmantoo rocks on either side. The only area on the Echunga Shect in which evidence for the Nairne Funlt ig to be looked for is thus immediately south of Macelesfield. We consider the Nairne Fault does not exist in this area for three reasons, Firstly, we Nave found an outcrop of the Nairne Pyritie Formation which can be traced for at least half a mile north of the supposed position of the Gutlt and for about a mile south of the fault without any brek in the outcrop, and then with breaks duu to poor outerop for another six miles south. Secondly, the axes of both the Macclesfield Syneline and the Strathalbya Anticline can he traced unde- vigted across the line of the fault, Although this does not preclude a fault with a throw parallel to the axial plane of the folds it does preclude any fault which was tequired to do what the Nairne Fault was supposed to du. Lastly, the Macelesfield Quartzite which appears at first to be out off by the Nairme Euule, docs iu fact cross the “fault” before dying out by change of facies. A thin, white quartzite band can be seen interbedded belween quartz and felspar mica schists for a few hundred yards south of the “fault”, und similiar quartaites ean he seen further to the south. On the other side of the Strathalbyn Anti- eline there is a eross-hedded micaceous quartzite in uw similar position below the Nuime Pyritic Formation. In 1956 Campana and Horwitz rejected the idea of the Nairme Fault and suggested that the boundary was an unconformity. They said that the relations ° Owing to the fact thal the Adelaide System beds gn the eastern side of the Mt. Lofty flanves wre of markedly differcnt sedimentary facies from those of the type loculities on the western side, the division into Torrensian, Startiun and Marinean mivst be jentative only. fn this paper we have followed the cutrent usage of Spriga et al. (1951, 1954). We lave extended thiy usage by considering all the beds between the Startiin aul Kanmantoa to be Miiringan. KANMANTOO GROUP 69 ebserved between the Adelaide System and the Kanmantoo Group were due to “erosion preceding the transgression of the Kanmantuo beds”, They also inferred that the Adelaide System was folded before the erosion and subse- quent transuression. In the Macclesfield Syncline the Adelaide System beds pass up through the Macclesfield Quartzite, the Macclesfield Marble and Nairne Pyzritic Formation to the greywackes of the Kanmantoo Group. ‘here is au evidenee at all of angular unconformity or any interruption in the sequenve of sedimentation. Furthermore, it is apparent that the Adelaide System heds and the Kanmantuo Group have been folded as a single unit, Our mapping lias not revenled any evidence for a sedimentary break of any kind from Paris Creek to Harrogate. North uf Harrogate White and Thatcher (1957) suggested conformity between the Nairne Pyritic Formation and the beds below. South of Paris Creek. however, Campana and Horwitz (1956) state that the Kaumantoo Group overlies suecessively older rocks mmtil at Yan- kalilla it lies on the Archaean, This is beyond the limits of our mapping, although we have seen the sections in several places. Mawson (1939) fas recorded rocks which are slightly metamorphosed greywacke, similur in appearance to the rocks of the Kan- mantoo Group, immediately above the quartzites of the Mt. Magnificent Ridge (base of Sturtian Series), Mawson records about 2500 feet of Adelaide System rocks below the topmost of the Mt. Magnificent Quartzites, In the Grey Spur area further south Forbes (1957) records about 4000 Feet of shale and quartzites overlain by greywackes and micacecus arkases. In the Mt. Magnificent area the qnartzites of the Mt. Magnificent Ridge ppear to be continuous with quartzites which Sprigg and Wilson (1954) place at the base af the Sturtian Series. At Grey Spur there is no evidence upon which te correlate the various rock types but the thicknesses measured suggest that the transition from the Adelaide System rocks tu “Kanmantoo-type” rocks ocurred at roughly the same time as at Mt. Magnificent. ft is clear that in the Mt, Muyirificent avea greywackes and impure arkoses appear to be vonformably wpon Adelaide System rocks of the Sturtian Series whereas in the Mt. Barker area the vreywackes and impure arkoses do not appear unlil high in the Marinoan Series, There are three possible explanations for the superposition of “Kummantoo- type” rocks on the Sturtian Series at Mt. Magnificent. 1. Campana und Ilorwitz (1956) have suggested erasiun of the upper part of the Sturtian and of the Marinoan and subsequent deposition of Kanmantue, They also postulate folding of Adelaide System rocks during this interval, 2, Non-deposition during Upper Adelaidean time and subsequent doposition of Kanmanteo greywackes on ta Sturtian beds. 3. Deposition of greywackes in the Mt. Mugnifcent area during Adelaidean jime while normal Adelaide System sediments were being deposited further to the north. Our mapping has shown that in the region between Harrogate and Paris Creek the Adelaide System and Kuuntautor rocks have folded as a single unit and we enald find no evidence for an carlier periud of folding involving only the Adelaide System. The Adelaide System beds are folded in the McIlarg Greek urca south Of Paris Creek but the Kanmantoo beds are folded also. Fault- ing and lack of outcrops have obscured the detail in this area, but no unequivocal evidence For unt unconformity can be seen. 70 A. W. KLEEMAN ane B, J) SKINNER In the absence of Fossils and marker horizons, it is impossible to decide the second and third hypothesis, but we feel that they explain the observed fucts hetter than the hypothesis invulving uplift, folding and erosion of the Adelaide System rocks as suggested by Campana and Horwitz. THE BASE OF THE KANMANTOO GROUP The definition of the base of the Kanmantoo Group in our area rests upon the correlation of the Macclesfield Marble with the Delamere Marble and there- fore with the Archeocyatha Marble. If we accept that correlation the base of the Kanmantoo would lie at some indefinite horizon just above the Marble. The Marble, however, does not outerop well and has not been located east of Macclesfield. It is probably only of limited extent and lenses ont before reach- ing the east side of the Macclesfield Syncline, although a small luns af a cale- silicate rock has been found below the Nairne Pyritic Formation ip the eastern limb of the Macclesfield Syneline. From our mapping it is clear that the lowest member of the Nairne Pyritic Formation must be very clase to the base of the Kanmantoo Group in the Macclesfield region. The lowest pyvitic band lies about 1200 = 200 feet above the Macclesfield quartzite on the castern limb, whilst the Macclesfield marble lies about 1000 fect above the quartzite on the western limb, A further justification for making the Nairme Pyritic Formation the base af the Kanmantoo Group is that it obviously marks a boundary between two contrasting but conformable series of sediments, Below the pyritie beds are massive cross-bedded quartzites und arkoses, greywackes, shales, marbles and vale-silicutes. Above the pyritic beds arc a vast thickness of very fine-grained greywackes and sjltstones with minor shale bands. We do not consider that thy pyritic heds mark a break in sedimentation. CONCLUSIONS This paper presents the results of mapping of the Kanmantoo Group rocks in the area araund Kanmantoo township, It shows that these rocks rest con- formably above the rocks mapped as Adelaide System, The mapping suggests that the Macclesfield marble and quartzite are two lenticular beds of limited exten( and quite useless as marker horizons. The correlation of the quartzite of Mt. Barker Summit with the Macclesfield quartzite, as suggested by the mapping of the Echunga Sheet, is incorrect. It is more probable that the Mt. Barker quartzite represents a lens of pure quartzite in a dominantly arkosic and greywacke series. The contact between the Adelaide System and the Kanmantoo Group seems to be one of definition on the Echunga Sheet. The earlier concept of a faulted contact is disproven by the mapping of marker horizons and structural features aeross the line of the supposed fault. The later suggestion of u transeressivn of the Kanmantoa Group over the Adelaide System can neither he proved nor dis- preved in this area. In the sequence of sediments we have examined there is certainly no reason to believe that a break in sedimentation has occurred. We propose that the base of the Naime Pyritic Horizon be defined as the base of the Kanmantoo Group in this area, and until further evidence ean be found, the beds immediately belaw the Nairne Pyritic Formation be considered as Marinoun. The base of the Marinoan has not been considered. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Expenses in connection with this work were defrayed from the University Research Grant, We are indebted tu Mr. KR. Offler for assistance with field work KANMANTOO GROUP 71 and to Mr. B. P. Webb and Mr. B. P. Thomson of the Geological Survey for helpful discussions. REFERENCES CGameana, B., 1955. The Structure of the Eastern Sonth Australian Range; The Mt. Loalty- Olary Arc, Jour. Geol. Soc, Aust., 2, pp. 47-61, Caarpeana, B., and. Horwitz, R., 1956. The Kanmantoo Group of South Australia considered as a transgressive sequence, Aust, Jour. Sci., 18. pp. 125-9. Dicxtnson, S. B., 1943, The Structural Control of Ore-Deposition in some South Australian Copper Fields, Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Bull. No. 20, Forues, B. G., 1957. The Stratigraphic Succession Eust of Grey Spur, South Australia, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 80, pp. 59-66. Grasso, R., and MeManvs, J. B,, 1954, The Geology of the Callington Arca. Thesis for Honours B,Sc., University of Adelaide (unpublished), Howenrm, W., 1929. The Ceology of South Australia, 2nd ed., Adelaide. Kieeman, A. W., and Ware, A. J. R., 1956. ‘The Structural Geology of Portion of the Eastern Mt, Lofty Ranges, Jour. Geol. Soc. Aust., 3, pp. 17-31, Mawson, D., 1939. The First Stage of the Adelaide System as illustrated at Mt. Magnificent, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 63, pp, 69-78. Sxmne_p, B. f., 1958. The Geology and Metamorphism of the Naime Pyritic Formation —a Sedimentary Sulfide Deposit in South Australia, Economic Geology (in press). Sprice, R. G., 1942. Tho Coology of the Eden-Moana Fault Block, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 66, pp. 185-214, Spricc, R. C., 1946. Reconnaissance Geological Survey of Portion of the Western Escarp- ment of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, Trans. Roy. Soc, §, Aust., 70, pp. 313-347. Spricc, R. C,, and Campana, B., 1953. The Age and Facies of the Kanmantoo Group, ae ee Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island, Sonth Australia, Aust, Jour. Sei, 16, pp. 12-14, Senicc, R. C., and Wirrrie, A. W. G., and Campana, B., 1951, Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Adelaide, Sprics, R. C., and Wison, R. B., 1954. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Echunga. Weare, A. J. R., 1956. The Granites and Associated Metamorphic Rocks of Palmer, South Australia, Thesis for Ph.D., University of London. Wate, A. J. R., and Tuatcner, D., 1957. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Mannum, Wootnoucu, W. G., 1908. Notes on the Geology of the Mt. Lofty Ranges, ChieHy the Portion East of the Onkaparinga River, Trans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 32, pp. 121-137. NOTES ON WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES, NO. 1 BY T. D. SCOTT Summary Seven new species from North Western Australia are described and figured. New localities and ranges of distribution are given for seventeen Western Australian fishes. Sixteen further species are recorded as new records for that State, and eight species, one of which is figured, are listed as new records for Australia. Polynemus specularis De Vis is considered to be a synonym of Polynemus multirudiutus Gunther. NOTES ON WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES, No. 1 by T. D. Scorr [read 12 June 1958] SUMMARY Seven new species from North Western Australia are described and figured. New localities and ranges of distribution are given for seventeen Western Australian fishes. Sixteen further species are recorded. as new records for that State, and eight species, onc of which is figured, are listed as new records for Anstralia. Polynemus specularig De Vis is considered to he a synonym of Polynemus multiradiqtus Gunther. INTRODUCTION During the past five years the Underwater Spearfishermen’s Association of Wester Australia has sent to the South Australian Museum for identification, a collection of about 500 onshore and reef-living fishes from that State. These fishes, collected by means of the spear-gun, or multi-pronged hand spear, were preserved in formalin, packed in 4-gallon collecting drums, and forwarded ta the Museum. The accompanying notes on the specimens provided useful in- formation as to the distribution, abundance and habitats of these fishes. In many cases, coloured photugraphs were taken at the time of capture of the specimens, and these have proyided useful records of life colouration. This is the first of a series of papers dealing with the fishes of Western Australia; T wish to express my thanks to the Underwater Spearfishermen’s As- sociation of Western Australia and in particular to Mr. F. Barrett-Lennard for his valuable assistance in the collecting of many of these specimens, and for the most useful notes and colour photographs which he has placed at my disposal, Family SYNODONTIDAE Genus Saurnma Cuy, and Val., 1849 Saurida tumbil (Bloch) Sulyna tuinbil Bloch, 1795, Nat. Ausl. Fische, 9, p. 112. Two specimens measuring 155 mm. and 170 mm. total length were taken at Point Samson, August, 1957, and Exmouth Gulf, November, 1954, respectively. Add area 5 tu Whitley's (1948, p. 13) distribution of this species in Western Australia, Family MUGILIDAE Genus Liza Jordan and Swain, 1884 Liza vaigiensis (Quoy and Gaimard) Mugil vaigiensis Quoy and Gaimard, 1824, Voy. Uranie Physic,, p. 337, pl. 59, fig. 2. A small specimen measuring 108 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam- son, December, 1957, Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 17) distribution of this species in Western Australia. Trans, Rey, Sac, 'S, Aust, (1959), Vol. 82. 74 T D. SCOTT Family POLYNEMIDAE Genus Potyxemus Linnacus, 1758 Polynemus multiradiatus Gunther Polyneneus multiradiatus Gunther, 1860, Cat. Fish. Brit, Mus., 2, p, 324. Palynemus specularis De Vis, 1883, Proc, Linn. ‘Sac, N.S.W., 8 (2), p. 285. A small specimen measuring 145 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam- son, August, 1957. This species was first recorded from Western Australia by Whitley (1952-53, p. 29) as Polydactylus specularis (De Vis). The above synonymy of P. specularis De Vis is suggested. My thanks to Mr. T. C. Marshall for material from the collection of the Department of Harbours and Marine, Queensland, Family KPINEPHELIDAE Genus Evineruiius Bloch, 1793 Epinephelus homosinensis Whitley Epinephelus homasinensis Whitley, 1944, Austr. Zool., 10 (3), p. 267. A specimen meusuring 315 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, August, 1957. Previously “recorded anly from the Ceraldton-Abrolhos region, Wester Australia, where it is known as the “Chinaman God”, Add areas 4 and 5 to Whitley's (1945, p. 18) distribution of this species in Western Australia, Genus Puecrrorpomus Cuvier, 1817 | Plectropomus maculatus (Bloch) Bodianus maculatus Bloch, 1790, Nat. Ausl. Fische, 4, p. 48. A specimen measuring 258 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955. Add area 5 to Whitley's (1948, p. 18) distribution of this species in Western Australia. Family PSEUDOCHROMIDAR Key ro tur PsrupocHuRoMIDAE OF WESTERN AUSTRALIA !. Dorsal spines more than 4 sei ae Stigmatonotus australis Dorsal spines less than 4 " 5 * a. 2 2. Dorsal spines 2, palatines toothless... se ste ie a 8 Dorsal spines 3, palatines with teeth . ae tains win A 3, Ventral fins close together; a large pink spot on side of Badly! Dampieria ignita sp. nov. Ventrals separated by a scaly prio hody with 16 to 17 dark longi- tudinal lines __.... . . itt Dampieria lineata 4. All dorsal and anal rays beached ue Leptochromis tapeinosoma wilsoni Some anterior dorsal rays simple, the posterior rays branched _..... sine “EF 5, Teeth of vomer and palatines in 4 or 5 rows: lateral line scales BOE BE) ee Pseudochromis (Assiculus) punctatus Teeth of vomer and palatines in a single raw; lateral line scales 30 + 8-10 awe _. Pseudochromis (Devisina) fuscus Genns DamprerniA Castelnau, 1875 Dampieria lineata Castelnau Dampteria lineata Castelnau, 1875, Res. Fish. Austt., p, 30, A specimen measuring 166 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955. Add area 5 ta Whitley's (1948, p, 18) distribution of this species in Western Australia. ~4 is WESTENN AUSTRALIAN FISHES Damipieria ignite sp, 110¥. Dies, IT Adiil4d Vii. C17. Br.é. Tat. dine 87 + 21-23. Length of head 48 mm. (4:1), greatest depth of budv 45 (4-4), greatest width of body 23 (8-6) im the total length 198 mm. Height of head 1-2 in its length, Lye 10 (1-3) in the snout, and 0°7 in the convex interorbital space. Snont 13 (3+7) i the head. Cleft of muuth very eblique, curved downward posteriwely, almost reaching (he ventral profile, terminating below the anterior border of the eye, Tower jaw louver than upper. Teeth in upper jaw iv several series. the eater row Mig, 1 —Dempierta fynite sp. nov. xR), enlarged, Twu pairs of canines in front, the outer pair larger, slightly carved, Teeth in lower jaw uniserial laterally, 2 pairs of enlarged canines in front, of esjual size, a patel of smaller teeth behind each pair. Palatines withuut teeth, vumer with a single row of smull conical tecth, Ten rows of cyeloid scales om the cheek. the upper scales the largest Operculum with six to seven rows of Lirger scales. Freoperculum entire, oper- ealum unarmed. Head scales beginning between eyes, small and cycloid. Rest of hody covered with ctenoid scales of mutlerate size, forming a low basal sheath on the vertical fius. Lateral line interrupted belaw the twenticth dorsal ray, the upper part separated from the lower by five rows of scales. Lateral line seales with a short simple tube. Dorsal long, originating ubove hindborder of operculum, consisting nf 2 weak spines and 25 rays, the posterior rays prolonged. Anal with 3 strouger spines, the third the longest, but not equal to the eye dianreter. Veutrals close (ngether, the third ray prodneed. Pectoral of moderate size. its length 1-5 in the head, Caudal fin younded, Colour in dleohol.—Body colonred a dark hrawn, with some traces of darker longitudinal bands as in lineata. A large whitish oval pateh (which is pink in life) on the sides, behind the pectoral fin, extending downwards to the ventral protile, upward to the fourth row of scales below the lateral line, and hack- wird ulmost ti the beginning of the lower lateral line. Dorsal and anal fins with dark spots, anteriorhy, parallel dark bands posteriorly, these bands extend- ing on to the caudal fin, 76 TY. D, SCOTT Described from a specimen 198 mm. total length, taken Sharks Bay, May, 1954. Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No. F2997, Further specimens measuring 119 mm., 130 mm., and 156 mm. total Jength were taken at Pomt Samson, December, 1957. Affinities. —Differs from D, lineata in body proportions, in colouration, in the more posterior insertion of the anal fm, and in the separation of the ventrals. In D, ignita, the ventrals are very close together; D. lineata has the ventrals more widely separated, and there is a scaly process between their bases. Family TERAPONTIDAE Genus Evruernaron Fowler, 1904 Eutherapon theraps (Cuv. and Val.) Therapon theraps Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1829, Hist. Nat, Poiss., 3, p. 129, pl. 53. A specimen measuring 138 mm. total Jength was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955. This species was first recorded from Western Australia as Ther- apon rubricatus Richardson, 1842, and Whitley (1948, p. 19) does not indicate its distribution in Western Australia, except “N.W. Australia”, Add area 5 to Whitley’s distribution of this species in Western Australia, Family CARANGIDAE Genus Caranx Lacepede, 1802. Caranx bucculentus Alleyne and Macleay Haring bupeylptiaa Alleyne and Macloay, 1877, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S, Wales, 1 (4), p. 326, pl. U, fig. 1. A specimen measuring 124 mm. total Jength was taken at Broome, June, 1955. Dorsal fin iviiisi,19. Anal fin iii,16, The straight part of the lateral line commences helow the 6th dorsal spine, and bears 37 seutes. The five broad dark cross-bars from the back to the middle of the sides, as noticed by McCulloch in a specimen 123 mm. in length, are apparent. A second record of this species for Western Australia. Genus Exacatss Bennett, 1835 Elagatis bipinnulatus (Quoy aud Gaimard) sexiole hipinnulata Quoy and Gaimard, 1825, Voy, Uranie Physic. (Zool.), 1, p. 363, pl. 61, go. A large specimen measuring 650 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam- son, August, 1957. A second record for Western Australia. Add area 5 to Whitley's (1948, p. 20) distribution of this species in Western Australia. In this specimen, the two detached anal spines characteristic of the Caran- gidae, have become obsolete with age. Family LUTIANIDAE Subfamily Luttantwar Genus Luriaxus Bloch, 1790 Lutianus russelli (Bleeker) Mesoprion russelli Bleeker, 1849, Verh, Bat, Gen., 22, Pere., p. 41. A small specimen measuring 160 mm, total length was taken at Exmouth Gulf, November, 1954. Above the lateral line there is a series of narrow bands, passing obliquely upwards and backwards to the dorsal profile. Below the lateral line, the specimen bears three horizontal wider bands, paralle] to the axis of the body. The black, oval, lateral blotch, measuring 13 mm, by 9 mm., is WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES 77 almost entirely above the lateral line, and is situated below the junction of tho posterior dorsal spines and anterior rays. A new record for Western Australia, Lutianus chrysotuenia (Bleeker) Mesoprion chrysetacnia Blocker, 18351, Nat. Tijdsch. Ned. Indie, 3, ya. 170, A specimen was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955. Add area 5 to Whit- ley’s (1945, p. 21) distribution of this species in Western Australia. Lutianus vitta (Quoy and Gaimard) Serranus vitta Quoy and Gaimard, 1824, Voy. Uranie Physic. (Zool.), p. 313, pl. 59, fig, 3. A smail specimen measuring 125 mm. total Jength was taken at Point Samson, August, 1957. Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 21) distribution of this species in Western Australia, Sub-lamily NemMiprentnat Genus Nemmrerus Swainson, 1839 Key 10 THR AUSTRALIAN SPECIES. or NEMIPTERUS 1. Lower jaw with canine teeth 9.00 aes a 2 Lower jaw without canines __ ser thos =. me = 4 2. Eleven rows of scales below lateral line; body with yellow bands N. taeniopterus Fourteen rows of scales below lateral line; body without bands. ~ 8 3. Lower jaw with six canines; colour uniform _- ioe TE N. rebustus Lower jaw with eight canines; colour brown above, silvery below N. sundanensis 4, Posterior dorsal spines longest _.. “jie > — N, theodorei Median dorsal spines longest _ . peo rig. @ Fe tee 5 5. Upper caudal lobe greatly produced _. vain toi ea N. aurifilurm Upper caudal lobe not produced 0 nite wi iy" Nips 6 6. Upper jaw with three pairs of canines, cate tage . N. upeneoides Upper jaw with one pair of canines... ote. N. samsonensis sp. nov. Nemipterus samsonensis sp. noy. Dx,9. PAG. Ajiii,7, Vib, C18. Br.6, Lat. line 49-50, Lat. trans, 3:11. Length of head 44 mm. (4-5), greatest depth of body 51 (4:0), greatest width of body 25 (8-0) in the total Iength 200 mm. Height of head 1-1 in its length. Eye 13 (1-2) in the snout and 0-8 in the tat interorbital space. Snout 15 (2-9) in the head. Body elongated, not very deep, rather compressed. Mouth of moderate size, horizontal, maxillary reaching ta posterior nostril. Jaws equal. Bands of small pointed teeth in both jaws, narrowing laterally, with the outer row enlarged. One pair of moderate canines in upper jaw, lower jaw with- out canines. Palate without tecth. Lips rather thick. Preoperculum rectangular, rounded at angle, smooth behind, Suborbital rather deep, more than halt vertical diameter of eye. Posterior angle very obtuse, the hindborder a straight line which when produced above reaches the origin of the dorsal fin, Naked limb of prcopereulum about half depth of scaly part. Body covered with moderate ctenoid scales. Nape, operculum and cheek scaly, rest of head naked. Three oblique rows of Jarue cycloid seales on cheek Tb YT DR. score below suborbital, leaving a naked linb below on preoperculum. Body svales vontinned to end of caudal fin. Lateral line compleke, not sharply bent. cou- sistinyy of unbranched oblique tubes. Ventral fins with an axillary process, Dorsal fin consisting uf ten slender spines, the middle spines the longest, Membrane between dorsal spines slightly emarginile. Posterior spitics styirtes Fig. 2—Nemipterns samaonenyts sp. TOV. (#8), than first says, Pectorals long, almost equal to head. Ventrals shorter, not reaching to vent. Anal spines slender, the first very short, the third Jongest, equal in length to diameter of eve. Anal cays longer than third spine. Candal fin deeply forked, consisting of eighteen principal rays. Pseudobranclhriae present. Colones in life--Body and head pinkish above, silvery below. A large dark patel on the operculuin. A roamed dark patch on body immediately behind lewd and below luteral line Fins pinkish, without any murkings- Described from a specimen 200 mm. tetal length, taken Point Sarmsem, November, 1954, Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, F2966. Genus Sco.opsis Cuvicr, 1917 Seolopsis bilineatus (Bloch) Anthias bilincatus: Bloch, 1793, Nat, Ausl. Pixehe 7p. 3. Two specimens measuring 195 mm, and 96 mm. total lenuth Were taken at Paint Samson, December, 1957- The adult and juvenile specimens exhibit a considerable difference in cul- oratiun and pattern. The colours in alcohol are us follows :— Adult, greenish above, breast silvery. sides yellow, Two greyish-silver stripes on sides, one arising immediately above the eye, the second from the upper part of the eye, passing hackwards and upwards towards the dorsal pratile, hut not reaching it. A third much broader stripe arises helow the eye, and passes upwards obliquely to. end below ther ast dorsal spine and the fitst soft ray, It is bordered above and below by a dark brown stripe. A black patel. covey's the membrune and distal parts of the last two dorsal spines und first Fever rays. Anal spines, first two aha rays and the membrane between them black, Other fins hyaline. In the juvenile, in addition to the three longitudinal stripes, there arises in the interorbital space a naremw stripe whieh passes back to the beginning of the dorsal fin. The three inferior stripes are all parallel and of approximately equal WESTERN AUSTRALIAN TISHES 79 width, passing back obliquely to the dorsal profile, the interspaves coloured dark brown. A black patch on the posterior part of the dorsal fin, as in adult. In addition, there is a Jarge black ocellus on the membrane between the first three dorsal spines. Anal fin black at the tip of the Jast spine and first two rays. Other tins hyaline, without any markings, A new record of this species for Austraha, Family GERRIDAE Genus Gesres Quoy and Gaimard, 1824 Gerres australis Castelnau Gerres australis Castelnau, 1875, Res. Fish. Austr. (Vict. Offic. Rec, Phila. Exhib.), p. 43. A specimen measuring 110 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955, Upper parts dark metallic blue, under parts silvery, the two colours sharply defined by a line passing above the orbit and through the middle of the caudal peduncle. There are 7 to & thin dark vertical bars on the sides, which become more obvious in alcohol. Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 21) distribution of this species in Western Australia. Family POMADASIDAE Genus Purctornyncaus Lacepede, 1502 Plectorhynchus chactodonoides Laccpede Plectarhynchus chaetodonaides Lacepede, 18038, Hist, Nat. Poiss., 3, p, 134. A specimen measuring 490 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955. An adult specimen in which the first and second dorsal fins and caudal fin are densely covered with large brown spots. Back, sides and upper pineal pedunele similarly spotted. Pectorals. anal and ventrals a uniform dark hrown, Weber and De Beaufort (1936, p. 414) record the maximum size of this species as 450 mm., but the specimen from Point Samson measured 490 mm., total length. A new record of this species for Australia. Plectorhynchus ordinalis sp. nov, D.xii,16. PAT. Adi? Vas. C17, Br.7. Lat. line 58-60. Lat. trans. 23 : 26-30. Length of head 50 mm. (4-0), greatest depth of body 66 (3-0), greatest width of body 21 (9-4) in the total length 194 mm. Height of head 1-0 in its length. Eye 12 (1-7) in the snout and 1-0 in the convex interorbital space. Snout 20 (2+5) in the head. Body rather deep, somewhat compressed. Mouth small, slightly oblique, scarcely protractile. Maxillary reaching to below posterior nostril. Lips thick. Both jaws with several rows of small conical teeth, the outer row in hoth jaws enlarged. No canines, Palatines and yomer toothless, Prooperculum rectangular, sorrated posteriorly. Body and head covered with small ctenoid scales, with the exception of the snout, lips and chin, Inter- orbital scales extending forward to anterior nostril. Soft dorsal and anal fins with a scaly sheath. Ventral fins with an axillary process. A row of six pores on the chin, behind lower lip, Lateral line complete, gently curved throughout its length, each scale with a simple oblique tube. Body scales above lateral line much smaller than those below. at T. DB. SCOTT Dersal fin with 12 strong spines, the third and fourth spines the longest, length 18 mm. Spines decreasing gently in length posteriorly, the last spine not much shorter than the first ray. Pectorals of moderate length, equal to length of ventrals. Ventral fins pointed, reaching tu vent. First anal spine aes second spine the longest, length equal to greatest body width, Caudal in truncate. , a NF Fig. 3.—Pleetorhynehas ordinalin sp. nov. (* %)- Colours in life—Body coloured blue-grey above, white below, Eight to nine bright yellow longitudinal bands on the head, extending on to the body, These bands remain distinct on the lower half of the heady, but become broken up into a series of dots and short bands on the upper half. Twa distinct rows ol similarly coloured spots along the entire length of the dorsal kn, All other fins colonred a transparent light yellow. Described from a specimen 198 mm. total length, taken Shacks Bay, May. 1954. Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. Nu. F3006. Affinities —Similar te chrysotacnia Bleeker in bedy proportions and coloura- tion, but differs in the dorsal fin counts (12 spines and 16 rays, compared with 13 spines and 19-20 rays in chrysolacni), and in seale counts. Family MULLIDAE Geotis Bansurensus Whitley, L931 Barbupeneus siguatus (Gunther) Upenvus signatus Gunther, 1887, Ann, Mag. Nat. Hist. (3), 20, p. 59, Two specimens measuring 180 mm, aud 211 mm. total length were taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. A new record of this species for Western Australia, Family LETHRINIDAE Genus LeTnarnicnticys Jordan and Thompson, 1912 Lethrinichthys nematacanthus (Bleeker) Lethrinus nemutucaitthus Bleeker, 1854, Nat. Tidjdschr. Ned, Trl, 6, p, 409, A small specirnen measuring 174 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam- son, August, 1957, Add area 5 to Whitley's (1845, p. 22) distribution of this species in Western Australia; WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES &1 Lethrinichthys, erected as a sub-genus by Jordan and Thompson, has been regarded by previous authors (MeCulloch, 1929: Weber and de Beaufort, 1936) as a synonym of Lethrinus. However, Whitley (loc. cit.) has raised the sub- genus to generic status, the two genera being separated by the character of the lateral teeth. ( Family SPARIDAE Genus Myiio Lacepede, 1802 Mylio latus (Houttuyn) Sparus tutus Honttuyn, 1782, Haarlem. Verh. Holi. Maatsch. Wet. 20 (2), p. 322. D.xi12, P65 Adio Vas. C17. Lat. line 50. = Lat. trans. 4:11. A young specimen measuring 165 mm. standard length was taken at Point Sumson, August, 1955. Six curved incisors in each jaw. Upper jaw with 4 rows of molars on each side, the outer row considerably fattened laterally. Lower jaw with 3 rows of molars, the outer series not much flattened. A small dark blotch at the origin of the lateral line, and a dark hind border to the operculum, No black spot in axil of pectoral. Dorsal fins dusky, ventrals and anal without markings, A narrow dark border to the caudal fin. Family PEMPHERIDAE Genus Pempneris Cuvier, 1829 Pempheris compressa (Shaw) Sparus compressa White, 1790, Voy. N.S. Wales, p. 267, pl. 12, fig. 2. Ex Shaw MS. ‘Iwo specimens measuring 114 mm. and 131 mm, total length were taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. This species was recorded from Western Australia by McCulloch (1929, p, 234), hut was omitted from Whitley’s (1948) list of the fishes of Western Australia. Family CHAETODONTIDAE Genus Mecarrotopon Guichengt, 1848 Megaprotodon strigangulus (Gmelin) Chaetodon strigangulus Gmelin, 1788, Syst. Nat. ed. 13, p. 1269, Two specimens measuring 145 mm, and 147 mm. total length were taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. A new record of this species for Australia. Genus AnisocHaETonon Klunzinger, 1884 Anisochaetodon lineolatus (Cuy, and Val.) Chaetodan lineolatus Cryier and Valenciennes, 1831, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 7, p. 40. A small specimen measuring 145 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam- son, December, 1957. A new record of this species for Western Australia. Genus CHaEronon Linnacus, 1758 Chaetodon lunula (Lacepede) Poracentrus linula Lacepede, 1802, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 4, p. 307. Two specimens measuring 185 mm, and 190 mm. total length were taken at Point Samson, Deeember, 1957. A new record of this species fur Western Australia. 82 T. D. SCOTT Genus Euxputeors Fraser-Brunner, 1934 Euxiphipops sexstriatus (Cav. and Val.) Tolacanthus sexstriatus Cav. and Vul., 1831, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 7, 0, 194. Previous Australasian recurds: Cape Grenville, Queensland (AJleyne and Macleay, 1877, p. 277); Port Darwin, N.T. (Macleay, 1878, p. 352); Port Moresby (Macleay, 1853, p. 944): Darnley Is. (Ogilby, 1915, p. 105); Low Is., Queensland (Whitley, 1932, p. 288). A specimen measuring 265 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955, A new record for W.A., and the most southerly record for this species to date. Genus Heniocuus Cuvier, 1817 Heniochus acuminatus (Linnaeus) Chaetadan ucuninatus Linnacus, 1758, Syst. Nat., 10, p, 272, Previous Australasian records; Port Darwin and Port Fissington (Macleay, 1861, p. 94): Hood Bay, New Guinea (Macleay, 1884, p. 263), Cape Byron Light, N.S, Wales (McCulloch, 1916, p. 193); northern N.S. Wales (McCulloch, 1922, p. SL). A specimen measuring 155 mm, total length was taken at Sharks Bay, May. 1954. A new record for Western Australia, Gerius Cuarrovon Linnacus, 1758 Chactodon aureofasciatus Macleay Chaetndon aurevfasciatus Macleay, 1878, Proc. Linn. Boc, N’S, Wales, 2 (4); p. 351, pl. 8, fig. 3. D.ri23. Aiii,19. Lat. line 35-36. Lat. trans 13 ; 23-24. Length of head 28 mm, (4-2), wreatest depth of body 88 (1-4), greatest width of body 15 (7-9) in the total length 118 mm. Height of head 0-4 in its length. Eye 9 (0-8) in the snout and 1-2 in the convex interorbital space, Snout 7 (4-0) in the head. Depth of body equal to standard body length. Depth of caudal peduncle 11, equal to interorhital space. A specimen measuring 118 mm, total length was taken at Point Samson, August, 1955, This specimen has the two bands across the caudal peduncle as scen by Macleay in the juveniles of this species. A new record for Western Australia. Family AMPHACANTHIDAE Genus Ampnacantueus Bloch and Schneider, 1801 ’ Amphacanthus vermiculatus Cuv. and Val. Amphucanthus vermiculatus ‘Cuvier and Valenciernes, 1835, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 10, p. 126. A specimen measuring 293 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, December, 1937. A new record of this species for Western Australia. Amphacanthus chrysospilos Bleeker Amphacanthus chrysospilas Bleeker, 1852, Nat. ‘Vijdschr. Ned. Indie, 3, p. 66. A specimen measuring 250 mm. in length (to candal fork) was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. A new record of this species for Western Australia. Amphacanthus doliatus Cuy. and Val. Amphacanthus doliatus Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1835, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 10, p. 132. A specimen measuring 184 mm. in length (to caudal fork) was taken at Point Samsan, December, 1957. A new record of this species for Western Australia. WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES 83 Family TEUTHIDAE Genus Teututs Linnaeus, 1766 Teuthis glaucopareius (Cuvier) Acanthurus glaucopareius Cuvier, 1829, Regne Auim. ed. 2 (2), p. 224. A specimen measuring 152 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. A new record of this species. for Australia. Teuthis triostegus (Linnaeus) Chaetodon triostegus Linnucns, 1758, Syst. Nat, ed. 10, p. 274. A specimen measuring 185 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p, 24) distribution of this species in Western Australia, Family ACANTHURIDAE Genus Naso Lacepede, 1802 Naso unicornis (Forskal) Chactodon inieornis Torskal, 1775, Deser. Ant, p. G3, A specimen measuring 335 mm. total length (excluding caudal filaments) was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. Body coloured a uniform dark brown. Dorsal fin with narrow, dark longi- tudinal bands. The horn on the forehead is very well developed in this specimen. A new record of this speeies for Western Australia. Naso lituratus (Bloch aud Schn.) Acanthurus lityratus Bloch und Schneider, 180), Syst. Ichth., p, 216, A specimen measuring 256 mm. total length (excluding eandal filaments) was tiken at Point Samson, December, 1937. Body coloured a uniform dark grey. The two bony spines on each side of the caudal peduncle surrounded by a yellow oval spot. A thin yellow band passing forwards below the cye and thence downwards to behind the angle of the mouth. Lower lip light coloured. Dorsal fin black, bordered by a broad cream hand, followed by very thin black band, Anal fin bordered by a similar black band, otherwise dark grey. Pectorals black, ventrals grey. Caudal bordered by a broad white band. A new record of this species for Australia. Genus Avanriunus Forskal, 1775 Acanthurus doreensis Cuv. and Val. Acanthurus doréensts Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1835, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 10, p. 220. A specimen nieasuring 220 min, (length to caudal fork) was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. Jolours: Body, dorsal, ventral and anal fins a uniform dark brown. Pectoral fin brownish at base, ils upper distal part yellow. A narrow white posterior border to the caudal fin. A new record of this species for Australia, Family ZANCLIDAE Genus Zancuus Cuy, and Val., 1631 Zanclus canescens (Linnacus) Chaetodon canescens Linnaeus, 1758, Syst. Nat., ed. 10, p. 272. Two juvenile specimens measuring 119 mm. and 140 mm. total length were taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. A new record of this species for Western Australia. aa T D. scOoTT Family POMACENTRIDAE Genus Giyruisopon Lacepede, 1802 Glyphisodon coelestinus Cuv., & Val. Glyphisodim evalestinus Cuvier and Valenciennes, (830, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 5, p. 464, pl. 135, A specimen meusuring 115 mm, total Iength was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. A new reeord of this species for Western Australia. Genus Cruromis Cuvier, 1515 Chromis cinerascens (Cuyv, and Val.) Heliases cineruscens Cuvier and Vatencicunes, 1830, Hist. Nat, Poiss., 5, p. 495. Two specimens measnring 104 mm. and 115 mm. total length were taken at Point Samson, December, 1957, A new record of this species for Australia. Family CORIDAE Genus Cretmio Lacepede, 1802 Cheilio incrmis (Forskal) Labrus inermis Forskal, 1775, Deser. Anim., p. 34. A specimen measuring 202 mm, total length was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957, A new record of tliis species for Western Australia. Genus THALAssomMA Swainson, 1839 Thalassoma septemtasciata sp. nov. Dwiii,13. PIS. Adil. Vi. C14. Lat. line 45-46. Lat. trans. 4: 16. Fig. 4.—Thalussoma sentemfasciata sp. nov. (> %)- length, Eye 10 (2-1) in the snout and 1-3 in the convex interorbital space. Snout 13 (4-3) in the head. Mouth sali, horizontal, not reaching anterior border of eye. Lips very thick. Premaxilla only slightly protractile. Teeth pointed, in a single series in WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES 85 cach jaw, decreasing in size posteriorly. Two moderate canines in cach jaw, Head naked, with the exception of a few scales on the upper part of the opercle, About ten small scales before the dorsal. Body cavered with moderate sized eyeloid scales, which form a basal sheuth on the dorsal and anal fins. Lateral line following the dorsal profile for the greater part of its length, sharply deflected below the tenth dorsal ray. Dorsal spines short and slender, the first very short, the last spine the longest, but not as long as the rays, Origin of anal slightly behind first dorsal ray. First anal spine very small, third longest, equal to diameter 6f eye, Pectorals equal to head without snout, the second and third rays the longest, decreasing unilormly, the shortest ray one-fourth of the longest. First ray of ventrals produced, reaching anus. Caudal rounded. Colour in life —Body colour light blue, with seven darker bhie bands, the width of the bands much greater than the interspaces. The first band arises in front of the dorsal fin, and runs to the base of the pectoral. The second and third arise below the spinous dorsal, and pass obliquely across the body, The fourth to sixth arise on the middle of the soft dorsal membrane and run obliquely In the base of the anal. The seventh: crosses the broad caudal peduncle. Caudal fin bluish, with light spots, Dorsal fin uniform bluish, with a narrow light burder to the soft part. Anal blue with light streaks, a broad light border the entire length of the fin, The wpper five rays of the pectoral dark blue, the lower part lightish, a broad dark band covering the distal part of the fin above, hecom- ing obscure below, Head without any distinct markings, dark bluish. Described from i specimen 214 mm. total length, taken Sharks Bay, May, 1954. Type in South Australian Museum, Rey. No. F2984. MBatertal exaumined.—Two specimens, measuring 202 and 214 mm, total éngth, Affinities.Similar to T. hardwicki (Bennett) in body proportions and band- ing on body, but differing in colouration, absence of bands on head and much ahaa number of scales in lateral line (45-46, compared with 27-98 in hard- mickt). Genus ANAmpses (Cuvier) Quoy and Gainward, 1824 Anampses pterophthalmus Bleeker Anampses pterophthabne, Bleeker, 1857, Acta, Soc, Se. Indo-Neerl, 2) p, BL, Dixl2, PQ, Aaiil2 Wa. Cid. Lat. line 52, Lat. trans. 9; 19, A specimen measuring 119 mm. total length was taken at Sharks Bay, May, 1954. A new record vf this species for Australia, Length of head 34 mm. (3°5), greatest depth of body 30 (4:0), greatest width of body 13 (9-1) m the total length 119 mm. Height of head 1-4 in its length, Eye 6 (1-8) in the snout and 1-5 in the convex interorbital space, Snout 11 (3-0) in the head. Mouth small, slightly oblique. Maxillary not reaching to below anteriur acsteil, Lips thick. A single series of very small teeth in the jaws. Upper and lower jaw with two prominent incisors, directed Forwards, compressed, with cutting edges. No posterior canines. Body somewhat compressed, covered with small cycloid scales, those on hack and thorax much smallec than those of sides. Head naked, except for the small pre-dorsal scales beginning behind the eye. Vertical fins without a basal sealy sheath, About fourteen pre-dorsal scales, very minute, most of which are embedded in the skin. Lateral line continuous, but sharply deflected helaw bed DD. SCOTT posteriar part of soft dursul tin, About 34 to 35 scales in its upper part, 11 seales in the lower part. Lateral line canals short and ujbranched. Dursal spines short and slender, the last spine 8-5 mm., 4-0 in the head, The lomgest ray 11 mm, equal ta the length of the snout, Pectoral fins short, length 2-0 in the head. Ventvals very short, length 2-8 in the head. Third Fig. S—Anampses plerophthalmus Bleeker (= %) anal spine longest, length 8 mm., 4-2 in the head, Caudal mmnded. Caudal pedunele compressed, rather deep, depth, 7-5 in the total length Coleur in. ife.—Body colour dark brown. Median fins all dark brown, caudal bordered by a narrow white band on He hind margin. A large black white- edged acellus on the posterior dorsal and anal rays. Pectoral fins light yellow. Anampses lennardi sp. nev, Dix lS P12, AJjile Vis, C14. Lat, line 29. Liat. trans. 4: & Length of head 54 mm, (3-7), greatest depth of bady 61 (3-3), greatest width of body 26 (7-4) in the total length 203 mm. Height of head 1-0 in its length, Eye 7-5 (2-5) in the snout and 1:9 in the strongly convex interurbital space. Snout 19 (2+8) in the head. Mauth very small, rather oblique. Maxillary not reaching to helow anteriur nostril, Lips thick, upper lip much thicker than lower, A single series of minute tecth in the jaws. Both jaws with a pair of prominent anterior incisors, directed forwards, compressed and with cutting edges. No posterior canines. Bady oblong, compressed, covercd with large cycloid scales, those _be- fore the dorsal and on the breast very smull and embedded in the skin. Leed naked, except for the small pateh of pre-dorsal scales beginning behind the eve. Vertics] fins without a basal scaly sheath. Lateral line continuous, sharply deflected belaw posterior part of soft dorsal fin, Alout 19 seales in upper part of lateral line, 8 in lower part. Eaeli scale with a rather Jong wn branched cinal. Dorsal spines very slender and dexible, gradually increasing in length pos- terfimly, the last spine 14 mm,, 2°8 in the head. Pectoral fins short and rounded, length 1-5 in the head. Wirst ray of ventral fins somewhat produced, reachin past vent. Anal spines slender, the third longest, length 14 mm. 3-9 in the head. Caudal margin rounded, caudal peduncle short and deep, its depth 28 mm, 7-2 in the total length, WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES * Colour in life—Head, body and fins a bright yellow, with blue markings ae figured, Three broad blue bars on the head, continued on to the middle uf the body, ‘Uwo of these bars cross the snout, and a further bar crosses the nape. Posterior part of body with blue bars and spots. Dorsal fin with a thin blue marginal band, below which is a series of round blue spots, on the mem- brane between the spines and rays, Membrane bluc between bases of spines and cays. Pectoral fin plain yellow. Anal with thin blne hands as fi ured, Spine and first ray of ventral fin coloured biue, rest of fin yellow. Caudal fin yollow, with a thin bic band on the first and last ray. Fig. 6—Ananpses lennarei sp. nov. (4%), Deseribed from u male specimen 203 mm. total length taken at Point Sumson, December, L957. Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, F024. Matertal examined —Two specimens measuring 203 mm. and 189 mm. total length, Affinities. Similar to A, meleugrides Cuv. and Val. in meristic fealures but differine, in body proportions and colouration, The ventral fin is much more produced in Jennardi, the venteals of mefeagrides being shorter than the pectovals. Genus Srevmoyents Gunther, 1861 Stethojulis rubromacula sp. nov. Dixil, P13. Aidill VAS. Cla, Lal. line 25-29, Lat. trans. 2:7, Length of head 32 mm. (3'8), greatest depth of body 34 (3-6), greatest width of body 17 (7-2) in the total length 122 mm, Height of head equal to its length. Eye 5 (2-6) in the snout and 1-6 in the convex interorlitil space. Snout 13 (2+5) in the head. Mouth very small, oblique. Maxillary not reaching to below anteriar nosteil ‘Teeth small, incisifurm, in a single series in both jaws. No anterior canines, but a small posterior canine at corner of mouth, Lips rather thick. Presnaxilla slightly protractile, Head naked, except for a few small scales embedded in the skin, beginning mid-way between the eye and upper augle of the operculum. Five to six pre dorsal scales. 38 T. D seorr Body covered with large cycluid scales, those of thorax larger than those of sides. Pre-dursal scales smaller than those of sides. Vertical fins without a basal scaly sheath, Lateral line following the dorsal profile, sharply bent down- wards betore the caudal peduncle. Lateral line canals single, unbranched, Dorsal spines shurt and slender, the first very shurl, smaller than the eye diameter. Vhe last spine the longest, but not as Wg us the rays. Vertical fins short, net reaching vent, First anal spines minute, the third laccrass, equal to one cye diameter and a half, Pectoral equal to length of head without snout. Caudal fin ranmiled, Depth of caudal pedtmele equal to snaut. Fig. 7.—Sterhojalts cubromacala sp. nav (1), Colour in fife—Body enlour olive green above, silvery white below. Three liuht blue lines on the face. The first passes horizontally from the dorso-frontal profile ta the middle of the eye, thence upwards to the upper anale of the oper- culum, ‘The secand arises from the mouth and passes slightly obliquely upwurds below the eye to the must posterior edge of the operculum, and continues on tn the first 4 or 5 body seales above the pectoral fin. The third arises below the mouth, passes upwards on to the cheek, thence almost horizontally to the edge of the operculum. Upper part of head green, cheeks grading to yellow, chim pink. Body with two light blue lines. The first arises immediately hehind the pectoral fin, and passes backwards horizontally on to abont seven body suales. The second arises below the base of the peetoral, and runs back hori- zuntally, ending about five scales before the beginning of the caudal rays. A dark band extends back from the end of this blue line across the caudal peduncle on to three says of the caudal fin. The remainder of the candal, and all other fins, are amber coloured. A large oval-shaped splash of red, immediatchy above the base al the pectoral fin. Described frum a specimen 122 mm, total Jength, tiken Sharks Buy, May, 1954. Mr. Barrett-Lennatd says that this appears to he about the maximum size tie which this species sraws: Type in South Australian Museum, Reg. No, F2993. Affinities —Allied to S_ striziventer (Bennett) in metristic features bul difter- ing iu body proportions, body colouration and number and distribution af bands on head and body. The silvery longitudinal bands of sfrigiventer arc blue in this species, and the brown spot on the posterior dorsal rays and hrown cardal eress-hars are lacking. WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES a Genus Cremixus Lacepede, 1802 Cheilinus chlorourus | Bloch) Sneras chloroarus Moch, 171, Nat. Ausl Fische 5, p. 24, pl, 240, A specimen measuring 232 mim, total length was taken at Point Simson, August, 1957. Add area 5 to Whitley's (1948, p. 26) distribution of this species in Western Australia. Family BODIANIDAE Genus Cuovnopon Bleeker, 184 Choeredon rubidus sp, nov, Dixit? PAY Adit Vib Cad, Bre Lat. line 28-29. Lae trans. 32: 9. Length of liead 57 mm. (3-7), greatest depth of body 63 (3-3), greatest width af body 28 (7-5) in the total length 210 mm. Height of head 1:1 in its length, Bye 12 (1:7) in the snout and 1-3 in the convex interorbital space. Snont 21 (2-7) in the head. Mouth vblique, scarcely protractilo, reaching to below posterior nostril, Upper lip thin, covered by preorbital when mouth is closed. Foor peg-like canines in each jaw, the outer pair in the upper jaw much smaller than the inner pair. Canines of lower jaw small, the outer pair slightly Hared out. Teeth behind the canines coalesced, forming a serrated ridge. No posterior canine. e. rs ne. 2 Fig, 7.—Stethojulis rubromacula sp. now. (#1). Six te seven rows of small seales on the cheek. Operculum with five rows nt much Jarger seales. Prewperculum finely denticulate. Scales on nape begin- ning abave vertical (hrough hind border of preoperculuin. Body covered with large cycloid seales, which form a low basal sheath on the dorsal and anal fins. Lateral line cceplcte, without a sharp deflection, Six predorsal scales, twelve to thirteen preventral scales, Scales on thorax much smaller than on body. Dorsal spincs short but pungent, the membrane behind them produced into a short filament. First spine equal to diameter of eve, the second spine the longest. Soft dorsal pointed behind, the last ray almost twice as long as the first. Anal spins pungent, the third longest, but not as long as the first ray, Anal fin pointed behind. Pectoral fin rather long, the longest rays 4:4 in the total length. Ventrals pointed, reaching to the anus. Caudal truncate. 50 T. D. scoTT Colour in aleohol.—Body and fins coloured a uniform reddish brown, the fins without any conspicuous spots or markings. A small black spet on the back, immediately below the cleventh and twelfth dorsal spines, and covering the small scales forming the basal sheath of the dorsal fin. Described from a specimen 210 mm. total length, taken Sharks Bay, May, 1954. Type in South Australian Muscum, Reg, No. 2985. Affinities—Similar to C. vita Ogilby in meristic features and body propor- tions. but differing in colour pattern, unevenly rounded shape of pectoral fin and truncate hind margin to the caudal fin, The caudal fin of vitta is emarginate, and the pectoral evenly rounded. Genus Lrpmapxors Gill, 1862 Lepidaplois vulpinus (Richardson) Lepidalpois vulpinus Richardson, 1850, Proe, Zool. Soc, Lond., p. 71- A large specimen measuring 435 mm, total Jength was taken at Hamlin Bay, Jamnary, 1955. Body and fins coloured a bright red. Membrane black between the first five dorsal spines. Add area 3 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 26) distribution of this species in Western Australia. Family TRIGLIDAR Genus Pararnicia Ogilby, 1911 Paratrigla papilio (Cuv, and Val.) Trigla pupiliiy Cuvier and Valenciennes, 1829, Mist. Nat. Poiss., 4, p, 80, pl. 73. Two small specimens measuring 92. mo. and 95 mm. total length were taken at Perth, September. 1954, Add area 3 to Whitley's (1948, p. 30) distribution of this species in Western Australia. Family DACTYLOPTERIDAE Genus Dacrytortena Jordan and Richardson, 1908 Dactyloptena orientalis (Cuv. and Val.) Dactylapterus orienédlis Cuvier and Valeuciemmes, 1829, Hist. Nat. Poiss., 4, p. 134, pl. 76 A small specimen measuring 172 mm. total length was taken at Point Sarm- son, August, 1957, Add area 5 to Whitley's (1948, p. 30) distribution of this species in Western Australia, Family OSTRACIONTIDAE Gems Osreacton Linnaeus, 1758 Ostracion tuberculatus Linnaeus Ostracion. thberculatus Linnaeus, 1758, Syst. Nat, ed, 10, y. 331. Two specimens measuring 345 min. aud 153 mm. total length were taken at Pomt Samson, December, 1957. A new record of this specics for Western Australia. Family TETRAQDONTIDAE Genus OnmtecorpHona Whitley, 1934 Omegophora armilla (McCulloch and Waite) LYetraodan armilla McCulloch and Waite, 1915, Frans. Roy. Sec. S. Austr, 39, p, 475, pl, 15. A female specimen measuring 185 mim. total length was taken at Point Sam- son, December, 1957, Add area 5 to Whitley’s (1948, p. 32) distribution of this species in Western Australia, WESTERN AUSTRALIAN FISHES wl An examination of 12 specimens of Omegophora armilla taken in Southern Australian waters during the past few years, shows that this species exhibits sexual dimorphism in its colour pattern. In the female the upper surface of the snout, back and tail are dark grey, this colour continued on to the sides behind the pectoral fins. There is a dark band passing from the eyes to helow the snout. A black ring encircles the gill-opening and pectoral fin. The lower three or four rays of the caudal fm are dark brown to black. The colouring of the male is similar, with the following additions. Blue spots on the head from the interorbilal space to tip of snout. Blne longitudinal bars between front border of eye and tip of snout. Sides with blue spots extend- ing, down to level of ventral insertion of pectoral fin. A thin blue horseshoe- shaped bar cncireling the pectoral fin, situated on the outer side of the black bar, and running parallel to it. Family DIODONTIDAE Genus Dropon Limnacus, 1758 Diodon holocanthus Linnaeus Dindon holocanthus Linnaeus, 1788, Syst. Nat., cd. 10, p. 335. A specimen measuring 128 mm. total length was taken at Point Samson, December, 1957. This species is doubtfully recorded from North-Western Aus- tralia by Whitley (1948, p. 32) in area 5. It has been recorded previously from Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and erroneously recorded from South Australia by McCulloch (1929, p, 435). Family ECHENEIDAE Genus Lerrecnenris Gill, 1864 Leplecheneis neucrates (Linnaeus) Echeneis neucrates Linnacus, 1758, Syst. Nat., ed. 1), p, 261, Duxxv,32. P20. A383. C17, A large specimen measuring 462 mm. total length was taken at Point Sam- son, August, 1955. The edges of the soft dorsal and anal ure bordered with a thin white band. Caudal with white margins, the central part black, A dark longitudinal band on the sides of the body. Add area 5 ta Whitley’s (1948, p. 29) distribution of this species in Western Australia. REFMRENCES Aureyne, H. G., and Macteay, W.. 1877. Proc. Linn. Soc, N,S. Wales, 1, pt. 2, pp. 321-959, Der Beavrort, L. F., 1940, Fish. Indo-Anst. Archipelago, & Fraser-Bnonnes, A,, 1933. Proc. Zool. Soe. Land., pp. 543-599. Macieay, W., 1878. Proc, Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales. 2, ph 4, pp. 344-307. Macrray, W., I88t. Deser. Cut, Austr, Fish, 1. Macrray, W., 1884. Prov. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 7, pl. 2, pp. 2244250. Mactiray, W., 1854, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S, Wales, 8, pp. 292-280, McCurnnocn, A. R., 1916. Biol. Res, Endeavour, 4, pp. 169-200. MeCuutoca, A, R., 1922. Austr, Zool., 2, pt. 3, pp. 86-130. MeCunnoon, A. R.,.1929. A Check-list of the Fishes Recorded from Australia. Ociwsy, J. D., 1915. Mem. Qld. Mus, 3, pp. 99-116. Wauntry, G, P., 1932, Rep, Great Barrier Rect, 4, No. 9, pp. 267-316. big ecp G, P., 1948. A List of the Fishes of Western Australia, W.A. Fisheries Dept.. Bull, No. 2. Wurrney G, P., 1952-53. Proc, Rey. Zool, Soc, N.S. Wales. IDENTIFICATION OF VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS NEAR MOUNT GAMBIER, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY J. T. HUTTON, G. BLACKBURN AND A. R. P. CLARKE Summary Soil samples that have been unmistakably affected by volcanic ash and collected from within 2 miles of the Blue Lake, Mt. Gambier, may contain up to 40 per cent. of particles in the range 2p-50p diameter, and the particles in this range show a clearly defined straight line relationship between their amount and size. This feature is interpreted as representing accessions of volcanic ash. When a soil contains less than 4 per cent. of particles within this size group, it is considered that there is no significant amount of volcanic ash in the soil. Using these criteria, volcanic ash has been demonstrated in soils up to 10 miles from the Blue Lake and the approximate distribution of the ash is shown on a map. Almost all areas within 4 miles received volcanic ash but at greater distances the distribution was irregular. Ash soils were identified in the Mil Lei district 7 miles to the north-east and in the Caroline Forest 7 miles southeast of the Blue Lake. IDENTIFICATION OF VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS NEAR MOUNT GAMBIER, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. by J. T. Hurron, G. Bracksugn ann A, R. P, Cranke* [Read 10 July 1958] SUMMARY Soil samples that have been unmistakably affected by volcanic ash and collected from within 2 miles of the Blue Lake, Mt. Gambier, may contain up to 40 per cent. of particles in the range 2u-d0u. diameter, and the particles in this yon show a clearly defined straight ine relationship between their amount and size. "This feature is interpreted as representing accessions of volcanic ash. When a soil contains less than 4 per cent. of particles within this size sroup, it is considered that there is no signihcant amount of volcanic ash in the soil, Using those criteria, voleanic ash has been demonstrated in svils np to 10 miles from the Blue Lake and the approximate distribution of the ash is shown ona map. Almost all areas within 4 miles reovived voleanic ash bot at greater distances the distribution was irregular. Ash sails were identified in the Mil Lel district 7 miles to the north-cast and in the Caroline Forest 7 miles south- east of the Blue Lake, INTRODUCTION The extent of volcanic ash around Mt. Gambier is of particular interest in South Australia, this being the best known of the few volcanic centres in the State. A detailed geological map of the Mt. Gambier area by Sprigg (1951) shows the boundary of this ash as no further than 3 miles from the Blue Lake, but obseryations made recently during a reconnaissance soil survey of County Grey suggested that the ash distribution extended to greater distances from this centre, In earlier accounts there had been a claim by Howchin (1909) of voaleanic ash as far as 7 miles north-east of Mt, Gambier and a denial of this by Femer (1921) whose map of the ash distribution is similar to that given by Sprigg (1951). The soils associated with the ash were described by Prescott and Piper j 1929), who mentioned that the soil type is limited to within a 3 to 4 miles radius of the town, although in the north-easterly direction the limits are less clearly defined than in the south. Some of the samples listed by Prescott and Piper were taken, however, at distances greater than 4 miles from Mt. Gambier. 4G analysis of charcoal collected from the sand immediately below the bed of tuff at one site in North Terrace, Mt. Gambier, indicated an age of not more than 5,000 years (Fergusson and Ratter, 1957) and this is taken to be the maxinnim age of much of the volcanic ash ejected from the Mt. Gambier cone, FIELD OBSERVATIONS The dunes of leached siliceous sands in the Mt. Gambier area are covered by several feet of tuff near the mountain and the contrast of the brown to dark brown soil and the compact tuff beds with the underlying loose white sand is clearly seen in new road cuttings, pits and augor holes. At 3 miles from the Blue Lake there is barely 2 feet of ash and at successively yreater distances * C.S.LR.O., Division of Soils, Adelaide, Trans, Roy. Soc. 'S. Aust. (1958), Vol, 82, J. T. HUTTON, G. BLACKBURN anp A. R. P. CLARKE | t 1 +1F é g #0 as 6 S1e9 fd 1 ra P I £-0 s 8 OFEV g I Lael z T £-0 Xx L 198V g 1 9-0 MN | 2 G6FE I 1 le-9 1 é £-0 cg ¢ LSSV +9 & j | F691 ¥ g £0 ag | L eeev 61 | ¢ @ . Sr 8 9 F-0 aN L 63 SI & L OF BS F ¢ , 619 u g £0 "aN 9 | TééVv Or 6 TL og 8 8 £-0 N $ | 9eV LZ T 0 GL-99 rs é ai-g é z £-0 N i $ 6S8V id if 0 LO-GP z j ; £0 aN F scey or ; ma ! at 9% at or | &0 as | F TweV — z I PELE z z | po-9l e € £-0 M F OSV LG g 1 OF-SE | LI a £0 s g POEV 81 0 I €¢-98 re c R19 id é FO | MN ig LOFV +09 oe | 46 | 8 04 61 €-0 MN é £osVv 0g , & T | Lg-g¢ ol 8 6-8 8 L £-0 a z ccey +09 | @b . FL. 9t8 91 81 9-0 a z esos #3 | O oe + He 1é 1g £-0 8 é ocev 9% 61 6r |e Ly 81 £0 8 3 GhEV +09 - FT fl | O80R 08 ard ¥0 ct cal FOPV % % “ul % % | ‘ut % % at “ul noc-or | wor-e | usdecr | Yos-ot | tor-z | waded | Mog-or | More | ded woe s9/ Tu FOQUINN, [fos pormng { | forquren yy | ofdureg oy uyydeq |~ at es - DOUBISICT pues duldjrepuy aoepins quy [fog sowpng NS ..BG_I_CCVOw»SSSr ‘ioe-oL pue Ho[-g asuer Ut soptaed Jo asvqueosag ‘T ATAVL VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS 35 the layer of Compact tuff becomes thinner until it is no longer distingnishable from the surface svil of the dunes. These surface soils, however, are muro like the soils of the ash zone than those on the dunes of leached siliceous sands 10 or more miles away, It is thought to be signifioant that the crests of dunes 5 to T miles from the Blue Lake have merited cultivation for cereals and after many crops the surface soils still retain suffivient aggregation tu protect bare soil trom erosion — circumskiieces which are not associated with sand dunes further from Mt, Gambier. Mt, Schanek, the volcanic formation T miles south of Mt. Gambier, is prob- ubly similar to it in age and structure, but the area affected by its ash hag not been studied in detail. The ficld observations of the soils near Mt, Schanck suggest that there is an overlup of the zoncs of ash distribution from the two centres and it is not possible, therefore, to clearly definu the suuthern limit of ash from Mt. Gambier. SAMPLES Soils and tuff layers were inspected at many points in the district and it was found that clearest evidence of volcanic ash could be obtained on the higher sand dunes, especially those identificd by Sprigg (1951) as the Gambier and Caveton dunes. On the flat land between the dunes thore is rarely such a comirast in texture and colour between ash and underlying soil and sa most sumples chosen for detailed study were from soil profiles associated with the dunes, Altogether, 46 samples from 21 profiles were studied and in addition to the surface samples, one or more simples from depths up to 6 feet were in- cluded. The profiles were all located between 1 and 11 miles from the Blue Lake, Mt, Gambier, and their location is shown in Fig. 1. METHOD OF LABORATORY EXAMINATION The inethod used was essentially that described by Hutton (1955) for the particle size analysis of soils. The plummet balance was used to measure the wmourt of material of particle size less than 5p, 10 and 50, as well as that less than 2p and 20,, the usual limits for clay and silt plus clay. Material larger than 204 was separated by an automatic decantation unit (Hutton, 1955) and then divided mto 5 fractions using appropriate sieves. Ten points were thus ubtained from which the particle size summation curves, such as those shown in Fig. 2, could be drawn, RUSULTS The outstanding feature of the summation curves is the lineal portion he- (ween 2p and 50,. Four typical curves are shawn in Fig, 2. For convenience of comparison these curves show the distribution of the material greater than 2» and the straight line is considered to mdicate the unsorted fine yoleanic ash, On a logarithmic plot, the mid point between 2 and 50 is 10 and henee a straight line on the summation curve belween 2, and 50p is indicated by the percentage in the range 2u to LO, being equal tu that in the range 10, to 50u, Table 1 sets out some of the results obtained and it has been divided into two parts to indicate the presence or absence of volcanic ash. DISCUSSION The results in Table 1 show that close to Mt. Gambier up to 40 per cent. of the particles in the surface are in the range 2 to 50p but further out the percentage of particles in this range falls off rapidly. When the percentage is less than 4, it is considered that the accession of volcanic ash bas not been significant, 96 J. T. HUTTON, G, BLACKBURN anp A. R. P. CLARKE . YOUNG MINGBOOL >> Aza npg MEL X BURNDA R.5. ‘BLANCHE \ A4GTS. NG eA Qo ae) z =) na ALLENDALE EAST SS” f PCUTHERN OCEAN BOUNDARY OF VOLUANIC DEPOSITS, / ye APPROXIMATE LsttT OF VOLCANIC ASH AFTER SERIGE f79st] GISTRIBUTION, DETERMINED FROM SOtL DATA Main soi0s Samer Locations __ © A362 HunORED BOUNDARIES 0. ATS, 9358 Fig. 1—Map of Mt. Gambier District Fase i area considered to have received accessions of volvanic ash. VOLCANIC ASH IN SOILS 97 By defining volcanic ash as material with more than 4 per cent. of un- sorted particles in the range 2» to 50, it has been possible to delineate the area around Mt. Gambier that came under the influence of the showers of ash ejected during its volcanic activity. The boundary is naturally ill-defined but within the limits imposed by the number of samples cxamined it is considered that the area indicated in Fig. 1 received accessions of yoleanic ash. Close ta the actual source, particularly if there is more than 20 per cent. of material in the range 2u to 50,, the relatively igh amounts of acid soluble phosphorus and potassium confirm the presence of material of igneous origin (Prescott and Piper, 1929, and unpublished data, C.S.1.R.0., Division of Soils), When, however, the amount of ash is low, phosphorus and potassiam may not be reliable indicators, as both elements are translocated by plant growth and tend to accumulate in the surface of soils. The map showing the ash distribution supports the earlier claim by How- chin (1909) of ash 7 miles north-east of Mt. Gambier. The irregular shape of the ash zone north of Mt. Gambier may help to explain the difficulty mentioned by Prescott and Piper (1929) of defining the north-easterly limits of the ash shower as compared with the southerly limits. 100 + tn a x So oe So S uw oO CUMMULATIVE % $s 20 —= a +—___1— ab z 5 if 20 sq 130 200 500 PARTICLE SIZE Al Fig, 2—Representalive partiels size summation curves. The distribution of ash indicated by Fenner (1921) was regarded by him as being governed by winds similar in direction and velocity to those of the present day, while Gill (1950) suggested that for south-west Victoria the pre- vailing, winds approximately 5,000 years ago were from the north-west. ‘The map presented in this paper suggests that the distribution depended mainly on south-west, north-west and north winds, but it is quite possible that the irregular distribution resulted from different wind effects prevailing during a limited number of eruptions. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The work described in this paper was carried out as part of the research programme of the Division of Soils, Commonwealth Scientific and Industrial Re- search Organization. 98 J. T. HUTTON, G. BLACKBURN anp A. R. P. CLARKE REFERENCES Fenner, C,, 1921. The craters and lakes of Mt. Gambier, South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 45, pp. 169-205. Fercusson, G, J., and Rarrer, T. A., 1957. New Zealand 14C age measurements — 3, N.Z. J. Sci. Tech., B 38, pp. 732-749. Gut, E. O., 1950. An hypothesis relative to the age of some western district volcanoes, Victoria, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 60, pp. 189-194. Howcurm, W., 1909. In Howchin, W., and Gregory, J. W., The Geography of South Aus- tralia, Whitcombe and Tombs, London. Hutton, J. Ms 1955. A method of particle size analysis, C.S.I.R.O., Div. of Soils, Div. Rpt. No. 11/55. Prescott, J. A., and Pirer, C. S,, 1929. The volcanic soils of Mt. Gambier, South Aus- tralia, Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 58, pp. 196-202. Spricc, R. C., 1951. Map of Gambier and Northumberland, 1 mile Geological Series, Geol. Surv., S. Aust. NOTES ON THE GEOMORPHIC HISTORY OF THE AREASURROUNDING LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY C. J. DE Mooy Summary The geomorphology of an area surrounding Lakes Alexandrina and Albert is discussed. Two stranded coastal dune ranges were mapped in detail and tentatively correlated with the former coastlines in the south-eastern Province by methods of photo-analysis. Three consecutive stages of construction were recognized in the younger range. The origin and mode of deposition of the black clay plains surrounding the lakes are discussed. Evidence of two former mouths of the River Murray is presented. Crocker's hypothesis of formation of the present aeolian topography during a Recent Arid Period (Flandrian transgression) is rejected. It is postulated that the redistribution of sands by aeolian activity occurred in Pleistocene arid cycles and was interrupted by periods of stability of the landscape. It is suggested that stages of construction of beach ridges, periods of consolidation and soil formation alternated with periods of aeolian redistribution during each glacial and interglacial cycle. NOTES ON THE GEOMORPHIC HISTORY OF THE AREA SURROUNDING LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. by C. J, pb—E Mooy* (Communicated by R. G. Sprigg) [Read 10 July 1958] SUMMARY, The geomorphology of aw area surrounding Lakes Alesandrinu and Albert is discussed. Twa stranded coastal dune ranges were mapped in detail and tentalively correlated with the former voastlines in the south-eastern Proyinue by methods. of photo-analysis. Three consecutive stages of constriction were recognized in the younger range. The origin and mode of deposition of the black clay plains sutrounding the lakes are discussed. Evidence of two former mouths of the River Murtay is presented. Crocker’s hypothesis of formation of the present aeolian topography during a Recent Arid Period (Planidrian transgression) is rejected. It is postulated that the redistrihntion of sands by aeolian activity o¢eurred in Pleistocene arid cycles and was interrupted by periods. of stability of the Jandsuape. It is suggested that stages of construction of beach ridges, periods of consolidation and soil formation alternated with periods of acolian redistribution during each glacial and interglacial vyele. 1. INTRODUCTION Some information on the Quaternary geomorphic history of the area sur~ rounding Lukes Alexandrina and Albert emerged from an analysis of the land- scape made during a reconnaissance soil survey (de Mooy, in press), It is a complex area, The present and former coastal dune ranges abut on the eastern slopes of the Mount Lofty Ranges. The stranded shorelines enter the area from the south-east aud reach their lowest elevation here due to pro- vressive downwarping in the same direction (Sprigg, 1952). Large tidal lakes oveupy the central depression between the stranded coastal dunes and the Mount Lofty Ranges. The River Murray and several smaller rivers discharge into the lakes and flow through the Murray Mouth into the ocean, Waterlaid deposits around the present lakes therefore have a lacustrine as well as a tidal and estuarine character. Changing sea Ievels in combination with negative peptone movement. and changing climatic conditions have influenced this andscape. The geomorphology and stratigraphic relationships of the surface layers are the main sources of information. These are supported by limited micro- palaeontological data. A soil survey, even on a reconnaissance basis, supplies unusual detail about stratigraphical relationships of surface layers. In the area under review it was found that the distribution of certain groups of soils mapped at the level of the soil combination correlates well with the extent of the geo- morphic elements of the landscape. *C.S.1LB.O., Division vf Soils, Adelaide. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust, (1959), Vol, 82. 100 Cc, J. ue MOOY IL GEOLOGY The thickness of the Pleistocene cover of the region varies greatly. Howchin (1929), dealing largely with country further east, gives an average thickness of 20 feet. The materials are largely sands, clays and lime. Limestone is abun- dant: it is the aeolianite described by Crocker (1946a) with the exception of the nun-tossiliferous limestone in the northern portion of the area (Seymour com- bination, figure 1), which is referred ta us “travertine limestone” hy Crocker. Underlying is-leyel-bedded fossiliferous Tertiary limestone, which also has a variable thickness (Howehm, loc. cit.). The Miocene Murrayian Cult covered the entire area and extended far over the New South Wales and Victoriun border. ‘he Gambicr limestone and its equivalents, deposited during this trans- gression, have been recorded in the area. Howchin (1929) recorded 60 ft. thick Miocene marine beds from a bore at Cooke Plains starting al 159 It. below sea level. King (1950) mentioned outerops of Miocene bryozoal lime- stone in the area comprised by the Hundreds of Malcolm, Coolinany and Sey- mour, The Oligocene "fanjublasy stage of the Gambier limestone was identi- fied from samples taken during the soil survey from section 305, Hel, of Seymour, by Dr. N. H, Ludbrook (personal communication), who also discovered Pligewne deposits along the Murray cliffs between Tailem Bend and Wellington, Tate (190U) identifiedl Eocene beds in the Hundred of Brinkley. The Tertiary murine beds rest wpon Precambrian crystalline bedrock, usally geanites of varviny composition, which outcrop in several places (eg. near Tailem Bend and Lake Albert), Permian tillites and boulder clay have been reported by King (1950) to occur above the bedrock and in depressions. Ze Sey ==SEYMOUR—=— SHERLOCK: ET f———} COOLINONG + Sour Sos SS ~“ — KEP TO SOIL COMBINATIONS — wuanG ST Styvmoun ES Sey BONNEY ;-GoG My, SPL ENERO. eS OLA MAALOOLM 22... St ' a Vy OUNG-HUSBAND Fl i Y, lasceciefon) 1 ae fy a. FA 4 Lb fy bd LLLP LA Fig. 1-—Soil eambination mup. Hf, GEOMORPHOLOGY AND SURFACE STRATIGRAPHY (a) The Soil Combinations The ares is composed of 7 distinct geomorphic units which are equivalent ta soil combinations. LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBER'L 1OL 1, The Milang combination consists largely of alluvial and colluvial de- posits of a clayey nature. It is situated on the eastern slopes and in the plains at the foot of the Mount Lofty Ranges, which grade gently towards Lake Alexan- drina. During upheaval and dissection of the Mount Lofty Ranges the Currency Creek and Finniss River carried materials from the hills, including lateritic gravel, which were deposited in the older terrace and plains along the rivers (EC and RB in Figs, 2 and 3). This and two lower agegradational terraces bear witness of former high sea levels (plate 1, fig. a). The middle terrace is mapped as the Currency Creek-a association (CC-a), Its soils have textural differentiation, The low terrace (CC-b) could correspond as to elevation with Fig. 2—Fragment of soil association map showing river terraces along Currency Creek. Legend figures 2 and .3: EC—East Currency association; RB—River Bank assoviation; CCa— Currency Creck a association; CCh—Currency Greek h association; BI-—Black Swamp; W— Oper water, _ the Malcolm deposits (sce Fig. 1). It is remarkable that soil formation in both deposits has been restricted to structural development and redistribution of carbonates. 2. The Seymour combination may be regarded as portion of the Mallee country extendimy eastward across the Victorian border. It consists of gently undulating plains of Pleistocene age. It grades gently seaward and was traced to some feet below sea level underlying the Malcolm combination, The materials are predominantly coarse textured, redistributed by acolian activity, and com- monly travertinized near the surface. West of the River Murray the plains extend north beyond the surveyed area to the foot of a range, which it is sus- pected represents a former coastal dune range, Its approximate position be- 102 Cc. J, pe MOOY tween the 100 and 150 foot contour lines is sketched in Fig. 6. Its shape has been influenced during formation by the River Murray. This suggests that deltaic conditions prevailed in the plains south of Murray Bridge and in much of the Seymour combination during this period of higher sea level. Repeated redistribution of sands formed several N-S transverse dune ridyes in the Sey- mour unit as well as a superimposcd WNW-ESE ridge topography. Fig. 3—Fragment of soil association map showing river terraces alone the River Finniss. 3, The Alexandrina combination is a steep former coastal dune range with an aeolianite core, In places it is ridged to a WNW to ESE direction, No geomorphological significance can be attached to the spur curying around the Malcolm combination to the sonth. For reasons of soil mapping convenience this spur of deep leached sands was included. 4. The Bonney combination is another stranded coastal dune system with irregular or SW to NE trended undulating to hilly topography. It has a core of aeolianite. 5. The Bremer combination was formed by alluvial activity of the Bremer and Angas Rivers. The alluvium can be divided into an older and a younger phase. The older deposits, the Bremer Plains and Lakes Plains associations have eroded the ridged Seymour and Milang combinations. The material was sub- sequently redistributed by aeolian activity to its present gently undulating topo- graphy, which can be distingnished from the older surrounding country by the absence of E-W sand ridges. Subsequently, soils of the Red-Brown Earth type developed on the fine sandy micaccous sediments. Finally, up to LO feet of ounger alluvial materials (Angas Plains and Langhorne Creek associations) local y buried the soils formed on the older material. The latest deposition of this material overlies the Malcolm clays, which in tum overlie the soils of the older alluvium. The distribution of the old and young alluvial deposits in rela- tion to the pre-existing ridged landscape is illustrated in detail in Fig, 4. 6, The Malcolm combination is largely composed of fine textured Tacustrine and estuarine sediments at low elevation, LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 103 vy 7. The Younghusband association is the present coastal dune range con- sisting. of unconsolidated calcareous sands. The area can be subdivided into a relutively stable dune landscape, and a system of SW-NE drifting sands, which = SCALE LANGHORNE BANNe — V ' = Wilce BEL MOELOULLN NOTE: Sti/ mahbing units shen tha .BPo Fg _ ae — KEY 70 COMBINATIONS — - BREMER Okder A Younge | LA MALCOLM Fig, 4—Feragment of soi] association map showing the distribution vf the alluvial deposits it relation to the older ridged landscape, N are moving in from the coast and gradually covering the former. The stable dune landscape is steep, has a thick vegetative cover and decalcified swales, Further subdivision of these units and greater detail is given in the soil association map (de Mooy, in press). ib) Stranded Coastal Dunes in the Area The stranded coastal dumes in the area haye un ieolianite core. The term aeolianite, variously named calcareous acvlianite, coastal limestone, sandy lime- stune ur calearenite, has been used by Crocker (19462) for both consolidated and unconsolidated windpiled caloareons material which consists Jargely of sands, fragmental shells and furaminifera. Tairbridge et al, (1952) wave the following general description: “Coastal limestone is a medium grained clastic sediment in which the grains consist mainly of fragmental calcareous algae, mollusea, foraminifera and bryozoa with yarying amounts of inorganic consti- tuents and a cement of secondary calcium carbonate.” Aeolianite in the lakes area is compuratively siliceous, which may be related to the proximity of the Murray Mouth. It contains only small fragments of shells. This applies in a larger degree to the Alexandrina than to the Bonney system, 104 . J. pe MOOY 1. The Alexandrina Coastline The Alexandrina coastal dune range has a strong relief. It rises sharply from Lake Albert to elevations of 100 and 150 ft. Here the range is up to four miles wide. WNW-ESE sand ridges, pronounced in several places, have largely been re-distributed presumably under a south-westerly wind component, The regular soils are sandy, deep or shallow, and, without texture differentiation, occupy swale positions in certain areas. The soils are separated from the under- lying aeolinite by travertinized limestone which contains no shell fragments. Commonly there are two sheets of this nature, separated by soil materials. The Alexandrina coastline runs in approximately E-W direction. It can be followed across the lakes to Goolwa and abuts against the foothills near Middleton, 2, The Bonney Coastline The Bonney coastal dune range runs parallel with the present coastline and follows the inner edge of the Coorong. The accompanying dune range of STAGES OF CONSTRUCTION OF THE BONNEY FORMER COASTAL DUNE RANGE ~ TRUMPLY POINT rl — LEGEND — STAGE 1 OF DUNE RANGES... Lv] ‘ 2° 7 . _ e fee + Bi, 4 pee e HBS FORMER COORONG AREAS... fa] SWAMPS AND LOW LYING FLATS . i232 25 FT CONTOUR b= opiania Compited by cy 2 ans AS x ¢ oe Fig 5.—Stages of construction of the former Bonney coastal dune range. approximately 1 to 2 miles width is relatively steeper than inland areas and reaches elevations of 50 to 100 feet. This Bonney Range terminates at Pelican Point on Narrung Peninsula, The soils can be easily distingnished from those of the Alexandrina Range. The decalcified sandy soils directly overlie the traver- LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 105 tinized crust of acolianite, which contains coarser and more shell fragments thay the Alexandrina Kange, The leached sands have been re-sorted by wind action, This has not Jed tu drastic separation from limestone arcas and the landscape has preserved much of its original tepography, Clouser examination of the morphology reveals that this unit was constructed in three stages. The older stage is outlined by the 25 ft, contour, which Follows the Bonney coastline for many miles along the Coorong in a_north-westerly direction. At Magrath Flat it turns inland along the Princes Highway. East of Meningic the coastal dunes smooth out to a large plain at an elevation of approximately 25 ft. above sea level. This flat could represent a former Coorong associated with the first stage of the dune range. This is confirmed by micro- palaeontological information obtained from semi-consolidated calcareous sands at 3 to 4 ft. below the surface in section 214, Hd, of Bonney (site 1 in Fig. 5). The assemblage contains the foraminifera Lagenv, Cassicluline, Rotalia and Globigerina. Nearby the micro-fauna consisted of Trileculina tricarinata VOrhigny, Miliolinella oblouga Montagu, Elphidium simplex Cushman, Discorhis dimidiatus Jones and Parker, Chara and Ostracoda. The foraminifera indicate deposition under protected conditions in shallow water with limited access to the sea, Suceinea shells occur sporadically in the assemblage. They could have entered this Coorong with the wind trom the seaward dune ranges. The fauna at site 2 (section 206, Ild. of Bonney) consists of Coxiella, Elphidium simplex Cushman, five species of Ostracoda, Chara, and 2 small land gastropod and indicates deposition in protected brackish water, into which gastropods are readily washed, During the second stage of construction the Bonney coustline was extended to the place where Lake Albert comes nearest to the Coorong. If ts separated from the previous stage by a strip of low-lying land where Coorong-like condi- tions prevailed during formation of the dune. It has a somewhat lower eleva- tion than the former Coorong East of Meningie and chains of pipeclay swamps ceeupy the lowest positions, Cross-bedding in the acolianite was found ty represent lagaonal deposition (site 3) similar to that taking place now along the seaward side of the Coorong. The final stage of construction took the Bonney coastline to Pelican Point. There are chyins of swamps just inland of the dune range (unit 3 in Fig. 5) and firmer channels which the River Murray maintained for some time between the dunes of the second and third stage. If these swamps represent 2 Coorang, it has a lower elevation than those of the first and second stages. The subdivision of the Bonney dune range in three perts correlates well with the distribution of various soils in the Bonney combination; the East- Meningie, Meningie and Baker associations respectively (see soil map, de Mooy, in press), The East-Meningie soils are characterized by a grey surfuce sand, a bleached subsurface merging into yellow sand and sometimes a thin, weakly developed texture — B horizon, ‘Typical Meningie soils lack the bleached layer and the B horizon. The Baker soil is an undifferentiated brown sand over aeolianite. On the basis of the geumurphic history outlined above, it may be suggested that these suil differences are primarily related to the factor time. If these striking differences are indeed related to time of soil formation another older phase could possibly he distinguished in the East-Meningie association, This phase includes the sands near the Alexandrina system. Ifere boulders of Jaturite have formed on the slopes: of limestone ridges exposed to south-vesterly winds, whereas com- 106 C.J, pe MOOY monly in the Must-Meningie association only light ironstaining is found on lime- stone. Also, the texture B horizon is better developed in this area, The various stages as brought out by the 25 ft, cantour from ovilitary may and modified by geomorphic and general soils evidence are sketched in Fig. 5, 3. The Relationships Between the Former Coastal Dunes in the Area and those in the South-East The stranded shorelines in the south-eastem province haye been studied extensively by Tindale (1933 and 1447), Hossfeld (1950) and Sprigg (1952), Sprigg mapped them in detail up te County MacDonnell and discussed their dowawarping to the north-west under the influence of the rising Mount Lofty Ranges. He calculated the degree of tilt uf varions dunes, starting from the ideu (hat the Hats immediately in frant of the dune approximately represent the original foreshore and that they were leycl when the dunes were formed, He found a progressive decrease in dawnwarping from the older to the younger dunes and therefore that the warping has been fairly continuous throughout the formation vf this sequence. Using his figures and assuming that the rate of downwarping of the dunes to the narth is constant, the tilt of these dunes can be extrapolated over the remaining distance to fake Albert. The toe of the Naracoorte Range would there be wt an elevation of 50 ft. above sca Ievel (L.W.O.S.T., Port Adelaide) and at 13 ft. below at Narrung. The Peacock, East Averiue apd West Avenue Ranges would he at respectively 50, 7 and 15 ft. below sea level when reaching Lake Albert. The Reedy Creek Range would enter the Hundred of Bonney at 7 ft. elevation and fall to 2 ft. below sea level near the Murray Mouth. The Woakwine Rane would be at 40 ft. below sea level in the Hd, of Bomey. It must be suspected that the tae of the dunes in the lakes area which is commonly at a few feet above lake level, are adapted to more recent deposition and not representative of the ancient shoreline, which may be submerged, One uf the places where it is believed that the original Alex- andyina shoreline can be observed, is south of Gookwa (plate 1, fig. b), This fur end of the shoreline was probably near enough to the rising Mount Lofty Ranges to be little influenced by downwarpine. Ts relate the formations of the lakes area to the system of stranded coastal dunes in the South-East more conclusive results than from elevations may be expected trom a study of the topographic continuity of the south-eastern shore- lines ¢o the north, The aerial photographs of the area between County MacDon- nell and the lakes district were analysed by stereoscopic interpretation. Sprigg's gevlogical map (1952) and a soil map of an urea surrounding Tin- tinara (Jackson and Litchfield, 1954) provided basic information to extrapolate from. The results are reproduced in Fig. 6, The geographical distribution and nomenclature of the ranges as defined by Sprigg (1952) were adopted. The West Avenuc and Peacock Ranges and an unnamed range following the Jand- ward shore of the Coorong could he traced over a long distance northward into Connty Cardwell, The unnamed range along the Coorong consists of two parts with different topugraphy. They have been clistinguished as units 3 and 4 in Fig. 6. Unit 3 is typified by a topography of beach ridges parallel with the coastline. Towards the western fringe their height decreases, Unit 4 is an undulating dune range without a special trend, [tis evidently older than unit 3. [t is inconspicuous in County MacDonnell and was not mapped by Sprigg, Fur- ther north in County Cardwell the proportions of the irregular dune landscape of unit 4 increase, Simultaneously swamps gain significance in the ridged unit 3 and this terminates at Sult Creek, Unit 4 continues and ultimately becomes part of the Bonnev dune landscape, which is a much larger formation. A LAKES ALEXANDRINA ANG ALBERT 107 possible explanation for the asymmetry of unit 4 is a greater accumulation of sands in the proximity of the former Lake Albert channel of the River Murray. Another explanation is that other ranges as well cuntributed to the Bonney landscape. ji = 1 eflitrRay Brine as \ ee TAILEM BENDYR, #-——____ GEOMORPHOLOGICAL PHOTO-INTERPRETATION Sma t MAP OF THE UPPER S.E. OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA | ' ay) — SCALE - a ® te Mitts —) eer ° bv aT WN te 9 4 BvRie page aoe Sy re f Fs = th aH POL \ 45 _——_— — \. \6 PY. ., ra 4 4 K = COM ALP YN ILL fa ge pI — ——BCULAWDA | Ty Fe ang a tia aeat 9%, “Sasuvasoar we 4 \ NY : i Oe = LEGEND SS 7 “ Ue PANGES WT SN “penn ce as at ‘ N -NE TREND ; YO @ . Winey QRIENTANON [a 1 Bee —Speapener SWAMPY AREAS TS gy i ec, STEEP DUNE PANGES , UNDULATING _ oe COUNTRY WITH WNW-ESE TREND... [ET Se}. PLAINS & STEEP DUNE RANGES. WITH = STRONG WHW~ESE TREND, 7] PLAINS e SWAMPY AREAS WITH S a OCCASIONAL WNW-ESE DUNES 8 | FREELY DRAINED PLAINS... FB] [| (RREBULAPLY UNDULATING COUNTRY WITH PRENUENT BiNITE OUTCROPS. =) ) BLACK RANGE awe Ne , HNN RANE oT) AY 2 6 eS ty. UNE ) oleae le 2 Se ees wa E\ ‘ Er YSN neti eT Waa > STRANDED SHORELINES = XA ARE he QUTCROPS OF BASEMENT ROCK... + Wi i 1 \ Ne 8 . \ \\ AN, \ sarin MASS Fig. 6—Geomorphological photo-interpretation map of the Upper South-Rast. Harlier correlations have been made by others. Tindale (1947) claims to have traced the Woakwine Range over a distance of 230 miles from the Glenelg River to Lake Alexandrina. We includes the East and West Dairy Ranges in the Woakwine Terrace and mentions a break at Kingston. At Lake Albert Tindale suggests that a later phase runs along the Coorong shore towards Hind- marsh Island-and that an earlier phase forms the northern shore of Lake Albert and runs down to Narrung and Point McLeay. Tindale attempted to trace the Reedy Creck Range northwards to the River Murray. His Reedy Creek Range correlates with Hossfeld’s (1950). It joins the West Avenue Range north of the 108 «). J. vp MOOY Hundred of Murrabinna, County MacDonnell. This is shown as the West Avenue Range on the present map in accordance with Sprigg’s nomenclature. Tindale presumes that it can be correlated with a sandy ridge between Welling» tun und Tailem Bend, primarily on considerations of height above sea level. He does not account for differences in height with the South-East due to tectonic movements, It follows further from the soil association map (de Muoy, in press) that these deep sand ridges (Mason Till association) and their topo- vraphy do not continue over long distunces. Hossfeld (1950) and Sprigg (1952) in more recent work have shown that the Woakwine Range bends out to the ocean and terminates at Gape Jaffa. Sprigg claims that it is the Reedy Creek Range that can be followed from Vic- turia ta the mouth of the River Murray. The course of the Reedy Creek Range north of Reedy Creek (East of Kingston) is not clear from Spriggs map. He mapped many parallel beach ridges, following the Coorong at the landside and reluted them to more recent “Woukwine truncation” and “Anadara high" sea levels, This Is unit 3 in Fig. 6. Since then remnants of an older dune range have heen discovered amongst these younger ridges, und Sprigg (personal communt- catinn) wow regards them as possible remnants af the Reedy Creck Range. Some of them are shown on the Kingston geological sheet. From a vombination ot this evidence with Fig. 6, it appeurs to he the Reedy Creek Range (unit 4) that contributed to the formation uf the Bonney landscape, Just nocth of the area mapped by Sprigg the distinct and straight shore- lines disappear, due probubly to ihe effect of progressive downwarping in this direction. The West Avenue Range and others to the east of it as well as the fiterdynal swamps have been affected by strong redistribution of sands in an E£-W direction. The original limits of the various geomorphic units have been obscured by this aeolian activity, Swampy areas traversed by occasional E-W stecp dunes give the impression that the movement of sands oecurred when the ground water level was lower than at the present time, The boundaries must be re- garded as a simplified outline of the elements of the lanmlscape. Apart from redistribution in E-W direction at a later stage, the ranges have also heen in- fluenced during their formation by granitic outcrops. Granite is, for example, deaponshie for the small inclusion of unit 4 in the West Avenue Range (see “ip, 6). ‘The Naricoorte Range is discontinued at the nerthern limit of County Mac- Donnell, Hossteld (1956) considers that it divides here and that one ranch continues to the NW, This is known as the Black Range (unit 11), It is a distinct formation which, however, shrinks to inappreciable sive towards its northern extremity. An entire Cardife shell (identification B, C, Cotton) re- covered From the wealianite at the northern limit of the range by Mr. G, Black- burn and the author conficms its formation as a coastline. The Black Range and the remains of the Hynam Range to the east of it (unit 12), although older than the ridges to the west, have themselves not been affected by the widespread redistribution of sands in E-W direction. They terminate SW of Tintinana. Continuing in the same direction a range of considerable yolume can be distinguished caonthiynicd from the hilly Mt. Boothby landscape characterized by granite outcrops (unit 10), This range has a volume comparable to the Alexundrina Range and meets the Alexandrina combination at the eastern limit of the soil-surveved areca. The deep sands of the oncoming range are of the Boney type (East-Meningie association, de May, in press) am it is clear that they foin z bre oristing landscape here. They partly overlie the local Alexan- drina soils which continue for some distance due east along the 100 foot contuur LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 109 line, Portions of the Alexandrina combination and particularly the portion mapped as the Ashville association during thre soll survey, possibly served as u core for the forming coastal dune landscape as was the case with the Mount Boothby unit. Perhaps it is significant in this vespect that Sprigg (personal communication) claims that the coastal dune ranye running east of Keith ond Tintinara in a north-westerly direction bends westward towards Binnies Look- mut, A fraction of this range was mapped by Jackson and Litchfield (1954) and is reproduced in Fig, 6. It probably joins np with the Naracoorte Range via Mount Monster and is the same range as referred to by Hossfeld (1950) as the West-Naracoorte Runge. A possible connection between the south-eastern ranges and the Mount Boothhy granite arc bus been obscured by a system of steep E-W sand hills (unit 7), The regular alternation of ranges and interdumal swaps can no longer be vecognived here. [t appears that the E-W alignment noticeable over the entire area of County Cardwell has joined the ranges. ‘Tho roason may be that the ranges converged here as suggested by [Tossteld (1950), possibly core bined with the influcnee of pre-existing granite outcrops. The entire sheet of E-W dunes could have been formed in the one operation, but for one obser vation; no BAW orientation is obvions in a fringe along the Coorony, Here the dominating trend is SW to NE (unit 4, Fig, 6), Going east across the boundary between units 4 and 7 there is a merging increase of E-W orientation, while at first the original trend is still recognraithle. This rather suggests that several poriods of B-W trending are involved, alternating with SW-NE trending in every newly formed dune range, The effect of each Following E-W redisiri- bution of sands here overlapped and amplified the effect of the former, while the fast Pleistocene coastal dune unit failed to experience E-W redistributinn of sands. This possibly will be dealt with further in the discussion of the acolian activity in the area. From the mode of contact of the B-W dunes with the Black and Hynam Ranges it appears that they crossed those ranges, while the latter showed no sigus of instability or movement of their materials, __Evidenly no complete tapographic connection of farmer coastlines can be made. If further remains oceur in the E-W trended dune landscape, detailed sails inspection could provide the information required to reconstruct a furthey extension ot the ranges, H The available information suggests that the Alexandrina Range of the lakes area corresponds with the Black Runge, althouy) this has a considerably smaller volume, and further with the Naracuorte Runge. The coastline was in places deformed by pre-existing formations, sametimes having a granitic core, (c) The Malcolm Deposits During the list period of greater extont of the lakes Alesandrinu and Albert there was extensive sedimentation in low-lying surroundings of the present lakes. Its maximum extent is marked by the ontline of the Maleolm eombina- linn (Fig, 1), Black, fine-textured nuiterials containing up to 70 per cent. clay particles form the principal deposit. Jt is certain from the eantact of the Mal- culm combinition with the surrounding country that this sedimentation ietivity post-dates all other deposition and aeolian activity in the area with the excep- tion of recent alluvial deposition along the Angas and Bremer Rivers (“yonnger Uluvial deposits” in Fig. 4) and sand drift caused by human beings. — ” The Malcolm deposits were laid behind the shelter of the present coastal dune range as in extension of the alluvial clays alone the lower course of the River Murray, The mode of depusition, althugh of estuarine character, varied cunsiderably in Various portions of the area, Eust of the lakes Alexandrina and hia C.J. pm MOOY Albert there were shallow cmbayments where uear-lacustrine conditivns pre- yvailed. Towards the island near the Murray Mouth brackish water sedimen- tation occurred under greater tidal influence. In the Hindmarsh association many sharply defined, curving depositionary creeks fingered out into the plains ( Pi. \ Vig. C), The deposition was a very slow process, continuing for a long riod, The original landscape was not disturbed. The thickness of the deposits is related t) the topography of the landscape prior to flooding, Depressions reecived more than rises which mav have only one foot af clay, A buried sil overlying limestone can usually be detected within 6 feet from the surface, Movement of water to and fro followed the low-lying central arcas and an occa- gional well-defined connecting channel. Blind Creek which has previously been mistaken for a former stream bed of the River Murray (Tindale, 1947) is one. of them. The maximum level of the deposits can be estimated from the extent and maxinum level of the foodwaters of the River Murray in 1956, The 1956 flnads are the highest on record. They were unable to inundate a considerable portion of thy: Malcolm clays in higher positions. Records in the Engineering and Water Supply Department state maximum flood levels of 111-3 ft. R.L. at the Goalwa barrages, 113-05 ft. RuL, at Milang, 113-02 ft. R.L. at Meningie and 115-85 ft R.L.. at Wellington, Taking the mean sea level at the Murray Mouth as 103-75 — WEY TO COMBINATIONS — SEYMOUR.COMBINATION SS MALCOLM ‘ ~~ —— FORMER AND PRESENT LAKE BORDERS ___ MOTE S07 engine ernifs, stm oun, BPI see woe @ ~~ =» « 2s &¢ & 6 —~= SCALE Q i CHAINS BO ag 2 MLNS «3958 ALC CRASS Fig. 7,—Fragment of soil assooiation map showing three parallel borders of Lake Alusandlyina. ft, R.L., it appears that a water level LO ft. ahove the sea is insufficient to cover the entire Malcolm deposits. in addition to that, if subsidence is considered to have been negligible, there is still shrinkage of the sediment to acconnt far. The clay was probably subjected ta similar shrinkage as that in the hed of Lake Albert for which Taylor et al. (1931) found a loss of volume of 80 to 90 per cent. on air drying, It means that the depositing waters reached a€ least LAKES ALFEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 111 several feet above the present rises. River foods wuald have had to be banked up by # higher sea level to reach this level. Traces of a 10 [t. bigher sea level are abundant alone the Australian coast and it js possible that the Maleolm deposits reached their greatest extent and height during that period, Ketreat of the high lake Ievel occurred by degrees. During its maximum extent Lake Alexandrina formed a_ border Fhrow rearrangement oF Iocal materials. This border. B® -a in Fig. 7. runs three oviles east of the lake, parallel with the present edge. and joius ridged land that preserved its original topo- graphy (P d). On this ridge developed a soil profile with distinct texture change, A second former lake border developed approximately one rile from the lake. It represents a standstill of the retreating water level, or a return after 2 more complete retreat. The coarse, sandy soil has no textural development, it overlies the original heavy clay where this was not first removed hy wave action, The third sandy border formed at the present lake edge, This evidence can be correlsted with phenomena in those swales of the present constal dunes, deep enough ta be affected by groundwater. The level of the groundwater in the narrow dune range would fluctuate with the level of the sex. It appears that pauses in the lowering groundwater formed concentric rings in the sand whieh are now marked by diferent vegetation through different salinity conditions (PL 2). The origin of the material and the conditions of deposition are borne out by micropalzeontological examination of saruples taken from the area east of Lake Alexandrina, Tiutwitehere [sland and Ewe Island. The foraminifera as- semblage reveuled considerable ditferuntiation in the conditions of sedimenta- tion both geographically and between various sedimentary horizons of the one profile. East of Lake Alexandrina no foraminifera could he found in the clay deposits at sites 4, 5 and 6 in Fig. 7 to conflict with freshwater deposition, nor in the buried soil at site 4. Ft is interesting that only a thin layer at 63 to 66 inches below the surface, at the top of the buried soil, bears witness of an inecur- sion of brackish water by virtue of an assemblige including: Elphidium simplex Cushman and Ostracedes, On Tauwitchere Isiand (see Fig. 1) the microfauna including Trochennina inflata Montagu is indicutive of brackish water deposition. Closer to the Miuvay Mouth on Ewe Island the assemblage while reflecting more salme sedi- mentary conditions also indicates that the materials were deposited while pro- tected trom direct contact with the oeean, The microlauna consists of sponge spieules and the foraminifera: Trochammina inflata Montagu, Discerbis sp. Globigerina bulloides AOvbigny, Planorhulina medditerranensis dOrbigny, El- phidium macellum Fichtel and Moll, and other Elphidium sp. and “Retalia bercarit’ Linne. Some of the planktonic foraminifera on Ewe Island mav have been washed through the nearby Murray Mouth, Evidently the present coastal dunes were in existence priur ta depusition of the Maleolm. clays. This is in accordance with the retreat of sea level by degrees, us is recorded by the swales of the coastal dune range. Subsequently the diatoms at site 4 were examined to render further in- formation on the depositional envirunment of the presumed fresh wuter horizons devoid of a foraminiferal assemblage. The diatoms Campylodiscus clypeus and C. echenies ace common and there are a few specimens of Hyalodiscus laevis. This is a brackish water assemblage, It remains the same with depth, but the diatem content increases greatly at 57 to 60 inches, approaching the top of tie buried soil, for which the foraminifera indicated a brackish environment. IE dixtoms may be used to draw ecological eonvlusions for this area where the 112 OG. J. nr MOOV environment yaried considerably with the distance from the Murray Mouth, it would appear that freshwater conditions never prevailod. (ad) Periodicity of Formation of gypsum and pipeclay Deposits and Thetr Relative Ave The material known 4s pipeclay in the Coorong flats is, in fact, 2 dolomitic luke-marl deposit according to Mawson (1929), whereas Jack (1921) suggests that the pipeclay at Meningie and along the Cooreng is Jour gypsum, Rather similar material taken from swamps during the soil survey of the lakes area proved by chemical analyses to be a mixtute of gypsum and dolomite. Pipeclay swamps are found in depressions east of the lakes in places where Malcolm clay deposits had no access. ‘They oyerlic undisturbed buried soils. Jack (1921) extensively dealt with the varieties, distribution and origin of the gypsim deposits of Sowth Australia, He discussed three possible sources for gypsum deposits: 1, Decomposition of sulphicles to sulphates in the presence of limestone. 2, Derived from sea water when au arm of the sea is cul off by a bar, permitting sen water intake to keep pace with evaporation. 3. Concentration from cyclic salts in evaporating areas, while excess sodium and the more soluble salts would be carried to the sea by the gradual eqreulation of groundwater. He vousiders the “pipeclay” swamps near Meningie and Cooke Plains to he part nf the tormer extension of Lakes Albert and Alexandrina, They were then more readily accessible to sea water and would act as efficient evaporating pans. At Cooke Plains gypsum dunes piled up subsequently. This view is also taken by King 1196 ), who states that the gypsum deposits are related geologically to the eld lake bed, where they crystallized. He re- lates the formation of gypsum on the bed of the saline flats and the commence- ment of accumulation in dunes tu the gradual emergence of the land after the inundations during the high sea-level period of the middle Recent. King found impure granular gypsum overlying concretionary limestone in shallow testholes in the “pipeclay Hats”. The limestone carried an assemblage of marine fossils “typical of the middle Recent period” including Coxiella, Diala lnuta and abun- dant foraminifera, The soil survey, however, has shown that the history of development is somewhat more complicated. The “former lake bed” can be divided inte two formations: 1 A low-lying purtion of the Seymour combinution where the “pipeclay” and the gypsum dunes were formed (Fig. 8), 2 The black clay deposits of the Malcohn combination which extend from Lake Aletantctna fo just east of Cooke Plains. They are a younger formation and overlie the Seymour combination. It has been pointed out that these materials, which probably originated during the latest sreater extension of the lakes contain no foraminifera. This suggests that the formation of the gypsum deposits at Covke Plains may predate the formation of the lake bed indicated by the Malcolm combination, They may be related to the top of the buried soil at 5 ft. depth below the surface, which witnessed an incursion of relatively brackish water according to its microfauna. Conditions fur the accumulation of gypsum dunes apparently prevailed pevindically. Howchin (1929) recorded several beds of gypsum alternating with LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT 113 sandy limestone in a bore at Cooke Plains. Actually, the Maleohn combination abuts on smaller gypsum dunes at the windward side of the pipeclay flats 9 Fig. 8), which may represent an earlier pliase of gypsum dune formation. Older gypsum dunes occur due west of Cooke Plains along the channel of the Murray River (Fig. 7). Here they have subsequently been eroded and have undergone several cycles of aeolian activity. Sands have been deposited over them, soil profiles formed and stripped to limestoné making them identical with the soils — KEY TO COMBINATIONS SEYMOUR COMBINATION SCALE O— MALCOLM ‘ CHANS BD gn I 168 PEL, KECLOULLS. GYPSUM DUNES NOTE: Soi? nopybingy vrnits,..-stoan thon. BPaa Fig, 8—Fraginent of soil association map joining Fig. 7 to the wesl and showing the geographic relationships between the Maleolm deposits, pipeclay swamps and gypsum dunes. of the Seymour combination. The gypsum is present in crystalline form, whereas the dunes at Cooke Plains are unconsolidated and composed of seed gypsum. One explanation for the false bedding described by Tate (1882) is that a Pleistocene high sea level inundated these older dines. (e) Former Mouths of the River Murray Howchin (1929) has stated that the Coorong may represent a former outlet of the Murray when the river had a more southerly position, from which it has heen gradually driven northward by the encroaching sand ridge. ‘aylor and Poole (1931) suggested that the River Murray ut some stage flowed through Lake Albert to join the Coorong, They recognixed silted up river channels and mentioned a cut-of billabong in Meningie Bay, The soil survey provided further evidence that the Murray at one stage maintained some’ channels across the Bonney Range. A system of depressions (unit 5 in Fig, 5) nearly joins the toe of Lake Albert with the Coorong. Presumably the river channel through the present Lake Albert became confined to this passage upon. construction of the third stage of the Bonney dune landscape, when also he inlet of the ocean was transformed into the lake; contrary to Howchin’s view the present coastline was not in existence at that time. Finally, the main channel shifted to Lake Alexandrina. Another former outlet of the River Murray wus Enund south of Goolwa (Pl, 3, Figs, a and b). Seaward af, and at lower elevation than the Alexandrina shoreline, which is well preserved here, the small creek draining the Middleton ll4 ©. Joe MOOY association, and the estuarine Hindmarsh deposits converge to the site of a former opening in the present dunes, The dunes are locally narrow and re- latively low. (£) Periodicity of Aeolian Activity and the Theory of Pleistocene Climatic Changes The strongly WNW-ESE orientated dune ridges of the Seymour combina- tion are superimposed on a gently undulating landscape also originating, from acolian activity, without such orientation, West of the River Murray it is clear that after soils had formed the old landscape was stripped down to a lime- erziched horizon by renewed acolian activity and remnants of the redistributed sands formed the present dunes. Formation of this landscape required two periods of instability and acolian activity (Pl. 4, Fig. a). East of the River Murray three transverse dunes running approximately north to south can be recognized. They have a considerably larger volume than the E-W dune ridges. Ina section from Wellington to Sherlock (Fig, 9) the first dune (Mason Hill association) is followed by an E-W ridged landscape ( Perkindoo association), ‘This peters out in stony plains (Tailem Bend associa- > z S 3 aad a = =o 2 s = 2 a a 5s S55 5 & SiS j MASON HUL-- | PEAKINDOO-4 J, 2, 3;35, G MOORLANDS ASSac™ Ze Zoo; Fiei, <= Fe o,raws - ' * ; ] } APPRORIMATELY 24 MILES Fig, 9—East-West section hetween Wellingten and Sherlick, tim), "The second transverse dune (Covlinong-a) rises sharply from the pluins and is followed by parallel longitudinal dunes (Coolinong-b) which merge into stony plains. The third dime is the westernmost part of the Moorlands asso- ciation. The first system is differentiated inte: deep sunds (Mason Hill) on the dunes, a ridged Jandscape with finer textured subsvils and plains with stoney soils. This becomes lost in the eastern units. In the second system the soils of the ridged Jandscape intrude upon the range itself and in the third dune the lime- stone follows similarly. This suggests that the third dune has undergone more stages of erosion and soil formation than the other two. An older aye for the third dune is also indicated by the fact that it is overlain by the soil pattern of the second dune in places. The formation of transverse dunes may be ex- plained by repeated activity of the same winds which formed the longitudinal dune ridges, Transyerse duncs could form where there is an abundant supply of sands, whereas seif dumes could form when materials become scarcer. A con- nection between the origin of the transverse dunes and the shores of former extensions of Lake Alexandrina is unlikely, because the dunes arc parallel to the gradient of the country. The Alexandrina combination has also been influenced by several perivis of wind activity as indicated by two sheets of travertinized limestone, overlying aeolianite (Pl, 4, Fig. b), and finally there is the repeated formation of gypsum dunes, mentioned earlier. ‘ Kiedistribution of sands in the Bonney landscape has not greatly disturbed the original topography, A SW tu NE trend is evident in areas of steep topo- Eraphy, If there has been redistribution of sands in an E-W direction the effect LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT tls has been weak. It may be concluded that the formation of the Bonney land- scape post-dutes all or at least most of the aeolian activity which resulted in WNW-ESE dune alignment elsewhere, The situation in the Seymuur and Bonney combinations is in agreement with the impression gained by stereoscopic examination Vhat an E-W orientation is superimposed on the originally NE treuding furmer coastal dunes in County Cardwell (units 6 and 7, Fig. 6) and at the westernmost dune range (unit 4) has preserved its preduminantly NE trend, There is general agreement that the south-eastern coastal dune ranges date from the Pleistocene. This certainly applies to the Bormey Rauye, which from corelation with its suuth-castern equivalents may be related to the Great inter- glacial (according to Sprigg, 1952), or the Penultimate Gluciation (according to Tlossfeld, 1950). Hence the formation of WNW-ESE sand ridges of the older wits in the area which actually extend over 4 large portion of southern Aus- tralia also dates from the Pleistocene period. This is in conatrist with the hypo- \hesis postulated by Crocker, who relates the distribution of leached sands to u severe Recent Arid Period of some 3,000 to 6,000 veurs avo (Crocker, 1946a and h), Further supporting evidence is that the alluvial deposits of the Bremer combination eroded the older Seymour and Vilang combinations. which at that time already had their E-W orientution fully developed. Several soils formed on the Brenier materials lave been sampled and their mechanical analysis compared with thuse from the Milang eombination in Table 1. Firstly, it ts clear that the soil materials of profiles A227. 229, 232 and 38, representing the Milang landscape, have @ typical mechanival cumpasition, They contain pruetically na_silt and have a rather constant course ta fine sand ratio. These (Solodized Solonetz) soils have a very sharp texture contrast be- tween the surface (A) and subsoil (B) horizon. ‘The ratio is ramarkahly con- stant vertically also and both horizons are genetically strongly related, Sccundly, the soils of alluvial origin of the Milang (A230, 331 and 239) and Bremer com- binations have a much lower coarse ta fine sum ratio quite distinct from those of the old landseape. They contain an appreciable amen of silt En this respect the young alluvial soils (A400, 405 and 425) are best provided. These figures indicate that no mixture of materials between the two units occurred, not even in the small alluvial inclusions within the Milang combination; which is to be expected if there were two separated periods of aeolian activity. It wenld he untenable tu maintain that the sand ridges of the Milang com- bination originate trom the Recent Arid Period. because in that case depusition of the Bremer materials coupled with removal of portion of the ridged landd- scape, follawed by acolian redistribution inte gently indulating plains without specific trend, subsequent formation of mattre soily and deposition of the Maleolm deposits as well as younger alluviuin should all post-date the Recent Ark] Cyele. The geomorphology of the Jukes area is rather in agreement with the hypothesis furthered by Fairbridye ef al. (1952) who concluded that evi- dence in Western Australia corresponds closely with the conclusion reached in Morocco that successive generations of ueolianites correspond to interglacial periods. Kach major cycle of dunes and high shorelines was separated from the next by erosional phenomena of a short period when sea level was consider- ably lowered, The maxima of the pluvials correspond te the glacial maxima when all the climatic belts migrated equatorwards and temperate-wet climates interrupted the descrt conditions when the aeolianites were formed. Fairbridge (1953) and also Hossfeld (1950) associated the suggestion that erosive cycles occurred repeatedly during the Pleistocene period with the theory C, J. pe MOOY 116 SE-0 ai $I L¥ LL = £-0 Str ¥ e9 9To1q Temaqeur [BLA |e Bun0 x 12-0 SE rd Gz ") =o wr Gop | wwoy AvP yBary euoysue'y ureo] AeA 12-0) 8% UZ RE 8 a L-§ or v sure, sesuy oI-0 LE ¥ I¢ f lest 08ST LOF V QF Sallag &-0 eg 8 If L ea $LOL 0 8 IT rat) 6 Iv F0 10h V Bf Solty 9-0 6L — LP LG dq 1z-81 GO8 W Ig sotleg Ge-0 it u er (i 1d 11-8 868 ¥ OG Seley ¢9-0 gt I 18 0% a SUFI 168 ¥ 6F Satay pues 9-0 LE g +P oT 2a OE-£E O68 ¥ SULB]q LeuIeIg ToUIOIg, 9:0 Ls g 9L 1a FI-9 CFO a IT ig IV z0 688 ¥ OI salag 19-0 3¢ OT at Ta gia 20 rat 81 Fr : Vv TO 183 ¥ Z| slag Perea) ig i) 1g Ta tal {eMapeUL [BLAUTTy ve) F 9 LO IV 0) O88 V¥ LT sone Suey F1 LG — (ira IF a It-L yey UT 1 ¢ g gf Te Iv £0 Bes ¥ pues oT Aysy ge if = er 9¢ | eV O8-ST aap JSoM-SBO uqQ §-L ra = Ge eo l¥ £-0 FEE ¥ pues WANS quieg jULIpPIBexopy 7 i ae 1 §-1T OF € ra ir ea rea ae j 5 apes ST 8 £ Le 0g Vv xt) Lit V (¢9) SI seneg ANOULABS 3-1 $¢ T 8% IF jess ST-6 wee] 0-3 £ if 18 €9 IV 2-0 GEE ¥ pues uo4terp 8-1 68 = ae 6g 1a 98-08 adpl qsom-qsea jo adoye L-T e sort cE 19 IV 6-0 Che V pues woyAHpy F-1 RG I Ro OF fs se yy. UL F-T 9 g g& es Iv gO 6cz F Somag Let Le = Le CF ea 0-91 - 9-1 0% = 8 FP Ta FT-E1 | espll Jseai-ises UC) e-T I — 9 6& iV ¥-0 LEE V pues ssruUly Suyyyy SyABIO yy be g ‘AL iT Qs ARO 4S a" ol ssi) UOZWOFT yqideq . ON Tos TWOTPBUIQULOTS j ayuoig ~sisdpRUy [BOTUBTOeyYT TT ATV LAKES ALEXANDRINA AND ALBERT WT ot wae changes as expressed by Flint (1945), Keble (1947) and Gentilli $49). Flint claims that glacial periods of the regions affected by glaciers Were replaced by plovial periods al lowes latitudes, during which the climate was relatively moist and cool while the interpluvial periods were characterized by warmer and drier climates. His hypothesis, based on fluctuations of atmos- pherie turbul:nee, allows for a number of erosive cycles during the Pleistocene. Keble (loc. cit.) and Gentilli (loc, cit.) expressed the opinion that during glacial maxima most of Australia was covered by humid, covl forest. This would be due to the advanced temperate belt during the expansion of the glaciers: During glacial minima the north would be under superhumid forest, while the south would still fall in a subhbumid woodland zone. This would be associited with the expansion of the wet equatorial belt. It follaws from this that during each major glacial and interglacial cycle the arid climate belt would move across the Australian continent twice, Hheoretically creating two cycles of unstable vegetation and landscape in general, Regarding the alignment of longitudinal dimes it relation Lo the prevailing winds, Barkley (1935) pointed out that the direction uf the Mallee sand dunes appears to be determined nol by lhe prevailing winds which are north in winter and south in summer (s.i.c.) but by the direction ot the strongest gusts accom- panying the change of wind, The prevailing winds of the present day, however, create a north-casterly trend in the coastal dunes and it is difficult to sec how the WNW-ESE dune ridges could be in balance with them. Yet they are longitudinal dunes which developed parallel to the direction of the dominuting wind at the time of their formation. Madigan (1936, 1935, 1946) showed that the sand dunes of the Australian deserts are everywhere longitudinal tidges, There trend is parallel to the diree- tion cf the prevailing wind, which varies: in different parts of the desert. The general trend in the Simpson desert is to the NNW- The hypothesis of migrating climatic belts offers an explanation For the direction of the Mallee dune ridves, whereby the wind regime associated with each climate is not affected. Southward shifts of the climatic belts duving periods of decreasing glaciation can even account for recurrence of those desert couditions, separated by periods of dominating south-westerlies. Such a theory even if it is an over-simplification of the real climatic Auctua- tions is quite able to explain the formation of the landscape in ageeement with field observations: formation of the visible coastal dune ranges as unconsolidated sands during Pleistocene high sea leycls, aeolian redistribution in SW ta NE direction nnder snhsequent arid conditions, leaching of lime and sail formation in temperate-wet climates of the glacial maxima, E-W redistribution of leached sands under unstable landscape conditions during subsequent aridity and por- hela coastal dune formation when the sea level dpproaches a new maximum evel, IV. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Grateful acknowledgment is made of the work by Dr. Ny tb. Ludbrook of the Department of Mines, South Australia, who carried out the palacontological determination of the environmental conditions of depusitiun frum soil samples submitted, Mr, B. ‘Tindale from Yarra Junction, Victoria: examined the diatoms, Mr. G. Blackbur, C.S.LB.O., Division of Soils, contributed with very helpful suggestions and criticism on the manuseript. 118 (. J. pe MOOY ‘The mechanical analyses were carried out under the direction of Mr. J. T. Hutton, of the same division. V. REFERENCES Barruey, IL, 1935, Dune building in the Victorian mallee, Rept. A.N.Z.A.A.S,, 29, pp. 436-437 (abstr.), Crocker, R. L., 1946a. Post-Miocene climatic and geologic history and its. significance in relation to the genesis of the major soil types. of South Australia, Bull. C.LS.R. No, 193. Crocker, R, L., 1946b, An introduction to the soils and vegetation of Eyre Peninsula, 5.A., ‘Trans. Roy, Soc. $.A., 70, pp, 83-L07. Famusnmocr, R. W., and Trrcnent, C., 1952. Soil horizons and marine bands in the coastal limestones of 'W.A,, J. Proc: Roy. Soc, N.S.W., 86, pp. 68-87, Famsnioce. R. W., 1953, Australian stratigraphy. Fuixr, R. F,, 1945. Pleistocene yeulogy and the Pleistocene epoch. Gentittt, J., 1949, Foundations of bird geography. The Einu. 49, pp, 85-129. Hossreup, P. 8., 1950. The late Cainozoje history of the South-Bast of South Australia, Trans. Roy. Soe. $.A,, 73. pp. 232-279, Howcrin, W., 1929. Notes on the geology of the Great Pyap Bead (Loxton), River Murray Rasin and remarks on the geological history of the River Murray, Trans. Roy. Sac. S.A., 53, pp. 167-195. Jack, KR. L., 1921. The salt aud gypsum resources of South Australia, Dept. of Mines, Geal, Sarvey of S.A., Bull. No. S. Jackson, E. A. and. Lrrenmenn, W. H., 1954, The soils and potential land use of part of County Cardwell in the Coonalpyn Downs, South Australia, C.$.0.R.0.. Soils and Land Use Series, No, 14. Kesce, R. A., 1947, Notes on Australian Quaternary climates and anigration, Mem, Nat. Mus. Vict,, 15, pp. 25-81. Kin, D., 1950. Unpublished data. Kine, D., 1951. Cooke Plains gypsum deposit, Mining Review (S.A. Dept. of Mines), No. 91, pp. 141-148. Manican, ©. T., 19836, The Australian sand ridge deserts, Geogr, Rey,, 26, pp. 205-227. MAneAN, C.'T., 1935. The Simpson desert and its. borders, J. Prac. Roy. Soc. N.S,W., ZL, pp. 503-434, Mamcan, GC, T., 1946. The Simpson cesert expedition 1939: Scientific reports: No, 6 Geo logy; the sand formations, ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A., 70, np. 45-63. Mawson, D., 1929, South, Australian algal lunestones in process. af formation. Geol. Soc. Loudon Quart. Journal, 85 (1V), pp. 613-623, péE Mooy, C, J. (in press). Soils and. potential land use of the area around Lakes Alexan- drina and Albert, South Australia, C.S.1.R.0., Soils and Land Use Series. Sparec, R, C., 1952. The geology of the South-East Province, South Australia, with ‘special relerence to Quaternary coastline migrations and modern beach developments, Dept. of Mines, Geological Survey of S.A., Bull. No. 29. Tate, R., 1882. Geological sectims about Wellington or north-east shore of Lake Alexan- drina, Trans. and Proc. and Report Roy. Sac. $.A., 4, pp. 144-145, Tate, R., 1900, Section of a well bore at Mulgundawa, near Wellington, $.A., Trans. Hoy, Soe. S.A,, 24, pp. 109-111. Taytor, J. K., and Pootr, H. G., 1931, Beport on the soils of the bed of Lake Albert, South Australia, J, C,S.1-R., 4, pp. 83-95, Tinvate, N, B,, 1933. Geulogical and physiographical notes, Tantanoola Caves, South-East of South Australia, Trans, Roy. Soc, §$.A., 57, pp. 130-142. TinvAre, N, 5B... 1947,. Subdivision of Pleistovene time in S.A. Rec, S.A, Mus., 8. pp. 619-652. Du Moay PLATE | Fig, a—YView of river terraces at Currency Creek. Micldle terrace (CGa) in foreground, aii a te te ee Fig. b.—Stranded shoreline near Goolwa, The toe of the dune (1) is situated above the Jevel of the flats (11) in foreground, De Mooy PiLare | (cont, ) F Fiz. ¢—Detail of depositionary creeks in Malcolin combination on Hindmarsh Tsland, The Murray Mouth just below the photograph is at the south of the island, PLATE 2 ad purgsnysuno x uO ALES daap UI SOLE OLQUIIUOT) “ppasuru De Mooy Dr Moos PLATE 3 ANDRINA RANGE ie SiTE OF FORMER ia a is tics, ‘ * Vig. b,—Site of possible former Murray Mouth looking south fron. Alexandrina Range, Surt visible over low dunes, De Moov PLATE «4 Vig. a—Gently vindulating limestone tindscape with superimpesed dune ridwes in Seymour combination Fig, bh—Two sheets of limestone overlying acolianite in the Alexandrine combination, Grass is urowing on top of the lower limestone Tayer, PLEISTOCENE STRANDLINES OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY NORMAN B. TINDALE Summary PLEISTOCENE STRANDLINES OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST OF SOUTIT AUSTRALIA. by Norman B. Tinpace {Read 10 July 1953] The Pleistocene Terraces of the South-Fast of South Australia have received much attention because the low slope of the continental shelf has caused the successive strandlines of the Pleistocene and Recent Periods to be spread out over a width of more than 60 miles from the present coastline, enubling detailed study of many minor phases elsewhere obscured by erosion and by compression wit 2 much steeper continental margin. The present writer first contributed to the discussion of this subject in 1933 and again in 1947. On several journcys between Naracoorte and Keith since 1954 the Fore- dune of the Naracoorte Terrace has heen closely followed and it was established that it remains on the right of the observer all the way from Nuracoorte ta Keith, there being a hinge or change of direction from north-north-west to nurth by eust in the vicinity of Darwent Waterhole (Section 7, Hundred of Willulookz), where outeropy of granite, furming Jow domes at or near former sea Jevel cause local disturbance in the regularity of the dune linc, There ure other granite uuterops in the Houdred of Marcollat and to the west. At a point three miles eust of Keith the Naracoorte Terrace forc-dunes can be seen in section at quar- ties in the vicinity of Section 51, Hundred af Stivling. The front of the dunes appears to face a vast embayment forming the Keith flats which also at ene timc seem to have been a lake. Vhe section was demonstrated to Dr, Brian Daily an it brief visit to. Keith on 15 February, 1957. Elevation of Keith R.R. Station on the former sea and Jake fluor Frenting the Naracoorte Range is LOL ft, and the line of railway rises sharply te 210 ft. ag it climbs the terrace escarpment towards Brimbago. Naracoorte K.R, Ste- tion is at 189 #t, It is situated on a Hood fan ut the mouth of Naracoorte Creek where it opeus on to the old sea Boor of Naracoorte times. Away from this alluviated area the interdune flat in the vicinity of Naracoorte may be as low as 120 ft. above sea level, as at Lake Roy about twelve mites north-north-west. ‘The interpretation placed on the maps of the Geological Survey and out- lined in Bulletin 29 of the Mines Department of South Australia delineates the Nuracvorte "lerrace as running north-westward in a direct continuation of the line of the Terrace at Naracoorte (Sprige, 1952). The new facts indicate that just beyond the point where their maps terminate there is a marked change in direction, Some revision may be necessary in cur views aud in particulur there may have been less warping than postulated by Sprigg or it may have affected a smaller area. The writer has formed the opinion, indeed, that the Naracoorte Terrace reported as standing at approximately 145 ft. above present sea level and vonsidered to be down-warped to ihe north at a tilt of 1-3 ft. to the mile, may be less down-warped than has becn suggested, some part of the apparent warping being an expression of differential erosion and sedimentation, and an- other the diversion of the strandline to the north which alters our interpreta- tion of the pusitions of the strands, Tt muy be significant that a feeble prior river system has maintained itself across the area ever since this series of strand- Trans. Roy. Svc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol, x2, 20 N. B. TINDALE lines commenced to form and the scale of warping docs not appear to have induced rejuvenation or marked diversion as a result of the deformation. Unfortunately, the testing of the area presents difficulties for, although very uecurate survey heights are availahle for the South-East of our State, these Leeome fewer and fail altogether towards the Upper South-East, leaving prin- cipully the Railway Survey heights as the basic guide. JZowever, these observa- tions may serve to draw renewed attention to earlier deductions by Tindale (1933, 1947), Ie considered it possible to trace cach Pleistocene ‘strandline werdss the area broken by granitic domes northward of the Ihindreds of Tand- seer and Peacock, etc., in such a way as to link up with corresponding strand- lines at roughly similar heights above sea level, along the Murray River, The Marmon Jabuk Range north of Keith was considered, for example, to be a north. ward extension of the “earliest Pleistocene dune Range”, which he then con- sidered to be the Naracoorte Strand. [t can now be re-asserted that it is likel to be part of a complex with a front of Naracoorte and a rear of Hynam strand- line features representing an early Inter-Glacial sea margin ov margins, perhaps of Milazzian date, The seaward face of the Naracoorte strandline can be traced northward from the vicinity of Keith into the Hundred of Archibald as an extension of the fore-dunes of the Naracoorte strandline. Tindale did not differentiate between the Hyman and Naracoorte Terraves described by Sprigy (1952) and his work must be read with this deficiency in mind. ‘The dual nature of the Naracoorte Terrace where it turns northward is evident in the south-west corner of the Hundred of Wirrega. It was well illustrated as early as in the May, 1905, edition of the Hundred of Wirega inch-to-the-mile map. This shows by its delineation of the original vegeta- tional pattern, the Naracoorte strandline in the south-western corner of the Tundred, with Swede Flat compressed between it and what would probubly equate with the older Hynam strand. This last named rons north-north-west to east-south-east and is denoted by a belt of dunes, ranging from three and a half to five miles in width. seaward from a line joining Sections 433 and 362. In passing, it may be noted that Sprig interpreted the shallowing of the present Coorong lagown in a southerly direction to be due to the progressive northward down-warping he had postulated. Alderman and Skinner (1957) have shown that precipitation of dolomitic limestone from Incoming sea water is occurring and it may well be this activity which was wither the chief agent, or at least another factor, in causing the shallowing of the Coorong lagouns southward at a distance from the sea mouth. REFERENCES Atpenaran, A. F., and Skinner, HW, C., 1957. Amer. Sourn. of Scienoe, New York; 255, pp, 561-367, Hossrexp, P, S., 1950. Trans. Roy, ‘Soe. $. Aust., Adelaide, 73, pp. 232-279) Sreicc, R. C,, 1952. Geol. Surv. of S, Aust., Adelaide, Bulletin 29. Tinnatr, N. B., 1933. ‘Lrans. Roy. Sac, S. Aust, Adelaide, 57, pp. 130-142 Trspate, N. B., 1947; Ree. §. Aust’ Mus,, Adelaide, 8, pp. 619-652. COMMUNAL EGG-LAYING IN THE LIZARD LEIOLOPISMA GUICHENOTI (DUMERIL AND BIBRON) BY FRANCIS J. MITCHELL Summary The following observations were made in the Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia, between 1949 and 1955. It is suggested that the communal nests discovered indicate that this species may form aggregation~ which possess a higher degree of social organisation than that usually credited to reptile communities. COMMUNAL EGG-LAYING IN THE LIZARD LEIOLOPISMA GUICHENOTI (Dumeri] and Bibron) by Francis J. Mrrcoe.i* [Read 1L September 1958] The following observations were made in the Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia, beltween 1949 and 1955. It is suggested that the communal nests dis- covercd indicate that this species may form aguregations which possess a higher degree of social organisation than that usually credited to reptile communitics, OBSERVATIONS On Ist May, 1949, at Waitpinga, South Australia, the writer observed several small lizards emerging from the centre of a dead Gruss-tree stump (Xanthorrhea) about 12 inches in diameter. On further investigation no fewer than 211 eggs were found closely and uniformly packed in the suwdust-like material which smrrounded the hard central core to a depth of about six inches. Of these, 62 had hatched, many of the young being busily engaged digging themselves to the surfave, and the majority of the remainder hatched in the laboratory during the ensuing 48 hours. Of the 37 which failed to hatch, 31 cuntained fully developed embryos which had been dehydrated in transit lo the laboratory, and the remaining six, which were much smaller, measuring only & % 5 mum, were apparently infertile. Imrnediately before hatching the cess measured 13 * & mm, Gravid females taken at the same locality between the Tth and 14th November, 1948, exch contained three eges measuring 7 * 4 mm. Fhe size of these eggs as compared with that immediately before hatching indi- cates considerable assimilation of uid during development, the volume increas- ing almost four times. On hatching the hzards measured 41 mm. and they grew without external food to 47-48 mm. In the hope of being able to observe the actual deposition of the eggs, a further search of the area was made early in December, 1949, but no aggrega- tions of more than fonr or five individnals were seen, and these small cliques were found to inclide males. All females examined were still carrying eggs. However, the investigation of potential nesting sites resulted in the discovery of an old nest containing 29 egg-shells, These were inside another Xanthorrhea stimp about two miles from the first site, The nest was old, and appeared to have heen dug out hy a native rat. Since May, 1949, all casual inquiries received at the South Australian Museum concerning lizard’s eggs have been investigated, and this has resulted in the discovery of four more communal nests. On the 23rd December, 1953, a nest containing 49 cegs measuring 9 x 6 mim, was found in a garden at Stirling, South Australia, The eggs were buried about two inches beneath the surface in loose loamy soil, and were exposed when a small hole was being dug to plant a shrub. The eggs had been freslily laid as the garden was only prepared for slanting during the previous week-end, Specimens of L, guichenoit were abundant in blackberry bushes adjacent to the garden. ° Curator of Reptiles, South Australian Museum. Trans. Roy. Sec. S. Aust. (1959), Vol a3. 122 “oF. J. MITCHELL On the 22nd January, 1955, a nest, estimated to contain over 100 eggs mea- suring approximately i cm, long, was found in a heap of vegetable debris lying against the wall of a wooden shed at Aldgate, South Australia. Unfortunately, these eggs were not cxamined, but using EB. R. Waite’s “Reptiles and Amphi- - bians of South Australia’, the obseryer, Mr. L. K. Clarke, of Adelaide, South Australia, identified the embryos as L, metallicwma, The species metallicum and guichenoti are closely allied and could easily be confused; L. guichenoti is the common species in this district. On the 4th February, 1953, another nest was discovered at Stirling, South Australia. lt contained 88 eggs which were found lying side by side in a hollow under a rotting log. The embryos were sufficiently well developed for recognition as Leiolopisma guichenoti, A nest containing “many dozens of eggs” was exposed during the ploughing of a partly cleared paddock near Port Macdonnell, South Australia, during April, 1948. Some of the eggs had hatched, and the finder, Mr. G, H. Tilley of Moorak, South Anstralia, captured several of the young and preserved them in methylated spirit, together with a dozen unhatched eggs. These specimens were presented to the South Australian Museum in Junc, 1955, and identified as 1, guichenoti, (Specimens registered under $,A.M. R 3713.) DISCUSSION, Sociologists have accepted the greater majority of group behaviour in reptiles as simple tropistic aggregation without a communal aim or internal organisation. Although in the present case Uhe deposition of the eggs has not been dircotly observed, the data suggests that the gravid females congregate for the purpose of locating i common nesting site, Assuming this to be correct, these lizards must possess a well-developed sense of recognition and be capable of forming communities in which there is distinct couction between the indivi- duals. Reviewing the observations it is difficult to conceive any other means by which 30-70 Reiale lizards could independently seek out a single nesting site. Furthermore, the nesting sites chosen do not appear to be unique within the general environment. Vegetable debris and dead Xanthorrhea stamps are abundant throughout the sclerophyllous scrub which forms the major habitat of this species in Lhe Mount Lofty Ranges, while the 49 eggs discovered at Stirling in December, 1953, were in the loose soil of a garden plot, all sections of which appeared to be of uniform consistency and humidity. The present evidence is fragmentary and inconclusive, but it is hoped that the publication of these observations will stimulate the interest of other workers who muy be able to undertake 4 complete field study of this interesting socio- logical problem. THE NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS AT HAAST BLUFF, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA. BY J. B. CLELAND AND NORMAN B. TINDALE Summary A general description is given of the country around Haast Bluff on the northern side of the MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia, and the native names for over 120 plants are given, together with notes on use, if any, made of them by Aranda and Pintubi natives. THE NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS AT HAAST BLUFF, CENTRAL AUSTRALIA. by J. B. Crecanwp ann NonmMan B. Trexpa.e [Read 11 September 1958] SUMMARY A geyeral description is given of the counity ayournl Haast Bluff on the northern side of the MacDonnell Ranges, Central Australia, and the native names tor ever 120 plants are given, together with notes on wse, if any, mace af them by Aranda ancl Pintubi natives. INTRODUCTION The Seventeenth and Kightcenth Anthropological Expeditions organised by the University of Adelaide to study the natives, left Adelaide for Alice Springs on 10th August, 1956, and 15th August, 1957, respectively, These Expeditions were financed by a liberal grant from the Wenner-Gren Corporation for Anthro- pological Research Incorporated (previously the Viking Fund) of New York, supplemented by substantial assistance from the University of Adelaide and its Board for Anthropological Research and from the South Australian Museum, and by transport facilities granted by the Conmunwealth and State Governments. The members of these Expeditions have been very much indebted to the Minister for the Interior (the Hon, Paul Ilasluck), the Administration at Alice Springs and the Department of Native Affairs and its officers for much help and cordial assistance in making their investigations. On arrival at Alice Springs, the party journey by motor vehicles to Haast Bluff Aboriginal Reserve Station situated 15 miles S.W. from Haast Bluff (of recent geographers), itself about 160 miles due west of Alice Springs and on the Tropic of Capricom. Here, during a stay of about three weeks in each case, an intensive study of the natives was made by various members of the purty. Though the natives were detribalised, the Pintubi people from the Western Aus- tralian border area only recently and imperfectly, and were im more or less permanent residence at the. Government Station, they still retain much of their knowledge of the natural history of their surroundings and readily supplied names and uses of plants that were shown to them. During our stay, visits were paid ta Blanche Towers, Mt. Palmer and Mt. Liebig, to Areonga im the Krichauff Range and ta Hermamnsburg, to Mt. Wedge Station and Yuendumnu, and to the Finke Gorge, at which places some additional plants were gathered, After the plant was shown to the natives, it was placed in an envelope or paper bag and given a number with the appropriate information, These plants were then crudely pressed and at the same time similar specimens were placed in a botanical press. On return tu Adelaide, the plants in the envelopes were identified, and we would like to acknowledge the help we have received from the State Botanist (Dr. H. Fichler); Dr. Consett Davis of the University of New England; Mr. George Chippendale, Kotanist to the Animal Industry Division of the Northern Territory Administration; and Mr, Dayid Symon of the Waite ~ Institiite. These specimens, seen by the natives, wil) be presented to the South Australian State Herbarium. Trans. Roy, Soc, 8. Aust, (1959), Val. 82. itt J. B. CLELAND axe N, B, TINDALE CENERAL DESCRIPTION OF HAAST BLUFF ABORIGINAL RESERVE Hanst Bluff Reserve, commencing about 150 miles due west of Alice Springs and straddling the Tropic of Capricorn, has an area of about 3,900 square miles- Much of it is low, red sandhill country with a vegetation of its own. We were camped at the eastern end on a mulga plain between the bald mountain masses of the Haast Bluff Range, running west almost to Mt. Liebig, and the distant Mereenie Range, the west end of the MacDonnells, padlvsally diminishing in height. The northern section of this plain runs west to terminate between the picturesque Blanche Towers and Mt, Palmer on the suuth and the Maast Bluff continuation on the narth, For descriptive purposes. this terrain can be divided into the plains, the usuully dey watercourses, and the mountain masses with their gorges and talus at the base where slopes were thickly vovered with gibbers. THE MULGA PLAINS The mulga (Acacia aneura) an the settlement is of (wo kinds, one with the usual nactaw phyllodes, 3 to 8 cm. * 1 mm,, and the other (var. latifolia) with broader glaucous foliage, the phyllodes 4 ta. § cm, * 5 to 8 mm. n. Theve was much young mulga 2 to 3 feet high. Some of the young mulgas spread out laterally for 5 feet when only 2 feet high, others tended to grow upwards. Some half yrown trees have branches stretching out horizontally, but there seem only the two kinds of adult trees here, in height about 18 tu 25 fect, There are many mulga honey-ant holes with rounded raised rims 3 ta 4 ins. high, covered with fallen mulga’ phyllodes, and about LO to 16 ins. across, with Several broad openings to the nest in the centre, which is about 5 ins, wide. These mulga ant holes are only seen in the mulga country and usually close to the bases af the trees, Deep imegular excavations indicate where the natives have been digging out the “honey hays”. The flowering of the mulga is probably irregular, depending on the oecurrence mM rain. A few trees were coming into fower during our stay, No honey could be tasted in the cylindrical spikes of flowers but, as will be mentioned later, a sweet fluid exudes from the glund at the base of the phyllodes when the sap is rising, and a lac seale, when it infests a tree, may result in an abundance of sweet exudate, At the time of our visit, a sea of a beautiful pink, due to the everlasting, Helichrysum cassinianum, spread out under the mulga, to be replaced elsewhere by white from Melipterum floribundion (the specific name well deserved ), ov yellow, from HI, charsleyac. Very abundant und widely spread was the luwl Composite bindi-eye (Culotis hispidula) with its painful spined achenes, tend- ing, to fet into one’s clothing, following on the insignificant Howers. Very abun- dant also was the Crucifer, Stenopetalum nutans, giving « rather dull yellaw tinge to the surface when very abundant and having a rather unpleasant smell, resembling the B.B.C. (bromobenzyl chloride) tear gas of the war. In driving through where this was abundant the smell permeated ito the vehicle, whereas the fragrance of the pink everlasting was almost confined to a nasegay uf it. Another magnificent mass of colour was the dazzling brilliance in places af the yellow flowers of Senecio gregorii, a brilliance almost painful to the eye when the sun shone upon an acre or so iW an open space. Bassia convexula, with five Beales on the fruits, was alsa very common with some B. cornishiana similarly armed, Witchetty bushes (Acacia kempeana) were abundant in places, and espect- ally on light’ stony rises, Cassia bushes, chiefly C. eremophila vay. platypoda. in uddition to the mula, the plints particularly used by the natives were the NATIVE, NAMES AND USES OF PLAN'IS 125 berries of Solanum ellipticum, which may be fairly abundant, and the Asclepiad, Pentutropis kempeana, seen occasionally scrambling up a mulga stem. THE SAND-RIDGES Low reddish Trivdia covered sand-ridges, rouning east and west, extend north of the Haast Bluff Range towards Mt. Wedge. We passed over 40 miles of these to the east of the Mount between the new aboriginal settlement of Koolpunya and Mt. Wedge Station in part of the range of that name. Pic. turesque graves of Desert Oaks (Casuarina decainseana) grew on many of these. The seedling Casuarina becomes first a rather intricately branched shrub. It then grows into a cylindrical small tree like a church-yard cypress, and finally branches out laterally on top into quite an umbrageous head, Another feature of the sand-ridges was the glaucous mallec-like Eucalyptus gamophylla with its broad opposite leaves joined together at the stem. On many of the ridges there was little else, but when the soil became more suitable, as towards Mt, Wedge Station, various shrubs appeared between the T'rivdia, and the long siphoned Nicotiana ingullu, much sought after by the natives, grew by the side of the track, its fragrant white flowers scenting the air at dusk. Oveusional hlnadwoods, corkwoods and whitewoods (Atalaya) were on the ridges and some yellowish leafless shrubs of Exocarpus spurtea with a drooping bruom- like appearance. Broad-leayed parakeclya (Calandrinia balonnensis) found shelter under the Triodia. Several belts of Melaleuca glomerata, usually assu- ciated with watercourses. were passed through and a couple of Salicornia {Samphire) flats. As far as this type of cuuntry is concerned, there did net appear to be much uf use to the natives. The tobacco was, of course, important. The Iloulwood Eucalypts might yield some “bloodwood apples” which contain a large juicy female coceid, sind the wilehetty bushes (Acacia kempeana) conld contain the grubs of that name in their roots. The Triodia near the north edge of this country seemed larger, more exible and less prickly than that in the ridges, and “Nosepeg", the Pintubi native with us, pointed out the red sand-encnisted resinuvus tunnels on some of the leaves protecting the underlying Cuccid from whieh Triodia (usually spoken of us ‘spinifex’) gum is obtained. THE PLAIN BETWEEN THE HAAST BLUFF AND MEREENIE RANGES The country for the 27 miles tu Blanche Towers is nearly flat, There are some belts of dense mulga and many patches of Triodiv in heavy sandy loam, sometimes quite open with oceusional tall bushes of Grevillea juncifolia, Eueo- lyplus papuena, and bloodwoud or Euc. gamophylla, Towards the western end were muny fine Desert Kurrajongs with tall roamed boles and spreading branches high up. growing in sandy loam. These were succeeded by Desert Oaks, the half-grown trees vomicocylindrical. Often Hut, very hard termitaria, uecurred amongst the THodia and tall ones, three to four feet and Hat-sided. amongst the mulga. THE WATERCOURSES The watercourses have a vegetation of their own. Tu most vf them, the Red Gum (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) with bluntly conical rather than rostrate opercula, is ta be found as well as Solanums, Crotalaria dissitiflora, Coral Trees (Erythrina vespertilio), the fragrant Prostanthera striatiflora, sedwes, grasses, Cassias and other shrubs, (26 J. B. CLELAND anv N. B, TUINDALE THE MOUNTAINS AND HILLS The mountains are covered with scattered Triodia tufts where the slope permits them to grow. On the tops, as at Mt. Liebig, Acacias and other shrubs may be found not scen lower down, In the gorges grow Native Ifup-bushes di hi petiolaris), the Native Currant (Carissa brownii), Grevillea wick- rami, tufts of scented grass, Sulamums, and many otber under-shrubs and herbs, Native pines (Callitris glauca) are uncommon here, At Taliperta Spring near Mt, Palmer, a permanent spring under the shadow of a ledge has given for many centuries a shower-bath which has enabled something like five species of fern to survive desiccation. Triodia-covered rocky outliers of the Haast Bluff Range near the settlement had scattered small trees of Eucalypius papuena and Eue. gamophylta (shrubby), two species of Cassia, Acacia notabilis, Ac. patens, a Lycopodium- like Acacia, a viscid species of Acacia and one with very long phyllodes, and as tare lowly plants, scattered Goodenia ravenelit, an Indigofera, Kerandrinia with its blue flowers, Grevillea wickhami, a daisy (Minuaria ?) and the fern Notholaena. In such types of country, the original Aranda, Kukatja and Jumu natives and the intruding Pintubi of later years. successfully obtained the necessities of tribal life. It is the object of this paper to record the names and uses of the plants that were available to them. The uses comprise food plants, such as herries, other fruits, cresscs, tubers, roots, grains, honey, gull-insects, ete; the Native Tobaccos; woods for weapons and utensils; and plants used for adorn- ment sand other purposes, There are probably more than 1,200 species of vaseular plants in Central Australia between 20° S. (passing through Tanami and well south of Tennant Creek} and 26° §. at the South Australian border. One of us (J-B.C.) has himself collected more than 530 separate species. During the 1956 Expedition, 133 specimens comprising 110 species of vascular plants and two fungi, were submitted to the natives. During the 1956 Expedition, the number of speci- mens was 165, consisting of 132 species. Some of these species were the same us were submitted on the first occasion and this served as a check on the native names that were given then. The total number of species including 3 varieties shown to the natives was 191, On x rough estimate one might say that about one-sixth of the vascular plants of the area were shown to the natives, This list must comprise nearly all the species of economic use to them. There must be a considerable number of small ephemeral plants that come up after rain which are of no consequence to them, Of the total of 191 species, 55 had no name or use, and a number of others had a name but were not used. The uses of the plants can be placed under the following headings:— Grains of grasses, winnowed and made into a paste: Tragus ravemosus, Brachiuria piligera, Panicum deconipositum, Mragrastis evlopoda, E. dielsii, Ductylocnemium radulans. Other seeds ground into a paste: Chenopodium rhadinostachyum, Portulaca oleracea, Acacia ligulata, Acacia patens, Brachychiton grégorti (Desert Kurrajong ). Seeds caten: Casuarina decalsneand. Currant-like berries: Carissa Lrownii, Plectronia latifotia. NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 127 Tomato-like fruits: _ Solanum nemophilum, 8, ceaetiliferum, S. ellipticum, 8. eremophilum, S. diversiflorum, S. phlomoicdes. Other fruits: Ficus platypoda, Rucarya acuminata, Loranthus murrayi, Enchylaena tomen- fosa, Capparis mitchellit (native orange). Leaves and secd-vessels eaten: Marsdenia australis (leaves and young banana-shaped fruits), Cyanehum floribundum (leaves and young fruits), Penfatropis kempeana (ieaves and follicles), Roots eaten: Boerhaavia diffusa, Portulaca oleracea, Vigna lanceolata, Leaves steamed: Lepidium muelleri-ferdinandi, Flowers sucked for honey: Hakea ivoryi (corkwood), Eucalyptus terminalis (bloodwood ). Ash used with Pituri: Acacia sp. Tobacco leaves chewed: Nicotiana gossei, N. ingulba. Piants used as medicine by steaming: Though the idea may have derived from contact with Europeans who doubt- less imputed medicinal qualities when there was an aromatic scent, it is probably original. Steaming is used in all parts of Australia and steaming- oven stones occur in deposits from the Pirrian Culture onwards, a period of at least 4,000 years. Prostanthera striatiflora, Stemodia viscosa, Eremophila gilesii. Yielding adhesives: Triodia basedowii, Xanthorrhoea thorntoni, Apart from these vegetable sources of food, whose food values can be as- certained if necessary in years ta come, the natives obtained animal foods in the shape of Aesh (of marsupials, dingoes, small rodents, birds, lizards and snakes), Of birds’ eggs and of insects (witchetty grubs from moths and beetles, termites and their eggs, grasshoppers and locusts, female coccids in galls on the bloodwood, und lerp), and honey from the mulga honev-ants and native bees, TILE SOLANUMS OF CENTRAL AUSTRALIA The Solanums of Australia are of considerable interest as being a source of food far the aborigines. In fact, in Centval Australia one species, Solanum ellip- ticwm, is of real importance as it is said to furnish small edible green tomatoes all the year round and is a widely distributed species and with reasonable as- siduity in the search (or it, numerous enough to furnish food on most occasions and situations. In South Australia, 26 species of Solanum are known, S. lasiophyllam hav- ing been found in the Tomkinson Ranges. too late for inclusion in Black’s Flora, Part LV, Second Edition, where the names of 25 appear, Of these five are introduced species, S. triflorum, S, giganteum, 8, elaeagnifolium, S. sodomacum and §, rostratum, none af which are edible. Ewart and Davies in “The Flora of the Northern Territory” record 19 species with an additional one for North Australia, of which 9 occur in South 125 J. B. CLETAND awp N, B, TINDALE Australia. The other eleven are mostly only recorded from the northern end of the Territory. Duwing the two expeditions to Haast Blulf Reserve, at least cleven species of Solvaum were colleeted, five of these being find within a few yards of each other in wush-aways Icading into 2 creek. Of these, five species had few prickles and six were furnished with abun- dant spines. Some of the latter supplied an important item m the diet of the nomadic natives, and others were of no aeemmt in their ecology. The aborigines readily recognise each species and have names for them, but to European eyes the distinction was often difficult, ‘The following points we found useful in recognising the different species of very prickly Solanums. Leaves entire Solamun ellipticum, Scmi-prostrate to scrambling with purplish tints on the young foliage. The spherical green fruits marbled with white are hidden, so that one turns the foliage over with one’s [out to pick the edible berries. The prickles are not very aggressive sv that one can handle the bush with- out being severely punished. There ave purple spines on the stems and calyx and some pale ones on the petioles and even midribs but not else- where on the leaves, Solunum ellipticum var. Mr. J, M, Black reterred specimens like this to S. eremo- philum, but Mr. R. V. Smith, of the National Herbarium of Victoria, says our plants are definitely not $, eremophilum, This has smaller leaves thas S. ellipticum aud lacks the purple tints. It is more or less prostrate and the prickles are not aggressive. The edible fruit is like that of S. ellipticum. Solanum quadriloculatum, This is an upright species abundantly furnished with spines which make it difficult to collect specimens. The leaves are thicker and broader than in S, ellipticum, but acute like them. The young foliage may be purplish. The berries are more numerous and easily seen, usually not quite round but somewhat pentagonal, showing five bulges, green be- coming suffused with purplish tints before becoming hard and pale. Fruit inedible, four-celled, Leaves pinnate-lobed. or pinnatifiel Solanum petrophilum. This resembles S, quadrilocnlatiam hut the leaves are shortly lobed, The berry is hard and inedible. The prickles are very averessive. The calyx lobes are narrow, acuminate, with prominent keels. Solanum melanospermum, Myr, KR. V. Smith considers our plants as probably referable to this species. They agree with the type in leaf lobing, tomentum, spines, cte. Unfortunately, he adds that the type shows no flowers. [He says it is not referuble to S. diversiflorum as we had suggested. Has deeply lobed Jeaves and calyx lobes narvow and acuminate without prominent keels. The fruit is an inch in diameter, pale yellowish yreen and edible. Solanum sp. aff. with 8. phlomoides, A. Cunn, and 8, melatiospermum, F. Muell. (RK. V. Smith). Has the remains of a large calyx still un the reflexed stem. The calyx lobes are broad and there are pale prickles on the stems and calyx und a few on the leaf veins. The large fruit is edible. Sulunum ferocissimum, Upright, about a foot high, with small pale Howers and narrow leaves hastate or cordate at the base, grew on the banks of a creck, Fruits red and not eaten. Selenum centrale and $. orbiculatum. Were growing in proximity to each other. The former has a rnst-culoured tomentum with ovate bo oyate-oblong leaves and calyx segments oblong-linear, It was not fuund in fruit which Black described as ovoid, yellow, succulent and edible. NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 129 Selanum orbiculatum., Has thicker ubloug leaves which Black described as sinuate-lobed, with a hairy calyx whose lohes are ovate-lanceolate, and yellow globular berries. Solanum sp. A sinall Solanum, only a few inches high, with an elongated berry was found on an open plain north of Mt. Hay. Selanim coactiliferum. Petals 4, edible sperical yellow fruit. Mt. Wedge Sta- tion and sandy rises on Haast Bluff Reserve. Selanum esuriale, With five petals and yellow edible fruit has also been [ound in Central Australia, THE NATIVE NAMES The native names here recorded in several tribal dialects were trauseribed by the one hand from information supplied hy different informants. It was not convenient to keep a record of the name of cach mformant since it was some- times necessary te refer the specimen to a whole gathering of interested om- lookers before 2 decision was made. In all cases, unless specified to the contrary, the words were spoken by a man of the tribe concerned and not repeated from hearsay by one of another tribe. Where marked variations in pronunciation were noted they are indicated. Principal differences are in the vowel sounds, but there are also some interesting variations in stress. Some minor differences may be ascribed to the modern reaction between the Aranda language us used in formal mission teaching and the several versions of it being acquired by the Western Desert tribes people as they come into the area. The Kukutja (Loritja) have been closely associated for at least three generations with the Aranda, the Juimu for two generations and the Ngalia and Pintubi only since about 1932, Since the break between Aranda-like languages and the Western Desert ones ( Pitjandjara, Kukatja, Pintubi, ete.) is one of the more conspicuous ones in Australia it will be of interest to have data enabling a clear-cut distinction to be drawn between the plant names used east and west of this linguistic bound- ary. The names are written in the system adopted by a Committee at the Uni- versity of Adelaide in 1932. A convenient exposition may be found in Volume 64 of these Transactions, at page 147. In the following list of plants, if the species concerned appears in Black's Flora of South Australia, the authors name is not piven. FILICALES Cheilanthes tenuifolia (8lb). No name; grows on sides of creeks. Notholaena brownii (44b), No name; grows only near water in gorges. Marsilea, probably M. hirsuta (55h) Nardoo, No name; animal food, ao good for miu, PINACEAL Callitris glauca (15a), Native Pine. kniilpuru, Pintubi, wanykarti, Nyalia. ‘alkyarta and ‘ilukwa, Aranda. Not used; appreciated only for the shade it custs. CRAMINEAE Imperata ? (18a und 99a), talbalbi, Ngalia. Jalbulara, Aranda. A bladey grass found only at springs such us Ulambaura where there is a permanent swamp. The leaves agree with those of Dnperata cylindrica var. at Encounter Ray, Dicanthium sericeum (107b and 108b), ‘tjawila, Pintwhi; ‘nam:a, Aranda (Generic terms). Bothriochloa ewartiana (130a). No native name, “only a grass”. Cymbopogon bombycinus (68a). No native name. 130 J. B. CLELAND axv N, I, TINDALE Themed australis (39a), ‘eria, Pintubi. “kalbulbi, Ngalia, ‘ara ‘ara, Aranda. lt is used to stop the splash of water in wooden dishes while they are being cutied on women’s heads. Tragus australiqnus (76a), i:ka. Pintubi, ‘punda‘ro, Ngalia. jaka, Aranda, A prickle grass; it provides ‘mi, i, a damper which is made trom the seed by niilling between stones. Neurachne mitchelliana (121a, 93b). ’mana, Pintubi. It has no native use. Brachiaria piligera (129a, 135a). ‘mana, Pintubi. ‘etuta, ’indalurnka, Aranda. The grass seed ix milled with watcr between stones:and cooked as a damper. Digtlaria ammophila (1i7a). Has no native name, “only a grass”. Panicun decompositum (07a, 75b). il’tja:dua, Aranda. eltja:tua, ‘jalka:ra, Pintubi. Yields a good grass-seed food; ground with water between mill- stones and cooked as a damper ("juma, Pintubi). Pennisetum ciliare 1. (P. cenehroides Pers.) = Cenchrus pennisetiformis Hochst et Steud. (138b). Buffle grass, Only a grass, a stranger. Zygachloa (Spinifex) paradoxa (160b). Only a grass, ‘along sandhill’, Aristida browniane (118a), Has no native name, “only a grass”. Aristida arenaria (96a). ‘okari, Pintubi, "‘endalkora, Avanda. Grass caten by animals, a prickly grass. Aristida arenaria (71b). ‘ipiri, Pintubi. ‘jawila, Ngalia. ’endurukura, Aranda. Tas sharp ‘spined heads’, Aristida nitidula (164b). ’awila, jawila, Pintubi. ’endurukuru, Aranda. No use. Enncapogon polyphyllus (81a). ‘jespari, Pintubi. ’man:a, Ngalia. ‘nam:a, W. Aranda dialect, ‘taruka, E. Aranda dialect. Only a grass, not a food. Enneapogon clelandii (5a, 149b). Has no native name and is of no use. Only a grass for cattle, horses and sheep. Enneapogon sp. (54a), Drumstick grass. Has nv native name, “only a grass”. Danthonia bipartita (78a, 123a, 155b). Only a grass, of no use except to animals. Triraphis mollis (105a). ’endurukura, Aranda, When the seed is taken in while drinking water it causes an irritation to the throat, and is much disliked. The seed pierces the gums of horses’ mouths causing an inflammation, Triodia pungens (21a). ‘undia, Pintubi, ‘ju:ta, Aranda. This species is said not to yield a gum; the Triodia from which the valuable native gum is ob- tained is said to “look greasy”. Triodia basedowii with gum (i01b). tjanbi, Pintubi. undia, Kukatja. ‘ju:sta, Aranda, Vlowers and seed are animal food. Eragrostis eriopoda (71a, 133b). wanunu, Pintubi. in’tjira, n’djira, Aranda. The seed is vathered, milled with water between stones and cooked as a damper. Eragrostis dielsii (150b). ‘intjirintjira, Aranda, Provides seed for milling. Chloris acicularis (23a). No native name, “only a food for animals”. Daciyloctention radulans (80a). “purmdjari, Pintubi. ‘inda’lumuka, Aranda, Seed is used in the same manner as that of Mragrostis ertopode. Is consid- ered to be a good food. CYPERACEAE Cyperus xerophilus (35a). ‘laripulara, Aranda, A mark of water country. Cyperus sp. (54b), an’garan’gara, Aranda. Found near springs, sign of water. Fimbristylis nutans (Retz.) Vahl. (3la), 'ju:lumburn, Negalia. ‘laribulara, Aranda. Not used. A sedge at Ulambaura, a permanent spring. The Ngalia name tor the spring is hased on the presence of reeds, An Aranda name for the spring is Paura. NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS ISL Scirpus litoralis (158b). ‘ankaranka, Pintubi. No name in Aranda. Lives in spring water. ; LILIACEAE Xanthorrhoee. thortoni (48a). alugkuru. Ngalia. alunkuru, Aranda. It grows in the sandhills in the MacDonnell Ranges and on the plains to the South. Aborigines have never seen it to the north of the Ranges. It is of economic importance to them because the resinous exeretion from it is made intu the m which provides the most highly-sought-after form of hafting medium or stones set in the ends of speurthrowers. This gum is known as ‘pal:a, Negalia; ‘tjalana, Aranda. CASUARINACEAE Casuarina decaisneana (53a). ‘korukara, Pintubi. ‘karukara, Ngalia, arkapa, Aranda, “There is good food in the seeds; pick out kernels, chew them when green, they taste like milk.” MORACEAE Ficus platypoda (50a). ‘ili, Pintubi. ‘witjiriki, Ngalia. ‘tjuruka, Aranda. Figs. ULMACEAE Trema aspern (43b). Only a tree, no name. Grows only near water in gorges. URTICACEAE Parietaria debilis (159b) (onder rocks). “Only a flower, near water.” [Does not grow near water.] PROTEACEAE Hakea lorea (143h). Corkwood. pirdwa, Kukatja, an‘tjuija, n’kwala, ndjujamba, Aranda, Flowers yield sugar by steeping in water. Hakea ivoryi (8a, 87a, and 1242), Corkwood. ’piriwa, Pintubi. bi:ru, Kukatja. n’djuia, Aranda. When emus eat n‘djuia fHowers they are stupified and cannot run and thus casily killed; it flowers in summer. Corkwood flowers are steeped to get a black, sweet liquid. Use the bark, charred, to rub on the breasts of women when the child has a sore tonguc, Hakea leucoptera (126a, 85b). ‘marawukara, ‘marawakal, Pintubi. ilbunga, Aranda, Used for making hut shelters; not used as root source for water as is the case further south. Grevillea juncifolia (92b), "jultukun, Pintubi. ‘kalin’kalinba, Aranda. Grevillea striata (70b). ildeilba, Pintubi. ildi:Iba, Ngalia. ildi:tba, Aranda. Grevillea wickhami (63a). ‘Vjaka, Aranda. No use. SANTALACHAE Execarpus spartca (43a). ‘wilpia, Pintubi. ‘winbaruru, Ngalia. ‘itjartitjarda, Aranda. No use; il is plentiful on Mt. Wedge and in the sandhill country. Eucarya acuminata (62a). Native peach. ‘manarta, Pintubi (occurs in country to the south-west). ‘mayarta, Kukatja. ‘malba, Aranda. Sore trees grow near Alalba, where it is a big tree; it is said by the natives to grow com- monly along the southern side of the MacDonnell Ranges. Santalum Laseeolataen (23b). kandurano, Pintubi. kanduraya, Kukatja. ‘kaluda, Aranda. LORANTHACEAE Loranthus murrayi (om Acacia rhetinocarpa and Acacia aneura) (102a, 27b, 104b, 119b). ‘nantja, Pintubi, ‘mi:puru’pa, Pintubi. ‘tjangina, tjankanu, Aranda, Fruit orange or red coloured, “eaten as a plum, very nice”. 132 J. &. GLELAND ann N. B. TOINDALE Loranthus exocarpi (on mulga) (91b). “nantja, Pintubi. Edible fruits. Loranthus gibberulus (on Grevillea wickhami and Grevillea striata, beeftwood) (20b, 86b). ‘mi:purupa, Pintubi. ‘tjan’ga, Aranda, Bird food only. Loranthus miqueliana (on Eue. gamophylla) (24b). The mallee (Lue.) = ‘warilja, Kukatja. lalba, Aranda. The mistletoe = im:ara, Kukatja. im:ara, Aranda. Loranthus maidenii (on mulga) (59a, 35b). etjitja (mulga), ‘tian’ga (Loran- thus), Aranda, Children eat the sticky fruits in play; birds cat the fruits. It has no further use other than us attracting birds which may be killed by throwing a boomerang or stones. CUENOPODIACEAE, Rhagodia spinescens (89a, 38b), ‘bulam’bula, Aranda. Used as red paint for the face; the ripe fruits are red. Rhagodia nutans (1a, 87b, Sb). ‘iria, ‘erta, Aranda. Emu food; only a bush; no Use. Chenopodium cristatum (74b), ‘tjilka, Pintubi, ‘madara’madara, Aranda. Food for kangaroo, emu and stock. ; Chenopodium rhadinostrachyum (13a). ‘indyka, Aranda. The black seed ob- tained from it is soaked and when swelled with water rubbed between stones to make a damper, Atriplex nummularium (LOla). Saltbush. ‘eria, Aranda. As an animal food it attracts and concentrates guime for hunters, Atriplex elucophyllum (69a). No mame. Only cattle, goat and sheep food. Bassia selerolaenoides (6b). tjilka, Pintubi. “No good; only a flower,’ Bassia quinqnecuspis (94h). marawakalba, Kukatja. jeltja ‘ta:ndina, Aranda. The Kukatja name meang literally ‘hand piercer’. it is often used as a generic name for spiny plants. No use, Kochia enchylaenoides (163b). Only a busb. Sulsola kali (65a, 22b), tjilka:la, Kukatja, ‘elkala, ilkala, Aranda. Only an animal food, — Enchylaena tomentosa (7a, 90a, Gla). "jewcte’wete, Ngalia. indi;ndia, Aranda. The red fruits are soaked in water and the liquid drunk like tea; it is very sweet; use a ‘tartia, an especially shaped pitji (dish). for its preparation, AMARANTHACEHKAER Ptilotus nobilis (14a). No native name, only a Hower. Gomphrena brownit (63b). Only a flower. Alternanthera nodiflora (134a). Has no native name: no use, only a flower. NYCTAGINACEAE. Boerhaavia diffusa (55a). ‘waipi, Kukutja. ‘iap:e or ’jaipa, Aranda. Has a long parsnip-like root; food, PORTULACACEAE Portulacea oleracea (83a). ‘wakati, Pintubi, ‘ngotjika, Aranda. Food; eat the black seed; the roct is also eaten, Calandrinia balonensis (17a, 52a, 16b). Parakeclya. ‘parkilja, ‘tjonni tending to ’shonyi, Pintubi. partandjarupa, Negalia. -‘tjungi, Kukatja. ilkyoalia, knilja, gemba, Aranda, CAPPARIDACKAE Capparis mitchellii (92a, 2b, 129b). Wild orange. ‘ulpundjatu, Pintubi, ‘ombultja:di, ‘umbutja:di, Kukatja. bultja:ta, mbultjeda, m/bartjada, Aranda. Eat the fruit, “no seed, very sweet”. NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 133 Cepparis spinosa (145b). ‘uranini, Pintubi. ‘aratnaya, a’ro:tnaya, Aranda. Yield a fruit which is eaten when ripe. PHYTOLACCACEAE Codonocarpus cotinifolius (66b, 8S5b), ‘kandurayu, Pintubi. ‘kaluta, kaludi, kaluda, Aranda, Grubs ’mako ’kaluda, Kukatja, found on the roots are caten. CRUCIFERAE Stenopetalum nutans (70a, 26h). ‘enmart’enmarta, Aranda. Emm food. Stenopetalum lineare (84a, 100b). ‘enmarta, Pintubi. enmarta, ’mourti murta, Aranda. “Too ‘strong only fit for emus, makes you giddy if you try to eat it.” Lepidium rotundum (97a, 116a, 116b). ‘enmartsa, Pintubi. ju:taju:ta, Ngalia and Pintubi. ’enmarta, ’enmatua, Aranda. Emu food. The same name is applied te Glossegyne (Conpositue). Aranda eat it after steaming; Pintubi do not use the steaming method of cooking greens and make no use of ‘enmurta, Lepidium oxytrichum (1035b). ‘enmarta, Pintubi. ‘enmarta, Aranda. Emus eat it. Aranda steam it. Lepidium muelleri-ferdinandi (95a, 98a, 29b). enmota, Pintubi. inmutu, Kukatja. ‘inmorta, enmarta, enmatua, Aranda. Plant steamed in a hole with hot stones by the Aranda; the plants are enclosed in a covering of Zygophyllum plants (Ijawuljawa). The steamed green is stripped off the stems and eaten; the stems are then pounded to a meal and also eaten, When stones are not available it is Jaid on heated ground on top of wet grass, covered by more grass, then with colder sand, Enough heat is sealed in to cook the food. The aborigines strip off the leaves and eat them, throw- ing away the stems. A big heap is cooked and all cat together. PITTOSPORACLAE Pittusporum phillyreoides (102bh). wanukutu, Pintubi. ‘mara mara, Kukatja. knauta, Aranda, Provides shade only; no other use. ROSACEAE Stylobasium spalhulatum (97b). "tulpulpa, Pintubi. LEGUMINOSAE Acacia ligulata (27a). Broad leaf wattle. ‘wardanska, Ngalia. ‘itjiruka, Aranda. Seeds eaten. Grows at Ularmbaura Spring. Acacia ligiuata, a form (on stony hill) (79b, 120b). wardaruka, wardaruka, Pintubi and Kukatja. i:’turuka, /i:tjaruka, Aranda. Not used. Acacia. notabilis (aus hitherto identified but really a new species) (31b). ‘itjiruka, Aranda. Not used except as dry wood for fires; just like fronwood, very good for fires. Acacia patens (115b). ‘Inba‘luba, Aranda, Seed eaten, ground on a stone to a meal; it makes a bean soup with water. Acacia shrongylophylla (43b). Only flower, grows on the ranges. Acaciu lycopodifulia (77b). No native name. ; Acacia coriacea yar, angustior (83b). bagguna, Pintubi. pankuna, Ngulia. ‘panku:na, Aranda, Multi-striate phyllodes, 20 cm. *X 4 mm. Yellow branches, grows on rocky hills. Use ashes for drawing with, Freshly burned ashes of the leaves are mixed with native tobacco (mingulba) when making a chewing quid, 134 }). B. OLELAND anu N. B.CTINDALE Acacia aneura (15b, 72b}. Mulga at the settlement, Haast Blu Reserve. ‘wanari, Pintubi, Ngalia. i:'titja, ‘ustitja, Aranda. Lac Scale (Austratachardia acaciac, Maskell) on Acacia anetira (131h), ‘lutandja, Aranda, Leyp scale and honey exudate on the phyllodes of the mulga. According tu native belief “kapada:da, the larva of a Ceometrid moth, is the leader (inkata) of the honey ant (jeramba) which gathers this honey. Honey on Acacia anewra (130b), Intandji, Aranda, A particular sonree of mulga sngar is from the exudate of glands in the young taulga tips themselves, Aborigines showed us that when viewed against the light the tips bore gleaming beads of honey-like sap at the bases of the phyllodes. These glistening particles (‘lutandja, Aranda) are supposed in native zoology to hecome larger, form together along the stems and become the lerp scales which yield sugar. The larva of a Geometrid moth of the mulga (species not yet identified, but close to Amelora) occurs asa larya in many hundreds un mulga trees; when the trees are disturbed the larvae lower themselves on long silken strands so that the whole tree appears decorated with them; the larva is called ‘kapada:da, Aranda, It is considered to be the leader or inkata of the ‘jeramba, Aranda (honey ant) and causes it all to happen, Heney avts gather and take the honey below ground to form the honey ant “bags”, The ’kapada:da (Aranda) is knuwn also as nanda (Aranda) and us punsa parutji:ta, Kukatja. The lerp scales grow large and fall off on the ground whenee they may We: gathered or are stripped from the twigs and soaked im water to make a drink. Lerps are also eaten off by drawing the twigs through the mouth. One of us (NVB.T,) some years aga, observed the extensive use of this lerp scale in the Mann Range where the women’s lips were bleeding and sore from the continual rubbing of them along the rongh twigs, In 195T he found that a family group at Lightning, Rocks, Western Australia, had heen living in this way for a week almost solely on lerp sugar. The amowot of food available on these twigs is surprisingly greal and they can be seen to be literally ronning, with honey-dew. Acdcia dneura vay. latifolia (73b, 143b), Blue mulga, ‘Ielele, Pintubi. ljalpiljaro, Nealia, i:t’itja il’paljata, Aranda. Seed caten, Honey-dew xt the base of the phyllodes, ‘muni in’da:na, Aranda. Seeds gathered, parched and ground for meal. Acuciat hiolosericen (28a, 125b). ‘kalkadi, Pintubi. ‘intjira, Aranda. No use. A wattle growing around Ulimbuara Spring. The same species in 1957 on a rocky hill with Jac insects (Austrotachardia acaciae Maskell), ‘nkwala‘i:titia, Aranda, Eut the sweet scule (mako karuko), The jeramba or honey «ints sometimes gather honey from these scales, Tree is named ‘pupa sume wurd us for dog. Acaciu. brachystachya (106a. 82b) (probably) a mulga. wanka, wanari, Ngalia, ‘j:titja, Aranda, The ashes from freshly burned phyllodes are chewed with pitjiri. Shrub not in Hower or fruit when collected, The phyllodes are 9-0 em, to 11-5 em. long and agree with this species, but it may be merely a long phyllode form of A. aneura. Acucia farnesiana (154b), Vlakwa = t'‘lokwa, Aranda. From the Hower comes a seed which is eaten by parching and milling. Acacia monticula, J. M. Black (80b), On rocky hill. No native name. Lacerated bark, several nerves, much reticulation, Cassia sophera (146h). ‘madara’madara, Aranda. Gocd medicine. Steep in warm water, wash face with liquid and inhale the steam from the dish. NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 135 Cassia pleurocarpa (4b, 120b). ‘kalpukalpu, kalbirkalbir, Pintubi. ‘leilara, Nelara, Aranda. Emu food only. Cassia desolata (95b). ’pundi, Pintubi. ‘inkutinkuta, Aranda. For decoration hy only. Cassia eremophila (40a, 33b). ’aribi, pundi, Pintubi. ‘pundi, Kukatja. ‘wari, Negalia. ‘pundi, ‘punda, Aranda. Has no important use; only a flower, used, mainly because of its soft foliage, for brushing off flies. Cassia eremophila var. platypoda (114a, 65b). ‘pundi, Pintubi, ‘punda, Aranda. Cassia artemesioides (22a, 55a, 30b, 78b). pundi, Pintubi. pundi, Negalia. ‘punda’punda, inkurtaankurta, Aranda, The flowers are used for decora- tion, being inserted in the head hand as a fringe falling over the brow. Brachysema chambersi (161b). omba. Sugar obtained from the flower called ‘nkwala omba, Aranda. Crotalaria cdissitiflora (41b). Only flower; no name. Iniligofera brevidens (126b). No name. Indixofera basedowit (127b). “Too shrivelled for identification’, “might be "pundi”, Proviilen (148b). Pea. ‘woraka’ljilja, Aranda. No use, Swainsona flavocarinata (15lbh). Only a flower, animals eat it. Vigna lanceolata (19a). ‘papurti, Ngalia. ‘latjia, Aranda. The root of this plant or the one for which the aboriginal informant mistook the leaf is eaten; it is supposed to have a large tuber like a sweet potato. GERANIACEAE Hepeiiott eygnormmn ($2a, 40b, 64b), Has no native name and no use is made of it. OXALIDACEAE Oxalis corniculata (34a), Native sour sob. ‘elkart'ilkarta, Aranda. Wallaby food only. ZYGOPHYLLACEAE Zyeophyllum tesquerum (53b). “ilk’ywalja, Aranda. Animal food only. Tribulus terrestris (75a). tjilka:la, Pintubi and Ngalia. ‘’jaka, Aranda. A prickly plant which causes trouble by injuring feet. EUPHORBIACEAE Euphorbia drummondii (52b), ma’dara’madara, Aranda, Animal food, Saleen wheeleri (57b). ma’daramadara, Aranda. Bullock and horse food only. Euphorbia clutioides (6a). ‘notanoto, Ngalia. ‘kwarakclilja, Aranda. Although _ it has a name, neither the plant nor its milky sap has any use. Phyllanthus sp. (36a), tjilkatjilkarupa, Pintubi. ‘pojor’pojorupa, Ngalia. Not used, and is poisonous. ; STACKHOUSIACEAE Stackhousia muricata (140b), Only animal food, no name. SAPINDACEAE Atalaya hemiglauca (25b, 87b). ‘wanukutar, Pintubi. ilbara, ilpa’ra, Aranda. Shade tree only. Heterodendron oleifolium (115b). wanjikutu, Pintubi. knjira, Aranda. Diplopeltis stuartii (84b), Only a flower, Dodonaea petiolaris (47a). njalpilinj, Pintubi, anjilinu, Ngalia. walukara, Kukatja. ‘ilpa’manda, Aranda, No special use except as a shade tree. 136 J. B. CLELAND anp N. B. TINDALE RHAMNACEAE Ventilago viminalis, Supple Jack (113a, 34b). _k’njira, aknjira, Aranda. Kan- aroo and euro shade tree. A big tree and it gives good shade, When it Fis a hollow stem find wild honey (ultamba) in it. MALVACEAE Malvastrum spicatum (112a). Has no native name, only noticed by them be- cause of its flower, Sida corrugata (47b). Only a flowér, Sida virgata (144b, 156b). Only a flower bush, no use. Sida inelusa (96b). alputadi, Pintubi. Fruit eaten. Cienfuegosia gossipioides (49b), Only a flower. STERCULIACEAE Rulingia loxophylla (88b). No name, only a fower. Brachychiton gregorii (51a). alta, Pintubi. malta, Ngalia, alta, Aranda. "yaltatjita, Pintubi (the seeds). Eat the seeds milled, considered u very fattening food. DiLLENIACEAE Hibbertia glaberrima (46a). ’jukuri, Ngalia. MYRTACEAE Eucalyptus camaldulensis (16a), Red Gum, ‘nyapari, Ngalia. ‘pira, ’pa‘ra, Aranda. Eucalyptus terminalis (103a), Bloodwood. a:rkanka, Aranda, Not used except as giving honey when in flower. This bloodwood grows six to eight feet tall on the slopes of rocky hills, and as larger trees on Hat ground. Eucalyptus gamophylla (128b). ‘warilja, Pintubi. ‘lalba, Aranda. No use is made of it, Melaleuca zlomerata (lib). ‘ilbili, Kukatja. ‘ilbala, Aranda. Melaleuca Tinophylla (42a). ‘ilbili, Pintubi. ‘ilbila, Aranda. Grows in the sandhill country by watercourses. UMBELLIFERAE Didiscus glaucifolius (2a). Has no native name, emu food only. APOCYNACEAE Carissa browniit (33a, 85a, 93a, 17b, 18b), ‘yamunboro, ‘yamunburu, Pintubi. ‘manikitji, Ngalia, ‘manikitja, Kukatja. ‘inikitja, ‘lalitja, e’nukitja, e’nokitja, Aranda. Grows at Ulambaura Spring. The purplish fruits are eaten; the taste is considered by aborigines to be very sweet, a good food. ASCLEPIADACFAE Sarcostemma australe (15b). alk’yaiknai, Aranda. Pentatropis kempeana (88a, 18b). ‘mana ’yaraka, Aranda. “Good tucker; cat the leaves; when they find it while hunting, they always stop and cat their fill of it.” Marsdenia australis (21b). ondorono, Pintubi. ’ondorokno, Kukatja. al’tjeia, Aranda, Eat the fruit, CONVOLVULACEAE Ipomoea sp. (in leaf only) (57b, 67b). Leayes and stem only used. No potuto, only a flower. No name, NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 137 Contoloulus erubescens (152h). ‘tnalja tnalja, Aranda, All cooked and eaten, steamed and stripped to yet only the leaves. Long lime ago lives on this. It is cooked in the same manner as Lepidium. Breweria rosea (48b). Only a flower. Evolvulus alsinoides (58b). Only a flower, no use. BORRAGINACEAE Heliotropium asperrimum (7b). Only a flower. Heliotropium undulatum (100a), Has no native name, “only a flower”. Trichodesma zeylanicum (46b). Only a flower. VERBENACEAE Dicrastylis gilesii F. Mucll. (110b). Taliperta Spring, Mt. Palmer Range. Only a flower. Spartothamnella teucriiflora (76b). alk’neiak’neia, Aranda. Food for birds and emis. Clerodendron. floribundum (30a, 6la). ‘cremari, Ngalia. ‘eremarta, Aranda. The purple fruit is eaten; also the carrot-like roots. Grows at Ulambaura Spring. LABIATAE Prostanthera striatiflora (131a). tjiruka tjiruka, ’tjurika ‘tjwrika, Aranda, Pound with stones; the plant is then put in a dish (wooden), water poured in and heated with hot stones; allowed to go cold and the body washed with it; a good medicine, SOLANACEAE Solanum centrale (77a, 90b). kararuba, kamburarupa, Pintubi. ’karalba, kararupa, Ngalia, ‘katjara, Aranda, Agrees with a specimen from Liddle Hill, with # rusty tomentum like this, identified by J. M. Black as S. centrale which appears to be distinct from $, nemophilum. Leaves with a rusty tomentum. Fruit ercen then yellow, slightly elongated, 1-7 * 1-2.em. Fruit like a plum, eaten. Solanum sp. (10b). With occasional small prickles thickened downwards on the stems and even on calyx. Leaves with paler tomentum than S. nemophilum but perhaps a form of this species. Not ‘wangi; only a flower. Solanum orhiculatum (73a, 9b). ‘itumba, Aranda, kamburarupa, Pintubi. Fruit green, spherical § mm. diam., becoming whitish and dry. Good fruit, eaten. Solanum. coactiliferum (100b, 166b). ‘itunba, Pintubi, ‘etunba, Aranda. It is a food, The ‘mana, yellow spherical fruit, arc eaten, Solanum elliplicum (64a, 74a, 125a, 8b, 56b, 60b, 68h, 99b, 121b, 122b, 123b), ’‘kuilpura, wayjki, Pintubi. wanki, wangi, Kukatja. wanki, Ngalia. Fruit eaten at all times and is an important staple dict of emu, kangaroo, dogs and people. finan: etiqin var. (1274). a’leljaka, Aranda. The small green fruits are 24018) ond, Solan guadriloculatum (ila, lla, 62b). ‘warakalukalu, Pintubi. arcilba, ‘erunalkna, Aranda, Only a kangaroo food; not the same species as wangi though very like it, fruit not eaten, Solanum quadriloculatum ? (162b). ‘wangi, Kukatja. alparandji, randa, Aranda. Fruit is called karjera and is thought to be a far smaller plant than ‘wangi. 158 J, B. CLELAND anv N. B. YINDALE Selanum eremophilum (5b, 6b, 36b), “weiajeri, Pintubi, werinwerinba, Kukatja, a'ljeljaka, Aranda. Yields wu fruit very nice to eat, Fruit 1 em, diameter, green to pallid. Svlanam sp. aff. with $8. phlomoides A, Cunn. and 8. melanospermum F. Muell. (Ib, 12b, 13b, 103b, 165b, 167b). Lobed leaves. Fruit large on long re- curved pedicles, long spines on calyx which is ribbed. ‘kura, *pura, Pintubi. ‘kura, “pura, Kukaya, ‘pivi, Aranda, Lzrge fruit, the black seed in this fruit is thrown away, the skin and flesh only being eaten, Solanum. melanospermuin F, Muell. (prob.) (37a, 51b, 59b). Both numbers 5lb and 5Ub were given the sume native name as Solanum sp. aff. S. phlomotdes. No. 5tb has deeply lobed leaves and delicate prickles on the stom, and occasionally on the leaves und even on the calyx. No fruit. No. 59b has rather short pale prickles on the stem and petioles but none on the Jeaves and calyx. The leaves seem undulate, There is a whitish dried fruit about 1 cm. in diameter in a rather short recurved pedicel, These two plants are considered to he probably §. melanospermum and the native identification incorrect. One would naturally infer that their identification was more likely to be correct than ours but it should be remembered that the natives were shown a broken-off branch and did not see the plant growing with its natural habit. ‘kura, ‘para, Pintubi. ‘*kuva, Kukatja. ‘kura, Nealia, ‘pigi, Aranda. Large tomato-like fruit eaten, The black seed in it is taken out and thrown away and is spoken of as ‘not good’, only the flesh and skin being caten, Tt is called ‘good food’, Solanum petrophilum (14b). Given the sume native name as Solanum sp. if. 8. phlomoides, Very numerous white spines up tu 1-3 cm, lung on the stem, eammon on the leaves and on the calyx. Leaves shortly lobed, A dried white fruit is 9 mm, diameter, This is considered ta be §. netrophilum and the native identification incorrect. ‘kura, ‘pura, Pintubi, © ‘kura, Kukatja. ‘pigi, Aranda. Ias a good fruit like a tomato which is eaten. [The fruit of 8. petrophilum is hard and not edible.] Datura leichardtit (1396). a’rangatrakata, Aranda. No use is made of it. Once two boys ate these and they became drunk. Their mother wanted to know what was wrong. Very “strong” and dangerous, only makes one drunk. Nicotiana rotundifolia Lindl. (38a), mingulba, Pintubi. ‘mingul’mingulba, Aranda, Not used by Aranda, (70). ‘ingul’ingulba, Aranda. Chew it when nothing better is available. Nicotiana gossei Domin. (56a). pitjori, Aranda. ingulba, Aranda, Nicotiana sp. ? nov. all. N. gossei. Dr. H. Wichler, State Botanist, reports: “This species is characterized by the long flowers similar to N. gossei aud N, rotundifolia, the pubescence of N, gossei and N. rotundifolia, the short calyx (ca, 9-11 mm.), the cauline leaves having not such a broad base as is characteristic for N, gossei, and the inflorescence being more clongatcd than in N. gossei and resembling more N. ingulba.” (38). mingulmingulba, Kukatja. ingulingulba, Aranda. Not used for any pur- puse by the Aranda. This species grows near water, The species on the sandhills and the one on the ranges are chewed by all. (32a). tjunbunbu, Nyalia, pitjuri, Aranda. This species is the hills tobacco aml is considered a good kind. (156a). jngulba, Pintybi, pitjuri, Arandis. (ALI). mingulba, Pintubi. ingulba, Aranda. This Nicotiana is chewed with ashes, NATIVE NAMES AND USES OF PLANTS 139 (141b). ingulingulba, Aranda. Some people use it as a tobacco, (The differ- ences in native nomenclature and use are perhaps due to their mis-identify- ing the inswflicient material. ) Nicotiana velutina (136b). mingulmingulba, Pintubi. ingulingulba, Aranda. Sometimes men chew it when they have na pitjuri, It is wilted in hat ashes but is not as good as ingulba. (Nicotiana ingulba with its very long corolla tube wus also collected and is used by the natives. However. 4 specimen was not submitted for the native name. ) SCROPITULARIACEAE Stemodia viscosa (104a). Has no native name, Has a strong smell; to make a medicine, it is put in boiling water and allowed to cool; in use the head is washed with the liquid. Tt is considered a good medicine. BIGNONIACEAR Tecoma doratoxylon (44a). ‘urtjanba, Pintubi. ‘winbiri, Kukatja. ‘wianbiri, Ngalia. ‘janbara, Aranda. The wood of this shrub, because of its flexibility and strength, is considered to bo the best spear wood. Short lengths are spliced together when long ones are not available. MYOPORACEAE Myoporum montanum (147b), tjuruku tjuruku, Aranda, Used as medicine, steep in water with hot stones in dish, wash head with it; very strong medi- cine. “Heat branches in fire and spread down, lie on them for medicine.’ Eremophila latrobei (32b). kujilana, Aranda. Eat the bases of the flowers, pull off flower and eat base; is very sweet sugar = nkwald. Evemophila gilesii (24a, T9b). ‘molili, Pintutbi. *knjizslana, Aranda. Emu food, also a native medicine; boil it, wash the hody with the liquid for the cure ot body sores- Eremophila sturtii (109a). “Kerosene Bush.” ‘inkotinkota, Aranda. Has no use. Eremophila longifolia (20a). ‘yalurupa, Pintubi, Kukatja. tnuruya, Aranda. Has no use, Eremophila freelingii (124b). ‘aratja, Pintubi. ‘aratja, Aranda. Euros eat it. Eremophila goodwini (50h). Only a flower, no food. Unpleasant smell, RUBIACEAE Plectronia latifolia (86a). awulura, Pintuhi. agia, Aranda, ‘This wild currant is plentiful on the sandhills and on the ranges. CUCURBITACEAE Melothria maderaspafana (133a, 39b). ‘elkart'elk(w)arta, Aranda. Kangaroos edt the fruits; has no other use, Citrullus culgaris (60a). kura, Kukatju. pikia, Aranda. The introduced pie melon, blackfellow melon, CAMPANULACEAE Isetoma petraea (157). “Euro fingers” is ore of names. ‘mara’kanjala, Pintubi. ‘raneratja, Aranda, “Very strong,’ Tf eat this with pitjuri it makes one very drunk, very strong. GOODENIACLAE Goadenia larapinta Tate (25a). Has no native name, 140 J, B. CLELAND anp N, B, 'TINDALE COMPOSITAE Brachycome ciliaris (67a). Has no native name, “only a flower”, Calotis latiuscula (109b). tjintatjinta, Pintubi, Kukatja, Aranda. Kangaroo and emu food only, Calotis hispidula (66a, 132b). tjilga, Pintubi. tongara, Aranda, Nuisance only (frorn the spines); hard to find place to camp where there are none, Siegesbeckia orientalis (12a). Has no. native name. Only a flower; no use except that it is used to decorate the hair of girls. Podocoma cuneifolia (142b). Only a flower. Olearia subspicata (98b). Only a flower, no name. Glossogyne tenuifolia (117b). ‘enomarta, enmorta, Aranda. Emu food. Senecio magnificus (137b). ‘knulja, knamba, Ielena, ‘knuljaknambalelena, Aranda, Only a flower. Senecio gregorti (122a). Has no native name and no use, only a flower. Helipterum floribundum (72a). Has no native name, only a flower. Helipterum stipitatum (41a, 112b), eno:tji (a flower), Pintubi. ‘wamala- ‘wamula, Negalia, andata, Aranda. (The Aranda speak of it only under this general name, meaning a Hower.) andata mara, a good or pretty flower. Helipterum thomsoni (153b), Only a flower. Helichrysum apiculatum (3b). "kembakemba, Aranda. “Only a flower.” Helichrysum bracteatum (26a). Has no native name, “only a flower”. Helichrysum ambiguum (9a). Has no native name and no use. Rutidosis helichrysoides (4a, 114b). kembakemba, Pintubi. kembakemba, Aranda. Not used. Myriocephalus stuartii (29a, 108a). Has no native name, “only a flower”, Calocephalus multiflorus (10a, 113b). Has no native name and is not used; only a flower. Sonchus oleraceus (79a). The introduced Sow Thistle. ‘ulbu’rulbura. “Came with the white man; not eaten,” FUNGI Pisolithus (Palysaccum) tinctorius. awingura, Aranda. Said by the aborigines to grow under mulga trees. Phellorhina sp. No native name or use. REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES - SCAPHOPODA. BY N. H. LUDBROOK Summary The present paper is the first of a series revising the molluscan species described by Tate. The scaphopoda are all lodged in the Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide. REVISION OF THE TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES — SCAPHOPODA. by N. H. LunsrooK* [Read 11 September 1958] SUMMARY The present paper is the first of a series revising the molhuscan species «é- scribed by Tate. ‘The seaphopoda are all lodged iu the Yate Museum Collec- tion, University of Adelaide. {NTRODUCTION At the suggestion of Dr, M. F. Glaessner the writer has undertaken, on a long-term basis, the revision of the type collection of mollusca described by Ralph Tate between 1875 and 1899. For the 50 years following the death of Tate in 1901 this material consti- tuted the principal basis of Tertiary correlation in South Australia. Lt is now desirable that the mollusca be revised and aligned with the microfaunas which have been studied during the last six years at the University of Adelaide and the South Australian Department of Mines. The scaphopod species ure all in the Tate Museum Collection. They are a small group of some significance in stratigraphic interpretation. Phylum MOLLUSCA Class SCAPHOPODA Family DENTALUDAE Genus Dentatam™ Linné, 1758 Type species (s.d. Montfort, 1810) Dentalium clephantinum Linné Subgenus Denrarium s. str. Dentalium (Dentalium) aratum Tate pl.1, fiz. 3 Dentalium qratum Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy, Soc. $. Aust., 9, p. 192, pl 20, fig. 8. Dentalium aratum. Tate, Harris, 189T, Cat, Tert, Moll, Brit. Mus., 1, p. 293. Dentaliumn aratum Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Tryon’s Man, Conch., 17, p: 199. Dentatium (Enisiphon) aratum Tate, 1899, Traus. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust., 23 (2), p. 265, Dentulium aratum Tate, Chapman & Crespin, 1928, Rec. Geol. Surv. Vic. 5 (1), p. 159. Denialium (Paradentalium) uratum Tate, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, Trans, Roy. Sue. 8. Aust., 62 (2), p, 223. Diagnosis—A small Dentalium with from 6 to 8 primary ribs narrower than the interspaces with fine secondary riblets and threads developing anteriorly. Strongly curved posteriorly, nearly straight anteriorly, Description of Holotype—Shell small, fairly strongly arcuate, polygonal in section with 7 strong primary ribs and fine longitudinal threads or riblets in the interspaces. Ribs narrow, interspaces wide, shell strongly curved posteriorly, straightening anteriorly, gradually tapering, Apex and aperture polyganal., Dimensions—Length 20 mm,, diameter at apex 1 mm., diameter at aperture 2 mm,, arc 2 mm. * Department of Mines, Adelaide. Published with the permission of the Disetar oF Mines. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol. 32, 142 N. H, LUDBROOK Type Locality—Cadell Marl Lens, River Murray, 4 miles below Morgan, Hundred Cadell, Section G; Lower Miocene. Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll., T 256A. Material—On original tablet T 256 holotype and 25 paratypes in 3 rows: top row numbered 1--l seven paratypes Muddy Creek, numbered 4 one paratype Spring Creek; middle row numbered 5—5 four paratypes Gellibrund, the holo- type, and 4 paratypes R. Murray; bottom row numbered 2 one paratype Fyans- ford, numbered 3 two paratypes Schnapper Point, 6 paratypes R. Murray, The origina] description cites the species as occurring in the Muloowurtie Clays, but no specimens from this Jocality are in Tate's material. Stratigraphical Range—Miocenc-?Pliocene. Dentalium (Dentalium) latesulcatum Tate pl. 1, fig, 1 Dentaliunt latesuclatum (err. pro latesulcatum) Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Sov. $. Aust.. 23 (2), p. 262, pl. 8, fig. 9. Dentalium (Paradentalium) howchini, Cotton & Ludbrook, L938, Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust. 62 (2), p, 224, pl. 19, fig. 6, Dentalium (Dentalium) latesuleatum Tate, Ludbrook, 1958, Trans. Roy. Soe. 5, Aust, 79, pp. 1-2, pl. 1, figs. 10-14 (gives full synonymy ). Diagnosis—A short thick solid Dentalium with 7 to 16 strong primary ribs upproximately equal to interspaces ™m which secondary ribs may be developed by intercalation, Description of Holotype—Shell short, thick, solid, only very slightly curved, rapidly tapering, sculptured with 10 strong primary ribs narrower than the inter- spaces in which secondary riblets rise near the aperture by intercalation. Inter- spaces irregularly and strongly crossed by growth striae which pass less con- spicuously over the ribs. Apex with a notch. Aperture circular internally, polygonal externally. Dimensions—Leuyth 40 mm., diameter at apex d mm.. diameter at aperture 8 mm. Type Locality—Grange Burn, Hamilton, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquiua, Pliocene, Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll,, T 16104. Material—The holotype and 6 paratypes on ori inal tablet; specimens labelled Dentalium elephantinum and recorded as such (Tate, 1890, p. 177) Dry Creek Bore. Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene. Subgenus Anwraris H. Adams & A, Adams, 1854 Type species (s.d. Pilsbry & Sharp, 1897) Dentalium entalis Linneé Dentalium (Antalis) bifrons. Tate pl. 2, fig. 2 Dentalium (2)bifrons Tate, 1887, Trams. Ray, Soc, 5, Aust. 8, pp. 192-3, pl. 20, fig, 5. Dentalium bifrons 'Vate, Tate & Dermant. 1593, Trams. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust., 47 (1), p. 235, Deutalium Lifrans ‘Vate, Harris, 1897, Mat. ‘ert. Moll. Brit. Mus, 1, 9 245, Dentalium bifrans. Yate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1598, Trydn’s Man. Coneli,, 17, p. 200. Dentalinm ( Fissidentuliun:) bifruns Vate, Cottou & Ludbrogk. 1998, Trans. Roy. Sne. S. Aust, 62 (2), p. 222. Diagnosis—A large solid, gradually tapering and only slightly curved Antalis, finely ribbed in the posterior one-quarter, Obsolete or smooth elsewhere but for conspicaous oblique growth lines, Apex with or without slit. TATE MOLLUSCAN ‘TYPES 143 Description of Holotype—Shell large and solid, only slightly curved, more so in the posterior one-third, nearly straight in the anterior two-thirds. Posterior one-quarter with about 40 fine ribs which rapidly become obsolete. Anterior portion of shell smooth, with microscopic and conspicuous oblique growth striae, Shell gradually tapering over all. Apex circular in the holotype, without slit, Aperture circular, only slightly oblique. Dimensions—Length 92 mm., diameter at apex 2 mm.,, diamietcr at aperture 9-4 mm.,, are 3-6 mm, Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Hamilton, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquina, Pliocene. Holvtype—Tate Mus, Coll,, T 255. Matertel—On tablet T 255, the holotype and 2 paratypes from Muddy Creek, aie paralype Spring Creek. One large topotype 96 mm. long with apical slit 3-5 mm. Stratigraphieal Range—Miocene-Pliocene. Dentalium (Antalis) sectiforme Tate pl. 2) ig. 5 Dentualium. (Graptacme ) sectiforme Vate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Sou. $. Aust., 23 (2), p, 263, pl. 8, figs. 6, Ga. Dentaliim (Grapteucme) sectiforme Tate, Cotton and Lndbrook, 1938, Trans. Roy. Sac. S. Aust,, 62 (2). p. 225. Diagnosis—A small, slender Antalis, moderately curved, ‘sculptured poste- riorly with fine riblets increasing by intercalation ftom about 16 at the apex to about 30 where they become obsolete in the anterior quarter. Descriplion of Heletype—Shell small, very slender and gradually tapering, fairly thin but solid, glossy, translucent, sculptured in the posterior three-quarters with fine riblets, 16 at the apex increasing by interealation to about 30 at the anterior one-quarter where they become obsolete, but are still visible under the microscope. Anterior quarter showing fine growth striae. Aperture circular, peristome thin; apex with a short slit and small supple- mentary pipe. Dimensions—Length 11 mm,, diameter at apex 0-05 mm., diameter at aper- ture 2-2 mm,, are 1-39 mm, Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquina, Pliocene. Holotype—Tate Mus, Coll, T 1615A. Material—The holotype and 5 paratypes. Stratigraphical Range—Lower Pliocene of Muddy Creek. Subgenus Fustraiwa Stoliczka, 1868 Type species (s.d. Pilsbry & Sharp, 1897) D. cireinatum Sowerby Dentalium (Fustiaria) tornatissimum Tate nl, 2, fizs. 6, 7 Dentalium (Episiphon) tornutissimum Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc, 8, Aust. 23 (2), p. 265, pl. 8, figs. 7-7s. Dentelium (Episiphon) tornatisximum ‘Vate, Cotten and Ladbrook, 1938, Trans. Koy. Soe. S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 226-7. Diagnosis—A very small solid Fustiaria with conspicuous annular grooves, about 8 per mm. Description of Holotype—Shell small but solid, nearly straight, sculptured with incised annular grooves, varying from 10 per mm. in the apical portion to less than 8 towards the aperture. Apex with a short terminal pipe, aperture broken, circular in section. ; 144 ¥ N. H. LUDBROOK Dimensions—Length 7-3 mm., diameter at aperture 1:37 mm., diameter at apex 0:55 mm., are 0-27 mm. Type Locality—Jemmy’s Point, Gippsland; Jemmy’s Point Formation, Kalim- nan (Plivcene). Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., 'T 1609. Material—The holotype and paratype. Stratizraphical Range—Kalimnan (Pliocene). Subgenus Gapinina Foresti, 1895 Type species (monotypy) D, triquetrum Brocchi, 18]4 Dentalium (Gadilina) tatei Sharp & Pilsbry pl. 1, fix. 5 Dentalium. (2?) triquetrum Yate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soc, 5. Aust, 9. p. 193, pl. 20, fig. 3 (nen Brocchi, 1814), Dentalium tatet Sharp & Pilsbry, 1898, Trvon’s Man, Conch,, 17. p. 218 (nom, nov.). Tontishtens. Keaaeelata } tatet Sharp & Pilshry, Tute, 1999, Trans, Roy. Soc, 8, Aust, 23 (2), p. 266. Dentalium (Gadilina) tatei Pilsbry & Sharp, Cotton & Ludbrook, 1938, Trans. Roy. Soc. §. Aust., 62 {2), p. 227. Diagnosis—A small but solid Gadilina, very slightly curved. Description of HWolotype—Shell small, solid, smooth but for microscopic growth lines, thick, only very slightly curved and only slightly tapering. Later- ally compressed. Aperture broken, apex triangular in section. Dimensions—Length 10 mm., diameter at apex 0-7 mm, Type Locality—Adelaide Bore, Kent Town, glauconitic sands, Upper Eocene. Hololype—Tate Mus, Coll, T 252A. Material—The holotype and six paratypes. Stratigraphical Range—Upper Eocene. Subgenus LAkvinentansua Cossmann, 1888 Type species (o.d.) D. incertum Deshayes Dentalium (Laevidentalium) acriculum (Tate) pl. 1, fig, 2 Entaliy acriculum. Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soe. S$. Aust., 9. p. 192, pl. 20, fiz. 11. Dentalium lacteum Tate, 1887, ibid., p. 193, nun Deshayes, Dentglium acriculum Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Man. Conch., 17, p. 197. Dentalium. ( Laevidentalium) lacteoluin Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc, S, Aust., 23 (2), p. 264. Dentalium (Fustiaria) acriculum Tate, 1899, ibid. Dentalium (Leevidentalium) lacteulim Tate, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 226. Dentulium ( Fustidria) acriculum (Tate), Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, ibid. Diagnosis—A small, smooth, thin, gently curved Laevidenialium. Description of Holotype—Shell small, thin, subulate, gently curved, smooth, Bolished, with microscopic growth lines. Apex with a slit, aperture circular, obligue, Dimensions—Length 33 mim., diameter at apex 0:85 mm., diameter at aper- tore 2.5 mm., are. 2:0 mm. Type Loecality—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marls, Lower Miocene. Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 251. Material—On tablet T 251 the holotype and 8 paratypes (Muddy Creck); on tablet T 253 originally labelled Dentalium lacteum Deshayes and later cor- rected to Dentalium lacteolum Tate, six specimens Muddy Creek, one Gelli- TATE MOLLUSCAN ‘TYPES 145 brand. Tate separated these from acriculum on the absence of the apical fissure which is not regarded as a diagnostic feature. 3 of the paratypes of acriculum. have no fissure and the two species are indistinguishable, The annular striae of the type description are merely very faint growth striae, Stratigraphical Range—Lower Mioceuie. Dentalium (Laevidentalium) australe Sharp & Pilsbry pl. 2, fiz, 1 Entalis onnulatum Tate, S87, Trans. Roy. Soc, §. Aust, 9, pp: 191-2, pl. 20, figs. Ga, 6b, non Gmelin, nec Meyer, nee Sandberver. Dentalium australis Sharp & Pilsbry, 1898, Tryon’s Man. Conch., £7, p. 199 (nom. anut.). Dentalium (Fustiaria) australe Sharp & Pilsbry, Yate, 1899, Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 23 (2), pp. 264-5. J Dentalium (Fustiaria) australe Sharp & Pilsbry, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1938, ‘Trans. Hoy, Soc. S. Aust, 62 (2), p. 226. Diagnosis—A fairly large solid Laevidentaliim nearly straight in the adult, with conspicuous fairly even growth striae. about 6 per mm. ~ Description of Holotyne—Shell stout, fairly large and evenly tapering, only slightly curved, more particularly in the posterior one-third, Shell smooth but for conspicuous incised and fairly even growth striae, generally about 6 per milli- metre. Apex rounded with a slit about 3 mm. long. Aperture circular, not oblique. Dimensions—Length 65 mm., diameter of apex 2 mm., diameter of aperture 7 mm, are 2 mm, Type Locality~Muddy Creek, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marls, Lower Miocene. Holotype—Tate Mus, Col., T 250A. Material—The holotype and 3 paratypes, on tablet with siz mounted spect- mens. The holotype is the second from the left, the paratype third from the left ix a specimen 53 mm. long of which the apex with terminal pipe was Ggured (Tate, 1887, pl, 20, fig. 6b). Two specimens, the extreme left and the second from right on the tablet, do not belong to the species but to a large undescrihed species on tablet ‘T258 with 4 specimens of D. subfissura from the Murray Cliffs. The dimensions of the holotype are incorrectly given in the original de- scription. j Stratigraphical Range--Upper Oligocene-Lower Miocene, Dentaliom (Laevidentalium) largicrescens Tate pl. Ll, fig. 4 Dentatium largicrescens Tate, 1899, Trans. Ray, Soc. 8, Aust., 28 (2), p. 264, pl, 8, figs, I, 10a, Dentalium la¢gicrescens ‘Tate, Chapman & Crespin, 1928, Ree. Geol. Surv. Vic., 5 (1), p. 159. Dentalium (Laevidentalium) largicrescens Tate, Colton and Ludbrook, 1938, Trans, Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 62 (2), p. 225. ) Diagnosis—A_ short, solid, rapidly tapering and slightly curved Laeviden- tatium. Description of Holotype--Shell of moderate size, moderately thick, smooth and shining with conspicnous slightly oblique growth striae. Shell rapidly tapering, gently curved in the posterior one-third but only slightly purved to- wurds the aperture. Apex circular, thick, with an apical fissure on the ventral side, aperture circular, relatively thin, ; 146 N. H. LUDBROOK Dimensions—Length 44 mm., diameter at apex 1-0 mm., diameter at aper- ture 6°5 mm., are 2-5 mm. Type Locality—Beaumaris, Victoria; Sandringham Sands, Blick Rock Mem- ber, Cheltenhamian (Upper Miocene). Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 16LL. Material—On tablet T 1611, the holotype and five paratypes from Beaumaris, one paratype from the Pliocene of Muddy Creek. One specimen Muddy Creek, f Stratigraphical Range—Cheltenhamian (Upper Miocene)-Kalimnan (Lower Pliocene )- Dentalium (Laevidentalium) pictile Tate pl, 2, fiz. 4 Entalis subfissura Tate, Tate and Dennant, 1896, Trans. Roy. Soe, S. Aust. 20 (1), p. 134. Denvaliom yicenidenlibigi pictile Tate, 4899. Trans. Roy, Soc, 5, Aust. 23 (2). p, 263, pl. 8, fig. Dentulium (Laevidentaliam) pictile Tate, Cotton and Ludbrook, 1936, Trams. Roy, Suc. S, Aust, 62 (2), p. 225. Diagnosis—A strongly curved Laevidentaliem of moderate size, evenly tapering. Description of Holotype—Shell slender. of moderate size, gradually tapering, strongly curved, smooth but for fine growth striae, dark grey to black in colour me light bands, Apex slightly oval, with a short broad notch, aperture rounded, oblique. Dinu rsions=Derigth 52 mrm., diameter at apex 1 mm., diameter at aperture 5 mm,, are 6-5 mm. Type Locality—Vable Cape, Tasmania; Oligocenc, Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 1608. Material—Tablet 'T 1608 with holotype and paratype only, Stratigraphical Range—Upper Oligocene-Lower Miocene. Dentalium (Laevidentalium) subfissura (Tate) ni, 2, fig. 3 Entalis subfissura Tate, 1887, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust, 9, p. 191, pl. 20, figs. du-b. Dentalium subfissura Tate, Harris, 1497, Cat. Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus., (1), n, 296; Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Man. Conch,, 17, p. 216, Dentalium subfissura Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. S, Aust., 23 (2), p. 263. Dentalium subfissira Tate, Chapman & Crespin, 1928, Rec, Geol, Surv. Vic, 3 (1), p. 159, Dentalium (Laevidentalium) subfissura Tate, Cotton & Ludbrook, 1938, Trans, Roy, Soe. 5, Aust., 62 (2), p. 235, Diagnosis—An evenly tapering and moderately arcuate Laevidentalivm of moderate size. Description of Holotype—Shell of imoderate size for the subgenus, thin, subulate, slightly compressed dorso-ventrally, smooth except for oblique growth striac, Apex small, subcircular, with a fairly broad V-shaped notch on the ventral side and a small supplementary pipe. Aperture oblique, slightly oval, dorso-ventrally compressed, Dimensions—Length 46 mm., diameters at aperture 4 and 4:25 mm. diameter at apex I mm, are 4 mm. Type Locality—River Murray Cliffs 4 miles downstream from Morgan, Hun- dred of Cadell, Section G. Morgan Limestone (Lower Mivcene). Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T 249A. Material—On tablet the holotype and the following paratypes: River Murray 2, Muddy Creek 3, Gellibrand River 3, Spring Creck 1, Schnapper Point 2, Aldinga Bay (Blanche Point Marls) 3, Corio Bay 1. Table Cape specimen was TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES 147 evidently removed from the tablet and described as D. pictile, the holotype of which just fits the unfaded space. T 258 consists of 4 topotypes from River Murray, and one large Laevidentalium belonging to another species. Also in the Tate Collection 1 specimen Dry Creek Bore, 34 examples un- localized probably from Muddy Creek, 1 specimen from the Eocene of Adelaide Bore, 12 specimens Schnapper Point, 12 specimens Blanche Point Marls, 11. topotypes River Murray, 27 specimens Muddy Creek. Stratigraphical Range—Upper Eocene to Lower Miocene. Common in Lower Miocene of Murray Basin. Family SIPHONODENTALUOIDAE Simroth, 1894 Genus Capuus Philippi, 1544 Type species (monotypy) Dentalie¢m ovvulum Philippi Subgenus Gants Gray, 1847 Type species (0.d,) Dentglium gadus Montagu Cadulus (Gadila) mucronatus Tate pl. 1, tig. 8 Cadulus mucronatus Tate, 1587, Frans. Roy. Sue. §. Aust., 9. p. 193. pl. 20, fig. 10, Cadulus mucronatus Late, Rarris, 1997, Cat. 'Tert. Moll. Brit. Mus,, 1. p. 287. Cadulus mucronatus Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Tryon’s Man. Gonch., 17. p. 237. Cadulus mucronatus Tate, 1899, Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Aust. 23 (2). p. 266, Diagnosis—A small Gadila, bulging slightly to the anterior of the middle, Genlly curved, fairly rapidly tapering at each end. Wider anteriorly than to. wards the apex. Description of Holotype—Shell fairly smal), solid, narroyy, gently arcuate on the ventral surtace and bulging on the dorsal surface. Contraction towards the anterior aperture fairly pronounced over 2 mm,; contraction to the posterior more gradual over a Iength of 3 mm. Aperture broken in the holotype, otherwise oblique, apex also broken, other- wise rounded, sharp, and thickened within. Surface smooth, polished, with slightly oblique growth lines and faint signs of banding to the anterior. Dimensions—Length 6-3 mm., ciameter at apex 0-7 mm., at aperture 1:0 mm., at swelling 1-63 mu. Type Locality (here designated)—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Muddy Creek Marls, Lower Miovene. Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll... T 229A. Material—The holotype and 14 paratypes in 2 rows mounted on card in box mounted on tablet labelled “Cadulus mucronatus Tate pl. XX., fig. 10, Eocene Muddy Ck., 1 Spring Ck.” The holotype is the specimen ut the left of the bottom row. There is nothing on the card to indicate which specimens come from Maddy Creek and which from Spring Creek. One large shell fifth from the left of the bottom row does not belong to the species. Stratigraphical Range—Lower Miocene. Cadulus (Gadila) acuminatus Tate ol. 1, fiz. 7 Cadulus aoumittatus Tate, 1887, Trans. Rey. Sac. S. Aust... 9, p, 194. Cadulus (Gedila) acuminutus Tate, Pilsbry & Sharp, 1898, Tryon’s Mau. Conch., 17, p, L83. Cadulus (Gadilz) aouminatus Tate, 1899, id, 23 (2). p, 266, pl. 8, fix. 12. 145 N. HH. LUDBROOK Cadulus acuminatus Desh. Demmant & Kitson, 1903, Rec, Geol, Surv. Vic., 1 (2), p. 145, Cadulius aeuminatus Tate, Ludbrook, 1941, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust, 65 (1), p. 104. Cadulus (Gadila) acuminatus Tate, Ludbrook, 1956, id. 78, p. 5, pl, 1, fig. 2. Diagnosis—A very small Gadila slightly curved and not bulging. Description of Holotype—Shell rather thin, very small, slightly curved, gently tapering anteriorly and slightly more so posteriorly. Dorsal face with gentle curvature, ventral face somewhat more arcuate. Surface of shell some- what eroded, otherwise smooth. Apex circular, slightly oblique, thin; aperture small, cireular, thin. Dimensions—Length 5-3 mm., diameter at the middle 1 mm., diameter at aperture 0-75 mm. Type Locality—Aldinga Bay; Oyster Beds, Pliocene. Holotype—Tate Mus. Call., T 231A, Material—The holotype (the middle specimen) and 2 paratypes mounted be eard in tube on tablet labelled “Cadulus acuminatus Deshayes Miocene Al- ing”, Tate’s (1899, p. 266) explanation of his use of Deshayes’s MSS name is sufficiently clear. Deshayes’s material has not yet been described; the tablet as originally Jabelled is still in the British Museum. Stratigraphical. Ranve—Pliocene of Aldinga Bay and the Adelaide Basin. Cadulus (Gadila) infans Tatc pl. 1, fic. 6 Catlilus infans Tate, 1899, “rans. Roy. Sov. S. Aust, 28 (2), p. 266, pl. 8, fig. 11. Diagnosis—A very small Gadila, very slightly curved and slightly bulging in the anterior one-third. Description of Holotype—Shell thin, white, smooth, very small, shining, slightly bulging in the anterior one-third and very gently tapering posteriorly, slightly more so in the anterior third. Dorsal fuce nearly straight, ventral face gently arcuate, Apex broken, apparently circular, aperture oblique, thin, Dimensions—Length 3-2 mm., maximum diameter 0-51 mm., diameter at aperture 0-5 mm., arc 0-05 mm. Type Locality—Muddy Creek, Victoria; Grange Burn Coquina, Pliocene. Holotype—Tate Mus. Coll., T1614. Material—The holotype only. Stratigraphical Range—Pliocene. REFERENCES Crapman, F., 1916. Cainozoic Geology of the Mallee and other Victorian Bores. Wee. Geol. Surv. Vic., 3 (4), pp. 327-430, pls, 43-78_ Crarman, F., Cresrin, f, and Kesre, R. A. 1928. The Sorrerita Kore, Mornington Peninsula. Rec, Geol, Sury. Vic. 5 (1), pp. 1-195, pls, 1-12, Corron, B. G., and Luperoox, N. H., 1938, Recent and Fossil Species of the Scaphopad Gees Dentalium in South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. $. Anst., 6% (2), pp. 217-228, pl. 13, Dennant, J., and Krrson, A. E., 1903. Catalogue of the Described Species of Fossils (ex- cept Bryozoa and Foraminifera) in the Cainozoic Fauna of Victoria, South Australia and Tasmuniu. Ree. Geol. Surv. Vie. 1 (2), pp. 89-147. LupproaoK, N. 1., 1956, The Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata Underlying the Ade- lnide Plains. Part UW, Seaphapoda, ete. Trans, Roy. Soc, 8, Aust., 78, pp. 1-36, pls. 1, 2, Prosarvy, TH. A., and Suanp, B,, 1897-8. Scaphopoda. Tryon’s: Manual of Conchology, 17, * 1-280, ‘pls. 1-39. Tate, R., 1886. The Scaphopoda of the Older Tertiary of Australia. “Trans. Ruy. Soe. §. Aust, 9, pp, 190-194, pl, 20. - Tarr, IL, 1890. On the Discovery of Marine Deposits of Pliocene Age in Australia, ‘Trans. Rey, Soc. §, Aust, 13 (2), pp. 172-180. Fig. Fig. Tig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. TATE MOLLUSCAN TYPES 149 EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE 1 1—Dentalium (Dentalium) latesulcatum Tate. Holotype, T 1610A, x 2-5. 2.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) acriculum (Tate). Holotype, T 251, x 2-5. 3.—Dentalium (Dentalium) aratum Tate. Holotype, 'T 256A, x5. 4.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) largicrescens Tate. Holotype, T1611, x2. 5.—Dentalium (Gadilina) tatei Sharp & Pilsbry. Holotype, T 252A, x 12. 6.—Cadulus (Gadila) infans Tate. Holotype, T 1614, x 20. 7.—Cadulus (Gadila) acuminatus Tate. Holotype, T 231A, x 10. 8.—Cadulus (Gadila) mucronatus Tate. Holotype, T 229A, x 11. PLATE 2 1—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) australe Sharp & Pilsbry, Holotype, T 250A, x 2-5. 2.—Dentalium (Antalis) bifrons Tate. Holotype, T 255, x 1-5. 3.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) subfissura (Tate). Holotype, T 249A, x2°-5. 4.—Dentalium (Laevidentalium) pictile (Tate), Holotype, T 1608, x 2. 5.—Dentulium (Antalis) sectiforme Tate. Holotype, T 1615A, x 10. 6.—Dentalium (Fustiaria) tornatissimum Tate. Holotype, T 1609A, x 9. 7.—Dentalium (Fustiaria) tornatissum Tate. Paratypc, T1609B, x 9. N. H. Lupprook PuatTE | 9 = PLATE N. LL, LupsrooKx SOME NEMATODE PARASITES FROM AUSTRALIAN HOSTS. BY PATRICA M. THOMAS Summary Four species are described as new, and amplified descriptions are given of six other species. The following are included: Capillaria miniopterae n. sp. (Miniopterus blepotis); Amidostomum biziurae Johnston & Mawson (Biziuralobata); Nicollina echidnae Baylis and N. cameroni n. sp. (Tachyglossusaculeata); Nycteridostrongylus uncicollis Baylis and Molinostrongylus dollfusin. sp. (Miniopterus blepotis); Austrostrorzgylus thylogale Johnston & Mawson (Setonix brachyura) ; Pharyngodon australis Johnston & Mawson ( Tiliquascincoides ) ; Porrocaecum (Laymanicaecum ) sp., immature ( Emusium balloti ) ; Amplicaecum mackerrasae nom. nov. syn. Ophidascaris varani Johnston & Mawson ( Varanus varius ) ; Ophidascaris sp. ( Amphibolurus barbatus) ; Hedruris longispicula n. sp. (Lygosoma challengeri); Abbreviata bancrofti (rwin-Smith) (Aspidites melanocephalus ). SOME NEMATODE PARASITES FROM AUSTRALIAN HOSTS, by Parricta M, THomas® [Read 11 September 1958] SUMMARY Four species are described as new, and amplified descriptions are given of six other species. ‘Che following are included: Capillaria miniopterae n. sp. (Miniopterus blepatis); Amidostomum bisiurae Johnston & Mawson (Biziura lobata); Nieollina echidnue Baylis and N. cametont nu. sp. (Tachyglossus aculeata): Nuyucteridastrangylus ticicollis Baylis and Molinustrongylus dollfust n. sp. (Miniopterus blepetis); Austrostrongylus thylogale Johnston & Mawsoa (Setimix brachyura); Pharyngodon australis Johnston & Mawson (Tiliqua scincuides); Porrocaecum (Laymanicaccum) sp., imuiature (Emusium ballot); Amplicaecum mackerrasae non. noy. syn, Ophidascaris varani Jolinston & Maw- son (Varanus varius); Ophidasearis sp. (Amphibolurus barbatus); Hedruris longispicula n. sp. (Lyzosone challengeri); Abbreviata banecrofti (Trwin- Smith) (Aspidites melanocephulus). LIST OF PARASITES ARRANGED UNDER THEIR ILOSTS Amusium balloti Bernardi. Shark Bay, W.A. Porrocaecum (Laymanicaecum ) sp. Hemiscyllium ocellatum Bonnaterre. Low Is., Qu. Proleptus australis Baylis. Lyzosoma challengeri Boulenger. Springbank, Qu. Hedruris longispicula Th sp. Varanus varius Shaw. Mt. Nebo, Qu. Amplicaécrmt mackerrasae nom. nov. Aspidites melanocephalus Kreftt. Cairns, Qu. Abbreviata bancrofli (Tewin- Smith), Amphibolurus barbatus Cuvier. West Burleigh. Polydelphis sp, Tiligua scincoides Shaw. Brisbane, Qu. Pharyngodon australis Johnston and Miutwson, Biziura lobata Shaw. Pumong, S.A. Amidostomum hiziurae Johnston and Mawson. Tachyglossus aculeata (Shaw and Nodder). Kangaroo Island, 5.A,: Nicollina echidnae Baylis; N. cameroni u. sp,; Glen Davis, N.S.W,: Nicollina echicdnae Baylis. Setonix brachyura Quoy and Gaimard, Rottnest Island, W.A, Austrostronzylus thylogale Johnston and Mawson. Miniopterus blepotis Temminck. Naracoorte, 8.A.: Nycteridostrongylus unci- callis Baylis, Molinostrongylus dollfusi n. sp. Canungra, Qu.: Capillaria miniopterae n. sp., Nycteridostrongylus uncicollis Baylis, Molinos(rangylus dollfusi n. sp. Capillaria miniopterae 1. sp, (Figs. 1-3) Four female und four male worms were taken from the slomach of Miniop- teris blepotis from Canungra, Quecnsland. The males are §-0-8-3 mm. long, the females 11-1-14-4 mm. The body Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol, 82. 152 POM, THOMAS ile base of the vesophagus 41-47p, 61; at the widest part of the body 35-5y, 88-100.. The ratio uf oesophageal to intestinal regions is as 1;1+9-2-L in the female and 1;1-6 in the male. The eggs are about 50, by 25.4. The vulva lies cluse behind the end of the oesophagus and its position is marked by # large tubular Aap of the cuticle. The anus m the female is 20u from the rounded posteriar end, In the male there are two lateral bursal Jobes each with a double-headed bursal ray. Prebursal lateral alae are present. A spicule is apparently absent, ur is su lightly cuticularised as to be invisible; the sheath does not project from the body in any specimen; it is not spinos and appcars to be voluminous and transversely striated. The species differs from others from hats {np which preanal alae in the male have been described, in the absence of spicules and in having a nonspinous sheath, and in the absence of bacillary bands in the enticle. Amidostomum biziurae Johnston and Mawson (Figs, 4-10) ‘This species was first described from a single fomale specimen. A number uf mates and females have now been obtained from the type host, Biziure lobata, in which they cecurred in considerable numbers from under the lining of the tizzatd in each of two birds examined. The species has been distinguished rom others of the genus by the presence of anterior projections around the mouth, and by the nature of the cuticle, The length of the males is 7:1-8-1 mim., that of the females 9-4-11-5 mm. The cuticle is annulated, cach annule being formed of a row of coarse bosses of more ur Jess equal size; these latter are discontinued in the lateral lines and on the tail of the female, Underneath this outer Jayer the cuticle is longitudinally striated, but these striae are set obliquely over must of the body, running to- wards the lateral lines, The anterior end of the worm is rounded and the cuticle not inflated; around the mouth is » ring of six small triangular cuticular eutgrowths. Six cephalic papillae are distinct. No epaulette-like structures are present. unless these are represented by the ting of cuticular outgrowths. The bueeal capsule is strongly built and measures in the female lip ex- ternal, and 12. internal, diameter, and 7-8. in length. The large dorsal touth is nat noticeably recurved, Other teeth if present are insignificant. The ooso- hagus is 530-620 long in the male, 600-680, in the female; it is surrounded the nerve ring a little in front of its mid-length, and shortly behind this, at almost the saine level. are the excretory pore and the minute cervical papillae. In a male in which the oesophagus is 500, long, the nerve ring lies 280p, the cervical papillae at 340, and the excretory pore at 345y, from the anterior end; in a Female in which the ocsophagus is 610. long these distances are respec- tively 3004, 350, and 350u. The oesophagus is lined by several long thick cuticularised bands, referred to by some authors us triturating rods, and these are broken (each possibly projecting as a small tooth) just in frout of the nerve ring, where the oesophagus is very slightly swollen. The oesophagus widens slightly in its posterior third and ends fn an elongate bulb, into which te triturating rods do not enter, The female tail, 210-240, long, is strongly striated, though not mammillated, and ends in an unstriated bulb. The distance of the vulva from the posterior em of the body is 1/4-4-1/4-9 of the total body length, The vulva itself is a wide slit. The eggs are 70-754 by 42-45,. The spicules are 115-130, long. Each ends in two points of almost equal length, of these the dorsal, sometimes shorter, is the narrower, and the other NEMATODE PARASITES 153 wide and membranous, The gubernaculum is 70s long. A pair of lateral pre- bursal papillae are present. The bursa is infolded along the outer edge of the lateral lobes so that the tips of the rays are hard to see. A small dorsal lobe is present, The arrangement of the lobes and rays is shown in Figs. 8, 9 and 10. Figs, 1-10. Fius. 1-3, Capillaria miniopterae. 1, vulvar region of femule; 2, ventral, and 3, lateral, views of posterior end of male. Figs. 4-10, Amidostomum bizturae, 4, dorsal, and 5, lateral, views of head; 6, oesophageal region; 7, tail of female; 8, posterior end of male; 9, ventral view of bursa: 10, dorsal ray. Figs. 1, 2, 3 and 8 to same scale; Figs. 4 and 5 to saine scale; Figs. 6, 7, 9 and 10 to same scale, The genus Nicotzina Baylis, 1930 Baylis in 1930 (p. 17) described two species of a new genus from echidnas. He stated that neither of them appeared to be that recorded (unnamed) by Nicoll (1914), because Nicoll described the worms as retaining their coiled 15d P. M, THOMAS shape in lot alcohol, whereas those of Baylis were not coiled, Cameron in 1931 (p. 153) added another species to the genus, from a marsupial Sarcophilus harrissi, and stated that this species assumnes the tightly coiled habit when pre- served, Of two echidnas recently dissected in this department, only one was pura- sitised, and this had two species, one coiled tightly in a long spiral and the other loosely curved. The latter are identified with one of the specivs described by Baylis, but the former appears to be so fir undescribed, and may be thal recorded hy Dr. Nicoll. Nicollina echidnae Baylis, 1930 (Figs, 11-12) A number of specimens were obtained from Tachyzlossus aeuleata from Kangaroo Island, Six of each sex were measured. The specimens agree in most points with those described from echidnas from Queenslind, The inales are about the same size, the females rather longer, .3:2-6-5 mm. ancl 6: 7-8:1 mi. long respectively, ‘Vhe body bears one lateral ala as deseribed by Baylis and the cuticle posterior to the ceplulic inflation is longitudinally as well ay trans- versely stiiated; it is, however, raised into broken longitudinal crests, of which there are abuut two at the anteriye end and more in the wider part of the body. The evgs are 30-35, by 70-80u, whereas those measured by Baylis are 55-7ay by 30-334, These are the ooly points in which the new specimens differ from the description given by Baylis. The spicule shape and length (340-390.) and the dorsal ray of the bursu, are exactly as described. It is possible that the Queensland specimens were vounver and the longitudinal crests were nor de- veloped, The mouth is surrounded hy six prominent lips, not figured or pastinacede (Rudolphi), In- vonstance et variabilité du caecum intestinal. Bull. soc, Path. exot,, 38, pp, 93-99, lnwin-Synti, V., 1922. Notes on uematudes of the genus Physuloptera. 'V, The Physalop- tera of Australian lizards. Proc. Linn. Soc. New Siuth Wales, 47 (4), pp. 415-427. Jonnsron, J. H., and Mawsow, P. M., 1940, Nematodes from South Australian. marsupials. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Aust., 64 (1), pp. 95-100. Jurnston, T, 1., ancl Mawson, PB. M,, 1940. The Gallard collection of parasitic nematules in the Australian Museum. Rec. Aust. Mus., 21 (2), pp. 110-115. Jonnaon, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1847. Some nematodes from Australian lizards. Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust, 71 (1). pp. 28-27, 162 P. M. THOMAS Jounsron, T. H., and Mawson, P. M., 1947. Some avian and fish nematodes chiefly from Tailem Bend, South Australia. Rec. S. Aust. Mus., 8 (4), pp. 548-553. Krets, H. A., 1940. Beitriige zur Kenntnis parasitischer Nematoden, IX. Parasitische Nema- toden aus dem Naturhistorischen Museum Basel. Zentr. fiir Bakteriol. Parasit. und Infek., Orig. 1, Abt. 145, pp. 163-208. Moscovoy, A. A., 1953. (Ascaridia of animals and man.) Pt. 2, 616 pp. (Osnovy nema- todologii) vol. 2. Moscow. Nicoiti, W., 1914. Remarks on the worm parasites of tropical Queensland. Med. Journ. Australia, Sept. 12. Van Crrave, H. J., and Mueiien, J. F., 1932. Parasites of the Oneida Lake fishes. Pt. 3, A parasitological and ecological survey of the worm parasites. Roosevelt Wild Life Ann., 3 (3-4), pp. 161-334. CYTOLOGICAL STUDIES IN THE GENUS DANTHONIA BY K. ABELE Summary Counts have been made of the chromosomes of 28 Australian species of Danthonia. Counts of 24, 42, 48, 72 and 96 somatic chromosomes were recorded. A study of stomatal lengths showed this character to be highly correlated with the level of polyploidy except in a few species. Except in three species, increasing levels of polyploidy are associated with increased hairiness of the lemma. No other conspicuous morphological character showed any relationship with the level of polyploidy. Two species displayed intraspecific polyploidy, viz. D. caespitosa (2n = 24, 48 and 72) and D. longifolia (2n = 24 and 48). The number of collections of D. longifolia was inadequate for an effective examination of the geographic distribution of the two chromosome races. Characteristics such as floret morphology, stomatal length and geographic distribution were not entirely satisfactory as criteria for distinguishing the chromosome races of D. caespitosa. The distribution and the interspecific relationships of polyp lo id’ levels in the genus Danthonia are reviewed. CYTOLOGICAL STUDIES IN THE GENUS DANTHONIA, by K. ABELE* [Read 12 June 1958] SUMMARY Counts have been madé of the chromosomes of 28 Australian species of Danthonia. Counts of 24, 42, 48, 72 and 96 somatic chromosomes were re- corded. A study af stomatal lenvths showed this character te be hilly cor- related with the level of polyploidy except in a fow spocies. Except in three species, increasine levels of polyploidy aré associated with inervased hairiness of the lemma. No other conspicuous norphulogival character showed any relationship with the level of polyploidy. Two species displayed intraspecific polyploidy, vi. D. caespitosa (2n = 24, 48 and 72) and D. Jongifolia (2n=24 ancl 48), The number of collections of D, longifolia was inadequate for an effective examination of the geographic distribution of the two chromosome races. Characteristics such as floret morphology, stomatal length and geographic distribution were not en- tirely satisfactory aa criteria for distinguishing the chromosome races of D, caespitasa, : The distribution and the interspecific relationships of polyploidy levels in the genus Danthonia are reviewed. INTRODUCTION Some 10) species of Danthonia are known in temperate aud sub-tropical parts of the world; many are valuable fodder grasses. The papers of Trumble (1927), Richardson, Trumble and Shapter (1931), Trumble and Davies (1931), and Cashmore (1932) deal with the taxonomy and agronomic value of the Aus- tralian species of Danthonia; cleyen new species of Australian Danthonia have been described by Vickery (1950), and more recently a revision of the Aus- tralian species has been carried out by the same author (Vickery, 1956), Several studies dealing with chromosome numbers in Danthonia have heen made in the United States and South Africa (see “Diseussion’) and these have included some Australian species. The present study was designed to examine chromosome numbers and the possible occurrence of intraspecific polyploidy in a range of Australian species. The plants studied were collected from natural Australian habitats as plants or seed. The individual plants were numbered, and specimens of most of them ae prseived in the herbarium of the Waite Agricultural Research Institute, elalae. CYTOLOGICAL TECHNIQUE The root tips for cytological examination were pretreated for four hours in a 0-003 mol, solution of 8-hydroxy-quinoline (Tjio and Levan, 1950), and fixed in acetic acid-alcohol, The pretreatment was adyvantageons in spreading the metaphase chromosomes, so that even in cases of polyploidy the counting and study of chromosomes presented few difficultics. Root tips were stained in bulk using Feulgen. Generally, there is no difficulty in germinating secd of Danthonia, The dormancy shown hy some species following harvesting can be broken by ex- * Waite Agricultural Researcl: Institute, the University of Adelaide, Trans, Roy. Soc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol, 82. 164 k ABELE posing the seed, previously suaked in water, to a temperature of 2-3° C. for a week. An exception is the seed of D. bipartita, which is difficult to germinate, RESULTS i. Chromosome numbers and morphology The Australian species of Danfhonia examined in this study have 24, 42. 48, 72 or 96 chromosomes (Table 1), but in contrast with some species from overseas none of the Australian material had 12 or 36 chromosomes. TABLE 1. Numbers of chromosomus.in Austtalian species of Danthorwi. Species No.. Species No. D. alpicola J. W. Viekery 24 | LD longifolia R. Br. 24) D, euriculota J. M. Black 24 48 f D, bipartity F. Muell. 72 D. nudiflora 'P, F. Morris™ 24 D, ceeapitosa Gaul, 24 PD. oncidentalis J. W. Vickery v4 48 D, pallida R. Br, 72 72 D, penicitiata (Labitl) Benuy. 24 D. curphoides ¥. Muell, 24 I. pilosa R. Br, a4 D. élelandsi JI. W. Vickory 48 DD. pilosa var. paleacea J, W, Virkery ut 2D. duitoniana A.B, Cashmore 24 D. procera J. W. Vickery Yb D. eriantha Lind. 48 2D. purpurascens J. W, Viekury 72 D. frigida J. W, Vickery: 42 | D, racemosa var. obtusatt F. Muell. 24 BD, geniculnia VM. Black 48. | D. richardsunii A, BR. Cashmore 48 Dy induta J. W. Vickery 72 D, semiannelerie (Labill) R. Br. 24 Dz lacris JI. W. Vickery | 48 | 2. setaeea R. Br. | 24 D, linkit Kunth | 24 D. linkii var. fulen J, W. Viekery Tz The chromusomes of all the above species are uniform in size and mor- phology. Length is of the order of 4, except D. bipartita, which are 1-2,. No morphological features such as differences in size, secondary constric- tions or trabants have been seen. In several cases small particles attached to the end of the chromosome were observed staining in Feulgen and closely re- sembling trabants, but as they appear rarely and irregularly they could not be definitely identified as such. This absence of sagrpbolagical differences accords with the work of other authors except De Wet (1953), Calder (1937, p, 5, fig. 7) draws two somatic chromosomes of D. setifolia with apparent trabants, but there is no mention of them in the text. The bivalents ut diakinesis in pollen mother cells ure about 34 long, with the exception of the bivalents of D. bipartita, which are about la long. The diakinetic chromosomes in the pollen mother cells show bivalents only; no uni- valents or multivalents have been observed at any stage. For all species, again with the exception of D. bipartita, 4 complete ter- minalization of the chiasmata of the bivalents by diakinesis is characteristic. No terminalization of the chiasmata was observed in D. bipartita. 2. Measurements of stomata Stomatal size is widely used as a criterion for assessing the degree of polyploidy. It is considered to be a better index of the chromosome number than the size of the pollen grains (Miintzing, tea (a) In order to determine the extent to which length of the stomata in Danthonia may be influenced by environmental factors two species of Danthonia, D. duttoniana and D. richardsonii, were each grown under different environ- 165 CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA ¥S-0 ¥F-0 9L-0 29-0 LO-T 9F-0 LE-0 99-0 €¢-0 16-0 oT BPO FE-0 69-0 8t-0 #8-0 98-0 620 19-0 TF-0 BL-0 “al 66-0 92-0 oF-6 Le-0 #9-0 L&-0 as-0 88-0 | 18-0 #o-0 %S (2) (p) (0) (a) (2) (0) (P) @) =| a) (e) ne i 1sOnUaTIOL IT qIeOyTEATY UUOSPLDY ML “fT Dunmwognp (7 £:0F | 3: 0F 9:0F | 9-68 | lt L-8& | 9-1F | o-0F o:0F uBeTy 2(60-0F) (60-0) all-0F) 0-0F £:68 L+0F paris 8-OF Lele 8: 0F 9-0F 6-0F aang, TF 6-0F a-1F L+OF GF L-68 BSF L-TF L-OF 13k = PIPPUAT 6°68 £-0F 9°68 0:68 8-0F L-88 6-1F £°68 1-68 ld diy, | wuospsoyais “7 (ZL-0-F) (91-0F) (BT OF} n(8B-07) (83-07) Ls £-98 | tne &-98 28 6-26 | o-96 | 9-98 9:28 | WRORT 2(80-0F) (80-0 F ) (11-07) £-98 €-98 &-98 g-Le 68 L-98 9:98 6-2 ose GLE 9-18 £-L8 9-18 1-L8 1*8& 9-18 T-Le 4-96 [PPH £98_ 6-98 L-96 B°9E ¥-9€ L-O8 T-S€ 9:88 8° LE diy, pUnIUONND “TT e(0T-0—) AFT-07F) (FIT-OF) (0-07) (02-07) | (squauL (syueur | 8} IrauE -7801} JayBM Jo UBaTY) | ~Jeer} YYSIT Jo uveyr) | peyoruysar pewiuyesr | TeULION jeanou ~yeory quay anyaty qyST] syst We | poyzorrgsor pouri01 popPoyBEr [BULLION pus yeuniow $| payauysor pue prey FRoy jo weep quarry quary TayeAd 109B AL IOge AA JOPE AA 1078 A JB7B AA uw uo seroodg | Burmoary | WOyBeg @SNOYSsEs) Ul SurMost) ‘(SUOTOTU UT BYBUTOYS HT JO BJUSULEINS¥EUT JO SUBOUL O18 SJUGULIVEI} [ENPLATPUL OJ BOUNTY) SUOT}IPUOD [eJUOUTUOTATO FUOIayIP JepUM UMOIZ YrUoYUDCT JO solDeds O44 UT BPVUIOYS JO SyUOMIAINEBOyT “6 GIAVL 166 Kk, ABELE mental conditions and the length of their stomata measuted. All plants were abtained by dividing 2 single parent plant grown from secd. One plant from each species was grown in the open and was well watered. All the other plants were grown in pots in an open-sided glasshouse, Two plants of each species were grown in full glasshouse light, while another pair was covered with a perforated zinc iron cage admitting about 5 per cent. of the light: One plant of cach pair was well watered, while the other was given only as much water as was necessary to prevent killing. The growth of the plants in the glasshouse was slightly retarded compared with the control plants in the open, while plants receiving limited water showed a further reduction in size. The stomata on the upper surface of the leaf are restricted to the longi- tudinal «ruoves whilst the lower surface is ungrooved and often has fewer stomata, in some species even none. Sections m the upper surface were used for the measurements. The leaf subtending the inflorescence was called the first leaf, the other leaves being numbered accordingly. In D. duttoniena the stomata of the first leak, especially when this leaf was small, were sometimes shorter than the storneta of the third leaf hy 2-3. In D. richardsonii. where the leaves are more raluust, this difference could not be observed, The third Jewf was used For the comparison of stomata developing under yalicus environmental treatments. The length of stomata near the base ot the lamiua, in the middle anid near the tip, were measured. In all cases the lengths ut 100 stomata were measured. The results ave shown im Table 2, Restriction of water or light supply led to significant but small decreases in the lenvth of the stomata. The reduction due to water restriction was 3:4 per cent. in D. duttoniana and .3+7 per cent. in D. richardsonii, Stomata were larger in the central position on the leaf than at the base or tip. The duta establish clearly that differences in stomatal size due to grossly varyinx environmental conclitions or to position on the feaf do. not exceed Vulues of the order of & per cent, Substantially greater differences between plants —evern between those grown under different environmental conditions — may be properly regarded as being due to differences of genetic constitution. {b) To study the correlation uf the stomatal length with the chromosome Niunbes, measurecnetts were made on all species included in this study, “Uhese were grown at the Tustitute under field conditions with the exception of D. bipartita. Measurements of the stomata of this species were made on the leaves of mature plants bronght from the John Mortlock Experimental Station at Yudna- pirina, 250 miles to the vorth of Adelaide, where the mean annual rainfall (9in.} is Much lower than at the Waite Institute (25in.). In all cases the leaves taken for stomatal measurements were from plants whose chromosomes had been counted. Stomata from the middle of the Tamina of the third leat were selected for measurement. The variation within most species was small. For instance, the rango of variation in. stomatal size between plants of D. purpurascens was 60°+7y-61+ 4p, in D. linkit var. fuloa A1-4yp-49-5p and in D. seniannularis was 38) 2u-40+3y. Wide variation, however, was encountered in two species. Plants of D. cnespitosa having the same chromosume number, 2n = 48, showed a range from 42-1a to 53-22. The variation is also wide in D. hipartita which showed values amony six plants of 32-4, 33-4, 34:0, 37-0, 37-8 and 42-6. These ranges of varialion in stomatal size in plants of D. caespitosa having 48 chromosomes 41-1), and in D. bipartita (10-22) arc each about as great as that within ¢ entire group of 10 species having 48 chromosomes (51-8p-41-2u = 10-6y) LENGTHS OF STOMATA NA 167 CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA 6s O.PURPURASCENS 60> OPALLIDA, OGAESPITOSA 2.048. 65 +. QPROCERA, BINDUTA. DCLELANDIL DGENICULATA 50+ DERIANTHA, as MLAEVIS. O.CAESPITOSA 203A, DNUDIFLORA, DRICHARESONI|, BLINKII VAR, FULVA, BSEMANNULARIS. —__L. QLONGIFOLIA. 2.43, 4O-- RPENNICILLATA DAURICULATE. DCARPHOIDES. DBIPARTITA. DLINKIL ODUTTONIANA 3+ 1 DCAESPITOSA.IO7A, DPILOSA, ORACEMOS AVAR.OBTUSATA, 30+ DRACEMOS A. DLONGIFOLIA. DFRIGIOA DPILOSAVAR.PALEACEA, 25 2N=224 2N=42 2n =46 anw72 2N= 06 MEAN STOMATAL LENGTHS PLOTTED AGAINST THE CHROMOSOME NUMBERS OF AUSTRALIAN SPECIES OF DANTHO NIA. Fig. 1—Mean stomatal lengths plotted against the chromosome numbers of Aus- tralian species of Danthonia. = i ee | | ci Be aed Fig. 2.—The distribution of three chromosome races of D. caespitosa. Reference: hollow circles = 24 chromosome D. caespitosa; full black circles = 48 chromosome D. caespitosa; crosses = 72 chromosome D. caespitosa. Each symbol covers one habitat from which the plant was collected for chromosome counting, except the cross near Adclaide which covers 5 habitats. The position of the symbols in the crowded areas is approximate only. K. ABELE 168 opyendig *“q *(sBuLa ‘ppypod *q esIOASURIy aqruyep ou) Airey AloOA WUOSPADY ILL *(T usengeq SITBy papnf IBA wyUa) “CT ‘oynynoiuab +7 saproydano "(7 ‘ayuy-q | esuep yy sBul esvoasuway aqojduod z susaspandind *( ueeAjoq sITBY Pos} 7RdS ‘pnpur °C puna “(tT MOF B UPA SBULI vsIaasuBs} ozo[durao 7 nsopdsane “(7 p4a904d *(T psopidsane * neopdsane * ‘paongas ‘(7 ‘vuDwmoynp “(7 DYFUDIA “CT ‘nyoynarann “qT ‘pyoowdyy "CT STULL esiaAsUBI} aqeydulos Z ! osoyibuas °C pLoyfibuo) “qr ‘saynquapia00 "CT sultan) “(7 ‘stunnuunruas *CT aya[duios Buna aaddn jug Dyn yiwued *(T ‘weopappd ‘IBA psopid “G7 ‘vsozid “ ‘neoyipnu “(7 “psowaons "CT eqejduios dui samo] ATU 96=Ug eL=usg 8F= Ue Fo= UE Apoq suru] ey4 uo Suley JO JueMEZURIy -seioeds ovueyjungy uvipesysny ut Aprojddjod jo jeae], eq} pue Apoq BUrUe] ey} UO BuleYy Jo yUSWIeZUPIIE oY} UseM40q diysuOTzE[eI Bt, ‘6 TIGVi CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA 169 so far studied. The wide variation in D. caespitosa agrees with the morpho- logical variability of this species and may be explained by the presence of various races among the plants. There is a marked positive correlation between chromosome number and length of stomata (Fig. 1). The exceptions are few. D. linkii var. fulva and D, bipartita, each with 72 chromosomes, have markedly shorter stomata than other 72-chromosome species. D. nudiflora (2n = 24) has stomata slightly longer than the shortest stomata found in the 2n = 48 chromosome plants. However, the most conspicuous deviation from the correlation was found in D. frigida, which grows in the alpine region of Australia and has 2n = 42 chromosomes. The stomata were found placed deeply in the grooves and are extremely small, measuring only 26-6p. 5 ! ! ! | H i | | i “a { ! ! ! i q Fig. 3.—Distribution of 24-chromosome D. cuespitosa. Reference: hollow circles = the chromosome number of collected plants counted; black triangles = only length: of stomata on herbarium specimens measured, 3. Interspecific polyploidy and morphological characters The principal character used in the identification of species of Danthonia is the abundance and arrangement of the hairs on the Jemma. ling an examination has been made of the correlation between the hairiness of the lemma and level of polyploidy (Table 3). It is apparent that increasing levels of polyploidy are associated with in- creased hairiness of the lemma. In some groups of species the relationship is 170 K, ABELE particularly strong, e.g. all species with only a lower ring of hairs have 24 chromosomes. On the other hand three species show disconformity from the general pattern, namely D. linkii, D. carphoides and D. procera. 4, Intraspecific polyploidy in Danthonia caespitosa The taxonomic species D, caespitusa at present includes a complex of forms distributed over southern Australia (Fig, 2). Collections from southern States have been grown, and from these a number of distinct forms bave been separated (E. L. Robertson, private communication), Of the 62 plants examined oytologicallys 5L had 48 chromosomes, 5 had 24 chromosomes, and 6 had 72 romosomes, The 24-chromosome group represents a morphologically distinguishable form, designated “form 6” by E, L. Robertson. As shown in the Fig. 3, this variant has been collected only from the drier areas of South Australia. The contrast between a floret of this form and a 48-chromosome type is shown in Fig. 4. Cc Db Fig. 4—D. cuespitosa. A, B—flowers of the 24-chromosome plant (A ventral, B dorsal view); C, D—flowers of the 48-chromasome plant (C ventral, 9 dorsul view). Two 72-chromosome forms are very distinct from each other, but only one of them is distinctly different from the 48-chromosome group, ‘The former has been found only in the Verdun-Ambleside area of the Adelaide Hills and possibly represents a distinct yaricty or species. It has robust, tall stems (2-3 feet in height) with glaucous-green foliage, entirely devoid of hairs except for the short ligule. The other form representing one collection from Ungarra, Eyre Peninsula, has short, sctaceous, pubescent foliage, with very short basal sheaths, and yery CYTOLOGY OF DAN'THONLA ii slender stems, and is not readily distinguishable from some of the 48-chrumo- somes material. All of the other specimens uf D. cuespitasa examined had 48 chromosomes and were of very diverse morphology. DISCUSSION 1. Polyploidy in the genus Danthonia Since the levels of polyploidy in the genus Danthonia in various parts of the world are recorded as 2n = 12, 24, 36, 48, 72, 96 and 120, it is clear that 6 js the basic number of most Danthonia species, The only species having 2n=96 or 120 chromosomes haye been found in Australia, but uo Australian species is yet reported with 2n=12 or 36. Calder (1937) postulates a basic number of 7 for New Zealand species with In =42. D. frigide is the only 42-chromosame species so far recorded in Australia. In view of D. frigida’s affinity with some New Zealand species (Vickery, 1956) which also have 42 chromosomes, and the fact that only bivalents are formed at meiosis, 7 would appear to be a more logical basic number for this Species. : The counts here recorded are in agreement with the previous counts made by other workers, except in three instances: D, pilosa, D. semiannularis and D. Npartita, ” The different chromosome number recorded for D. pilosa by Calder (1937) from that found by Stebbins (Myers, 1847) and by the author tay have re- sulted from u wrong identification of the material. Chromosome counts were made on D. pilose and D, semiannularis sent by Calder from New Zealand. D. pilosa had the same number as found in Australian D. pilosa, ie, In = 24. One of the two plants received as D, semiannuleris had 2n = 24 chromosomes, the other was identified at the Waite Institute as D, cuespitusa, Calder has advised that botanists in New Zealand do not recognise D, cuespitosa as graw- ing in that country, and the 48 chromosome D. caespitosa had been identified as a form of D. semiannularis. If each identification is correct the difference in the chromosome number of D, bipartita were De Wet (1954) faund 2n = 48 chromasomes and the author 2n = 72 (derived from 36 bivalents in diakinesis and counted in root tips} may indicate that this species had developed intraspecific olyploidy. D. bipartite stows only in remote arid areas of inland Australia, ate as mentioned ahove, is ficult to germinate and grow. Brock (unbabtihed has recently counted 22 = 120 chromosomes in D_ indula in material sent to him from the Waite In- stitute, but all material of D. induta examined here has shown 2n = 72. 2. Chromosome numbers and length of stomata Apart from the high currelation of chromosome number and stomatal length, and the aberrant species already noted, the principal point of interest is that D procera with 2n = 46 chromosomes has shorter stomata than any of the 2n = 73 chromosome species. Though here based on a single species, this phenomenon has already been reported in other instances. Yamamoto (1938) observed that a hexaploid Rumex acetosa had smailer stomata than a pentaploid plant, Love (1944) noticed in his studies in Remex acetosella that “from the hexaploid to the actoploid state, however, a diminution in the length of stomata is calculated”, Tischler (1954) mentions (p. 230) the measurements of Duffield, who found that a hexaploid Acer rubrum has longer stomata than an actoploid plant of that species. Apparently there is a limit beyond which the length of stomata 172 k, ABELE ceases fo increase with further increase in number ot chromosomes, and this may also be the case in Danthonia. 3. Intraspeelfic polyploidy (2) Turning to intraspecific polyploidy, it has been shown that the levels of ploidy in D. cuespitosa arc not wholly satisfactorily related ta morphological charactors, ‘I'he 24-chroinosome form appears to be reasonably well-differen- tiated and to have: a limited distribution (fig. 2), On the other land, the 72- chromosome material inchides two very distinct growth forms, though each has to date been reeorded within a very limited arca. Present evidence dues not elucidate the origin of the 72-chromoseme race. However, its collection frem the vicinity of both the 24- and 45-chromosome types in South Australia would support the hypothesis of it being a hybrid between these races. Within the 48-chromosome material, which includes most af the Toaterial collected, there is a considerable diversity of morphological characters. Roth Nampfeldt (1938) and Love (1951) express the view that if more than one chromosome munber is recognized in a taxonomic species, the species should be re-examined taxonomically with a view to its subdivision, even though dit- ferences in morphological characters prove to be small. In D, caespitosa, as now recugnized by botanists, there is clear evidence for subdivision of the species hased on chromosome numbers, and less sharply on morphological characters. The limited amount of material examined suggests that in South Australia some chromosome races may be geographically delimited im that the 24-chromosome type appears to uccur only in the driec areas of the southern part of the State, Collections could profitably be made from the eastern edge of the distribution arca of the 48-chromosome type in Western Australia and in western New Sonth Wales to determine the generality of this situation. (b) D. longifolia, ta this species two chromosome numbers have heen recorded, yiz,: (i) Chromosome number 2n = 24, the length of stomata about 28p. (Gi) Chromosome number 2n = 48, the length of stomata about 41. As one one plant of D, fongifolia 2n = 48 and two plants 2n = 24 were collected, na comment can be made concerning the existence or distribution of chromo- some racos based on different chromosome numbers. No morphological differen- tiation among the three collected plants could be observed. The regular pairing of the cliomosomes and absence of multivalents at meiosis would suggest allopolyploidy. As the species of the genus Danthonia are recorded as bein siostly autogamous, the small degree of outerossing which must have occurred would result in rapid stabilization of new chromosome races. 4. Interspecific relationships Vickery (1956) used the characteristics of the lemma as the morphnloyies! feature must likely to show the affinities of the various species within the genus Daiithonia. Four series of species were postulated in this way The first consisted of a single species D. bipartite which was relitively iso- lated hoth in habit and floral character. Cytologically, this species ix unique m that its chromosome morphology and hehaviour at meiosis differs from that of all other species which tend to be rather uniform. The second series was characterized by the scattered distribution of hairs on the body uf the lemma. The chromosome numbers of these species were 24. 48 and 72. Vickery (1956) felt that the affinities of D. frigida appeared to be with a group of New Zealand species represented by D. aunninghamdl, dD. raoullig and D. flovescens rather than with this series. The cvtological evidence CYTOLOGY OF DANTHONIA 73 supports this view as both D. frigida and these New Zealand species are the only 42-chromosome species so far identified in the two countries. The third series is centred on D, caespitosa and its extreme taxonomic diversity has not been clarified by a cytological study, as species with chromo- sume numbers of 24, 48, 72 and 96 have been identified in this group, quite apurt from the complexity of D. caespilosa itself. ‘The final series have hairs of the Iomma represented only by isolated mar- ginal and dorsal tufts, All species of this series lave 24 chromosomes, A more extensive ecological and cytological investigation will be necessary to clarify the complex of inter- and intraspevific polyploidy but a definite pattern of relationships within the Genus is becoming obvious from the cytological and inorphological evidence presented. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The author would like to thank Mrs. E. L. Rubertson, formerly Systematic Botunist at the Waite Institute, for identifying and growing all the plants in- eluded in this study. and Dr, K. W. Finlay. Messrs, F. M. Hilton and D. E. Symon for their advice and criticism. REFERENCES GCarven, J. W., 1937. A cytological study of sume New Zealand species aid varieties uf Danthonia, Linn, Suc. J. Bot., 51, pp. LY. Casumore. A, B., 1952. An investigation of the taxonomic and woricultural characters af the Danthonia group, Coun. Sei. Tndustr, Res, Bull. No, 69, Darume'ron, C, D,, and Wri, A. P.. 1955. Chromasour: Atlas of Hlowering Planis, London. Dg Wer, J. M, J., 1953, Nucleoli numbers in Danthonia polyploids, Cytologia, 18, pp, 229-234, Dr Wer, J. M, J., 1954. The genus Danthonia in grass phylogeny, Amer. J. Bot, 41, pp. 204-211, Love, A., 1944. Cytogenetic studies on Runiva sudgenus Acestosella, Hereditas, 80, pp. 1-136, Love, A., 1951, Tuxunomie evaluation of polyploids, Caryologia, 4, pp. 263-284, Moinrzine, A., 1937. The effects of chromosal variation in Jactylis, Horeditas, 23, pp. 113-235, Myers, Ys AT, 1947. Cytology and genetics of forage urasses, Bot. Rev,, 13, pp. 318-367, 369-421. Naxnereupr, J. A. 1938, Pow meruceana Nannf., n. sp. and Pow rivalorwn Maire and Trahut, two inore tetraploids. of sect, Ochlapoa A. and Gr., aud some additionyl notes on Ochlapoa, Svensk Bot. Tidsk., 32, pp. 295-321, Ricuarpson, A. EB. V., Tuumsie, H, C., and Suarrer, RK. £., 1931, factors affecting the mineral content of pastures, Coun. Sei. Industr. Bes. Bull. No. 49, Strppins, L. C., und Love, R. M., 1941. A eytologieal stucly of C.ifornian forage grasses, ; Amer. J. Bot.. 28, pp. 371-382. : Twenuen, G, 1954. Allgemeine Pilazenkaryologie. Erginzuogsband zum Band il, Zweite: Lieferung, Burlin-Nikolasce: Typo, J. EL, and Livan, A. 1950. The ose of oxyquinoline in chromosome analysis, Ann, Est. Exp. de Aula Dei., 2. (1), pp. 21-64. TktuMace, Ho C,, and Daving. J. G,, 1931, The roles of pasture species In regions uf winter rainfall and summer druight, J. Coun. Sei. Industr. Kes,, 4, pp. 140-151. Vioxgxy, J. W., 1950. New species of Danthonie DC, (Gramineae) from Australia, Con- fributions from the New South Wales Natioual Herbarium, 1, pp. 296-301. Vickery, J. W., 1956, A revision of the Australian species. of Danthonia DC, Contributions from the New South Wales National Ierbariam, 2, pp. 249-325, Yamamoto, Y., 1938. Karyogenetische Untersuchungen bei der Gattung Rumex, Memoirs of the College of Agriculture, Kyoto Imperial University, 43, pp. 1-59 THE CHEMICAL COMPONENTS OF THE TEST OF AN AUSTRALIAN LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE (MASKELL) BY HARRY F. LOWER Summary The test of A. acaciae consists of chitin, protein, a dye, a wax, and a complex of lacs and lac-like substances. Of the latter, which constitute more than half the dry weight of the test, none could be identified as shellac. The dye and wax are also chemically distinct from those described from other insects. THE CHEMICAL COMPONENTS OF THE TEST OF AN AUSTRALIAN LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE (Maskell) (Homoptera : Lacciferidae) by Hasuy F. Lower® [Read 11 September 1958] SUMMARY The test of A. acaciae consists of chitin, protein, a dye, a wax. and a complex of lacs and lac-like substances. Of the latter which constitute more than half the dry weight of the test, none could be identified as shellac, The dye and wax are also chemically distinct from those described from other insects. INTRODUCTION Among the Homoptera, certain groups within the super-family, Coccoidea, are characterized by their secretion of large quantities of various waxes, or resinous materials, or both, which they incorporate into their tests or “scales”, This mode of forming a protective covering for the body is most highly de- veloped in the Lacciferidae or “lac insects” of which Laccifer lacca (Kerr), the Indian Jac insect, is the best-known species. There is an extensive literature dealing with its most important commercial product, shellac, and scattered references to insect waxes and dyes are to be found. The literature of the two latter has recently been reviewed by Warth (1956) and Fox (1953), respectively, while detailed accounts of the manu- facture, physical and chemical constants, and industrial applications of shellac, such as these of Gardner (1937) and Parry (1925), are mumerous. Apart from Fox (op. cit.) whose interest is in the chemistry of animal dyes generally, and Chamberlain (1923, 1925) who has provided the only complete taxonomic study of the family, the literature is entirely technological. Not only is this so, but its scope is limited to discussing three components of the test—shellac, wax and dye—and these of the one species L. Jacca. Of the materials constituting the remainder of its test, or of any of the components of the tests of other lacci- ferids, nothing is known. Austrotachardia acuciae (Maskell) is an endemic lac insect which is widely but irregularly distributed throughout the dry inland parts of Australia, where the environmental conditions admit of the growth of its host tree, Acacia aneurea F. Muell. (mulga). The female secretes a thick, hard, brittle, dull orange-red test (Plate 1) which, in addition to the normal chitin-protein complex, contains over 60 per cent. of a variety of complex organic substances. The material studied was collected from mulga trees on Yudnapinna Station, 50 miles N.W. of Port Augusta. Within the time at my disposal, practical diffi- culties made impossible the collection of material in quantity adequate for the complete examination of all substances present. Considerable distances often separate affected trees, rarely are parts of more than one or two boughs of any one tree infested, and in their colonies the insects are relatively dispersed. A further restriction of yield was imposed by the need for confining selection to ° Waite Agriculiural Research Institute, University of Adelaide, South Australia. Trans. Ros. Soc. 8. Aust (1959), Vol. 82. 176 HARRY F. LOWER dead insects, to obviate contamination of the sample with the body fats and fuids of living ones, Some extraneous matter was thereby unavoidably introduced in the form of desert dust, and the webbing and frass of spiders and larval scavengers. While the proportion of these was greatly reduced by subsequent teatment, it is almost certain that the greater part of the inorganic matter found was of external origin. Somewhat less than 50 g. of crude material were collected from which ubout 35 g. of sample were prepared. EXPERIMENTAL (To obviate xvepetition throughout the paper attention is drawn to the fol- lowing: 1, All drying was done to constant weight at 103° C, 2, “Ethanol” means absolute ethanol unless otherwise specified. 3, The substantive, luceoid, has becn coined for substances which, while exhibiting many of the properties of the lacs. show by their mode of formation that they have much in common with fatty acids.) The crude material was dried and the resulting cake, after breaking, was ground and as much as possible passed through a sieve of mesh diameter 0:246 mm. This eliminated webbing, and wood and leaf debris. The resulting powder was vigorously stirred with water in a tall cylinder and allowed to stand until the denser fraction had settled. The floating matter was then skimmed off, dried, and ye-geound. This was the sample with which all work was done. Micro- scopic examination of the sludge showed it to consist alrnost entirely of silt. Three 10 g. portions of the sample were individually Soxhlet-extracted with ether for 30 hr. The extracts were united, the ether distilled off, and the residue collucted (Eatract A), The residues in the thimbles were then further extracted with ethanol for 40 hr, The extracts were united and evaporated to dryness ( Extract B). The residues in the thimbles, after drying, were digested under reflux for 10 hr. with boiling 5 per cent, hydrochloric acid, filtered under pressure, and washed with hot water until free from acid. Filtrate and washings were evyapor- ated ta dryness (Extract C )- The residue was digested under reflux for 6 hr, with 200 ml. of 0-1 molar boilins sodium carbonate solution. The mixture was filtered under pressure and the residue washed with hot water until the washings were free from carbonate, Washings and filtrate were evaporated to dryness (Extract D). The residue was dried and weighed. It was then ashed, and the ash weighed, The ash was boiled in three changes of aqua regia, each for 15 mm, After each boiling, the insoluble matter was allowed to settle and the liquid decanted. The three extracts were united and evaporated to dryness (Extract £). The residue remaining after treatment with aqua regia was heated to red- ness for 5 min., covled and weighed. EXTRACY A (Ether-soluble) Extract A was a solt, deep orange-brown solid, It was boiled under reflux for 12 hy. with 200 ml. of a proprietary wax solvent of high efficiency (sce note at end), After cooling, the clear yellow solution was decanted and the residue hoiled with three successive 50 jot portions of the same solvent, each For 6 hr. The final extract was colourless and a drop of it evaporated without residue, The extracts were united and the solvent distilled off. The wax, after solidification, was twice recrystallized from a hot mixture of equal parts of chloroform and ethinel (charcoal), LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHAKDIA ACACIAE iy After extraction of the wax, the residue was finely ground, well stirred with cald chloroform and filtered. The filtrate was evaporated, dissolved in ethanol, activated charcoul was added, and the mixture filtered. [Evaporation of the solution gave a pure lac (Lac I). The residue remaining after treatment with chloroform was dried, dissolved in 10 ml. of ethanol and sufficient N/10 ethanolic putassium hydroxide svlution added to convert the original dye present into a potassium compound (insoluble in ethanol). The mixture was filtered and the potassium dye washed with hot ethanol until free from lac and alkali. The potassium dye was then dried, dis- solved in 10 al. of water and a slight excess of N/10 hydrochloric acid added to te-form the original dye which precipitated. The dye was extracted with ether, the solution washed twice with water, and the ether evaporated. The dye was Iwiee recrystallized from hot chloroform, THE WAX The wax is soft and pale yellow in colour, Tts melting point is 60-2° C. Tt has an acid value of 95, a saponification value of 235, an ester value of 140, and an iodine number (Hithl) of 32:3, Approximately 6 per cent. of it is un- saponifiable, This fraction consists of a hard, faintly coloured, wax-like material of melting point 70-4° C. Lack of adequate material made further investigation of the wax impracticable. LAG ] Lac I is a dark, reddish-black, very hard lac which is brittle and breaks with a conchoidal fracture, It is very soluble in ethanol, chloroferm or ether, but is insoluble in water, acetone or liquid hydrocarbons, it has an acid value of 145, a saponification value of 302 and an ester value of 157, About 3 per cent. of it is unsaponifiable and consists of a hard, cream- coloured, wax-like solid melting ut §3-1° ©. After removal of the unsuponifiable fraction, the solutiun was acidified and again extracted with ether. On evaporation of this extract, the lac acids re- mained as a solt, brownish-white, sticky mass comprising 55-6 per cent, of the weight of lac used, They were recrystallized several times from acetone {char- cual) and formed thin colourless plates having a melting point of 555° C. THE DYE The dye is upparently present as the dye aeid. It is soluble in water or acids, irrespective of temperature. Hot concentrated sulphurie acid chars it; hol concentrated. nitric acid vigoruusly oxidizes it. It is readily soluble iu cther, ethanol of any concentration higher than 60 per cent., and somewhat less so in hot chloroform. On cooling its solution in the latter, the dye separates as glittering scarlet rhombic crystals, Depending on concentration, the coluur of its solutions varies from dark blood red to yellow. Its absorption spectrum in ethanolic solution is shown in Fig. 1. On addition of sufficient ethanulic alkali tu solutions of the oriyinal dye, a compound of dye and alkali precipitates. This is apparently insoluble ip all liquids except water in which it is highly soluble. The colour of the solution, epending on concentration, varics from blackish violet ta pale violet. Addition uf ethanol to the solution precipitates the dye compound as a black, micracrystal- line solid; addition of acids precipitates the original dye. From the almost black saturated aqueous solution, the potassium compound crystallizes as black, glit- tering prismatic needles having a violet reflexion. Its absorption spectrum in aqueous solution is shown in Vig, 3, . 178 HARRY F. LOWER Over the range pH 6-9 to 8-5, its colour changes from orange, through red, to violet, The colour is red at about pH 7:8 to 7-9. mated | Po a T PERCENTAGE 6 - = “TRANSMISSION 8 ue! b 20- 6so0 70 360 a50 550 WAVELENGTH my Fig. 1—Absorption spectra of dye of A. acaciae. A. Original dye in ethanolic eis Concentration: 0-03125 g./litre. B. Potassium compound in aqueous solution. Concentration: 0-03125 g,/litre. EXTRACT B (Ethanol-soluble ) The solid dark brown material was finely ground, digested under reflux for 10 hr. with boiling ethanol, and the residue twice digested (each for 5 hr.) with fresh boiling ethanol. The three extracts were united, activated charcoal was added, the mixture filtered and the filtrate evaporated to dryness (Lac II). When ethanolic extraction was complete, about 54 per cent. of the original extract remained as a flocculent material closely resembling precipitated copper ferrocyanide in appearance. This was dried and weighed (Gel lac). LAC II Lace II is a hard, brittle, bright orange lac, very similar in erpcrtanse to orange shellac. It melts between 140° C. and 142° C. Very soluble in ethanol and somewhat less so in methanol, it is insoluble in any other of the commonly LAC INSECT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE 178 used organic solvents, It has an acid value of 95, a saponification value of 246, and an ester value of 151, The unsaponifiable fraction comprised 2-4 per cent, and consisted of a hard, yellowish, wax-like material melting at 96-1° C. After removal of the unsaponifiable material by ether extraction, the mix- ture was acidified and the resulting lac acid extracted with cther: the ether extract Was evaporated and the residue thrice recrvstallized from hot acetone (charcoal) forming golden-yellow, glittering scales whose melting point was 107:3° GC. On cooling the melted material, it solidified as a hard orange-yellow, transparent, resin-like mass lacking the physical properties associated with fatty acids generally. It is only slightly soluble in boilin ethanol, but is very soluble in cold ether, chloroform, carbon disulphide or boiling acetone. From its solu- tinn in the latter most of it separates on cooling. Tile GEL LAC This cinsisted of a brittle, black, vesicular mass which boiling ethanol yestorcd to the original floceulent condition, It was insoluble in any of the 43 organic solvents and solvent mixtures tested. When the solid is heated, it dces not melt but decomposes inte a spanuy, carbonaceons mass evolving a dark dense vapour which condenses as dark red, ail-like droplets soluble in ethanol forming a reddish solution, It was hoiled with N/2 ethanolic potassium hydroxide and formed a deep, hrownish-black, gpaque solution which passed unchanged through filter paper. Ether extracted nothing from this solution. [t was then diluted with water, placed in a separating funnel, sufficient hydrochloric acid was added to make the mixture acid, and the whole was well shaken with ether. On standing, three layers formed, The lowest consisted of an aqueous-ethanolic solution of potas- siam chloride coloured yellow by a trace of impurity. The middle layer was oily and black, and above this floated the orange ether laver. After running off the bottom Jayer, the two upper ones were well washed several times with water, allowed to stand, and then separated. The black material was dried, dissolved in ethanol (charcual), filtered, and again evaporated giving a black lac-Jike material (Laccord 1). The ether extract was evaporated, and the residue recrystallized several times from hot acetone (charcoal ) (Gel Jac acid). LACCOID I This is x highly polished, pitch-like material, very hard and brittle, readily soluble in ethane! but insoluble in other solvents. On heating, it mells quietly at abuut 127° C. Boiling it with either aqneous or ethanolic alkali re-saponifies it furming a deep reddish-brown solution from which it can again be set free by acidification. Prolonged boiling with fat or wax solvents dissolves nothing from it, Its nitrogen content is 0°45 per cent, THE GEL LAC ACID From. its solution in hot acetone, the acid scparates as a decp orange, ap- parently amorphous, material. On heating, it softens and finally melts at about 109° ©. On re-solidifying, it forms a transparent, glassy, deep orange-red, brittle solid, It dissolves readily in fat solvents < in hot acetone, but is insoluble in boiling cthanol. Aqueous or ethanolic solutions of alkalis readily re-saponily it, EXTRACT C (Hot HC) Extract) As first obtained, this was an orange-brown solution which, during evapora- tion, underwent chemical change so that the dark brown amorphous residue 180 TTARRY Ff, LOWER could not be re-dissolyved in hydrochloric acid, nor was it soluble in any other solvent tested. After boiling with ethanol, and evaporating the yellow solution, a truce of a dark brown, mucilaginous substance remained. This was dissolved in a little hot water, and the solition after decolorizing with charcoal and filter- ing, gave a positive result with Mélisch’s reagent, but none with Feliling’s solu- tiem. Since less than -O1 g. of material was available, further tests could nut be performed. The original residue contained 6-1 per cent. of nitrogen and probably can- sisted largely of “humin” formed by decomposition of arnino-acids resulting from hydrolysis of the proteins of the test by the hydrochloric acid used for the extraction. EXTRACT D (Sodium Carbonate Digest) The sodium carbonate extract, on evaporation, left an almost black residue. After boiling with water, a small quantity of black insoluble matter was filtered off. Ether extracted practically nothing from the filtrate which was then acidi- fied with hydrochloric acid, A dense precipitate formed, When the mixture was warmed, this coagulated to a yellowish-brown rubber-likc mass. The imix- ture was (hen evaporated to dryness and the residue digested three times (each for 5 hr.) under reflux with boiling cther, The extracts were united and the ether distilled off, leaving a lac acid, After expelling remaining, ether, the residue was ground, dissolved in ethanol (charcoal), filtered anc evaporated (Lacegid II). THE LAC ACID The erude lac acid was a soft, orange-coloured, wax-like material. It was several times recrystallized from hot acetone (charcoal) and finally obtained tis almost colourless plates (melting point 65-2° C.). When the acid was melted and allowed to solidify it formed a soft, eream-coloured, waxy material. LACCOLD I This was a very hard, black, lac-like material practically insoluble in all liquids except ethanol and methanol. I[t 1s extremely soluble in the former, Boiling with aqueous or ethanolic alkalis quickly brings about its saponification. From the solution it can be recovered by acidification, On heating, the solid does not melt but swells, bubbles, and evolves dense fumes which on condensing form an oil-like stain easily soluble in liquid hydrocarbons. Its nitrogen conteut is 2:3 per cent. RESIDUE REMAINING AFTER SODIUM CARBONATE EXTRACTION The residue leH after sodium carbonate extraction, when dried, was a white material resembling bleached paper-pulp, It was weighed, ashed, and the ash then weighed. The loss in weight was assumed Lo be chitin, ane ash, after treatment with aqua regia (presumed to be silica} was weighed, After weighing, the dry aqua regia extract was dissolved in dilute hydro- chloric avid and the solution tested qualitatively for inorganic ions. ‘The follow- ing were identified; Na~, K+, Ca~*>, Mz-+, Fe-++, PO,- ——, and SQy- -. DISCUSSION The major components af the test of A. aeweiae are shown in Table 1, Since the dye, wax, and lacs I und II were separated in a relatively pure state, their roportions are reasonably correct, The “gel lac” and the acid and sodium car- onate extracts are mixtures af at least two and probably more substances. Evidence obtained during the investigation proved that had more material been LAG INSEGT AUSTROTACHARDIA ACACIAE £81 ayailable, the diversity of substances identified would have been much greater. Frequently, traces only of certain organic compounds were isolated, the quan- tities of which were too small for anything other than a very general classifi- cation, The figures for silica and the inorganic ions «wre artificial; these materials are almost certainly of extraneous origin and form no intrinsic part of the test. TABLE I. Principal constituents of the teat of 4. aencire. Component Weight in grams Pareentage of weight of tast Dy 0-594 2-0 Wax i 2-BL6 f 7-8 Lie | 3-035 | 13-1 Live 1L 4-318 14-4 “Gul Lac’ | 5-027 16-7 “Thumin’* 4-(150 13-5 Sodiury Garbonale exteset 3350 11-2 “Chitin” | 4-038 13-5 Bilicas | 0-984 3-3 Thorganic iaud Q-101 0-3 Loss 1-262 43 30-00 100-0 Since no corresponding study of any other lac insect has been published, Jittle comparison with allied forms is possible, The wax and the dye are both chensically distinct from those of Laccifer lacca (sce Warth, 1956; Fox, 1953), and the dye differs from any which has. been described from other insects. Of the various members of the lac complex present, noue is shellac as is shown by their solubilities, and acid, saponification, and ester values (see Gardner, 1937; Parry, 1925). The two lacuoids separated are interesting compounds. In their general behaviour they resemble high melting point lacs, but their mode of chemical formation indicates a relationship to the Jac acids. They are not present in the test as laccoids since their ready solubility in ethanol would result in their extraction carlier in the analysis, As the name “Inc insects” implies, production of lacs is. characteristic of the Lacciferidae. In A. acacice they comprise over half the dry weight of the test, but their biological significance in any species has never been explained, little is known of their mode of secretion, and nothing of their metabolism or function. Nove.—The proprietary wax solvent mentioned above is marketed by the Vacuum Oil Company as “Stanvac Hexane”. It consists of 93-95 per cent. saturated hydrocarbons and 7-5 per cent. of aromatic hydrocarbons. The boiling point range (A.S./1M_) is from 662 C. to 68-3° C. REFRRENCES Crampentiy, J. C., 1923. A systematic monograph of the Tachardiimae or lie iusects (Cac- cidae). Bull. ent. Res., 14, pp. 147-212. Gramuritm, J, G., 1925. Supplement to a monograph of the Lacciferidae ( Vachardiinae) ot lac insects (Homopt.,, Coccidae). Hull. ent. Hes., 16, pp. 31-41. Fox, D. ir Aninial Biochromes and Structural Colours, Cambridge University Press, pp. 205-208. Ganpner, H, A., 1937, Physical and Chemical Examination of Paints, Varnishes, Lacquers. and Goulors, Eighth cdition, Institute of Paint and Varnish Reseurch, Washington, D.C., pp. 873-902. Parry, E. J., 1925. In Allen's Commercial Organic Analysis. Fifth edition. Churchill, London, pp. 290-299, Wantn, A. H,, 1956. The Chemistry and Teclinclogy of Waxes. Second edition, Reinhold Publishing Corp., New York, pp. 76-121. Puate 1 Harry F. Lower *syoosut [enprArpur jo aouvrwodde jeurayxo moys 0} pesivjua y jo weg -% (T9%SeIN) an1ovov vIpsvyonjo.ysny ais = somes “wg ol “Wo3s UO sJoosUL Jo UONNIASICE ‘“T ar 4 STRANDED SEA BEACHES AND ASSOCIATED SAND ACCUMULATIONS OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST. BY R. C. SPRIGG Summary Highly detailed geomorphic information concerning the distribution of sand dune systems in the upper south-east provinces of South Australia is provided. A large "stranded coast" embayment encloses Tintinara and Keith as part of the earliest Naracoorte beaches, and with it the deep Pleistocene shell deposits described by Tate (1898). This is the Tintinara "Bay". Suggestions are made for the northerly continuation of the Kanawinka fault or its en echelon associations from Naracoorte immediately east of Keith to the Marmon Jabuk Range. These fault escarpments did much to fashion marine and lake coasts at about the beginning of the Pleistocene Era. A rapid increase in quartz is found in modern beach sands north of Kingston towards the outlet of the Murray River. This is held to be of principal importance in the development of the leached silicious sand sheets in the upper south-east rather than simply podolization of high-lime beach sands. Wind directions remain dominantly E.-W. during the course of all high sea level phases of the Pleistocene (as evidenced by inland dune trends). The modern coastal dune structures, however, approximate N.E. in conformity with prevailing wind patterns requiring a four or five degree southward migration of the "Roaring Forty" prevailing westerly belt since the Pleistocene. STRANDED SEA BEACHES AND ASSOCIATED SAND ACCUMULATIONS OF THE UPPER SOUTH-EAST. by R. C. Sprice* [Read 11 September 1958] SUMMARY. Hichly detailed geomorphic imfornnation concerning the distribution of sand dune systems in the upper south-east provinces of South Anstralia is. pro- vided. A large “stranded coast” embayment encloses Tintinara and Keith as att of the earliest Naracoorte beaches, and with it the deep Pleistocene shell Reposits described by Tate (1898). This ig the Tintinara “Bay”. Suggestions are made for the northerly continuation of the Kanawinka fault or its en echelon associations from Naracoorte immediately east of Keith to the Marmon Jabuk Range. These fault cscarpments did mnch to fashion murine and Jake coasts at about the beginning of the Pleistocene Era. A rapid increase in quartz is found in modern beach sands north of King- ston towards the outlet of the Murray River. This is held to be of principal im- portance in the development of the leached silicious sand sheets in the upper south-east rather than simply podolization of high-line beach sands. Wind directions remain dominantly E.-W. during the course of all high sea level phases of the Pleistocene (as evideneed by inland dune tends}, The modern coastal dune structures, however, approximate N.E. in conformity with prevailing wind patterns requiring a four or five degree sovthwyrd migration of the “Roaring Forty” prevailing westerly belt since the Pleistocene. INTRODUCTION Ground observations supported by widespread aerial reconnaissances by the writer since 1954 have provided much new information concerning the his- tory of this region. A highly detailed map compiled by the writer from the latest aerfal photography by the Sonth Australian Lands Department goes far to elucidate this history. The present paper is one of a series, arising from efforts to obtain more factual information on structural deformation of the larger sedimentary basins in South Australia, during Recent geological times. The dating of certain land renga in these basins are of particular interest in the search for commercial oil. This present paper is designed to deal with coastal migrations of the Jate Cainozaic Era as they affect the upper south-east, In this respect it is supple- mentary to earlier papers by N. B, Tindale (1933), P. Hossfeld (1950), R. Sprigg (1950-2) and P. Du Mooy (1958), Of particular concern is the fate of the older “Naracoorte” and “Hynam” beaches, as they trend north-north-easterly from the Naracoorte vicinity beyond the immediate influence of the scarp- forming Kanawinka fault. These beaches were known generally to strike to- wards Tintinara where Tate (1898), Howchin (1929) and others had described a thick section of “Newer Pleistocene” shell beds extending from 38 feet ahove to 182 feet below moder sea-level. Considerable land warping continued throughout the period of beach formation, and strong differences of upinions amongst geologists still remain.to ° Geosurveys of Australia Ltd. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82. 184 RK ©, SPRIGG be resolyed as to the effectiveness, and even the existence. and direction of these compliqating movements. GEOLOGICAL BACKGROUND Qhutcropping basement rocks in the south-east are all acid igneous types which Mawson (1943, 44, 45) has classified in three major yroups, “hey in- chide the reddish granite of the Murray Bridge type in which fluorite is a not- able accessory, also the yreyish porphyritic udamellites and granodiorites, and finally the quartz keratophyxes considered to be effusive equivalents of the adawinellites and granodioritcs, They are considered to be comagmatie with similar intrusions in the eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges and southern Kaugaroo Island 4 the north and west, and perhaps with those of Dergholm to the south-east in tcloria, These granite rocks outerop in isolated inliers, as knolls and “whalebacks” throughout the present region along the crest of the yo-ealled Padthaway buried liarst (Sprige, 1952), Permian glacials infll many glacial valleys in an ancient buricd topography excavated in the foregoing terrain, Glacigenc sands and clays and boulder beds are indicated in drilling, but these do not appear to outcrop in the area. Mesozoia subgreywacke, coals,.and shales are present to a thickness of 3,000 feet in Robe Bore, but are not recorded iu the present area, ‘Ihree samples between 1,400 and 2,630 feet in Robe Bore have been determined (Covkson and Dettmann, 1958) as of Lower Cretaceous age. Older Tertiary sediments of Locene age are principally paralic scdiments with local lignite of the Knight and Buccleuch Groups (Ludbrook, 1957). They are Overlain by normal marine limestones mostly of Upper Oligocene age. Most of the present land surface is now blanketted by sands highly siliceous in the north, but more calcareous to the south where they form “aeolianite” dune rock. Travertinization is widespread where the calcareous element is stronger, and Iaterization or soil hard-pan formation is conspicuous in restricted areas, THE (?) PLIO-PLEISTOCENE COASTS There is no reliable indications as to the exact dating of coasts in this area. At ubout the end of the Pliocene the sea receded completely from the “Mur- ravian” Gulf of which the prescnt urea is part. This was accompanied by uplift of an ancient N.N.W.-S.S.F. ridge known us the Padthaway Horst (Sprigy, 1952), As Howchin (1929) had noted, the original mid-Tertiaury Gulf became a great inland Jake or series of lakes behind this zencral zone. The engrafted River Murray drained into it. The position of the sea coast during late Miocene tu early Pliocene times fs not.known and may have retreated beyond the limits of the modern coast, but certainly appears to have retreated at least to the Padthaway Horst, During Pliocene times the sea gained aécess to an elongate topographically negative zone close by tle uprising Mt. Lofty Ranges, and massive ovster beds extended along the general course of the Murray valley in this region, ag far north as Morgan- To the south of Naracoorte, there is a multiplicity of very obvious stranded sea beaches mostly of Pleistocene ages, ‘hese haye been stranded in turn on an upwarping but gently sewward slopiag plain (Fig. 2). Some complications have been noted (Sprige, 1948, 1952: Hossfeld, 1950) by later inundation of the lower (younger) beaches. The best developed of the higher (older) stranded beaches occur at Nara- eoarte against the Kanawinka fault scarp, developed in mid-Tertiary polyzoal PB RAN aN: TANKS.” BORDERTOWN me a 1 \ \ | ai . yl i i iy} Be I “eo (a! Kent es? ras. \ Weds ,O0cOP! M\)! i = vs c 0 our: ee ws BP. es Ts- ' 1% MILes me tt iD ue yt! Na Na in OF THE UPPER SOUTH EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA SAND DUNE ASSOCIATION O00 a6e) 100 e6E! 9 ; ; a ia ih iu To) a > v 3 2 ry 5 “4 * § a a 8) 8 8 o "7 n ) fd 9 = & ®BORDERTOWN CAPE NORTHUMBERLANO = sree ° a ry] < w 2 Ds: c. KINGSTON % MOORLAN seen CAPE JAFFA TAILEM BEN of Australia kta ae. “153 a L. ALBERT 24 «MILES inezeic volcano e sand dune complex Stranded sea beach Granite out¢rap “Whit Late Ca SOUTH AUSTRALIA © DUNE COMPLEX SOUTH EAST PROVINCE STRANDED SEA BEACHES 18% limestones, and attaining more than 100 feet high. Remnant sub-paralle] coastal dunes oecur further inland at still higher levels marking the “Hynam™ and “bin- nim” coasts, The Naracoorte duce has been tuken by Sprigg (1952) to be the earliest Pleistocene dime, and the Hynam and Rinnum coasts on this assumption would be uf Pliocene age, Further to the south extensive oyster depusits occur inland from the Dismal Swamps ou the “back” of the Mt. Gambier arch (Sprigg, 1948, 52), or Cape Banks axis poesteld. 1950). These may or may not be time-equivalents of the Murray Valley deposits to the nurth, They appear to be co-extensive with the Plio-Pleistocene deposits of the Glenelg River at Heywood in south-western Victoria described by Singleton (1934) as spanning this “time” boundary. The western Naracourte beach is contemporaneous with these oyster deposits and so « Plio-Pleistocene “boundary” age for this beach seems reasonable, The sea at this time lapped at the foot af the Kanawinka fault searp. The Naracoorte beach dune is compuund., Tt consists of two major ridges separated a short distance (a few hundred yards) from the Kanawinka fanlt at Narweoorte, which also appears tu have Formed a (slightly older) cvast, Te the narth, the Jung facing aspect of the “west” Naracoorte component af this beach dune trends consistently N.N.W. with only geatle arching more lo the N.W, to with L5 miles of Keith, Here there appear numerous compli- catiuns. Granites outerop boldly. and at least 3 or 4 coastal dunes appear vast of the “Naracourte” trend, variously aeched into successive embayments con- tralled in part by protecting granite “headlands” (Fig. 3). The younger of these may he correlated with the west Narwcoorte dune and this interpretation is pre- ferred. The next east includes several granite eminenves within its boundaries near the southern end. Tle Mount Monster dune, next to the cast, may not have been a complete cuast. but rather a string of granite islands “tied” by dune accumulations. Further east the compounded Keith dunes make a pronvinent coast forming the Tintinaru “Bay” and backed by ¢normuus east-blown siliceous sand sheets which rise relatively sharply from the dune fore-front Ievel of 90-100 feet to 200 feet or mare, tt is not improbable that this dune skirts the northern continuation of the Kanawinka fault or a reluted en echelon fracture and escarp- meat, The Keith “beach” can be traced north-eastward to opposite Tintinara (74 feet above sea level) beyond which it is lost beneath enurmous sand blows originating from sbaut the seaward gramte “isluuds” of the Binneys Lookout and Mt. Boothby “archipelago”, This and associated “blows effectively ohliter- ate ull coastal dunes north of this lutitude. South feo Keith this Tintinara “Bay” swings seaward to link with the Naracoorte trend, but in doing so, also ix “tied” to the Mt. Monster archipelago. Of the younger (lower level) dunes west of the “Naracoorte” Ine, most of them louse their identity north of the latitude of Keith. Only the Peacock dune can be traced beyond this limit, with the exception of the immediate sul voastal “Reedy Creek” beach and others of the “Covrong” association. In the region of the Morray Lukes to the north (Fig. 4) evidence of fonner cixists is difficult to elucidate. Enormous sand sheets and “blows”, and lakes, effectively blanket most of the evidence. The northem shore of Luke Albert has a wently arched form and is backed by high sand dunes and is thought to represent an old sea stand, probably the Naracoorte coast, Further west, constrictions on Narrung Peninsula also suggest the trace of an ancient coast, possibly ane of the “Avenue” beaches, from the south. This has been tentatively termed the Loveday Bay Beach, The role of the Mt. Boothby and Binneys Lookout granite whalebacks in cuastal corifiguration can only be surmised, although the protection must have C, SPRIGG R. f Is if IM STRANDED SEA BEACHES ‘ pt Pipa t 4 i y Iie ee Dade hy LM eB es ol ht’ the cn (eeu dy mata! N 1] a il Da ost re y. TS r 4 Hast 4 eke t ‘ ifs ha eetalt \ at = x Qa 4 < oe 5 = LAKE Nd ae Ta! Ly oe A/a ees Uy) a fe eh et, cairip . Pe AO ane ond hte F h i hee GOLWA Sass < ~ + 5 r 7 fe es = aes . : Cours . Lo nw re DUNE ASSOCIATION LOWER MURRAY RIVER LAKES SCALE O Stet wet f te * *. : re ter eae t 4H fn3. opts 4 fe pees ¥ = re Gaesurveys - 722. = ared b 26-858 | Flan prep i pes? 188 h, G, SPRIGG had considerable influence on local coastal configuration. Presumably these granite knolls formed archipelagoes and tied-islands and finally headlands in successively younger stranded coasts. The outcrop undoubtedly facilitated inland sand dnift, for the most massive “blows” surround these and extend for 20(t miles inland directly eastwards. DISCUSSION. {a} The Tintinara Marine Shell Deposits Appreciation of the form of the stranded “Tintinara Bay” and associated ouasts throws new light on several previously puzzling features. Tate (1898) examined fossil shell assemblages from the Tintinara Railway Bore, and de- clared them to he New Pleistocene. He recorded that “the total thickness of New Pleistocene beds is 220 feet extending in depth from 38 feet above sea level to 182 feet below it, All the examined species as a result of cormparison with authenticated specimens ave, with threc exceptions, living in our local seas.” Chapman (1914) following this evidence of deep shell beds extending well below modern sea level. suggested the possibility of a rift valley or an earth fold by which thé sea was admitted. Some overdeepening seems certainly to have eccurred, and may have marked an ancient erosional valley, or as Howchin and Tate suggested, a possible outlet of the Murray River. The new view of the landward swing of the “East-Naracoorte” or older coasts, as herein described, accommodates the Tintinara shell deposits within the older Tintinara embayment. Tate's identification of “Newer™ Pleistocene should he accepted cautiously in the absence of more precise determinations, bast an older Pleistocene age would appear to be more in accordance with the ach. (h) The Northward Continuation of the Kanavinka Fault Another problem concerns the northern extensions of the Kanawinka fault. This gently arenate fault extends more than 100 miles from near Portland in Victoria, west of Casterton and through Naracoorte, to disappear into the Nara- coorte stranded coastal dunes only a few miles north of the latter town. Topographic data is sparse in this direction. Railway gradients between Tintinara (R.L. 62) and Keith (R-L, 101) are quite low (30 feet in 24 miles), whereas to the east, the rise across the “Keith Coast” is 40 feet in 6 miles. This could indicate the position of the projected Kanawinku fault extension or a en echelon partner, Bat is also attributable to sand accumulation. No granites outcrop west of this line. To the north-west, numerous faults all trending N.W., W.N.W. or N.N.W. continue the general zone of uplift, and certain of these mark the boundaries of the Marmon Jabuk Range. (See Figs, 2and 6.) These relationships are being discussed more fully in a parallel paper. {c) Landwarping Movements, Particular interest centres upon the extent of landwarping movements active throughout the Late Cainozoic Era, which is widely known in Australia as the “Kosciusko Epoch”, A graph (Fig. 5) has been prepared of stranded beach “forefront” levels. projected onto a sub-parallel plane taken along the general average trend of the beach system. It is appreciated that true strandline, or other “datum™, may vary plus or minus 10 or 20 feet or more along these situations. In general, haw- ever, erosion and deposition along the fore-dune flats since the stranding of the respective beaches will have acted to reduce these elevational differences. [ur example, in the extreme south, on the axis of the transverse Mt. Gambier arch STRANDED SEA BEACHES Q ‘BI AYVWNaY YVSN OL HOVE SNOWOOD sable hoe a gd NOILDaS «= 1¥Di907035 4ines PNBYE BWoOZOVILOYE PUCYoOM sue aH3201N SKYE SHOZIVLIG> Apeq |9Ke ewan FIOZONIYD 3L¥1 esyubi] @ BRED SRuES eousk giep DIDZONW? BLT g Big GS das 82 eiratty p Meuneoay AE oaeens veg OF FE SS === SISuT EA WSoreT 13027935 pee BANgS TT STE ASOT VEATTWES —_—_—— Nyasa, SNIMAEOM = 3woTON 1 * \ A. - * pe — «yond _— —_ ee gaye * * ana YuyINILN! AID Lys FONINI Pe —_ HLNOW MIAH AvininW note BHanTS LAL 40 Slay 190 R. C SPRIGG (or upwarp) Tertiary rocks are cxtensively exposed by sediment stripping, whereas to the north the interdune Hats are progressively more deeply amnion by later sediments. The graph, then, will tend to indicate rather a lesser amount of Warping than has actually occurred, The warping trends are quite obvious from the graph, indicating progressive apwarp about the Mt, Gambier (or Cape Banks) line, with greatest downwarp towards the foot of the (devclopmg) Mt. Lofty Ranges. It is this type of down- wiki towards the eastern edge of the Mt. Lofty Ranges and the eastern ogorthern margins of the Flinders Ranges which has exercised a major control on stream patterns in the Murray River and Lake Eyre basins. These patterns wre notably asymmetrical with all trunk streams trending towards, and finally along, the base of the previously mentioned margins of these ranges, These are also the zones of South Australia’s major lakes, The graph produced clearly supplies the controls for this situation. (d) The Origin of the Sands Enormous volumes of white or cream colonred sands in vast shects extend for up to 150 miles from the present coast almust directly eastwards into Vic- toria (the “Big Desert” in the north, and “Little Desert” to the south), These are the leached siliceous sands described by Crocker (1946) and others. Crocker concluded the enormous volumes of sand to be “aeolian resorted leached A-huri- zong from the former calcareous dunes ,. . the consolidation of the calcareons dunes by downward leaching of lime and re-deposition in a B-C horizon, has resulted in the formation of a residual siliceous A horizon. The stripping of this siliceous horizon by acolian agencies during a snbsequent arid period, and its re-sorting is considered to have led to the development of the large areas of siliceous sand in the lower south-east”, : Obviously these processes have played some part in the development of the siliceous sand sheets of the upper south-east, and of some consolidated “acolianite” dunes, but other more important factors have been overlooked. Firstly, all coastal sands in the south-east are not dominantly calcareous. Crocker (1946), for example, has quoted 5-35 per cent. insoluble matter as the normal range of variation for “our Australian calcareous sands”. Analyses of sands taken by Sprigg (1952) in the lower south-east certainly do indicate uni- formly high lime content (65-95 per cent.) as suggested by Crocker (ie. 5-35 per cent. insolubles). However, these samples were all taken from the vicinity of Kingston or south in a region notable for destruction of enormous shell popu- Jations on open ocean surf beaches which lack river cutlets which would other- wise provide non-caleareous sedimentary material. Kingston, for example, is almost 90 miles from the Murray River mouth to the north, and 120 miles from the Glenelg River outlet to the south-east. A series of sand samples taken at intervals along the Coornng Beach north from Kingston show a progressive increase in insoluble as follows: vicinty \ - | Dune 100 ml. N. of Kingston (Surfers’ Beach, { H.T.L, extreme north | ir 4 . {Dune 10 ml. 5.W, of Kingston » LL, IL-7 1 ml. N. of Kingston } nee =f 20 ml. N, of Kingston : Dune 28-9 40 ml. N. of Kingston ; Eee “Dine 30-8 90 ml. N. of Kingston (Goolwa Barrage {H.T.L. 63-0 icinty J4-1 §1-6 795 STRANDED SEA BEACHES Ih The progressive change in composition to the north is obvious and micro- seopic examination reveals the increase in solubles to be almost entirely due to quartz, although some silicate minerals are also present, On this coast only one source is likely to be important in mducing the cam- ositional change revealed, namely, those sediments introduced via the Murray iver. Lesser sources are frum coastal erosion in Encounter Bay, and froin submarine outerops of granite and/or Pre-Tertiary und Tertiary sedimentary rocks. Littoral drift would tend to spread these insoluble products particularly to the south from the Murray mouth which is eccentrically situated on the gently arenate Coorong sea-heach. A sommarshle state of affairs seems to have held throughout the period of “stranded beach” formation in the south-east. North of about Kingston sand blows extend increasingly further inland und finally become sufficiently massive to inundate, and obliterate, all earlier-formed coastal heaches. Moreover, as ex- pected, the cvarsely-grained acolianite of the south gives away to finer-grained acolinite with obviously increased insoluble (quartz sand) content, in this more northerly aspect. North ot Keith, siliceous sand sheets reach euornnious dimensions, and extend for up to 150 miles inland. With one or two exceptions, the northern boundary of this sand lies about along the Jatitude uf Tailem Bend and corresponds wi the northern limit of the settling basins provided hy the lakes before the Murray River mouth. More northerly aecurnulations exteud east from about Jabuk and Karoondsa. Two principal dune systems extend away from Jocal fault escarp- ments and may possibly indicate former cuast furmation in earlier Plio-Pleis- tocene times, or Huviatile activity. A complication in the concentration of the heaviest siliveous sand slivets north of Keith is apparent with the Naracoarte Beaches. Whereas the lower level beaches, south of the Keith, cease to be smothered by later distrilrutiuns of sands from successively younger beaches, these latter still produced large easterly distributions extending almost south to Naracoorte. The presence of granite knolls within these older coastal complexes, and associated outcropping older Tertiary fluviatile sedimentary sources, may be sufficient source. There remain, however, the possibilities of a more southerly oullet, here, fo the Murray River, as suggested also by the overdeepened (? croded-valley) deposits of fossil shells of Tintinara as described by Tate (1898) and Ilowchin (1928). (e) Dominant Wind Directions Relatively “inexhaustible” supplies of fine sand, free tu mave under cundi- Lions of Favourable climate (and other factors), may provide excellent “fossil” record of former wind patterns, Few areas could excel the south-east region in this respect. In this paper it is not intended to anticipate a much more exhaustive treat- ment of the subject of “fossil wind regimes” as indicated by ovr Australian fixed desert dime systems which is now in an advanced stage of preparation by the writer. In this treatment particular consideration is given to “high impact force” winds (uf 5 miles per huwr or more) which are considered most efficient in transport of sand (other conditions of moisture content, vegetative caver, etc., being equal). Frequency-dominance of winds (in terms of direction) may or tay not he a less important factor, assisting more in sweeping the interdune corridors and producing bias in lateral avalanche tendencies. The dune patterns reproduced herein (Pigs. 1 and 2) highlight the dumin- ating influence of prevailing “high impact furce” westerly winds during mast of the periods of active sand transport, The long axes of all] major sand necumm- 192 RK, C. SPRIGG lations (inland from) West Avenue Range show this westerly factor yery clearly, To the north this influence is,overwhelming whereas to the south some oblique trends are superimposed on the still dominating westerly influence, This westerly “dominance” is remarkable in view of modern wind patterns for this same area which show a strong prevalence, both in relative frequency and force of impact, for “south-westerlies”.. The sand drift lines of the medern Coorong coastal dune reflects this direction quite faithfully. The most accepé- able explanation for this seeming anomaly would appear io be that the present lay wind pattern is strongly at variance with conditions obtaining during the Pleistocene Period when the inland blows were most active. The dune pattern of the Karoonda-Pinnaroo zone is strongly reminiscent of the modern active dune system of the Waterhouse district in north-eastern Tasmania which are still active under conditions of high rainfall. A plentiful sand supply and strong force westerly winds are the controlling factors. ‘These are sufficient to negative the influence of a strong, but quite comparable stunted vegetative cover in this region, (Both are areas of deeply leached sands apparently with low nutritive status of the sails.) The directional change of dune stricture near the Murray River mouth is from N90-100° E. to N35-45" E. This can best be explained by a significant migration of climatic belts in geologically recent times suggesting also that our modern climate muy not simply be that of a “Pleistocene Interglacial”. Tt would appear, then, that the anticyclone belt is now removed further south, The so-called “Roaring Forty” belt (an unstable zone at the best of times} of high impact force westerly winds, and now passing over Tasmania, would appear to have been located at least 4 to 5 degrees of latitude further north. Moreover, there is no necessity tu invake arid periods to account for these desert-like developments, although drought and aridity may well have been significant factors. High impact force winds im areas of heavy and con- tinuing sediment supply are adequate to overwhelm stunted vegetative cover and lead to dune formation. REFERENCES, Cuarr, E. T., 1896. Notes on the Geology of the Ninety Mile Desert. Trans, Roy, Sou, 8. Aust, Vol. 30, Cookson, I. C., and Derratann, M. E., 1958. Cretaceous “mevaspores” und a closely asso- ciated paid ag fram the Australian region. Mircrepalaeontology, 4 (1), pp, 30-49, pts. 1-2 text, figs, 1-3, 1 table, . Crocxur, Bi L., 1943. Post-Miocene Climatic and Geolugic [istary anil tts significance Jn relation ta the Genesis of the major soil types of S. Aust, C.S.LB.0. Aust. Bull, No, 193. Crarnsax, F., 1916. Crinozwie Ceolagy af the Mallee and other Victorian Bures. Ree Gel, Surv, Vie., 3 (4). Hossein, PB oS., 1950, The Late Cainozniv Mistery of the Sot Kast af South Australia Trans. Foy. Soe. 5.A., 73 (2). Hoyeran, W., 1929. Notes on the Geolagy of the Great Pyap Band (1oxton), River Murray Basin and reniarks on the guological history of the River Murray. Trans, Hoy. Sac. S. Aust., Vol. 53. Luvanoox, N. H., 1957. A Reference Colunm for the Tertiary Sediments of the Soutl. Ans- trilian Portion of the Murray Basin. Journ. Hoy. Soc. NSW., 30, pp. 174-180. Srmicc, R, C., 1948 (1952). Stranded Sea Beaches of the south-cast of South Australia anil aspects of the Theories of Milankavitch and Zeunur. Rep. 18th Int. Geol, Conuress {Tondon, 1948), Sericc, R. C., 1952. The Geology of the South-Eust Province, South Australia, with special reference to Quaternary coastline migrations and modern Beach Development. Bull, 29, Geol, Survey, 8, Australia. Sprice, R, C,, and BourAxorr, N., 1953. Summary Report on thr Petroleum Possibilities of the Gambier Sunklands. Minmg Review, No, 95, S. Aust. Department of Mines. STRANDED SEA BEACHES 193 Tinpace, N. B., 1933. Tantanoola Caves, Geological and Physiographical. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 57. Tate, R., 1898. Two Deep Level Deposits of or over Pleistocene Age, Tintinara and Port Pirie. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 22. SterHens, C, G., ev aL. A Soil and Land Use Survey of the Hundreds of Hindmarsh, Young, Riddock, Grey and Nangwarry, South Australia. C.S.1.R., Aust. Bull. 142. SincteTon, F. A., 1939. The Tertiary Geology of Australia. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vic., 53. PRESUMED SUBMARINE VOLCANIC ACTIVITY NEAR BEACHPORT, SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY R. C. SPRIGG, M.Sc. Summary Three, possibly four, submarine ridges lying transversely to the general contour of the continental platform opposite Beachport are interpreted to be submarine lava flows. A marginal submarine valley accompanies one or more of them. The heads of these presumed flows coincide closely with the epicentres of the 1897 and 1948 earthquakes, and this activity may represent the last phase of the late Quaternary basaltic volcanicity in south-eastern Australia. PRESUMED SUBMARINE VOLCANIC ACTIVITY NEAR BEACHPORT, SOUTH-EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA. by R. C. Spricc, M,Sc,* [Read 11 September 1958] SUMMARY Three, possibly four, submarine ridges lying transversely to the general contour of the continental platfurm opposite Beachport are mterpreted to be seanaeinr lava flows. A marginal submarine: valley accompanies one or more of them. the heads of these presumed flows coincide closely with the epicentres of the: 1897 and 1948 earthquakes, and this uctivity may Tepresent the last phase of the late Quaternary hasultic voleanicity in south-eastern Anistralia. INTRODUCTION Volcanoes have almost certainly been active beneath the sea opposite Beach- pert in late Cainozoic, perhaps even geologically Recent times. Ilighly scoriaceous basalts have been collected washed up on beaches at many places from Beachport to Port MacDonnell. These may be the origin of local “old timer” rnmours of volcanoes beneath the sea in this vicinity. Some have contended that the basalts came from greater distances, and the inevitable “clinkers” brought in with such samples, and also one example of imported basalt ballast, dumped at local seaports, rather more confused the issue, The writer, while an officer of the South Australian Geological Survey, be- came interested in the fascinating possibility of submarine voleanicity in this vicinity, during prolonged field activities in the coastal zone during 1949-51, but at the time decided that the available evidence was insufficient, However, Captain Little, commander of the survey ship Lachlan, with whom the writer was associated during the Robe Harbour investigations, undertook several echo sounding traverses across the local continental shelf, and reported a submarine eminence off the coast between Robe and Beachport which appcared suggestive. This “peak” has been Jocated on the latest hydrographic charts of the area which form the basis of this contribution. Of special interest is that this position cor- responds closely with the epicentres of the 1897 and 1948 earthquakes, and also ties in with other anomalous submarine topographic features of the immediate vicinity. Late Cainoxoic Volcanicity Readers are referred to publications by A. V. G. James (1949) and R, C, Sprigg (1952) for summaries of volcanic activity in the local hinterland (Fig. 1). A roughly east-west voleanic belt extends across southern Victoria into south- eastern South Australia, ending rather abruptly, as far as outcropping evidence goes, in Mt. Muirhead, in the Mt. Burr range. Two solitary centres of late Ter- tiary activity occur much further to the north-west on Kangaryo Island. These groups are the so-called “Newer Voleanics” as distinct from earlier Tertiary voleanicity. * Geosurveys of Australia Limited. Trans. Roy. Soc. 5, Aust. (1959), Vol, 83, Kk. C. SPRIGG 196 esibojasy sores = Shsidls py Sain 09! oF) ry an . Saula Oo n'y vate Papo .L,. Lp oo I “81a Saviy Jo ydag ¥ Ss O21 ie MDs “Op, VA ocr NVHIO GY. 5 1H Wp? “ Mey Ly iy ni “ste ~ i Wig Pi aS v NAVAL MOS > UST. VICTOR! ““S0uTH A — 2/E-OS BOF 7397 YS PuUl SMO}, uHPspg samen, WW (4034 4: /2da/ Das atoga fy Slay mogs saunbes ) sadjua, ajupo}0A OPS @ SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY wi Fissure cruptions played a major role in the Victorian activity with the extrusion of basalt sheets covering more than 10,000 square miles over the western district plains and highlands. Near Portland, coastal eruptions poured out lava streams whicli €ven now can be traced across the constline vut along the sea floor, far oul to sea, Tn South Australia the activity was cntircly basic, and the yurious yents ean be related to presumed lines of fissuring, although true fissure eruption js not obvious. Small flows usually proceeded cone formation, but the rapid accumulation of steam quickly led to the growth uf large explosion craters. In the Mt, Gambier vicinity, the earlier of these late Tertiary volcanoes, as exemplified by Mts. Burr and McIntyre, are cunsidered to be late Plivcene to Early Pleistocene phenomena (Sprigg, 1952), and the later group hy Mt. Gam- bier are late Pleistocene. Other writers have placed the activity still later, and N. B, Tindale and others, in drawing attention to possible references in local aboriginal legends have suggested very recent activity. This is not impossible, as even a short cycle of activity could well span the time interval concerned, Late Catnazoie Faulting Brief mention of faulting during late Tertiary and Quaternary times is im- portant for its possible bearing on recent earthquake activity in the area. Minor late Tertiary faults oceur throughout outcropping Tertiary limestones in the Mt, Gambier area. They confurm well with the major geological struc- tural pattern of the area, and the jointing (Spri¢g, 1952), and mostly they strike W._N.W. or N.W. Fault dewnthrow is usually to the south-west, and the extent of muvernent is generally small, T.nei of voleanic eruption may be aligned along some of these. One of these, the “Tartwaup” line, would appear to pass out beneath the sea near Beachport which is also the site of an unexplained extremely sharp positive gravity anomaly (Department of Mines, unpublished information), Earthquakes. In view of the known late Cainozwic volcanic activity, and the considerable arching (upwarping), occuring in the south-eastern area (Sprigg, 1952), it is not surprising that two of the State’s major earthquakes have been ccntred in this area in historic times, The first occurred on May 10th, 1897, and the second on April 8th, 1948. Mr. G. F. Dodwell (1909). the late Government Astronomer, in describing the 1897 earthquake wrote that “tremors in the vicinity of Kingston . . . can- tinued at intervals for some months, all appeared to point to a focus in the ocean somewhere west of that neighbourhoed”, The earthquake showed a large epicentral area and was recorded over southern Australia trom Streaky Bay and well into Victoria. An isoseismal map (Fig. 2) prepared at the time suggests an epicentre off the coast near Beachport The disturbance was aceorded the value 9 on “Mercalli” scale. According to local reparts by persuns still living, the shock dislocated the lighthouse machinery at Cape Jalka, throwmg the light off its beam and spilling the mercury at the hase of the lamp. A largo mass of acolianite nearby was split, and portions collapsed into the sea. To the north-west of Mt. Benson, upposite Nulook bark mill, the travertinsed limestone was cracked deeply, Ac- curding to Mr, F’. Winter, a local resident, the tremors continued for same weeks. The more recent tremar of 1948 had its epicentre beneath the séa 10 miles north-west of Beachport. in much the same place as the 1897 earthquake. The shock was less severe, even though it was felt as far as 250 miles away, At Beachport, it cracked buildings, stepped clocks and dislodged crockery from 198 R. C. SPRIGG shelves. Nearer Adelaide the tremor lasted from a few seconds to five minutes, and in some areas it was proceeded by low rumblings. The Evidence from Submarine Topography Lt. Commander Little’s report of a rock eminence rising to 13 fathoms, but lying approximately on the trend of the 25 fathom contour, raises considerable i le PT AUGUSTA KINGSTON ISOSEISMALS OM MERCALLI SCALE FOR Op PROBE EARTHQUAKE. - MAY 10, 1897 aNenngad (AFTER —- HOCBEN) mo 3¢M™ GAMBIER x 266-58 Plan prepared by Geosurveys of Australia ite SEP 3 Fig, 2 interest, The continental shelf in this vicinity is at about its narrowest expression in South Australia. The trend of its outer margin is very direct, and almost due north-west. A general contouring of the depth soundings (Fig. 3) produces a gently sloping surface, steepening rapidly as it approaches the 100 fathom line, and thereafter plunging increasingly rapidly into the Jeffrey abysmal deep. Information is sufficient to show the broad form of this shelf quite clearly SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY 199 except in a few zones. While appreciating the effects of personal bias, most of the contouring is reasonably smooth, and can be readily reproduced by independant investigators. However, several obvious anomalies stand out clearly. Three om PRESUMED SUBMARINE LAVA FLOWS ANO RELATED FRATURES ON THE CONTINENTAL SHELF SOUTH EAST SOUTH AUSTRALIA Cate from Admiralty Chart (Ola BEN few on Mai) wreparys oy Leasucreya of Anstraha be Fig. 3 transverse ridges, and possibly a fourth, interrupt the trend of the general sea floor contour boldly. In addition, valley-like depressions margin two of these features. The eminence recorded by Lt. Commander Little represent the apparent abrupt landward termination of one of the ridges. Down-slope, it appears to 200 R. GC. SFRIGG continue as a ridge for at least 12 miles, and is elevated 30 to 60 feet or more above its surroundings. Unfortunately, the density of soundings is insufficient to he more precise as to its exact morphology. The ridge is clearly elongated across. the continental platform, in the direction of the steepest slope which is algo tramsverse to the grain of faulting on the adjacent mainland. It is proposed to call this feature “Little’s ridge”. The upper (?) termination of this feature lies near the projected 235 fathoms contour, where it also appears to have its greatest differential elevation above the local sea floor (summit at 13 fathoms). ‘This point is approximately 17 miles N60W of Beachport and 7 miles from the nearest coast. There appears to be no deviation of the recently surveyed 100 fathom linc opposite this feature and it is prestimed not to extend that far. A second prominent ridge structure also lying transverse to the genera! contour of the shelf, occurs almost due west of Beachport. This will be termed the Beachport ridge. The soundings suggest this to be similarly clevated 60 to 100 feet above the projected level of the local platform. In the absence of suitably positioned soundings, the nature of its “head” is unknown. This ridge almost certainly crosses the 100 fathom line, for the marine charts show a clearly intended and definite outward bulging on the line at this situation. (This line was resurveyed in “continuity” by the “Lachlan” and replotted accurately.) The structure has elongation of twenty miles or more. A third ridge, apparently only slightly less conspicuous, lies a few miles to the south; its form is quite compzrable. It is termed the Rivoli ridge. On the northern margin of the Beachport submarine ridge there exists 2 deep trench, apparently also trending in the direction of steepest slope. This appears toe be an erosional feature, and the few random surroundings centred on it indicates overdeepening to 100 feet or more. The valley may be of the nature of a miniature subtree canyon, but more evidence is required to justify this conclusion. The valley to the south of the Beachport ridge appears not ta have been overdeepened, rather it appears to be present by virtue of the existetice of the ridges on either flank. Directly south of Beachport distant approximetely 20 miles, there is yet anvther associated ridge and valley topographic “anomaly”. The evidence is meagre in view of the paucity of local soundings, but the general indication is similar to the foregoing. Its position is indicated on the plan, Interpretative statistics on cach of these incompletely known features is given in Table 1. TABLE Ef, From Beachport Min. dist. L | Max tiferred Natge of Submarine from const ! Length elevation feature (in miles) Distance | Direotion (miles) difterones (miles) (iy fost) Little's vidge 7 iy) NOW M+ | 368! Beachport ridge 134 134 | Ssow 164 100 Rivoli ridge ll 12 s6uW Op Loo Northumberland ridge 22 26 Slow (¥)3 tin Beuvhport groove 13 17 due W ¥ Os Northumberland groove 18 ; 20 BSW v4] Wh— INTERPRETATION Submarine earthquakes in 1897 and 1948 indicated epicentres to the north- west of Beachport distant some 10 to 20 miles. This general zone encompasses portion of the local continental shelf which carries several prominent ridge struc- SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY 201 tures consistent in form with submarine lava Hows, The structures are remark- ably persistent, extending for 10 to 20 miles or more in the direction of maximum set Hoor slope. The more northerly ur “Little's” submarine ridge on present in- formation has relatively greater prominence at its head, indicating perbaps re- stricted erosion, and suggesting very “youthful” characteristics, if the volcanic interpretation is correct. This location corresponds very closely with the caleu- lated epicentral location of the 1897 earthquake. The 1948 epicentre admittedly also very approximately located is placed somewhat nearer to the head of the Beachport submarine ridge. The nature of the (?) canyoning on the northern side of the Beachpurt sulmnarine ridge is little known, It is possible that submarine density currents have been concentrated about the former sea floor anomaly and lave lead to active erosion by buttom density currents. As the landward portion of the platform consists of Tertiary and Mesozoic sediments to more than 4000 feet depth, these soft sediments are alsa predicted for the platform edge and would be readily eroded. Outcropping rock is reported on three of the four ridge structures, even though the adjacent continental platform surface: is almost exclusively of sand, shell or “coral” (? polyzoa). ‘This supports the lava flow interpretation, which in the light of all the available evidence appears logical, The Hows would be conecived to have had “tunnel” form with the chilled lava surfaces providing crusts to insulate lava continuing to How. Portland vents were spread rather more and produced wider and less regular flow associations, Relative sea floor elevations of the order of 100 feet above the surroundings were produced. ‘The lava flow within Portland Bay originated on the land, but the position of the sea margin at the time is not known. Its conrse beneath the existing sea is clearly defined (Fig, 4). In its landward extension this flow has left some very fine elongate lava caves where the central liquid lavas had drained away. CONCLUSTONS Three, and possibly four, presumed submarine lava flows erupted oppasite Beachport in late Cainozoic times, The earthquake epicentres of the 1897 and 1948 correspond with these positions, and scoriaceuus basalt has been washed upon the beaches along the local coast. The fows are of great length (10 to 2U miles or more) and one of them (the Beachport flow) is margined by a decp trough on its northern side, possibly by submarine scouring by marine bottom density currents, There is no evidence, for or against, extrusion vf any of these presumed flows during 4 low level phase of the sea. In either case, the lower portians of the Hows must have becn below sea level even at the height of the generally accepted 40 fathom or 240 feet maximum lowering. Tho Beachport structure displaced the 100 fathom line markedly to seaward, @ fact which has been clearly recognised in drafting the latest hydrographic charts, A lowering of existing sea level by about 80 feet would be sufficient to expose the head of Little's “flow”. It is presumed that the “Hows” belong to the Mt. Gambier-Mt. Schank phase af Jatest volcanicity, and in view of the associated seismic activity, may be the latest of them all, There is a need for more detailed echo sounding surveys to fully elucidate these structures, and grab sampling of rock fragments would quickly verify the presumed yoleanic nature, A search for volcanic glass or other material on the open beaches near Beachport may alse help confirm these opinions, 202 R. C, SPRIGG wy gor—fr Oo - 7 __ Kp eeon PISS OPPOSITE CAPE BRIDGWATER VICTORIA v) 5 ha LL < > < - > wl Zz o < 2 Fa > w fy! g |) \ MOOI) Fig. 4 SUBMARINE VOLCANICITY 293 ACKNOWLEDGMENT Appreciation is expressed for the kind co-operation of Mr. T. A. Barnes, Director of Mines, South Australia, in making available the block reproduced as Fig. 1 herein. REFERENCES. Dopweti, G. F., 1909. South Australian Earthquakes. Aust. Ass. ady. Sci. (12). James, A. V. G., 1949, The last of the Australian Volcanoes. Walkabout, February issue. Howcuin, W., 1918. The Geology of South Australia. Govt. Printer, Adelaide. Spricc, R. C., 1947. Submarine Canyons of the New Guinea and South Australian Coasts. Trans. Roy, Soc. S, Aust., 71 (2), pp. 296-310. Spricc, R. C., 1952. The Geology of the South-East Province, South Australia, with Special Reference to Quaternary Couast-line Migrations, and Modern Beach Developments. Geol. Surv., S. Aust., Bull, 29. THE CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY IN THE EASTERN MT. LOFTY RANGES REGION: SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY R. C. Horwitz, B. P. THOMSON AND B. P. WEBB Summary This paper presents the results of recent mapping by the Geological Survey of South Australia in the eastern Mt. Lofty Ranges. The area covered forms portion of the Adelaide, Echunga and Milang Sheets (1:63, 360 scale). In the north and south of the area, field evidence establishes an unconformity between Adelaide System sediments and younger Cambrian sediments. An attempt is made to locate the base of the Cambrian in the central region where both sequences are conformable. The stratigraphy of the Adelaide System and the lowest beds of the Cambrian, including the Kanmantoo Group up to the Nairne pyrite formation, is outlined. The facies variations of these sediments are described. THE CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY IN THE EASTERN MT. LOFTY RANGES REGION: SOUTH AUSTRALIAt hy B. C. Hoxwirz,* B. P. Tuomson* ann B. P. Wess* [Read 11 September 1956] l. SUMMARY This paper presents the results of recent mapping by the Geologiea) Survey of Senth Australia in the castern Mt. Lofty Ranges. “Whe area covered forms portion of the Adelaide, Echunga and Mikmg Sheets (1:63, 360 seale). Ip the north and south of the area, Geld evidence establishes an vuconformity between Adelaide System sediments 2nd younger Cambrian sediments, An atteuypl is made to locate the base of the Carubrian in the central regi¢n where both sequences aré conformable. The stratigraphy of the Adelaide System and the lowest beds of the Cambrian, including the Kanmantoo Group tip to the Nairne pyrite Boestaitiony is ontlined. The facies variations of these secliments ate de- Scriupen, (a) History Metamorphosed Cambrian sediments, now known as the Kanmantoo Group, form the extreme eastern flank of the Mt. Lofty Ranges. Until some seven years ago there was much doubt as to the age of these sediments, and the opiaion was held by many geologists that they were cither Archaean or Late Proterozoic. This was due mainly to inadequate regional mapping. Harlier, Madigan (1925) had assigned a Cambrian age to these sediments farther south on the Fleurieu Peninsula, where the metamorphic grade is Jow. ; Systematic mapping of the region on 1 inch to 1 mile sheets by the Geo- logical Survey of South Australia led to the publication in 1951 of the Adelaide Sheet (Sprigg, Whittle and Campana ). The schistose metascdiments on the eastern side of the Sheet were assigned ta the “Kanmantoo Series” of (?) Early Palaeozoic age and the contact with Adelaide System rocks to the west was interpreted as a fault (the Nairne Fault). A similar interpretation was adopted for the Gawler Shect (1953) and in part on the Echunga Sheet (1954). Mapping of the Jervis and Yankalilla Sheets (Campana and Wilson, 1954, 19542) represented a major advance in the understanding of the geology of the “Mt. Lofty Ranges. This work clearly demonstrated the correlation uf the Ade- laide System sediments along both flanks of the Archaean core of the Ranges and the closure of these sediments to the south. The earlier Cambrian correla- tions of Madigan were confirmed and led toa the proposal by Sprigg und Cam- pana (1953) to the name “Kanmantow Group” for the cluracteristic marine “flysch” facies overlying Cumbrian phosphatic slates and limestones. A thick- ness of the Kanmantoo Group execeding 30,000 feel was recognized on the Jervis Sheet. This great thickness suggested to Sprigg and Campana that the upper boundary. of the Kaumantoa Croup may extend inte the Ordovician, As a result of prelimimary mapping on the Milang Sheet in the Ashbourne- Mt. Magnificent area, Campana and Horwitz (1956) interpreted the Kunmantoo * Geological Survey ot South Australis, + Published by permissiun of the Director of Mines, South Austrulia. ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S, Aust. (1959), Vol. 82. 206 K. GC. HORWITZ, B. P. ‘THOMSON anv B, P, WHEE Group as a transgressive sequence on Ue (?) Cambrian aad older rocks. One important result of this interpretation was the inference that the eastern bound- ary of the Adelaide System in the Mt, Charles arez (Adelaide Sheet) and further north was marked not by a fault (the Nairne Fault) but by an uncon- formity with the younger Kanmantuo Group. More detailed mapping on the Milang Sheet later led Horwitz (1958) to the conclusion that both the Kun- mantoa Group and basal Cambrian were transgressive, viz.i— “Towards the east a great thickness of detrital socks ave found... . [t is a deeper geosynclinal Cambrian equivalent and transgressive on the Adelaide System. In this region, changes of facies also affect the Adelaide System.” Unpublished mapping by Coats on the Truro Shect demonstrated that the basal Cambrian (Angaston and Stockwell marbles) and overlying Kanmiuntoo sediments were best interpreted to be transgressive on the Adelaide System. Kleeman and Skinner (1958) do not accept the evidence for Cambrian trans- gression un the Adelaide System and prefer to explain their field evidence in the Struthalbyn-Harrogate region as the result of complex facies changes in the upper members of the Adelaide System and arbitrarily place the base of the Kanmuantua Group at the Naimne pyrite formation, stratigraphically well above the base of the Kanmantoe Group as established by the Geological Survey. Honwvitz commenced feld work on the Milane Sheet in 1954, initially under the direction of Caropana. Horwitz subsequently mapped on this Sheet the stratigraphy and facies variations of the Adelaide System and the basal Cam- brian sediments and lawer members of the Kunmantoo Group and thereby was able ty recognize an unconformity between Precambrian and Cambrian sedi- ments. In 1958 Webb mapped the Mt. Charles area (Adelaide Sheet), This map- ping ¢stablished relationships between the Adelaide System and basal Cambrian sediments. which can only be satisfactorily explained as an unconformity, Thomsun in Jate [987 eommeneced a study of the stratigraphy of the Kan- mantoo Group on the Milung Sheet and extended it north and south on to the adjoining sheets. This mapping proved that the Nairne pyrite formation, and a related shaley Facies extended sonth from Macclesfield to the Southern Ocean near Victor Harbor (Fnecounter Sheet). The thick arkose formation below the Nairne pyrite formation was also found by Thomson to be one of the persistent tnajoy units in the whole of the exposed Kunmantoo Group on the mainland. All three writers have examined together numerous sections of the Marinoan and Lower Cambrian on the Echunyga and adjoining sheets. The recent mapping of the Kanmantoo Group on the Milang and Encounter Sheets was done in collaboration with A. R. Crawford. Valuable and enthu- siasti¢ assistance was given by University students K. J. Mills, T. BR. Pontifex and R. CG. Brown, (b) The Problem of the Base of the Cambrian Daily (1956) gives an excellent account of this problem as applied to the Suuth Australian Cambrian generally. Lower Palaeozoic fossils have not yet been recognized on the eastern side of the Mt. Lofty Ranges. This fact makes the pusitioning of the hase of the Cambrian in that region a task involving strict attention in the field to the mapping of stratigraphy, lithology and structure of the sedimentary units. This work must be extended to a regional seale before oven fairly reliable conclusions can be drawn, The writers believe that this stage has now heen reached, Restriction of observations to small local areas is inadequate and misleading beeause of facies changes in both Cambrian and CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN HOLNDARY 207 Precambrian sedimentary units. Anuther fuctur to be cunsidered ts the variation in grade of regional metamorphism. The hase of the Cambrian on the western side of the Mt. Lofty Ranges at Sellick Hill has been taken by Campana and Wilson (1954b) to occur helow a dominantly limestone sequence, the upper member of which contains Lower Cambrian fossils including Archacveyatha. Duily (1956, p, 134; Horwitz and Daily,1955, p. 54) on palaeontological evidence suggests that this approximates to the base of the Cambrian. The Sellick [ill limestone sequence or its meta- morphased equivalent is overlain by phosphatic shale. In this paper these two units will be referred to as the “basal Cambrian”, At Carrickalinga Head on the Yankalilla Sheet, Campana and Wilson (1954u) found the phosphatic shale to be overlain by a greywacke-shale sequence which they took to be the basal member of the Kanmantoo Group, They found this sequence to be preserved in a structurally complex area on the fervis Sheet to the south where the phos- phatie beds finally turn north across the axis of the regional anticline and eun- tinue up the eustern flank to the vicinity of Delamere, Spricg and Campana (1953), in. dealing with the Kanmantoe Group on the eastern side of the Ranges, tentatively correlated the Macclesfield marble horizon with the basal Archaeocyatha Jimestone. Subsequent mapping on the Milang Sheet lias enabled more previse curre- lations to be made. Horwitz (1958) mapped a marble similar to that at Maccles- field in the Fiiniss River Gorge near Mt. Magnificont. This marble overlies u black phosphatic and pyritie shale which can be reasonably correlated with the hase] Cambrian phosphatic shale on the Yankalilla and Jervis Sheets where it overlies the Archaevcyatha limestone, The Finniss River marhle js, therefore, om the basis of this correlation within the Kanmantoo Group. Similarly, it is be- lieved that the Macclesfield marble is a member of the Kanmantoo Cronp be- cause it is stratigraphionlly 2000 feet above the Macclesfield quartzite (Plate 3), Near Ashbourne this quartzite is immediately overlain by abeut 150 feet of black pyritic and (?) phosphatic slate, which is here correlated with the phos- phatié shale at the buse of the Kanmantoo Group. ‘This slate dies ont to the north of Ashhourne where it either lenses ont ar changes facies to a thin-bedded greywacke, In the Ashbourne area, Morwitz (1958) recognized the Hallett Arkose formation of the Marinoan Series. This observation showed that the underlying marbles there, previously interpreted as (7?) Cambrian (Campana and Horwitz, 1958) helonged to the Hrighton Limestone formation of the Sturtian Series, These findings narvawed considerably the problem of locuting the base of the Cambrian in this region and at the same time presented strong, evidence fir 1 Cambrian (pre-Kanmantoo Group) transgression on the Adclaide System rocks. Since the uceessirily generalized definition of the Kanmanton Group by Sprige and Campana (1953), many geologists have tended to associate “prey- wucke facies” solely with the Kanmantoo Group. Iorwitz (1958), however, has found in the Bull Creek-Ashbourne area that a restricted greywacke facies occurs in association with the Marinuan Hallett Arkose and also localiv deeper in the Proterozoic seyuunce, This is generally in contrast to the Proterozoic facies on the western funk of the regional anticlinorium. The interpretation of Kleeman and Skinner (1958), however, represents aun extreme development of this concept. By shifting the base of the Kan- mintoo Group upwards to the base of the Nairne pyrite formation, and Includ- iny the underlying arkose and greywacke sequence in the Adelaide System, they 208 fh. GC. HORWITZ. B. PL THOMSON ann B. 1 WEBB have made stratigraphic correlations which are not compatible with field evi- dence for the region, (¢) The Scope of the Paper In this paper an attempt is made ty locate the base of the Cambriai sedi- ments in the region between Mt. Magnificent (Milang Sheet) and Mt, Charles Kast (Adelaide Sheet), a distance of about 84 miles. "The purpose of this. study is to provide a basis for fixing the Precambrian-Cambrian boundary for the future publication of the Barker and Adelaide Sheets of the 4-mile series af Geological Atlas of South Australia, The emphasis has been on lithological aud stratigraphic observations. The interesting structural details, which are readily available in the field, are described unly in so far as they have a bearing on the solution of local stratigraphical problems. No atteampt is made here to deal fully with the variations in metamorphic grade which show a general increase fam south-west to north-east. The original sedimentary character of the rucks at the northern end of the area are in many cases still readily recognizable in the field, Very useful aid has been given. particularly in the classification of some of these rocks, by petrographic studies carried out in the Mines Depart- eeend labortirien both personally by and under the direction of A, W. G. Whittle. It, CROLOGICAL EVIDENCE (a) General Lithology, the “Kenmantoo Facies” and “Adelaide System Facies” The much abused term “greywacke” has been loosely adopted by many Suuth Australian geologists as synouymous with the Kanmantoo Group rocks. Greywackes (as defined by Pettijohn in 1957) appear to be most abundantly developed in the Kanmantoo Group rocks immediately above the Nairne pyrite formation. Below this formation, exclusive of thin, ine-grained phyllites mem- hers, there are local greywacke units und a variety of sediments covering a range of grain size and composition from sub-greywacke to arkose. Similar compositions have been found by Forbes (1957) for his Strangway Hill Beds, Inman Hill Formation and Brewnhill Beds in the Grey Spur region which lies in the south-western portion of the Milang Sheet and extends on tu the En- counter Sheet. All these beds have subsequently been demonstrated to belong ta the Kanmantoo Group, These sediments have a variety of field characteristics which may be sutm- marized as Follows: (i) Culour, Drab grey on weathered surface. Often finely mottled by dlis- seminated ferramagnesian minerals, (ii) Texture. Dlomogeneous and granular texture is a feature of thick- bedded members. When struck with u pick these rocks do not generally frac- ture readily, due to the “woody” character of the rock structure. This “woody” character is presumably due to the binding wbility of the fine-grained matrix in which the detrital grains are set. On weathered surfaces the outer layer of the rock may be slightly friable. particularly if close to the Tertiary laterite level. (iii) Outerop Shape. Generally, shapes are rounded to sub-rounded, de- pending un grain size, silice content and degree of cleavage or schistosity de- veloped, TRocks of the Kanmantoo Croup are generally of the above type, but, in the area dealt with in this paper, local horizons and lenses of sediments with similar characteristics occur thronghout the Adelaide System, In this paper the term “Kanmanton facies” is ased to include all such rock types. Such occurrences in Wairne pyrite formation Arkase ea* s50' Greywacke Marble (Macclestield & finniss River) Greywacke & slsve SS + SRM Chae CAMBRIAN Morble & cate silicate tenses Oo 1) FE z < Z x J <= uv) < a z < ag co = < O Phuyllite & greywache Lenticular quartzite &cale silicate lenses UNCONFORMITY (in North £ South of area) Slate, minor guarizive & greywacke af tog Gritty pebblyarkose & guartzife Brighton Limestone Slate BRN ae Miedoch bil) My HA MS 7. Sturt Trltite MAL WL - 4 2 4 Quartzifes He i —- * » BS"00' (PROTEROZOIC) ADELAIDE SYSTEM ARCHAEAN| |TORRENSIAN | STURTIAN |MARINOAN Predominantly siltstones Conglomerate & sandstone UNCONFORMITY aan SS f Schist, gress, pegmatite bcale sificate Mapped gedlagical boundary .------~- -~~-~- ------ — Boundary drawn trom local trends ~....--+-+----- ~~~ 7 lniferred boundary —.--.----------+-------+--+---= 9 *+----- vw Ry 7 bey os ot GAWLER | EAS EQS . ies ee 5 », Carrickalinga Head JF e ne 35'10' Sheets magped fine unpublished) .. TRURO Aarantad GYOUD - 22.01. -.22 6.2. EL A \eh i- = Location of columnar sections SHOWN | « Mn Frate M1 oo. “ =_ fs Wp OL Ae} rslem Hill fast 35'(5' STRATHALBYN I36"55 LR GEOLOGICAL MAP OF PORTION OF EASTERN MT.LOFTY RANGES BETWEEN Cy ees MT. CHARLES & MT. MAGNIFICENT =NLARGEMENT| SHOWING CAMBRIAN- PRECAMBRIAN STRATIGRAPHY So 2 3 5 MILES Conpiled trom bee Survey S.A. /imile series geological maps, and later magpirg 4y #0 Horwitz, 8 F Thomsen & BP Webb. CAMBRTAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 2) Proterozoic time heralded the general change Eo unsorted sediments, which de- veluped in the vicinity of the Mt. Lofty Ranges and extended an unknown distance to the east in Cambrian time. The normal “Adelaide System facies” can he considered t6 occur in the type seotions near Adelaide (Mawson and Sprigg, 195(})- Pelitic rocks form the greatest proportion of the whale Adelaide System seqynence on the castern side of the Ranges. This ix clearly illustrated by the great thickness of approximately 20,000 fect of slate and siltstone in a total thickness of 31,700 feet as shown in the legend of the Adelaide Sheet, although it is now believed that more detailed mapping and structural interpretation will considerably reduce these figures. The thickness of 10,000(+-) feet for the Adelaide System shown in Plate IT has heen largely determined on the eastern side of the anticlinorium om the Milang Sheet. “This agrees with recent measurements on the Echunga and Adelaide Sheets for Sturtian and Mavinoun Series, Other features of the “Ade- laide System fucies”, apart from the tillites, arkose and dolomites, are the hard, white quartzites with 75 per cent, or more quartz, associated with the Stonyfell Quartzite, the Sturt Tillite and the Hallett Arkose. Apart from the Mt. Barkey- Macclesfield quartzite and lower minor members such quartaites do not occur in the Cambrian. ‘ It is in the Marinoan that the “Kanmantoo tacies” und the “Adelaide System facies” overlap and intertungue to the greatest extent, (bh) Stratigraphy The generalized stratigraphy of the region is outlined on Plate 1, (1) Archaean Campana and Wilson {1954b) describe these rocks on the Yankalilla and Jervis Sheets as schists, gneisses and stressed granites. Gneisses range from quartz-mica to sillimanite-garnet gneisses. Basic dvkes and pegmatites, in part pussibly of Proterozoic or Palaeozoic age, are also present. Strong schistosity is developed in the metasediments und in places in the besal beds of the Adelaide System. ‘he metamorphic grade of the Archiean is generally much higher than the Proterozoic and Cambrian rocks, but has been to a large extent obscured by retrugrade changes caused by Palaeazoic and earlier folding and shearing. (2) Proterozoic: Adelaide System The Proterozoic succession in the southern part of the Mt. Lofty Ranges on the Fleuricu Peninsula shows some interesting facies variations. As previ- ously recorded by Sprigg, Whittle and Campana (1951), rucks to the west of the Archacan core differ in facies from those to the east. Despite these facies Variitions some good marker beds persist on both flanks of this structure (Mt. Lafty Anticlinorium of Campana, 1955a). The succession can he summarised as follows—further detuils being shown on Plate TL ; (i) Torrensian. The lowest members are the Basal Crits and Conglomer- ates (Howchin, 1906) or the Aldgate Sandstone (Mawson and Sprigg, 1950). This formation vanes in thickness from 200 to 700 feet. Boulders are usually present at the base. The basal formation is overlain, on both limbs of the anti- clitiurium by a sequence, less than 4000 feet thick, in which siltstones or their metamorphic equivalents (phyllitic siltstones or siliceous schists) predominate. _ There is, however, a difference, for on the eastern side of the Archaean core bands of greywacke are interhedded with the siltstones. Al] of these sediments ure correlated with the Torrensian Series, ‘The wpper limit had already heen chosen as such on tle published sheets. 210 Rf. C, HORWITZ, B. P, THOMSON anv B. P. WEBB These sediments persist to the northern limit of the area here described, ta the north and west of Mt. Charles where the metamorphic grade has converted them to quartzite-sericite-muscovite schists. Here, one specimen examined by PLATE It PROTEROZOIC—CAMBRIAN SUCCESSIONS SOUTHERN MTLOFTY RANGES WEST OF MT COMPASS EASTERN SIDE OF Mt LOFTY RANGES (AFTER F.C HORWITZ \958) BETWEEN MFCHARLES & MT MAGNIFICENT meseY Base ot Marne gyre Rarrenation | Grass-devtled ardor, Bcc graynwote Thinbedied gremsihe aint kite Atsowestiatc! wmenbie Beaver! crates ond silstones with lranerenonts 8 ptogehates analy Limentone Arivttoctpea tha Aimeniare | Cea eden Meggy titetnads Besdly | pee Fied vi Surya, — 1 CAMBRIAN Pyrite, phosphatic a graphiti shite ME Barker—Maccles Pele guarteite Aardle & calesivcate lenses Phylites arid grepaache leggy harestane saherdeazed arit Walersasing with quentzifep orecderdod Sepilivorcus witesees, KANMANTOO GROUP z2 precise witiaty eng Cele-siticate tenses and Se Dares SEY PONIES. -—| Ce eatissse- gunirieite & sardvane, BR] (testes, pebon bere ga [eearenigy dasha Lereres [Cinevebie A feriencing pyarsfter pres ‘ M Thin quartzite bends [tie Beauy ators dann, eberokehy = “veetagrerphpiives satwrdeavled end SAPOfORES, gaa pUrBhY Sealer aie asing with gepwaches er dedses! gritty ouhiny arose x Melt dosase watts oevk | dj martes, nnckote of tilde sot sity payliifes wilh grepwerte ebshagongnrs TY dnterredtotd, gritty, petal orate bsntts wile lgmunafed seesyareir sad Shales. Called? Araase ARINOAN enthuse: mennive aed Mbpgy Himestage, watt aad gala tig m7 Lbarts “Srghton. Lrmasto: f denbcater, mrosrives Maggy mane, polite ana dalemirie ip Dante \ Orighton J imasvare | (RRNA MO CvcCareasy gate sitstofes acd shafts “lapley vive Mgfes” Fite af toa “Star h Biete? wr iiihde at san, Stuer Filtre” trfenbecten sitters s guartidtes near Ask doung, daiditier' tenses, “Beker Grau” trpure telspathle silistores, 5 ey otyiites on SCANT s, wiht washe Seesigomeat 7 Y @erhex. STURTIAN tater bedded xirsranet 4 guartetex dace! grhase of bauidler . teases. "Belair Craw” 4 amoure (sispathre siltstones, 490014 joo-200 & " werbewers welt be Savas of WAOSE AIT Qs { Singé on oouive haces F eriare an puarizres, ADELAIDE SYSTEM (PRoTERazoIc) Cangtormrates Henchan, Arkese arc’ grits parsing 7S davtage dea. , " » ktgute Samisron (Basal Grit 4, en aie Aisgule Sarastare (Bera? Grits > sd Canginmeratas Fawcrlas (seeks Arkaos af gate with dearer Ae ke Legs of Bare, tes UNCONFOAMITY UNCONFORMITY p__, ADEE TORRENSIAN f 4 Sait grelns, pegrante Lb | inteth, pnetts, peprietiVe anet | ze Polite ralcinicare 2 zt (J az t es a Whittle was found to have the composition of a greywacke and to contain traces of sillimanite, (ii) Sturtian. The Yorrensian Series is overlain by well marked bands of quartzite (usually three) with boulder beds and coarse arkoses, interbedded with slate and greywacke lenses. CAMBARTAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 211 Tillite sometimes overlies these beds. The quartzite and the tillite are cor- related with the Belair Group and Sturt Tillite of the type section near Adelaide (Mawson and Sprigg, 1950), These lower beds of the Sturtian are yery con- stant in facies on the Milang Sheet and on the eastern side of the anticlinorium measure 1000 feet in thickness. Further north the quartziles decrease in number, but persist to Mt. Charles East, where they are terminated by the Cambrian mncontormily. Howchin (1929) recurds tillite in the upper members in the vicinity of Mt. Barker township. Overlying these lower Torrensiun beds is a comstant succession, 2000 feet in thickness, of laminated siltstones and shales with limesteme hands and lenses tawards the top. These sedituents, which are yaluable markers, ave correlated with the Tapley Hill Slates of the type aren, Near the base of this sequence the slates are blueish in colour and show traces of pyrite. In a similar stratigraphic position, immediately south of Mt, Charles, a low gerade schist was fering, by Whittle tu have a typical greywacke eoniposition. Local marble lenses are interbedded with the Tapley Ifill Slates which themselves are alsu Tucully culeareous, In the northern part of the area these beds are represented by Aagyy cule-silicate rocks. The Sturtian Series ends with the Brighton Limestone, represented by a white marble, which persists along the strike for [ene to five miles in places, and may reach a thickness of over 100 feet. (iii) Aferringen. ‘The lowest beds of the Marinoun Series are arkosic sand- stones, interbedded with silky phyllite, greywacke, gritty and pebbly arkuse (Hallett Arkose) aud gritty marble. These arkosie beds are locally lenticular, but combine to form a well-defined and easily recognisable unit reaching a thickness of over 2000 feet. In the northern part of the area in the vicinity of Murdock Ifill cale-silicate horizons develop at the top of the sequence anil are apparently Huncated at the unconformity hy the overlying Cambrian sediments. Of interest are the local pockets or tillite occurring with arkoses and greywacke in the vicinity of Mt. Barker Creck (Howchin, 1929) and near Bull Greek (Ticrwitz, 1958 ). The upper sequence of the Marinoan Series is finer grained and is noticeably phyllitic throughout the region. Andalusite-staurolite schists develop in this whit to the north, “Che thickness varies from 1000 te 2400 feet, the maximum thickness being observed in the vicinity of Macclesfield (see Plate III). At the top of these beds, near Bull Creek, quartzite members, gencrally not exceeding one foot in thickness, occur and are interlensed with phyllite and fine-gruined preywacke. These quartaites disappear to the north and are here provisionally interpreted as the thin eastern) extension of the Pound Quartzile, a facies de- veloped very extensively towards the north-west of this regiun. [t is also possibly present on the western side of the anticlinorium as thicker sandy seyuences that occur extensively at the top of the Marinoan (see Plate 11), (3) Basal Cambrian (i) Mt. Magnificent-Ashhourne Area, Since it ts i this area that the starting point for the Cambrian correlation by Hie region under discussion is assnmed, it will be discussed in some detail, Phosphatic slate and underlying marble lenses which we correlate with hasal Cambrian sediments are exposed in the hed of the Finniss River. This sequence continues north for three miles where it changes to fine-grained phyllitic grey- wacke Which is folded in a tight syncliné-anticline structure. The sreywacke overlaps uncunformably the underlying Sturtian quartzites which being more rigid were deformed by imbricate thrusting during the major folding process. A north-east striking feult near McHarg’s Creek is developed on the un- conformity and the “Kanmantoo arkose facies” is there in contact with Marinoan R. €. HORWITZ, B. P. THOMSON anv B. P. WEBB ol oO LOUIE of Bf ee tie a ——_—— | UP dd gosh cone cone copl 9 oeuluzays AINYNOGHSVY SSONVY ALJOTIW NYSLSVS eS] — f. SNOLLY T3YxOD DIHdVHSILVYELS TWIS WHNOZOH S . LNADIINDYA LAN OTAlSSIIDOVIN \ { SSTYVHD iN 40 HLNOS W33YD S8\tW 2| HaMyVE iW ALINYOSNGINY SVONV Y3Ald ay us N ALINHOANG ONT Semprren oe ea pan van fh CE at Sacer Se A LIWHOINOSNN ~ PS iZLevno HLS DY PY RO is “ a Syke tt pee ~layEem Asay aqgyVN—__ a1g14ea DS vN Spanien PADSI- SCAR A NF j a LACES irons th Salve CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN, BOUNDARY 213 sediments. A dark phyllite, possibly equivalent to the phosphatic slate, cmerges frum the fault contact and is exposed in a syncline one and a half miles north- vast of McHarg’s Creek. Overlying the phyllites ave fine-grained greywackes which become courser in grain size until the sequence is represented by coarse crass-bedded urkuse. The eastern limb of the syncline is sheared out to the sauth and develops into.» steeply dipping north-south stretchhrust. To the east of the thrust the structural setting is even more complex, Isolated exposures of black pyritic slate occur overlying thin (2) Cambrian quartzite west of the main road. This slite is believed to be the equivalent of the Mt. Magnificent phosphatic and yyritic slate. On the main roud, one mile north of Ashbourne, the black slate is well exposed in a deep cutting, where it is folded into a tight anticline with a quartzite core, The slate is repeated in a suecession of steep plunging anti- dlines which are disposed in an en eehelon pattern to the south and finally plunge below the arkose of the Kanmantoo Group near Ashbourne. The slate finally emerges from this anticlinal environment as an cast facing limb and persists for one and a half miles north of the main road cutting, where it is underlain by the Macclesfield quartzite as described above. (ii) The “Basal Quartzsite’, Nerthwards from the main road cutting the heds underlying the Macclesfield quartzite diverge in stike to the west and greywackes und interbedded slates appear in the sequence. The sequence ap- pears to be continudus down tea lentionlar quartzitic unit which is well expused in vuterop at Bull Knob Trig. Below this quartzite, which is provisionally re- ferred to as the “hasal quartzite”, typical Marinoan phyllites appear, The quartz- ite and related sandstones can he followed intermittently to the north around the Macclestield syncline. Abuut one mile cast of Macclesficld the “basal quartz- ite" is exposed in the nose of the Strathalbyn anticline which al this point planges gently south below andalusite schists containing minor ereywacke bands. The unit reappears one and one-third miles south as massive quartzite in a domal structure, the result of a pitch reversal, Local cale-silicate minerals aré here developed at the base of the quartvite. The quartzite can be followed for alamt one mile north along the castern limb of the Strathalbyn anticline where it gradually changes facies to a massive greywacke. The greywacke in turn hecomes increasingly phyllitic in character like the underlying Marinoan sedi- ments and it cannot be located with certainity in the field at the latitude of Bugle Ranges. Structural evidence shows that the stratigraphic position of the basal member is loeated approximately midway between the Hallett Arkuse to the west and the Mt. Barker quartzite to the east. At this stratigraphic level one mile east of Wistow, greywackes reappear, and continue north to the Mt. Barker Creck. Tere a well defined greywacke and quarizite sequence is exposed which continues with interbedded phyllites up to the persistent cale- silicate bed at the base of the Mt. Barker quartzite. Quarizite, massive crey- wacke and arkose continue to one mile north of Naiene, Further nurth the formations thin gradually and converge in strike. The “basal quartzite” is re- Presented hy discontinueus lenses of white quartzite assaciated with lenses of diopside granulite rocks. These rack units persistently maintain a northerly strike to the northern edge of the area, in contvast to the general east-west strike of the Adelaide System rocks to the west. (iii) The Macelesfield-Mt. Barker Quartzites. Massive quartzite is ex- posed about une mile north-west of Macclesfield where it reaches 1000 feet in thickuess. If can he followed south-west to the northern boundary of the Milang Sheet as descrlhed above. This formation lenses out or intertongues with grey- wackes one und a half miles south-vast of Macelesfield, on the eastern limbs of PLATE iv ft , .' tbh bb bee ene ott -+ foe degeret seo piste t é 4 ~ 3 3 & FS > CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 215 the Macclesfield syocline. Tectonic thinning appears to have contributed in part te the disappearance of the quartzite. Tle greywackes at this stratigraphic level cantinne séuth and enter the complex folds that are part of the major struchye cumprising the Strathalbyn anticline. A massive quartzite outcrops tw anda half miles south-cast of Macclesfield, Analysis of the stricture shows that this quartzite approximates closely the stratigraphic level uf the Maccles- Reld quartvite. The roussive quartzite can be followed north fur fifteen miles to the northern boundary of the Echunga Sheet where it forms the Mt, Barker ridge. On the Adelaide Sheet the quartzite is concealed by younger sediments south of Mue- deck Hill, Lenticular quartzites outcrop north-east of this point und the strikes gently converge to the north. In Inverbrachie Creek the mast casterly quartzite has been taken to represent the Mt. Barker quartzite horizon. This formation is associated with cale-silicate lenses which may be correlated with the diopside granulite exposed in Mt. Barker Creck at the hase of the Mt. Barker quartzite, This calcareous metasediment can be followed inter- mittently fo the south for five miles, We believe that it fs an echo oF the more vigorous limestone sedimentation af the basal Cumbrian in the Sellick Hill region. Considerable support is given to this interpretation trom the regional geology to the north of Mt. Charles. A thick marble horizon, which underlies greywackes, occurs three-quarters of & mile cast of Mt, Torrens. On the Gawler Sheet marbles also occur west of Mt. Kitchener, The thick marble sequence in the basal Cambrian on the Kaponda and Truro Sheets indicates a carbonate sequence vomparable in thickness with the Sellick Hill urea. (4) The Kanmantoo Group By definition the Kanmantoo Group commences at the top uf the basal Cambrian phosphatic slate. Good sections are obtained in the Finniss River east of Mt. Magnificent and in the vicinity of Ashhourne (see Plate IIL). Here the lowest beds are lenticular massive greywackes interbedded and intertungne- ing with phyllites, the latter increasing in proportion in the ascending sequence. At 1200 feet above the bise is the white marble lens of the Finniss River. At 2300 feet above the base, thick cross-bedded arkoxe suddenly appears in the sequence. The contaet with underlying phyllites can be readily mapped to the yerth and south. In the Ashbourne section the same arkose appears al 1200 fect above the base, and is here 3000 feet thick. North of Ashbourne the base of the Kanmantoo has been taken at top of the Macclesfield quartzite, although the precise location is proh- ably several hundred feet above this level. In the Macclesfield section (Plate Ifl, section 3) phyllites and greywackes extend for about 3300 feet above the quartzite and inchide the marble member which is approximately 200 feet thick. This marble may he contempsraneous with the Finniss River marble and also with a cale-silicate horizon reported by Kleeman (personal communication) one and a quarter miles north-east of Mt. Charles East. ‘The arkose formation in the Macclesfleid section is only 1600 feet thick. The proportien and thick- ness of the coarse arknse facies increases to the north until it occupies all the stratigraphic column between the Nairne pyrite formation and the Macclos- field-Mt, Barker quartzites as seen in the urea between sections 4 and 6 on Plate [In section 5 the basal Kanmantoo sequence is thin-bedded atkose and phyllite. The typical coarse cross-bedded arkose docs nat appear until 1200 feet above the base. The finer-grained facies appears to lens ont completely to the south and in a larye degree to the north. The thickness of the Kanmantoo Group sequence helow the Nairne pyrite formation varies from 4400 to 5200 gio RK. 0. HOBRWITE, Bo. THOMSON axp TP, WEB feet between sections 1 and 5. In these sections the coarse arkuse Varies from 1600 to 4700 feet. This range of thickness can only be satisfactorily explained as the result of facies vurtelions within the sediments (as indicated on Plate L11). ‘The 10,000 feet thickness uf coarse arkose in section 6 and 10,000(—) fect in section 1 can be attributed largely to original sedimentary thickening, This is shown by the divergence of strike lines north-east of Murdock Till. (ce) Structure (1) Sedimentary Struefures Minor sedimentary structures such as slump bedding sre found in 4 few places in the greywacke facies of the Marinoun Series as also are fine scale eross-beddiny and graded-bedding. fn the coarse arkose of the Kanmantoo Gronp both shimping and erass- bedding are developed in some localities on a large scale. Beds up to three feet in thickness may show intense slump folds and cross-hedding has an am- plitude of up to four feet between topset and bottomsct beds. The most spectacular large-scale sedimentary structure is in the vicinity ut McHare's Creek near Ashbourne where a north-east contact between cast- north-east trending Matinoan sediments and north-sonth trending Kanmantoo arkose marks approximately the boundary of a zone of rapid thickening in the arkose possibly related to a fault line which was. active during sedimentation. The geometry of the structure demonstrates that the hinge linc, formed by intersection uf hedding planes with the plane of the contact, plunges steeply south-east and that the present surface in this locality represents a section of the Gambrian basin, The contact has been the locus for later local Laulting- (2) Tectonic Structures In the Mt. Magnificent-Ashbomne area the tectonic structures have their strongest development. East of Mt. Mugnificent the incompetent Lower Cam- brian sediments are lightly folded and strongly sheared between the Adelaide System quartzite and the Archacau core to the west, and the resistant block of coarse Kanmantoo Group arkose to the east, The arkose block has also been theust against the underlying unconformity with the Adelaide System. Near Ashbourne, the right-handed en echelon of domes of basal Cambrian, although Jocally overtummed in plunge, represents in miniature the regional pattern of folding. This is consistent with the zig-zag and elliptical patterns of en echelon folding described by Campbell (1955), The en echelon pattern is repeated along the axis of the Strathalbyn anticline which is a composite structure made up of numerous individual anticlines, Thesco structures, however, are not us tight as those in the Ashbourne area, The en echelon pattern is preserved on the Adelaide Sheet in the Me. Charles area where the unconformity traces in plan 4 sinuous course reflecting the Paleozoic folding. The individual folds in the thickened Kammantoo Group to the east appear ta dic out as they approach the unconformity, whereas the folds to the west in the Adelaide System appear to plunge beluw it, The pattern aud degree of folding established in the Adelaide System priur ta Cambrian sedimentation is difienlt to establish, We believe that it was most probably monoclinal in character. ; TV. CONCLUSION (a) Valiclity of Stratigraphic Correlations In the absence so far of fossil and isotope dating evidence for inferring a Cumbrian age for the sediments in the area dealt with in this paper, the wrilers have aecepted the lithological and structural evidence. An important key luri- CAMBRIAN-PRECAMBRIAN BOUNDARY 217 zun is the phosphatic slate of the Mt. Magnificent area, Evidence for accepting this as a member of the basal Cambrian is as follows: (i) Considering the evidence in section. At aboat ten miles west of Mt. Mugnificent in the Sellick [ill area. on the western side of the Mt, Lofty Anti- clinorium, the Lower Cambrian calcarequs sequence is overlain by the phos- platic shale horizon, A lithologically similar sequence, facing east, is ubserved eust of the Mt. Magnificent quartzite, whieh is iiterpreted as marking an un- conformity in this area, the limestone being restricted to small lenses at the incontermity, (ii) Considering the evidence in plan. ‘The cross-hedded Kanmantno irkose has been followed south by une of us (B.P.T.) on to the Yankalilla ane Jervis Sheets, where in the vicinity of Delamere, phosphatic slate and marhle appear at approximately the same stratigraphic interval below the arkose as they do at Mt. Magnifleent. From this point the succession can be followed with minor interruptions to the Scllick Hill locality. Ficld evidence north uf the Adelaide Sheet has already been discussed (see “Basal Cambrian” above). The writers believe therefore that the most reasonable interpretation of the evidence now available is to inelude the ML. Maynifivent slate aud marble in the basal Cambrian, The dating of the “basal quartzite” as lower Cambrian in the area between Ashbourne and Mt. Charles hus been intuenced by the discovery of a gritty arkose (Horwitz, 195%) at the base of the Cambrian sequence an the Milang Sheet north-vast of Sellick [Gl This arkose would imply a hiatus and chance in condition of sedimentation in this area towards the end of Pound Quartzite time and possibly into the earliest Cambrian, We correlate this change and possible disconformity with the folding and erosion of the Adelaide Syste) which took place farther east during this time interval, The possibility remains that the Macclesfield-Mt. Barker quartzite represents the equivalent of the Pound or ABC Range Quartzitc, The writers consider this unlikely and assume that the uncontormities exposed at Ashbourne and Mt. Charles are the result uf contemporancous transgression. (b) Tectonic History The tectonic history, commencing with the Upper Proterozeiv, is summur- ized as follows: (1) Deposition of Torrensian sediments on Archaean. (2) Sturtian and Marinean sedimentation and continued slight variations in stability in the region. (3) Local uplift and erosion of the Adelaide System in the Mt, Lufty Runges revion at the close of Marinvan time; probably due to positive movernernt of the Archaean core. Sedimentation continuous la the east during this period. (4) Transgression of Cambrian on the eroded and folded Adelaide System platform. relative increase in the rate of sedimentation to east and west of the present Mt. Lofty Anticlinorium. (5) Sedimentation of the Kanmantoo Group marked by the intermittent but relatively rapid subsidence over eroded areas of the Adelaide System. (6) Pre-Pernian Palaeozoic orogeny; deep folding of the Adelaide System; meta- morphism of the Kanmantoo Group and the castern zone of the Adelaide System sediments; granite intrusions; positive movement of the Archaea basement. (7) Prolonged erosion of Pre-Permian mountain terrain and associated arching, warping and faulting with the formation of localized younger sedimentary 218 Kk, GC. HORWITZ, B. P. THOMSON anu B, P. WERRB basins and continental areas, These phenomena are still active and wre responsible for the present physiography of the region, ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The authors express their gratitude to Mr, T, A. Barnes, Director of Mines, and Mr. L. W. Parkin, Depnty-Director of Mines, for granting permission to publish and prepare this paper. They are very grateful to Mrs. BE. N. Teesdule- Smith for carefully checking the M.S. and to Mr. Peter J. Brown and Mr, Bruce Thomas for their drafting of the plates. REFERENCES Camenenn, J. D., 1958, Hi echelon Folding, Econ, Geol., 53 (4), pp. 448-472. Campana, B., 1953. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Gawler. Geol. Suev, S. Aust, Castpana, B., 1955. The Ceology of thy Gawler Military Sheet, Rep, Invest. Geol. Surv, S, Aust., 4, 24 pp. Campana, B, 1955a. The Structure of the Eastern South Australian Rariges. The Afount Lofty-Olary Are. J. Geol. Soe. Aust., 2, pp. 47-61. Campana, B., 1958, The Mt. Lofty-Olary Region and Kangaroo Island, being Chapter T of “The Geology of South Australia”, by M. F, Glaessner and L, W. Parkin (Ed.). J. Ceol. Soo. Aust, 5 (2), pp. 3-27, Campana, Bi, and Horwirz, R., 1956. The Kammunten Group of South Australia Considered as a Transgressive Sequonce, Aust, J. Sei, 18 (4), pp, 128-129, Campana, B., and Wirson, B., 1954. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Jervis. Geol. Surv. 5. Ast. Campana 3i., and Witson, B,, L85da. Ceologleal Athi of South Australia, Sheet Yankalilla. Geol. Sury. 8. Aust. Camrana, B., and Winsen, By 1954b, ‘Whe Geology of the Jervis and Yankalilla Military Sheets. Rep. Invest. Geol. Surv. S. Anst,, 3, 26 pp, Coats. A, P., and THomsow, B, P,, L958. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Shect Truro. Geol. Surv. S. Aust, in press. Dany, B., 1956 The Cambrian in South Australia, EL Sistema Cumbrico, su Palaeogen- grafia_y el Problema de su Base. Part 1 20th Tntetnat, Geol. Cougress, Mexico, pp- 91-147. Dicgmson, S, B., and Coats, BR, Pi, $957, Geological Atlas of Sonth Australia, Sheet Kajpiinda. Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Fores, B. G., 1957. Stratigraphic Seeeession East of Crey Sonr, South Australia, ‘Trans. Roy. Soa, &. Aust, 80, pp. 39-66. Horwitz, R., 1956, Geologie de la Region de Mt. Coripuss, Australie meridionale. D» es Se, Thesis, Unity. of Lausanne. Unpublishix!, Hoawirz, R., and Daizy, B.. 1958. Yorke Peninsula, heiny Chapter IT of the “The Geolngy of gene fasbealia by ML FE. Glaessoer aud L. W. Parkin (Ed.). J. Geol. Soe. Aust., 5 (2). pp. -60. ; . Hoawitz, R., and THomson, B, P,, 1958, Geological Adas of South Australia, Sheet Milany. Geol. Surv. 8, Aust, in press. Towcun, W., 1906. The Geology of the Mount Lofty Ranges. Dart I. Trans. toy. sae S. Aust,, 30, pp. 227-262. Howcum, W., 1929. On the Probable Ovcurrence of the Sturtian Tillite near Nairne and Mount Barker. Trans, Koy, Soc. $8, Aust,, 53, pp. 27-32. Kieeman, A. W., and Ssinnen, B, J., 1959. The Kanmantoo Group in the Strathalbyn- Harrogate Region, South Australia. ‘Trans. Roy. Soc. &. Aust., 82, pp. 61-71 Manican, ©. T., 1925. The Geology of the Fleurieu Peninsula, Part The Goast from Sellick Hill to Victor Harbor. Trans. Roy. Suc. S. Aust., 49, pp. 198-212. Mawson, D., and Spricc, R. C,, 1950. Subdivision of the Adelaide Systum, Aust. J. Svi., 13 (3), pp. 69-72. Perryoun, F. J., 1957. Sedimentary Rocks, 2nd ed. N.Y., Harper, 1957. 715 pp. Space, R. C., and Camrana, B., 1953. The Age and Facies of the Kanmuntov Group. Aust, J. Sci., 16 (1), pp, 12-14. Semoc, H.C, Wurirren, A. W. G., and Campana, B., £951. Guological Atlas of South Aus tralia, Sheet Adelaide, Geol. Surv, S. Aust. Semce, A. C., and Watson, B., 1954. Geologieal Atlas of Sonth Australia, Sheat Kchuaga Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Trontson, B. P., and Crawrorn, A. H., 1958. Geological Atlas of South Australia, Sheet Encounter. Geol. Surv, S. Aust,, unpublished, A WIDESPREAD PLIOCENE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA. BY N. H. LUDBROOK Summary A shallow water molluscan fauna with large pelecypods including Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) is described from transgressive Pliocene sediments occurring from Fishery Bay on Eyre Peninsula to Moorlands in the Murray Basin. A WIDESPREAD PLIOCENE MOLLUSCAN FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA. by N. H. Lupsroox* [Read 11 September 1958] SUMMARY A shallow water molluseun fanna with large pelecypods including Ana- dontia sphéricula (Basedow) is described trom transgressive Pliocene sediments occurring from Fishery Bay on Eyre Peninsula to Moorlands in the Murray Basin. INTRODUCTION At widely separated localities in South Australia, thin, apparently syn- chronous Pliocene limestones and sandstones carry a fauna characterized by an abundance of large pelecypods. The most conspicuous and interesting is a large globular shell the size of a flattened tennis hall, casts of which readily weather out. from the limestones. These globular casts have been variously known as Dosinia greyi Zittel and Meretrix sphericula Basedow, but the adductor impres- stons ae the pallial line are those of the Lucinidae. The only complete speci- men so far recovered consists of a pair of valves recorded by Howchin (1936, p. 7) from the Cowandilla Bore at 470-485 feet. From this specimen it has becn pogeibie to identify the genus Anoedontia to which Basedow’s species should be referred, DISTRIBUTION OF THE FAUNA The molluscan assemblage has been identified from as far west as Fishery Bay on southern Eyre Peninsula to Moorlands in the Murray Basin, Many of the outcrops represent strand lines of the transgressive shallow seas distinguish- ing this part of the Pliocene. Deposition took place in shallow bays, the abun- dance of Pectinidae indicating sandy bottoms and of Ostreidae the existence locally of restricted conditions favourable to the development of thick oyster beds. Not all oyster beds occurring in the Murray Basin were contemporaneous with the present fauna. There has been a tendency to regard those of the western margin of the Basin as belonging to u single unit, but this is not so. The stratigraphic levels at which oyster beds occur still awaits the result of de- tailed mapping and examination of the vertical ranges and associated faunis of the three species which occur in the Loaton Sands and Norwest Bend Forma- tion — Ostrea hyotidoidea, O. sturtiana, and OQ. arenicola. Most of the Pliocene outcrops are very thin, seldom exceeding five feet in thickness, They were deposited in markedly transgressive seas, At both Fisherv Bay and Moorlands the conglomeratic limestones overlap bedrock, of which pebbles up to small boulder size are caught up in the limestone. The probable margins of the sea at this time are indicated in Fig. 1; areas known to have been inundated are shaded. ® Palacontologist, Department of Mines, South Australia; published with the permission uf the Director of Mines, Trans, Roy. Soc. 8, Aust. (1959), Vol. 32. 220 N. H. LUDBROOK On Eyre Peninsula at Fishery Bay, at the south end of Sleaford Bay, 20 miles south-west of Port Lincoln, basement granite pebbles occur in limestone with molluscan moulds and casts of Anodontia sphericula, Vasticardium sub- maculosum, Fulvia tenuicostaia, Miltha hora, Antigona cognaia, Cassis (Hypo- cassis) salisburyensis, all of which have been identified from casts weathered from the matrix. This assemblage is represented in the molluscan fauna of the Dry Creek Sands. The material from Fishery Bay was collected by R. K. Johns. The occurrence in Deep Creek, Hundred of Poynton, 20 miles south-south- west of Whyalla, has been described elsewhere (Miles, 1954, p. 25). wh ‘o ef oh in) & iwunvaten puRING PLIOCENE. @ LOCALITIES WITH PLIOCENE FAUNA, @ DOUBTFULLY GONTEMPORAMEOQUS WITH PRESENT FAUNA, Fig. 1—1l. Fishery Bay; 2. Hd. Poynton; 3. Wallaroo; 4, Hd, Moorowie; 5. Giles Point; 6, Edithburg: 7. Hd. Menzies; 8. Redbanks; 9. Adelaide: 10. Hallett Cove; 11. Aldinga Bay; 12. Tailem Bend; 13. Moorlands; 14. Waikeric. On Yorke Peninsula, Pliocene sandy limestones outcropping on the coast at Edithburg and entered in wells west of Edithburg, were described by Basedow (1901) and correlated with other Pliocene occurrences then regarded as of Miocene age, From the Edithburg material Dr. Basedow described four mol- Jusean species including Meretrix sphericula and Campanile iriseriale. Base- dow’s types and also the type material of Tellina basedowi, which according to Basedow (1901, p. 148) was deposited in the Museum of the University of Adelaide, have disappeared. Recently, Mr. E. J. Carmichael, of Yorketown, has collected assiduously from the Pliocene on his. property on Section 140, Hundred. of Moorowie, where the limestone is burned for lime and underground water is obtained at shallow PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 221 depth at the base of the formation where it rests on Permian till, Mr. Car- michael's interest has greatly helped in replacing some af the Basedow types and in identifying the extent uf the Plivcene in sou Yorke Peninsula. At Edithburg itself 3 feet of Pliocene sandy limestune ciivered by 15 feet of kunkar is exposed at Point de Mole at the foot of the steps leading to the old bathing pool. Limestone blocks with abundant Chlumys ontiaustralis and Spondylus spondyloides are strewn at high tide level, From this locality the neotype of Curdita dennanti was collected by Mr. Carmichacl. Two miles north of Coobowie at Giles Point, Section 319, Hundred of Melville, a three-foot oyster bed in sandstone is exposed above high tide level at the base of low cliffs 27 feet high. Tellina basedowi was re-collected from this exposure. Associated molluscan species are Ostrea arenicola and Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis; the foraminifera include Cribrobulimina palystoma, Triloculina trigonula, Diseorbis dimidiatus, Elphidium adelaidense, LZ, setatum, “Rotalia’ beccarii, and Marginopore vertebralis. The oyster bed is overlain by 92 feet of mottled clayey sandstune with a gravel bed at the base. This is nsually considered though not proven to be of Pleistocene age. From the wall 20 feet below the surface of a well on Section 200, Hundred of Melville. 14 miles west of Edithburg, A. A. Gibson recently collected a sample of sandy limestone with Chlamys enticustralis and Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes, This appears to be the well described by Basedow (1901, pp, 146-7), No Pliocene has been observed north of Giles Point on the eastern side of Yorke Peninsula although some marginal limestones near Kulpara and Clinton lithologically resemble the characteristically sandy limestones of the Pliocene. The limestones at Kulpara and Clinton, however, carry Austrotrilline howehini and locally Lovenia and Menoastychia, they are of Lower Miocene age. On the western side of the Peninsula two exposures are known near Wal- larou, one at Point Hughes 1 mile west-south-vest and a second 2 milés north of the tewn on Section 925, Hundred uf Wallarna, where Pliocene limestone with abundant molluscan moulds and casts was formerly quarried for flux for the smelters, The fauna, identified from latex casts, includes abundant rather small moulds of Anodontie sphericula and Diastoma provisi, with Cucullaen. An interesting exposure of the Pliocene occurs on Kangaroo Island. Lime- stone boulders collected by E, P. O'Driscall on Section 268, Hundred of Men- zies, 11 miles west of Kingscote, cayry abundant Chlamys antiaustralis in asso- ciation with Ostrea, mostly juveniles, *? Cardita sp., Barbatia SDs Cueullaca sp., Chlamys (Hguichtemy) consobrina and Diastoma provisi. Although no basalt was actually seen by Mr. O'Driscoll during his. short visit to the locality, the limestone has been baked by the basalt which occurs to the west of Kingscote, The fauna is consequently poorly preserved, mainly as casts, moulds, and hard- ened shells in reddish and grey limestone. Along the eastern coast of Gulf Si. Vincent the Pliocene occurs discentinu- ously from Aldinga Bay to Adelaide, and the exposures at Aldinga, Hallett Cove and Adelaide have been described by many authors. The sequence in the Dry Creek Sands of the Adelaide Plains Basin is, however, understood only in general terms at present; only one of the molluscan faunas has been deseribed ( Lud- brook, 1954-8) and no zoning of the foraminifera has been undertaken. An exposure of Tertiary beds at Redbanks on the River Light was described hy Howehin (1912) and correlated with rocks of Older Tertiary (“Eocene”) ave elsewhere in South Australia, Some anachronons features of the malluscan species collected from this locality led to the recognition (Ludbrook, 1957, p. 17) of a very thin remnant of Pliocene calcareous sandstone overlying Miocene limestone {Howchin’s Eocene), 222 N. H, LUDBROOK The general features of the occurrence have been adequately deseribed by Howchin, The Tertiary beds consist of from 12 to 15 feet of hard fossiliferous yellow limestone (calcarenite), gritty near the base, carrying the echinoids Lovenia “forbesi T. Woods", Pibularia gregata, and the pelecypods. Lentipecten sp. and Hofrigonia semiundulitu, The associated microfauna contains Amphi- stegina lesson, Calearina verriculata, Notorotalia howchini and species of Gat- dryina, Dorothia, Nonion, Cibicides, and Cassidulina. An echinoid band occurs near the top of the limestone, with abundant Loventa, Monostychia, Fibularia and Lentipecten, together with Kotrigonia semiundulata and Placotrochus. Krosion has considerably obscured the contuct between the top of the echinoid band anc the overlying thin remnant of leached white calcareous sandstone with chalky remains of Glycymeris convexe. Where it is best exposed under Pleis- tocerne mottled clays, the sandstone rests upon poorly fossiliferous Miocene ealcarenite with echinoid spines, sponge spicules, and miliolid foraminifera; else- whicre if may be represented by a coarse grit resting on the echinoid band of the limestone. Howchin (p. 17) noted the rich fossil content af this “thin siliceous layer”, It is obvious Irom the megafossil assemblage that this is not a bed of the anderlying Miocene, but a retmant of the Plincene Dry Creek Sands en- ciuntered in borings in the Adelaide Plains Basin, Qne small, loose boulder frum the echinoid band of the Miocene carries, vertical ta the bedding, a mould of the boring mollusc Pholas on the infilling uf a lube bored into the limestone. An irregular junction betwoon limestone and grit is also visible on the same houlder. The Redbanks exposure probably represents the north-eastern margin of the Plincene sea in this part of the St. Vincent Basin. Although the total exposure is only about § feet Fin and 1 foot thick. the followig molluscan species, some of which are restricted to the Pliocene, have been identified: Nuculuna verconis, Glycymeris converxa, Cucullaea sp., Chlamys antiaustralis, Cardita compte, Miltha hore, Notocallista (Striacallista) sp., Dentalium lofesuleatum, Turvitella. aericula adelaidensis, Diastoma provisi, Thericium ftorri, Polinices substolida, Contes (Floraconus) adelaidae. “Retalia® beccarii is associated with this assemblage. Overlying the Tertiary marine beds are about 40 feét of Pleistocene muttled, mainly red, clays and loam. At Tailem Bend the low cliffs forming the eastern bank of the Murray River are composed of fine caleareuus loosely cohereat sandstone with abundant Mar- einopore vertebralis visihte «m weathered surfaces. In this area the Miocene has been partially or wholly removed by erosion and Pliovene sands rest directly on grey limestone of the Ettrick Formation. 2): miles south of Tailom Bend on the stock route adjacent to Section 321, Hundred of Seymour, well preserved mollusca occur in a bed of Ostrea arenicola 25 feet down the low cliffs. The splendid specimen of Spondylus spondyloides (Pl, 2, Fig. 1) was callected at this locality with Chlamys (C.) antiaustralis, Chlamys (hquichlanys) palmipes. and Afiltha hora. The associated microfauna is similar to that of the Dry Creek Sands. The sample taken on the eastern hank ut Jervois punt contains a shallow water formaminiferal assemblage with Marginopord vertebralis and “Rotalia” bececarii in abundance. in association with Trochammina inflata. Clavulina multi- nurernta, Cribrobulimina polystoma, Quinqueloculina costata, Triloculina tri- sonula, T- tricatinata, Peneroplis pertusus, Discorbis cdimidiatus, Rotorbinelle eycloelypeus. The foraminifera of the oyster bed with Spordylus, 24 miles south of Tailem Bend, include “Rotalia” becearii. with Quinquelocelina costatna, Q, pelyzona, Trilovulina tricarinata, Guttuline irregularis, G. problema, G. regina, Stemoidella elesntissima, §, kagaensis, Discorbis dimidiatus, Rotorbinella cyclo- PLIOCENE FAUNA WITIT ANODONTIA 233 clypeus, Planulinoides biconcava, Planorbulina mediterranensis, [Iphidium adelaidense, E.. rotatum. E. macellum, E, advenum. The Pliocene at Moorlands has been described by McGarry (1953, p. 87). Five species of molhisea occurring in this locality were recorded by Mawson and Chapman (1922, p. 136). Thin, highly fossiliferous sandy and gritty lime- stone with large slate pebbles overlies hedrock on Section 6, Hundred of Sher- lock, on the roadway where it is thinly covered with kunkar, and to the south of the roadway. Anadontia sphericula is abundant, in association with Macoma basedowi, Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina, Diastoma provisi, Barnea tiara, Anapella variabilis, and doubtfully identified Antigona cognata, The distribution of the fauna at these localities is tabulated below. The sandy limestone quarried at Waikerie as a building freestone also con- bei ARR GPnE sphericula and Diastoma provisi with moulds of Polinices and Mytilus. DISTRIBUTION TABLE x a & 3 =] oa FI : a] #| £ IS 4 |< a B18) a | 2 Ios) o | B a 732) R Clew, 6/5) 2 | 2 7 2 s ojo 4] 8 5 S a = a on ~E [-s g os a ai ie |S £| 2 |s"| 2) e|/S] 2 s/f |e) a [s m3) 5 els |= = 2) | Fe ale | a] ie Ale] a = - E. ae 4 paged se at Cucullaea sp. x | x | x | x le | Glyaymeria convera 1 : x Ostrete urenicote { 0 x we | cf | x Chlamys antiaustralis x oO}; x» |x | x | x x Chlamys (Byutehlamys) consabrina x oO] x x | of Ohlamys (Equichlamys) polmipes | x OC | aes) ese | cof Chlamys (Bquicklamys) subbifrons 3 x 0 Spondylus snandyloides 7 x | |] x | x Glans deroreuente | ) Anouantia sphericula x x x x! O | x | x Antigona cognata x Dosinin (Phoeosomna) edithburgerisis | 1 0 Luciolina alihingae | ) Mucome busedoun. x ; | 0 Anapella variubilés x 0 | x ’ ree | Diastona Prats x 1 & x 0 | » x x Cumprinile triseriale x x x | 0 | 0 Type locality x Occurrence noted. SYSTEMATIC DESCRIPTIONS Family PECTINIDAL Genus Canamys Réding, 1798 Subgenus Crnamys s, str, Chlamys (Chlamys) antiaustralis (Tate) Synonymy: Ludbrook, 1955, p. 30. Observations—The species was well figured by Gatliff and Singleton (1930, pl. 2, fig. 3; pl. 3, figs. 6, 7; pl. 4, fiz. 10). It occurs commonly in calcareous sand- stones carrying the present fauna. 224 N. H. LUDBROOK Subgenus Equrcuiamys Iredale, 1929 Type species (a.d.) Pecten bifrons Lamarck Group of Chlamys (Equichlamys) bifrons (Lamarck) Three species described by Tate, Pecten consobrinus, P. subbifrons and P. palmipes, are each morphologically close to variants of the living Chiamys ( Equicklamys) bifrons, the type of which is in the Lamarck Collection in the Museum of Natural History, Geneya. These either represent allopatric popu- lations of a single Pliocene species or are Pliocene subspecies of a single polytypic species of which hifrons is the living South Australian representative. The amount at material available is, however, too limited for satisfactory compara- tive study. Chlamys (Equichlamys) subbifrons (Tate) pl. 1, fie, 1 Pevten subhifrons Tate, 1882, p, 44; 1886, p. 104, pl. 3, fy, 2. Diagnosis—A rather small Equichlamys with 12 square-cut bifid ribs equal to the interspaces, cut into riblets in the early stages by a median groove and into 4 or 5 riblets by dichotomous grooves towards the ventral margin. Main inter- spaces and rib grooves shagreencd, Deseription—The holotype figured by Tate is a juvenile right valve, narrower than the adult. Shell of small to medium size, weakly inflated, height (in the juvenile) yreater than the length, auterior-dorsal and posterior-dorsal margin slightly concave, ears large, unequal, posterior ear triangular, with 5 rays with shagreen interspaces; anterior ear larger, upper margin directed slightly upwards, lower margin with a broad but not very deep byssal notch, 6 rays, the upper bifid and much broader than the rest which are divided by one or two grooves, interspaces shagreen. Main shell sculpture of 12 square-cut ribs, equal to the interspaces. Ribs cut into riblets by onc increasing to three square-cut grooves towards the ventral margin. Riblets more or less granular, about 13 granules in 10 mm. Grooves shagreen. Interspaces between main ribs shagreen with a secondary riblet de- veloping by intercalation. Valve margin squarely undulating, Dimensions—Height 30, lenvth 28 mm. Type Locality—Pliocene, “Government Mouse Quarry”, Adelaide, Location of Holotype—Tate Musenm Collection, University of Adelaide, T 959A, Material—The holotype and 4 paratypes, Adelaide. Observations—The holotype is an ornamented phase of the species. The granules are not always present on the ribs which in juvenile paratype D are shagreened over. Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina (Tate) pl. 1, fig. 2 Synonymy: Ludbrook, 1955, p. 31. Diagnosis—A fairly large Equichlamys with about 8 low radial folds. Falds and interspaces covered with narrow radial riblets increasing by intercalation to about 100 in the adult: Interspaces shagrecn. Description—Holotype left valve, Shell not fully grown, of medium size, maderately inflated, height equal to length, equilateral, anterior-dorsal and pos- terior-dorsal margins concave, ears large, unequal. anterior ear triangular, with PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 235 10 narrow radial riblets separated by broader shagreened interspaces, posterior eat subtriangular, carrying narrow radial riblets, outer margin broken but apparently very gently sigmoidal, upper margin straight. ; Shell with 8 low folds strongest at the middle and almost obsolete anteriorly and posteriorly, both fulds and interspaces carrying 3 or 4 flat, slightly granular tihs with shagreened interspaces a little wider than the ribs. Valve: margin very gently undulating, Dimensions— Height 67, length 67 mm. Type Locality—Pliocene, Aldinga Bay. Location. of Holofype—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, T 9378. Material—The holotype. one paratype (adult 85 x 85 mm,), 5 topotype fragments; wne yourly preserved specimen in limestune, Moorlands, Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate) pl. 1, figs, 3-6 Pecten palmipey Tate, 1886, p. 105, pl. 5, fig. 4; pl. 7, figs. 4a-db. Diugnosis—A fairly large Equichlamys with 9 strong broad ribs on the right valve and § narrow elevated ribs on the left valve, ribs and interspaces covered with Hat, square-cut riblets up to 15 on each rib on the right valve. Interspaces shagreened. !leight greater than length, Dorsal margins conspicuously concave. Description—Lectotype, Shell fairly large, roundly triangular, incquilateral, slightly incquivalve, higher than long, anterior-dorsal margin shorter than pos- terior-dorsal, but both relatively short, coucayve, ventral margin strongly convex. Kars large, unequal. Right valve with 9 strong broad subrectangular ribs with U-shaped inter- spaces. The ribs in the median part of the shell are straight and radial, but both anteriorly and posteriorly they become increasingly concave. The two horder- ing the dorsal margins are separated from the adjacent ribs by a narrow inter- space, which varies in intensity in individual specimens, It seems, therefore, a matter of individual preference as to whether the valve is regarded as having 7 (Tate, 1886) or 9 ribs, Ribs broadening and fattening ventrally. Interspaces shagreened. Fars unequal. Posterior ear triangular, outer margin slightly in- clined to the vertical, with 11 radiating riblets yrooved towards toe. wniBo, An- terior larger, upper margin directed slightly upwards, outer margin convex, lower margin with a broad shallow byssal notch. Left valve rather flattened im the mumbonal region, anterior dorsal margin shorter than posterior, concave; posterior-dorsal margin concave; ventral margin roundly convex, profile narrowly undulating. Valve with 8 narrow inverted U- shaped ribs with deep interspuces twice as wide as ribs which widen and flatten ventrally, Ribs and interspaces currying riblets developing by intercalation from ahout 3 per rib in the middle of the shell to about 7 at the ventral margin. Interspaces between ribs and riblets shagreened. Ears unequal. Anterior larger than posterior, triangular with 5 primary and radiating riblets with a secondary riblet developing in each interspace; posterior subtriangular, upper margin sloping downwards, outer margin meeting it at 115°, Dimensions--Height 75, length 72, inflation (beth valves) 27 mm. Type. Locality—Pliocene, Edithbureg. Location of Lectotype-—-Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, 2A, 226 N. H. LUDBROOK Material—The lectotype and paratype T932B, both complete specimens except for damage to posterior-ventral margin of holotype. One complete javenile with smooth ribs and 4 valves, Tailem Bend; 1 valve in limestone with Chlamys antiaustralis, well at 20 feet, Section 200, Hundred of Melville, 1% miles west of Editlhburg. Observations—Tate’s description was based on two specimens, both of which were figured. The larger T 932A (figured 1886, pl. 7, figs. 4a-4b), of which Tate gave the approximate dimensions, is. chosen as lectotype. Family SPONDYLIDAE Genus SpoxpyLus Linné, 1758 Spondylus. spondyloides (‘l'ate) pl. 2, fif. 1 Synonymy: Ludbrook, 1955, p. 34. The magnificent specimen (pl. 2, fig. 1) Tate Mus. Coll. F 15470, with both valves intact was collected south of Tailem Bend in calcareous partially coherent sandstone, Family CARDITIDAE Genus Gians Megerle, 1811 Type species (monotypy) Glans trapezia = Venus trapezia Linné Glans dennanti (Tate aud Basedow) pl. 2, fivs. 2, 3 Cardita dennanti Tate and Basedow, 1902, p, 132, pl 2, fig, 4. Diagnosis—A subtrapezoidal inflated Glans with about 20 rather broad nodulose ribs, S Deseription—Nevtype. A single right valve of moderate size, broadly sub- trapezoidal in outline, strongly inflated, solid. Umbo prominent, inflated, strong]: prosogyrous, situated at one-third from the anterior margin. Lunule small, cordate, escutcheon well defined. Anterior-dorsal margin almost straight, an- terior margin arcnate, posterior-dorsal margin gently convex, posterior margin obscured by matrix, ventral margin gently convex. Sculpture of about 20 broad nodulose ribs wider than the interspaces. Ribs and interspaces crossed by irre- gular growth lines. Inner valve margin coarsely crenulate. Hinge fairly broad, damaged, but showing a strong, high, prominent, triangular 3b. Dimensions—Ieight 23, length 24, inflation (une valve), 10 mm, Location of Neotype—S:A. Muscum No, P 12657. Type Locality—De Mole Point, Edithburg, Material—The neotype only. Although the dimensions are greater, the speci- men collected by Mr, E. J. Carmichael from Point de Mole is so like the figure of the holotype that there can be no hesitation im selecting it as the neotype. Family LUCINIDAE ‘Genus ANononTrA Link, 1807 Anodontia Link, 1807, p. 156, ( Loripinus Monterosato, 1883, p, 91). (Kophysemu Stewart, 1930. pp. 37, 186; non Anedontia Stewart, 1930, p. 179. Anodontia Link, 1807, Eames, 1951a, Type species (monotypy) Anodontia alba Link = “Venus” edentula Linné ie st PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) pl. 3. figs. 1, 2, 3: pl. 5, figs, 1, 4 Meretrix arasiul, Basedow, 1902, p, 13], pl 2, fiz, 2; Wewchin, 1935, pp. $4, 39 1936, pp, , Diagnosis—A large glohose Anodontia, thin shelled, sculptured with irregu- lar growth lines about } mm. apart, with very fine secondary threads between. Hinge edentulous, anterior adductor well within pallial line, rectangular, about 20 mm. * 6 mm., posterior adductor subtriangular, about 10 x 10 * 15 mm, Description—Shell large, thin, transversely orbicular, strongly inflated, sculp- tured with fine distinct accremental ridges a botik 1 mm. apart in the middle of the shell with fine secondary irregular microscopic threads between them and Hany fine short microscopic radial striae discernible on some portions of the adult Strett, Anterior area narrow, marked externally by a slight interruption of the con- centric ridges which fold over on a slight nmbo-ventval furrow. Posterior area muruw, less conspicuous than anterior area but similarly separated from the main part of the shell by a slight depression from the umbo to the posterior ventral edge. Umbo small, smooth, sharp, not prominent, prasogyrous, situated anteriorly in the ratio 26:37. Anboriog vee margin almost straight, directed slightly upwards, meeling the anterior end in a broad curve. Posterior-dorsa! margin relatively Jong and gently convex; gently descendent towards the posterior, inceting the posterior murgin at x rounded obtuse angle. Ventral margin strongly convex. Hinge edentulons, ligament long, uarrow, bounded by a ridge. Anterior adductor long, rectangular, within the pallial line and diverging from it at un angle of about 20 degrees over three-quarters of its length, 21 mm. lony, 6 mm. wide in the Cowandilla hypotype, Posterior addnctor snbtriangular, pointed dorsally with straight sides each 10 mm. long, ventral side convex towards the ventral margin, about 15 mm, long. There is a conspicuous umho-ventral ridge bardering the inner side of the posterior adductor and a less conspicuous furrow extending from the inner margin of the anterior adductor in a broad sigmoid curve towards the posterior end of the hinge at the top of the pedal retractor. Pallial line simple, area outside pallial line smooth, inside granular, Dimensions—Neotype height 72, length 82, inflation (cast, both valves, 47). Ilypotype, Cowandilla Bore, height 57, length 63, inflation (both valves) 31 mm. Type Localtiy—Edithburg, Location of Types—South Australian Museum, Neotype P 12658; Ilypotype, Moorowie, P 12659; Hypotype, Cowandilla Bore, 470-485 feet, Tate Mus. Cuall., University of Adelaide, F 15471. Material-The neotypé and 2 topatypes collected from Edithburg in the Hawchin Collection, S.A. Museum, | specimen 305 from Giles Point in collec- tion of E. J. Carmichael, 9 specimens, Hundred Moorowie, Section 140, E. J. Carmichael Collection. 4 casts Wallaroo, 2 casts Aldinga, 2 casts Moorlands, 3 casts Fishery Bay; 17 fragments Cowandilla Bore, 1 valve Bore, Hundred of Munno Para, Section 4251, S.A. Mines Department Collection; Hypotype F 15471 placed in Tate Collection. Olbservations—The whereabouts of the helotype are not known, but there hus been no difficulty in finding specimens tn replace it, The hypotype fram Hundred of Mosorowie is a large example, partly decorticated but with a fair amount of the outer shell layer still remaining. 22 adult specimens were mea- 224 N. H. LUDBROOK sured, the average dimensions of which were height 64 mm., length 71 mm., inflation 43 mm., umbo-anterior 29 mm., umbo-posterior 42 mm., ratio height: length 0-901, ratio umbe-posterior-:nmbo-anterior 1:44, In the adult the height: length ratio varies fram 0-90 to 0-95, in the juvenile from 0-50 to 0-95; in the adult the position of the umbo is more central in the ratio UP; UA is 1-23:] 63; in the juvenile the ratio UP:UA is 1-00:1-61. Large globular casts of this species are very common in the limestunes, With the removal of the shells by solution, the casts readily weather out. Casts appear to be similar to those of Anodontia pharaonis (Bellardi) occurring in the Eocene from Spain to India (Cox, 1936, p. 32; Eames, 195lb, pp. 390-2). A. philippiana (Reeve) from North Queensland is a close living relative. The species, or one very close to it, also occurs in the Pleistocene sandy limestones af the Eyre (Roe) Plain south of the Hampton Scarp in the Enela Basin. Furnily DOSINILDAR Genus Dosixts Seopoli, 1777 Type species (manolypy) Chama dusin Adanson = Venus concentrica Bort Subgenus Prracosema Jukes-Brown, 1912 Type species (o.d.) Artemis japonica Reeve Dosinia (Phacosoma) edithburgensis sp. nov. pl 3, fia, 4 Dosinta grayii Zittol, Baseduw, 1901, p. 147 (non Zittel). Diagnosis—A. fairly large suborbicular Phacosoma, moderately thin-shelled, sculptured with fine, erect ridges about 2 mm. apart, with about 8 fine striae on the interspaces and ridges. Pallial sinus deep, triangular, with apex about the middle of the median umbo-ventral line. Description (Holatype)—Shell large, suborbicular, umbos inflated, promi- nent strongly prosogyrous, lunule deeply impressed, somewhat sagittate. Escutcheon narrow, deep. Sculpture on adult portion of shell consists of narrow concentric ridges about 2 mm, apart with finely striated interspaces. Hinge plate moderately narrow, partly obscured by matrix. Hinge of right valve with long, narrow, high grooved posterior cardinal, a prominent bevelled median cardinal and a narrowly triangular entire anterior cardinal. Anterior lateral portion of hinge obscured. Pallial sinus not visible in holotype. Dimensions of Holotype—Height 66, length 65, inflation (both valves) ap- proximately 34 mr. Paratype—Internal cast with a good deal of the original shell. Part of the pallial sinus visible, broadly triangular, deop, inclined, with apex directed to- wards the anterior cnd of the hinge at the probable position of the anterior ad- ducter; apex at about the middle of the median umbho-ventral line. Type Locality—Edithburg, Pliocene. Loeation of Types—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, Holo type F 15467, Paratype F 15468. Obsercations—This is one of the shells recorded by Tate as Dosinia grayii Zittel. It is a larger shell with only a superficial resemblance to D. ( Kereia} greyi Zittel from New Zealand and has not so far been collected from any other locality than Edithburg. Two specimens in the Tate Collection from “Miocene, Gippsland Lakes*—probably Jemmy's Point Formation (Pliocenc)—appear to be long to Kereix, although the hinge is obscured. They are somewhat similar PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 229 ta but not conspecific with greyi, Marwick (1926, p. 570) has noted that the Japanese subgenus Phacosome is not known tu occur in New Zealand before the Lower Pliocene. Family TELLINIDAE Genus Macoma Leach, 1819 Type species (monotypy) Macoma tenera Leach = Tellina calcarea V.inné Macoma basedowi (Tate) pl. 4, figs. 3, 4 Tellina basedowi Tate in Basedow, 1901, p, 148, pl. 3. Diagnosis—A fairly large suborbicular-triangular Macoma with slightly irre- gular concentric lamellae up to about 1 mm. apart and faint radial striae visible in oblique light. Deseription—Interior cast and portion of right valve selected as neotype. Shell of moderately large size, suborbicular-triangular, probably tairly solid, sub- equilateral, gently Inflated, Umbos prohably small, antemedian. Anterior- dorsal margin nearly straight, gently sloping; posterior-dorsal margin longer, gently arcuate, more steeply sloping. Anterior margin roundly arcuate, pos- terior margin more narrowly arcuate, Ventral margin roundly convex. Scnlpture of sharp concentric lamcllae widely spaced and gencrally about 6 in 4 mm., the interspaces crossed by numerous faint radial striae. Pallial sinus widely rhombic, apex at about the posterior one-third. Dimensions (internal cast)—Height 32, length 36, inflation 15 mm. Type Locality--Giles Point, near Edithburg. Location of Neotype—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, V’ 15469. Material—The neotype and 2 topotypes, Giles Point, 2 miles north of Coo- bowie; 4 specimens Moorlands, Section 6, Hundred of Sherlock. Observations—The species appears to have features in common with Tellina pitatica Hedley, 1918, collected by Basedow in the Buccaneer Archipelago. The pallial sinus is similar in shape to that of piratica. Genus LactoLtina Iredale, 1937 Type species (o.d.) Tellina quoyi Sowerhy Laciolina aldingae sp. nov. pl. 3, fg. 4 Telling lato Tate, 1887, p. 164, non Quoy ond Gaimard. Diagnasis—A large Laciolina with conspicuous concentric sculpture cunsist- ing of crowded siriac on the outer layer, the inner layer and shell interior with broad concentric ribs about 2 mm. apart. Anterior margin rounded, posterior- ventral margin rostrate with fairly strong flexure. Description—Shell large, subelliptical-subtriangular, only moderately inflated. Umbos small, snbmedian. Anterior of shell broken in holotype, posterior dorsal margin apparently straight, fairly steeply descending, posterior end produced, rostrate, strongly flexed, ventral margin convex. Sculpture on surface layer on undecorticated portion of valve vonsisting of fine irregular crowded concentric striae about 4 per mm. Decorticated she with broad rounded concentric ribs about 2 mm. apart on median part of shell. Pallial line only partly visible, pallial sinus not known. 230 N. H. LUDBROOK Paratype an internal cast showing anterior margin; anterior-dorsal margin steoply sloping, anterior end narrowly rounded. Dimensions—Holotype: Length (estimated) 125, height 75, inflation 28 mum, Material—The holotype and two paratypes, | doubtful topotype. Type Locality—Aldinga Bay, Pliocene, Location of Types~Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, holo- type T 1210A, paratypes T 1210B, 1210C. Observations—Tate (1587) referred the Aldinga specimens to the Recent “Tellina lata Quoy and Gaimard” on description and figures. A splendid series of the Tellina lata Q. and G. group has been generously made available on Joan from the Australian Museum; Lacioliia quoyi (Sowerby) (? = Tellina lata Q. and G.) C 15874 Hargraves Collection, from New Caledonia; Laciolina ehloro- leuca (Lamarck) C 15873 Hargraves Collection, New Caledonia; Laciolina quoyi ? attracta Tredale C 62322, Heron Island, Queensland; Laciolina quoyi attracta Iredale Paratype C 62323 Lord Howe Island; Laciolina francesae Iredale Paratype © 59874 Roy Bell Collection, Norfolk Island. From these it is clear that the Aldinga Pliocene species is distinct both in its dissimilar sculpture and in the strongly rostrate posterior margin. The state of preservation of the fossil renders the generic location a \Ittle doubtful. The low. rather narrow pallial sinus of Laciolina is not confirmed, Family MACTRIDAE Genus ANAPELLA Dall, 1895 Type species (o.d.) Anapa triqueta Hanley Anapella variabilis (Tate) pl. 4, figs. 5,6 Anapu variabilie Tate, 1887, p. 172, pl. 17, figs. 5a-Sh. Anapella ucriabilis Tate, Ludbrook, 1955, p. 76 (synenyuy), Diagnosis—A small rather tumid subtrigonal Anapella with a rather narrow hinge. Description—Uolotype, left valve. Shell small for the genus, tumid, sub- trigonal, inequilateral, thin but solid, umbo inflated, prosogyrous, anterior margin moderately narrowly arcuate, posterior dorsal margin longer than anterior dorsal margin, Anterior dorsal margin incurved near the umbo. Surface sculpture with fine growth ridges about J mm, apart near the umbo but increasing to about 4 per mm. towards the ventral border, Fine striae about 7 per mm. in the inter- spaces. Hinge with a deep triangular resilifer. Dorsal tnargin deeply and narrowly notched under the umbo by the resilium. A grooved, oblique, narrowly triangular anterior cardinal bordering the resilifer with a small secondary denticle overhanying the resilifer at the top of the anterior cardinal. Both anterior and posterior laterals long and thin. Anterior adductor moderately large, subovate, near the anterior-ventral margin, posterior adductor subovate at the posterior end of the hinge; pallial line simple. Dimensions—Length 17-5, height 13-5. inflation (left valve) 6-5 mm. Type Locality—Blanche Point, Aldinga Bay, Pliocene. Location of Types—Tate Museum Collection, University of Adelaide, Holo- type T 1209A, Paratvpes T1209. PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA Sul Material—Holotype and 13 paratypes on Tate's original tablet; external moulds. on limestone, identified from latex casts, Moorlands; specimens from Adelaide Plains Basin Government Bore No. 20, Woodville South, 362-380 feer associated with a larger species of Andpella (? pinguis Crosse and Fischer), and a megafauna distinct from that described by the writer from the Dry Creek Sands. Class GASTROPODA Family CERITHIIDAK, Subfamily Campaniuinar Genus Campanite Bayle, 1884 Type species (s.d. Crossman, 1906) Cerithium giganteum Lamarck Campanile triseriale Basedow pl. 5, figs, 2.3, 4 Campanile triseriale Basedow, 1902, p. 130, pl. 2, fig. 1, Diagnosis—A. Campanile of normal size for the genns, sculptured with three rows of tubercles the adapical row axial. coarse, usually about 4 in 5 mm., separ- ated by interspaces of the same size, median row narrow, set on a narrow cord mm, wide, about 7 in 5 mm., adapertural row oblique, on a rib about 1 mm, wide, 6 tubercles per mm. Desvription—Neotype. The neotype has been selected from the Howchin Collection in the South Australian Museum. It is a broken specimen tightly embedded in limestone with nine adult whorls only the posteriur of which is visible externally. The original description and figure given hy Basedaw are consistent with the neotype, the estimated dimensions of which are height 130 mm., diameter 40 mm, Hypotype. Mould in limestone, north side of Aldinga Bay, south of Blanche Point described from latex cast. Shell large, isostrophic, multispiral, turriculate. Early whorls (about 15) missing, 17 whorls remaining in a height of 90 mm, Whorls narrow, flat regularly sculptured with 3 rows of tubercles, the adapical row broud, one-third width of whorl, with broad tubercles 3 in 3 mm, in the last whorl, separated by approximately equal interspaces, median row of tubercles ou 4 narrow, well-defmed cord, about 1 min. apart, adapertural row bordering the suture, with oblique tubercles about 4 in 5 mm. in the last three whorls. Location of Types—Neotype, South Australian Museum, No. P 12660, Hypo- type, South Australian Museum, No. P 12661. Type Locality—Edithburg, Plioeenc. Observations—Seven good specimeiis of the original shells of this species aro in the South Australian Museum with the locality label “Bore”. The preser- vation leaves little doubt that the shells are from the Dry Creek Sands of the Adelaide Plains Basin. It is unfortunate that the locality has not been recorded as these are the only well preserved specimens showing the carly part of the shell so far obtained; they are also the only record of the species from the Dry Creek Sands, In the early whorls a narrow somewhat irregular cord occurs between the adapertural row of tubercles and the suture; this cord is gradually engulfed and tlisappears on later whorls. The aperture is obliquely rhomboid, siphonal canal strongly retroflexed, Associated Species—Associatcd with the pelecypoda and one gastropod de- sevibed above are several species the synonymy and descriptions of which have heen published previously. These are included in the distribution table, 232 N, H, LUDBROOK ACKNOWLEDGMENTS 1 am indebted te Messrs, F, P, O'Driscoll, R. K. Johns and A. A. Gibson of the Geological Survey of South Australia for collecting material and tu Mr. E. J. Carmichael, of Yorkctawn, for the loan and donation of material, to Dr. D, MeMichael, of the Australian Museum, Dr. B, Daily, of the South Australian Museum, and Miss Mary Wade, of the University of Adelaide, for the loan of specimens, and to Miss Basedow, sister of the late Dr. Bascdow, fur assistance in endeavouring te trace Dr. Basedow’s types, The illustrations are the work of Miss G, E. Num, Assistant in the Palaeon- tology Section, Geological Survey of South Australia, The photographs, Plate 5, were kindly supplied by the South Australian Muscum. REFERENCES Basenow, H., 1901, On the Occurrence of Miocene Limestones at Edithburg and their Biratiaranliienl Relationship to the Kocene of Wool Bay, with Description of a New Specics by Prof. R. Tate. Trans. Roy. Svc. S, Aust., 25 (3) , pp. 145-148, pl. 3. Rasevow, H., 1902. Descriptions of New Species of Fossil Mollusca from the Miocene Lime~ stone near Edithburg. ‘rans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust., 26 (2), pp, 130-132, pl. 2. Cox, L, R., 1936. Fossil Mollusea from Southern Persia (Iran) and Bahrein Island. Mem. Geol. Sury, India, Pal. Ind. ns. vol, 22, Mem. 2, 69 pp,, 8 pls. Eames, F. E., 195la. The Type Species of Anudondia Link, 1807. Proce. Maluc. Soc. Lamd., 28 (6), pp. 232-233. Bames, F. B., 1951b. A Contribution to the Study of the Eovene of Western Pakistan and Eastern India. B. The Description of the Lamellibranchia from Standard Sections in the Rakhi Nala and Zinda Pir Areas of the Western Punjab and in the Kohal District. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc. Lond., Ser. B. Biol. Sei. 627, vol. 285, pp. 311-482, pls. 9-17. Ganuter, J. H., and Smvcteton, F. A., 1930, On the Relationship of “Pecten” asperrimus Lamarck and “Pecten” antigustralis Tate, with a Description of an Allied Fossil Parm- Prne. Roy. Soc. Vic, 42 (2) (ms.), pp. 71-77, pls. 2-4, ‘ Hepiey, C., 1918. Molluscs, in Basedow, H. Narrative of an Expendition of Exploration in Narth-Western Australia, Trans, Roy, Geog, Soc. Aust. ‘S.A. Branch, 18, 1916-1917, pp. 263-283, Text fig, 1, pl 41. Howcnm, W., 1912. On an ontlier of Older Cainoxoic Rucks in the River Light near Mal- lula. Trans. Roy. Sov. $, Aust,, 36, pp. 14-20, pl. 1. Howctuin, W., 1935. Notes on the Geological Sections obtained by several Borings: sitnated on the Plain between Adulaide and Gulf St. Vinesat, Part trans, Koy. Sov. 5, Aust. 59, pp. 68-102, Howcets, W., 1936. Tdem, Part 2--Cowandilla (Government) Bore. Trans, Roy. Suc, §, Anst., 60, pp. 1-34. Inepace, ‘J, 1937. Middleton and Elizabeth Reefs, South Pacific Qeean. Anst Zunl., 8 (4), pp, 232-261, pls. 15-17. Lauvwroox, N. H., 1954-1958. The Molluscan Fauna of the Pliocene Strata onderlying the Adelaide Plains, Pt, 1, 1954, Trans. Roy. Suc. $.A,, 77, pp. 42-64, pt. 2, 1955, fd, 738, pp. 18-87, pls. 1-6; pt, 3, 1956, id., 79, pp. 1-36, pls, 1-25 pl, 4, 1957, id., 80, pp. 17-58, ple. [-4; pt. 5, 1958, id., 81, pp. 43-111, pls. 1-6. BanyICh Ja ra The Vencridac of New Zealand. Trans. NZ. Inst.. ST. pp. 567-636, pls. 35-54, Mawson, D., and Crarman, F., 1922; The Tertiary Brawn-Coul Bearing Beds of Moorlands, Trans. Roy, Soc. S$. Aust., 46, po, 131-147, MrGaury, D. f., 1953. Geology of the Moorlands Brown-Coal Field. 5S. Aust. Dept. Mines, Min. Rev,, 94, pp. 82-90, Mites. K. R., 1954. The Geology and Iren Ore Resourees of the Middluback Range Ares. Guol, Surv, S, Aust, Bull. 33. Srawany, R. B. 1930, Gabb’s California Creticeous and Tertiary Type Lamellibranchs, Avad, Nat. Sci, Philad. Spec. Pub. 3. : Yar, R., 1882. Diagnoses of New Species of Miocene Fossils from South Australia. Trans. Roy. Sac. S, Aust., 5, pp. 44-46. ° Tare, B.. 1886. The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia, Part 1, ‘Trans. Hoy. Soc. §. Aust., 8, pp. 96-158, pls. 2-12, Yare, 4., 1887, The Lamellibranchs of the Older Tertiary of Australia, Part 2. Trans. Hey. Soe. S, Aust., 9, pp. 142-200, pls. 14-20, Fig. Fig, Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Vig. Fig, Fig, Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig. Fig, Fig. Fig. PLIOCENE FAUNA WITH ANODONTIA 233 EXPLANATION OF PLATES PLATE 1 1.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) subbifrans (Tate). Holotype, T 959A, x 2. 2.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) consobrina (Tate). Holotype. T 937B, x 0-75. 3.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate). Lectotype, T 932A, left valve, x 0-73. 4—Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate). Lectotype, T 932A, right valve, x 0-73. 5.—Chlamys (Equichlamys) palmipes (Tate). Juvenile, Tailem Band, left valve, x2. Mines Dept. Coll, 6—Chlamys (Equichlumys) palmipes (Tate). Juvenile, Tailem Bend, right valve, x2, Mines Dept. Coll, PLATE 2 1.—Spondylus spondyloides (Tate). F 15470, x1. 2,—Glans dennanti (Tate and Basedow). Neotype, S.A. Mus. P 12657, x2. 3.—Glans dennanti (Tate and Basedow). Neotype, S.A. Mus. P 12657, x 2, 4.—Laciolina aldingae Ludbrook, sp. nov. Holotype, T 1210A, x 1. PLATE 3 1.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) Hypotype, F 15471, left valve, x1. 2.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) Hypotype, F 15471, right valve. x 1. 3.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow) Hypotype, F 15471, exterior, x 1. 4.—Dosinia (Phacosoma) edithburgensis Ludbrook sp. noy., Holotype, F 15467, x 0-85. 5.—Dosinia (Phacosoma) edithburgensis Ludbrook sp, nov., Holotype, F 15467, x 0-85, PLATE 4 1.—Ostrea arenicola Tate. Tailem Bend. S.A. Mines Dept., F 196/58, left valve, x 0-75. 2.—Ostrea arenicola Tate. Tailem Bend, S.A. Mines Dept., F 196/58, right valve, x 0-73. 3.—Macoma basedowi (Tate). Neotype, F 15469, x 1:5. 4.—Macoma basedowi (Tate), Neotype, F 15469, x 1-5, 5.—Anapella variabilis (Tate). Holotype, T 1209A, x 3-7. 6.—Anapella variabilis (Tate). Holotype, T 1209A, x 3-7. PLATE 5 1.—Anodontia sphericula (Basedow). Neotype, Edithburg. S.A. Mus., P 12658, x 1, 2.—Campanile triseriale Basedow. Latex cast of hypotype, P 12661, x 1. 3.—Campanile triseriale Baseclow. Neotype, Edithburg. S.A. Mus,, P 12660, x I, 4.—Cast of Anodontia sphericula and mould of Campunile triseriale hypotype, in lime- stone, Aldinga Bay. S.A. Mus., P 12661, x 1. (All photographs by courtesy of S.A. Museum.) Pate 1 LL Lupsreok N. N. H. Lupsrook PLATE 2 N, H, Luppsrook PLATE 3 N. H, Lupsprook PLATE 4 H! - N, LL Lupinoox Pure 5 THE CORRELATION BETWEEN SALINITY AND RIVER FLOW IN THE ALICE SPRINGS TOWN WATER SUPPLY BY B. R. JEPHCOTT Summary The results of an investigation into the relationship between recharge of the Alice Springs basin and the salt content of the town water supply are presented. THE CORRELATION BETWEEN SALINITY AND RIVER FLOW IN THE ALICE SPRINGS TOWN WATER SUPPLY by B, R. Jercorr® communicated by T. N. Lorman [Read 9 October 1958] SUMMARY The results of an investigation into the relationship between recharge of the ad Springs basin and the salt content of the town water supply are pre- sented. INTRODUCTION Alice Springs is nestled in the heart of the Macdonnell Ranges and is com- pletely surrounded by hills. The average annual rainfall is of the order of 10 inches and evaporation is about 100 inches. Hence, knowledge and conserva- tion of water supplies is all important. The water for the town has always been obtained from wells or bores sunk into the porous structure which forms the water-retaining beds underneath the town itself. The basin is recharged by infrequent Cowie of the Todd River. Estimates of the capacity vary from 900,000,000 gallons (Owen, 1954) to 330,000,000 gallons (Jones, 1957), but regardless of this, with a peak summer loading of the order of 3,500,000 gallons per week and a winter loading of about 1,500,000 gallons per week, there is, at the moment, considerable margin for error in estimation of volume since either capacity far exceeds the drain per year. Pumping, at the time of a survey in 1954, was performed at four major points, namely, Town Wells, Army Wells, Bent Tree Well and Todd River Well. Since then, numerous other town supply bores have been opened and there are many private wells or bores which do not feed into the town mains. The depths and pumping rates. of the town wells and bores used for this investigation are given in Table 1 and their positions are indicated on Fig, 1: TABLE 1. Nuine | Depth | Oapacity used. ‘Town Wells (2) | 23°9" | 2,000 gallons per hour ench. No, 1 Army Well 25'4° t 3,000 gallons per hour No. 2 Army Well 277" 6,000 gallons per hour Todd River Well | our 8,000 gallons per hour PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATIONS Owen (1954) performed a survey of the Alice Springs basin and found that the most important additions of water to the storage are made from the river when, and shortly after, it flows. Water also enters the basin from the west at * Chemist, Animal Industry Branch, N.T, Administration. Trans. Roy. Svc. 5. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82. 236 B. R, JEPHCOTT the west corner of the town aerodrome, probably a small quantity from the north-west towards the Railway Station and also from the west near the southern boundary of the town aerodrome. These additions are likely to be more saline than the river water and he considered this point should be checked by analyses of water from the bore used by Connellan Airways. The only early analyses available are those performed by the author in October, 1953. Fig. 1. Map of the Alice Springs area showing the localities of the principal wells supplying water to the town. The dark areas represent stony ranges providing the Jocal watersheds. 1. Todd River Well. 2. A.1.M. Well. 3. Town Wells. 4, Mount Gillen Motel Bore, 5. Bent Tree Well. 6. Army Well No. 1. 7, Army Well No. 2. 8. Heavytree Gap Well. ALICE SPRINGS WATER 237 TABLE 2. 1 2 3 4 Bicarbonate 165 ppm | 110 ppm | 213 ppm | 311 ppm Chlaride 25 30 70 165 Sulphate 1) ig 4n 105 Floride O16 0-08 0-44 O72 Calcium \ 24 20 20 35 Magnesium 14 8 16 tt) Sodium 30 27 91 198 Silica, Ferric anc other oxides 4 4 9 63 Total Salts (parts per million) 276 209 459 897 Total Salts (eraing per gallon) 19-4 44-6 42 63 Where: 1, Todd River Bore. i ® ( Fig. 2, aso 3, Power House Tank, 4. Army Well No- 2. w E | {s a es Fe ee 2 F i | ae Pe: i alia eps SATE ee Co ee 0 ee eter ce ony PPT Te RELATIVE FLOCD VOLUME 3. Town Well 6-in, main, Composition of monthly samples of water fram the Town Wells, The positions of the sources of samples 1, 2, 3 and 4 are shown on Fig, 1. It is interesting to note the increase in salt content to the south. The above results suggested that the Army Well may mark the southern limit of potable water. These observations indicated that a more detailed study would be im- portant. MAIN INVESTIGATIONS Monthly water samples from four sites, Town Wells, Nos, I and 2 Army Wells and Todd River Well, were collected as from September, 1954, Mt. Gillen Motel from August, 1955, and Australian Inland Mission (Lot 75) from April, 238 B. KR. JEPHCOTT MOUNT GILLEN MOTEL 1955 256 ~ 1957 AS OND|J FMA aval HEH [ae | | i JASON Div FM F read alsscevko FOLLAS R 8 ia | | am a Soe 4400 jean 197 | SECC Eas 4,200 /.0090 PP 2 — EE ————————eEE—EE——————————————————— Pine Al | | hE — ~ ok ‘, O 4 J -X Be ~ *, ta I ie) ? Ox 780 mx | | | ena a xo | oe ae et Le |f x 4 | x [eo | = 2 ere 4 “oe Sk ea = ~ o 1) | tl PP pete st | >| Fat =e Ex) | || AA TA | | es 8 S | é ic) 3 Rr che ts ra Ys aoe | kL | 9 i) 100 2 RELATIVE FLOOD VOLUME Fig, 3, Composition of monthly samples of water from the Mount Gillen Motel Bore. ALICE SPRINGS WATER S39 1956, until April, 1957. The results were plotted for 14 different factors, but only eight were finally considered of any significance. All thesc samples were collected as near as possible to the 18th of each. month. The methods used were:— Nitrate: The standard method using Phenoldisulphonic acid (Am. Public Health Assoc., 1955), ARMY WELL No2 en naaa #00 AL PPP Pret woot LI i clot" | merry ith te seaatea fAQ i TH | Nd oH TTT Br UT tt Lt ae i HE 1 Bee lana Saal Gama Conan 30D ® RELVTNE FLOID VOLUME. Fig, 4, Composition of monthly samples of water from Army Well No. 2, — a Fluoride: A modification (Jepheott, 1953) of the method of Huckaby, Welch and Metler (1947) was used. Chloride; Estimated by the universal method of Fr. Mohr. Sulphate: The standard Gravimetric method (Am, Public Health Assoc., 1955) was used, Bicarhonate and Carbonate: Estimated by using selective mixed indicators (Murray, 1954). Sodium and Potassium: Estimated by Flame Photometry, Collins and Polkin- horne (1952), 240 B. R. JEPHCOTT Calcium and Magnesium: Determined by the Schwarzenbach method (1948) as modified by Diehl et al. (1950). Hardness: Determined by the Schwarzenbach method (1946), (1947) and (1948), as modified by Betz and Noll (1950). RESULTS The results are as presented in Figs. 2-7 and are tabulated with one co- ordinate being parts per million salts, and the other being time in months. The mid-position of each of the monthly values coincides with the 18th day of that month. The times of river flow are as shown, and an estimate of the relative strengths of How is mdicated. INTERPRETATION (I). Lag Period. Wilson (1957) observed that the lag period between river How and filtration to the six watering points were us in Table 3. TABLE 3. (1) Todd River Well | Immediate. (2) Town Woll 8-10 days. {3) Army Well No. I | 2 months, {4) Army Well No, 2 33 months, {5) Lot 74 (A.T.M.) | Y divs. (6) Mt, Gillen Motel | A months. However, the following factors make these generally nnreliable: (a) From Fig. 5 (Army Well No. 1) the lay appears more closely to approximate one month than two months, this being especially noticeable in the sodium, bicarbonate, total hardness, and total dissolved solids. (b) From Fig. 4 (Army Well No, 2) the lag would again be nearer one than 3% months. However, the Storm Water drain near No. 2, which has a most irregular How depending on the distribution of the rain, may account for certain very quick responses —e.g., end of February, 1956, especially in the sodium and free alkali levels. (¢) Normally the height of the water table will influence How rate—i.e., a low © table will increase the speed of filtration to a large extent, Unfortunately, this is not obvious in the graphs due to the regular distribution of the river flows and the masking effect of the heaviness of the February, 1956, flow after one of the longer dry spells. (1) The size of the flood on the river bed influences the filtration rate —i,e., a small fow may not even reach the furthest points and the amount of re- charge will be relatively small —e.¢., the medium flow in March, 1955, did not create the magnitude of salinity drop of the two flows in July and August, 1955, the combined flow of which amounts to quite a large factor, especially since the porons structure above the basin would still be quite moist from the first How. All relevant graphs show this marked response after this dual flow, Naturally, the size of the flood is determined by volume which in itself is dependent on duration of How, and speed of flow which is in itself dependent on the head of water. The following observations were made for the period September, 1954, to April, 1957 (Table 4). 241 ALICH SPRINGS WATIER Vanni Fig. 5. Composition of monthly samples of water from Ariay Well Na. 1 RELITVE FLOOD VOLUME olh ee agles 2a0 200 l 100 H 2 abba oo {here | Oo al | pF | Mt Seer “S mite eaaape SzIp i apecbe ert | INT UL | | TRE RELATIVE FEOOD VOLUME Fig. 6. Composition of monthly samples of water from the Todd River Well, 242 B. R. JEPHCOTT is) F a || z |_| |_| | | |_| i Zoo 1 Ve PCH o Fig. 7. Comparison of the analyses for Total Dissolved Solids. for all wells. 2 RELATIVE F003 VOLUME > Fe tt, z 2 , ARMY WELL , No.) : yo ARMY WELL ‘ ' No.2. 2 8 gy \ TOWN t WELLS yo , TODD RIVER WELL 2 ! SA MOVELL 0 4 u MOUNT GILLEN MOTEL ‘ a RELATE FEC Fig, 8, Comparison of the analyses for Floorides for all wells. ALICE SPRINGS WATER 243 TABLE 4, Strength of flow relative Date Strongth of flow to Feb,, 1956 Mid October 1954 Mediu 10%, 7 Mid March 1965 Medium 7 ee Early July 1955 “Tl tay ~ 50%, . Harly August LO54 Very amalll 2.2%), End. February 1058 : 3 Very heavy | 100%, a End June 195 a Very small “2. b) Hence the major effects should be noticed after the How at the end of July to early August, 1955, and the end of February, 1956, and in practice, this is so, especially as already stated in the dual July-August, 1955, flows. (IL). Individual Responses. On first examining the Figs, 2-8 it appears obvious that the responses of chloride, fluoride and sulphate is seldom indicative of river flaw, especially with the No. 1 and No, 2 Army Wells and the Town Wells, Atter the largest flows the fluoride (Fig. 8) in the No. 2 Army Well actually inereased and similarly with No. 1. The response of chloride and sul- phate tollows w most irregular pattern. This then leaves two other ions, namely, sodium and bicarbonate. two other factors partly dependent on bicarbonates, numely, total dissolved solids and free alkali, and the overall picture of total dissolved solids (Fig, 7). Naturally, it is best to examine the uncomplicated facturs first to see if their response is simple and in this, such is the case. Sodium and bicarbonate respond truly if due allowance is made for time lag and flow strength. With bicarbonate, in every case, a response is noted, the most obvious being the Army Wells No, 1 and No. 2 and the Town Wells, Allowing the five-month lag for Mt, Gillen Motel, the fall is quite accurate. Sodium likewise responds to flow in the correct pattern and duplicates the responses of the bicarbonate. The two ions combined must have, in the majority of cases, a greater effect than all other ions slice, apart from isolated cases, the total dissolved solids fall with river flow, CONCLUSIONS In the waters from wells in the Alice Springs basin the most sensitive indi- cators of the basin recharge are sodium and bicarbonate, these two combined having an effect on the total dissolved solids. REFERENCES Amenican Pusurc Heanry Assc., 1935. Standard Methods for Examination of Water, Sew- age and Industrial Wastes, Lt edition. Betz, J. D., and Noun, C, A, 1950, Ain. Water Works Assoc., 42 (1), op. 49°56. Bunxr, G. W., 1926. J- Am. Water Works Assoc., 15, pp. 169-170. Cuamot, E, M., and Pratr, D, $., 1909, J. Am. Chem. Soc., 31, pp, 922-8, Cnamor, E. M,, Puave, D.S., snd Rewrieny, H, W., 1911. J. Am. Chem, Soc., 33, pp. 366-84. Coxuins, GC. C,, aud Porxinhounr, H,, 1952. Analyst, 77, pp. 430-436, Dun, H., Gorry, GC. A., und Hacu, C. C., 1950. Am. Water Works Assoc., 42 (1), pp. 8. 244 B. R. JEPHCOTT Hucxany, W. B., Wexcu, E, T., and Mrtier, A. V., 1957. Anal. Chem., 19, pp. 154-6. Jerncorr, B. R. Unpublished data. Jones, N. O., 1957. Preliminary Report on the Groundwater Reserves of the Alice Springs Area, Bur. Min. Res. Murray, L. R. Personal communication. Owen, H. B., 1954, Report on Geological Investigations of Underground Water Resources at Alice Springs. NT. Adm. SCHWARZENBACH, G., and AcKERMANN, H., 1948. Helv. Chim. Acta., 31, p. 1029. Scuwanzenbacn, G., and AckERMANN, H., 1947. Helv. Chim. Acta., 30, p. 1798. ScuwarzenBacu, G., and BrepeERMANN, W., 1948. Chimia 2, p. 56. SCHWARZENBACH, G., BrepenMANN, W., and BAancerter, F., 1946. Helv. Chim. Acta., 29, p. 811, Tanas, M. J., 1950. Anal. Chem., 22, pp. 961-1072. Wison, T., 1957. Personal communication. PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS IN THE TRIASSIC SUCCESSION OF THE SPRINGFIELD BASIN, GORDON-CRADOCK DISTRICT. BY W. JOHNSON AND M. J. BUCKNELL Summary The field occurrence and petrology of some rocks of igneous appearance occurring at the top of the Triassic succession in the Springfield Basin are described. It is concluded that they are natural slags formed by fusion of argillite and coal ash due to heat from a burning coal seam. Some forceful ejection of the molten slag may have occurred. The peculiar mineralogical association in the slags is due in part to the highly siliceous, lime and magnesia-free, composition of the coal ash and the argillite. PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS IN THE TRIASSIC SUCCESSION OF THE SPRINGFIELD BASIN, GORDON-CRADOCK DISTRICT, by W. Jounson, ann M. J, Buecxnen* [Read 9 October 1958] SUMMARY The field cecurrence and petrology of some rocks of ikneous appearance oceurring at the top of the ‘Iriassie succession in the Springfield Basin are de- seribed. Tt is conchided that they are natural slags formed by fusion of argillite and coal ash due to heat from a burning cowl seain, Some forceful ejevtion of the molten slag may have oceurred. The peculiar mineralogical association in the slags is due in part to the highly siliceous, lime and magnesia-free, composi- tion of the co#l ash and the argillite. INTRODUCTION in 1957 2 party of students mapping in the Wilson area onder the super- vision of Dr. A. W. Kleeman collected specimens of indurated or silicified pink and buff argillite, containing leaf impressions of Triassic aspect. from an area 9 miles due east of Gordon. The possible economic importance of this find was immediately obvious and as soon as the Department was informed one of the authors (Johnson) made a reconnaissance of the area (in November, 1957), when it was found that the silicified pink and buff argillite was the top member of a relatively thick succession of Triassic sediments forming a true structural basin of some considerable areul extent, On a subsequent brief yisit with L, W. Parkin fragments of a material re- sembling scoria or clinker were picked up on the slopes of a small mesa at the top of which the argillite occurs. At this stage, the analogy between the occur- ‘rence and that of the “burnt coal” at Leigh Creek (Parkin, 1953) obviously in- viting comparison between the two, a similar origin for the igneous-looking material at Springfield was considered. Then at a later stage, field and labora- tory evidence, particularly the similarity between some of the fragments and voleanic ejactamenta, led to our consideration of an igneous parentage for them. Finally, more detailed examination of the occurrence in the ficld and Jaboratory bas shown that the material originated chiefly from the fusion of the argillite by burning of coal in situ. Investigation of the field occurrence, described in the first part of this paper was the responsibility of Johnson. Bucknell describes the petrology of the material in the second part. LOCATION, TOPOGRAPHY AND GEOLOGY As it is intended to publish a detailed deseription of the geclogy of the Springfield Basin at a later date a brief account only is given here to assist in the understanding of the occurrenec. The Basin is situated some 9 miles due west of the abandoned township of Gordon on the Quorn-Hawker road and is reached from a road running directly between Gordon and Cradock. ® Department of Mines, South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. 8. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82. 246 W. JOHNSON anp M. J, BUCKNELL Boked argitite a CHAINS LOCATION Hawker Ha. Cyrdle Mudla SPRINGFIELD BASIN PROTEROZOIC QUATERNARY AM uv Ja cover Sands foras ast silfslones Shales and orgies Base! canglomerste Sate Titlite Geological sketch plan of the Springfield Basin near Cradock, South Australia, PSEUDG-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 2487 It lies in an area of moderate topographic relief and is almost bisected by Slaty Cliffs Creek, a large tributary of Wirreanda Creek, It is elongated in a divection slightly north of cast and is asymmetric, the eastern end heing broader and having a semi-circular periphery, The length of the Basin is 28 miles and its greatest width 1% miles. The Triassic sediments have been extensively eroded and for the most part lie in a topographic depression. A small central mesa, to which the pseudo- vuleanic materials are confined, has been Icft and the basal conglomerate forms a hounding ridge around three-quarters of the periphery of the basin. Outcrop conditions are poor and nowhere is the full Triassic sueeession exposed in one section nor is it possible to build up an accurate composite seetion from a number of stratigruphically overlapping discontinuous sections, Estimates of maximum thickness therefore vary and estimate of total maximum thickness given in this paper is subject to an error which may be in excess of +3500 feet. The succession as built wp from fragmentary sections is as [ollows, starting at the top. Thickness Deseription of Lithology 70-00 feet = Pink and buff baked aryillite with leaf impressions and fresh water molluses underlain by whitish paper shales with ash beds at the base. 900 feet Grey sandy shale, fine-grained sandstone with a coarse-grained ; lentienlar arkose or yvreywacke at the top. 150 feet Carbonaceous shales, argillites and siltstones with impure eoal seams, 125-140 feet Chiefly white to yellow siltstone or fine-grained micaceous sand- slones with interbedded carbonaceous shales and impure cecal foams, Sandstones weathered to comeretionary ferrmginvus box WOTKS, 200-700 fect Carbonaceous shales and argillites with impure coal seams, Gypsum weitthers out of shiules. 170-940 feet Red, mauve and bof argillite with beds of red, grey, purple and buff, very coarse-grained sandstone, some containing clay pellets, At western end grades into a predominantly sandstone sequence. At the eastern end arsillite is 600 feet thick and overlain by the sandstone sequence 340 fect thick, May contain intorhedded. coal seams. Sandstones contain leaf impressions. 16-000 feet Basal conglomerate. Consists of interbedded torrential ennglom- erate and red and mauve coarse-grained current-bedded sand stone. Conglomerate boulders are predominantly quartzite, Some beds are vein quartz pebble conglomerate, 200) Feet Possible basal beds at eastern end of basin consisting of grey gypsiferous shales. ; ‘ The best coal seam sc far discovered by drilling is 12 feet thick. It is possible that the coal seams responsible for the formation of the pseudo-igneous rocks were much thicker. FIFL.D OCCURRENCE OF PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS All the material of igneous appearance has been found on the top and the side slopes of the small mesa, on the structural axis of the basin, The tup 70 to 90 feet of the mesa consists of baked argillite and shale with at least two thin clinker beds at the base and psendo-basalt dispersed in isolated patches amongst the argillite near the top, Clinker, ropy lava-like masses and “hambs” of pseudo-basalt are scattered erratically over the side slopes and some black, 245 W. JOHNSON anv M. J. BUCKNELL highly ferraginous lumps are concentrated about a small depression in the surface of the mesa near its central point, There is a clear-cut division between the normal sediments of the ‘Triassic succession and the “abnormal” rocks on the mesa. The dividing Ine is the lowest clinker bed, The succession above this bed, so Far as can be ascertained from the talus obscured outcrops, consist of (from the top dawnwards): Huff and pink argillite with plant remains and fresh water 60-80 beet molluscs. White argillite with molluscs, white paper shale and plauts. 14 inches. Pink, red and greenish-black ash-like material. 6 inches Clinker. #10 feet White and buff shale. @ inches Clinker. The thickness of the individual beds except for the clinker and ash cannot be determined accurately owing to the talus cover. ‘he pink and bull argillite is highly siliceous (see analysis in the section im Petrology) and massive, It is hard and tough, though light, and it breaks with a conchoidal fracture and weathers in angular and cuboidal masses. It contuims abundant leaf impressions and external casts of molluscs. These are particularly well displayed on weathered faces of the cuboidal and angular bhicks, Leaf impressions have been observed within 2 few imches of com- pletely fused argillite, The white “paper” shale beneath the pink argillite is 4 soft. crumbly rock splitting into paper-thin layers with numerous poorly preserved leaf impressions between the layers. In places the bedding of this shale dips vertically and, although apparently in situ, is overlain by normally dipping shale. The clinker at the base of the abnormal succession consists of immexular small masses of black aphanitic vesicular material whose vesicies are filled in art with white and yellow substances of possible secondary origin. It is em- bedded in a layer of vari-coloured powdery material bearing a strong resem- blance to coal ash, or clay soil strongly heated by buming tree roots. The only other material of igneous appearance found in situ is the rather eoarser grained greenish-black “basalt” occurring in flat slabs and thin seams in the pink argillite. It forms chiefly orizontal tabular masses with irregular out- lines apparently intrusive into the argillite, and in some places completely en- veloping pieces of it, In other places thin seams of basalt can be observed in vertical and subvertical cracks leading up into the horizontal layers, Adjacent to the contact, in a zone of varying width, the normal pink or buff colour of the argillite hus beem altered to a light or dark grey. The other types of igneons-looking material found are small bomb-like masses; ropy tava, black, highly ferrnginows lumps and louse masses. of heavy basaltic clinker scattered over the side slopes and the top of the mesa, Ex- amples are figured in the text and their microscopic appearance is described in detail by Bucknell in the petrological section of this paper. THE MODE OF ORIGIN OF THE PSEUDO-IGNEOUS MATERIAL Although the remarkable resemblance between. some of the material and volcanic ejectamenta led to 2 consideration of an igneous origin for it, the weight of field and laboratory evidence points to it huving been formed from argillite or shale by the heat from burning coal or from gases distilled from the coal. Firstly, let us examine the evidence af the general circumstances of the eceanence. In the coal-bearing basin of Triassic rocks at Leigh Creek, some 150 miles north, similar material has been proved hy Parkin (Parkin, 1953) and PSEUDO-IGNEGUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 249 Baker (Baker, 1953) to have been formed by heat from burning coal. Likewise. in other parts of the world numerous occurrences af baked clays and natural slags are described by various authors (Sherburne Rogers, 1917 ). In fact, it seems 2 normal occurrence in coalfields, given the right type of coal, suitable topography and climate. On the other hand if the material in the Springfield Basin were trul igneuys | it would be unique, for no other voleunic rocks of Triassic age are known in Australia west of the Tasman Geosyncline, his, of course, cannot be taken as proof and stronger evidence against the igneous origin and in support of the burning coal hypothesis is supplied hy the turm af the material in situ and altera- tion effects in the argillite. As mentioned above, apart from the clinker Inwer dwn the. mesa, the “pseudo-hasalt” uecurs as thin, tabular, horizontal musses and thinner vertical seams or veins. with irregular, but quite sharp, boundaries, showing chilled edges against the argillite. The vertical scams fill small cracks and join the horizontal masses frum belaw- To explain this form of ovcurrence as due to igneous activity would require a very fluid lava cither flowing by gravity into pre-existing holes and cracks in the argillite or else intruding the argillite from below. Such a fluid lava implies quiet volcanic or igneous activity on a large seale. The Auidity and the intru- sive hypothesis are incompatible with the ropy lava and bombs and scoriaceous basalt (clinker) and the postulated large-scale volcanic activity is incompathle with the small volume of igneons material remaining on the mesa. Two other tacts weighing against an igneous origin are the cumplete absence of volcanic ur igneous material lower down in the Triassic succession of the Springhcld Basin and the apparent absence of a neck or pipe representing the souree of the material, The unusual chemical and mineralogical composition of the psendo-igneous material and the variation between its various forms also weigh heavily against their heing uf common ijmeous origin. Finally, there is the problem of the quantity of heat required to hake the argillite. A layer 15 feet thick has been converted tu a hard, tough pink or buff rock over an area of 400,000 square feet. Though the amonnt of heat needed to effect this conversion cannot be calculated precisely, it obviously. must have been large and could only have been supplied by a thick sill or lava flow. Either of these would surcly have left more traces the fesy remnants found scattered over the top and slopes of the mesa. Furthermore, it seems doubtful if even a thick How or sil] could have caused such a thick zune of baking beneath it becanse of the limited heat transfer in x downwards direction and the lack of heat renewal in the sill, or lava ow, once emplaced. To pursue the igneous hypothesis to the end it would be feasible to postulate small-scale volcanic activity, operating about a locus centred on the mesa, as a suurce of the heat. This aud have to have been cpi-Triassic to explain the clinker or scoriae beds towards the base of the mesa, overlain by fossiliferaus Triassic rocks and surely would have left more evidence of its occurrence. Turning to tie hypothesis of Fusion of the argillite by heat from burning coal we find that it presents no inexplicable difficulties. Firstly, coal seams are known to occur at various levels in tha Triassic succession of the basin, and they - ave of a similar type to Leigh Creek coals, which are notoriously liable to spon- taneens combustion. Then, as previously mentioned, it requires no unique sequence of events, as the formation of the pscudc-igneous rocks or natural slags, and the large-scale baking of shales overlying coal seams as a result of combustion of the scams, is a well-known phenomenon recorded at various places throughout the world, including Leigh Creck. 350 W. JOHNSON anu M, J. BUCKNELL The eumbustion of one or more thick seams beneath the mesa would have quite adequately supplied the beat required to bake the argillite and shales at the top and to partially fuse them. The patehy occurrence in situ of the pseudo-basalt is explained by_ the behavicur of the burning eval, Burning and super-heated gases resulting from the partial combustion of the coal, penetrating upwards through cracks formed in the strata overlying the coal, would fuse the argillite in situ in places where the passage of the gases was restricted, or where further combustion tock place, Hot gases could pass through cracks of capillary size or not much wider and hence the presence of Java-like material in thin vertical and subverti¢al seams is ade- quately explained. The presence af quite extensive slabs of pseudu-basale is no doubt in part due to fowage of completely fused argillite in the hugtest zunes oF to the extrusion of fused coal ash as postulated by Bucknell. The presence of bomb-like fragments of pseuda-basalt implies Forceful ejection of lava im small masses. It is suggested here that the hot and burning ases from the coal were channelled principally up a crack near the centre o the wmesa and eventually travelled upwards at sufficient velocity to simulate the effect of a small volcano, In this phase the small bombs were ejected and perhaps part af the molten fused argillite extiuded in the form of ropy lava. The site of this pseudo-volcano is thought te be the small depression near the centre of mes which is marked by a concentration of heavy, highly ferruginous, black, angular blocks, A concentration of iron near the channel ways for the burning gases is noted by Sherburne Rogers (Sherburne Rogers, 1917), Further support to the burning coal hypothests is given by the variation in the mineralogical and chemical composition of the natural slags. This is also discussed in detail by Bucknell. Other evidence is given by the two clinker beds situated near the base of the mesa. These consist principally of irregular masses of vesicular light and lack coloured clinker in a reddish vari-coloured, fine, powdery material identical with the unfused ash from burning coal, and are overlain in places by white paper shales tilted on edge. The latter occur erratically around the mesa and are almost certainly due to slumping of the beds following withdrawal of support by consumption of the coal beneath. Taking all the evidence into consideration and coupling it with the wenesal circumstances of the occurrence there seems little doubt that the pseudo-igneous rocks aad the baking of the argillite and shale were caused hy heat emanating from a burning coal seam or stams. COMPARISON WITH LEIGH CREEK The two occurrences obviously invite comparison and have many similari- tics, such as the baking of the shales, the presence of ash from burning coal and the resemblance of the black aphanitic vesicular clinker at both localities. There are, however, a number cf differences which are probably chiefly rb bathe differing topography in the two localities at the time when buming tuok Place. At Leigh Creek, so far as can be ascertained by personal inspection and from descriptions by Beker and Parkin, coarse-grained material similar to the bombs and “basaltic” slabs of Springfield, do not occur. The “basaltic” material at SpringSeld also occurs in much larger masses and there is definite evidence that it formed by fusion of the argillite. The mineralogical and chemical composition are obviously different but this may be due principally to difference in composition of the source material. ‘These differences are discussed in more detail in the comments by Bucknell below. PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASTS 351 The chief difference, however, appears to be the stratigraphic position of the clinker and other pseudo-igneous material in relation to the burnt coal, At Leigh Cresk it is apparently intermingled with the unfused ash formed by burn- ing of the coul seam. At Springteld, the slabs, bomb-like fragments, some of the clinker, and the highly ferruginous lumps are un top of the mesa, are inter- mixed with the argillite, and on visual evidence, above the level of the burning seam. The mincralogical evidence suggests that the temperatures attained were higher than at Leigh Creek and it is suggested here, that most of the differences are due to the topographie situation of the coal seams at Springfield, The mesa occurs on the synclinal axis of the Triassic basin. It is physio- graphically normal for 4 mesa or ridge to be left by erosion in such a situation and it is thought ignition of the coal seam or seams took place subsequent to the cycle of erosion which formed the mesa, This allowed oxygen to have access to the seams around the perimeter of the mesa, Following ignition of the coal, cracking occurred in the overlying rocks, more oxygen was admitted to the coal, and gas, distilled off the coal ahead of the burning zone, began to pass up through the cracks to the surface of the mesa. This would soon ignite at the surface and cause 4 forced draft up the Jarger cracks, drawing in more oxygen from the atmosphere and resulting in better combustion and higher temperature. The process would be vomnu- lative, self-sustaining wid would eventually result in the formation of blast furnace conditions in one or more of the larger cracks, with argillite being fused up the cracks and at the surface, At the period of iniximum combustion and emission of gas it is suggested that blobs oF molten fused argillite were ejected to form the bomb-like fragments. It seems probable that when the ignition occurred the mesa was not much larger thun xt present, certainly not having more than twive its present surface area, Baking of the argillite to a hard porcellanite type material would assist in the preservation of the mesa by formation of a crust resistant fu weathering, It seems probable that it uwes its present shape fo that cause. The likely mechanism of ignition would be spontaneuus combustion after sudden expusure of the coal seam or seams at one or more points around the perimeter of the mesa by erasion following torrential rainfall, Burning vf coal has been noted in America chiefly in areas subjected to rapid cutting of stream ghannels (Sherburne Rogers, 1917, pp. 2-4). An alternative explanation would be that the coal seams ignited at a stage when the Triassic sediments were penepleined to a level approximately that of the present surface of the mesa and that the mesa mwes its existence to the reyistance of the hard-baked argillite, The coal searns could have still burnt out completely due ta their synelinal basin structure. Towever, if this latter ex- plimation were correct, one would expect remnants ot baked argillite, clinker und pseudo-igneous material spread over a wider area than its present occur- rence. The explanation alsa introduces difficulty in explaining the ignition uf the coal, and on the whole the evidence favours the hypothesis of combustion in comparatively recent tines when the mesa was not much different in shape and size than at present. PETROLOGY OF THE PSEUDO-IGNEOUS HOCKS IX THE SPRINGFIELD BASIN The host-rock for intrusive members of the pseudo-voleanic series is 2 sili- cified, yet highly fossiliterous argillite. This is afteu mottled in pink and grey, depending on the state of oxidation af the small armmunt of ferruginous matter 258 W. JOHNSON anb M. J, BUCKNELL present. Sometimes the pink areas can be related to. small fissures; these would cause oxidation, whether by atmospheric agency or by seepage of hot, oxidizing vapour. Microscopic examination of a thin section from this material reveals a mass of very fine, mainly kaolinitie clay which has been impregnated with secondary silica, giving a hard rock with a conchoidal fracture. There is a tendency for the clay mineral flakes to be orientated in parallel. The ground mass also contains traces of zircon, rutile. a chlorite and ue matter, while sporadic porphyroclasts of quartz coated with secondary silica occur as well as cavities lined with chalcedony, The chemical analysis of this rock is recurded in Table 1, column B. Pseudo-volcanic rocks include the following: Veinlets intruded into the argillite. Extruded material resembling “ropy lava”. “Volcanic bombs”. Massive vesicular material, Massive material slightly to non-vesicular. An example of the argillite with an intruded veinlet is shown in Fig. 1. Xencliths of the sediment can be seen floating in the intruded material, Fig, 2 is 4 photomicrograph of a thin section across the contact, showing the radial structure of white and black minerals in the veinlet as well as the concentration of opaque matter along the margin. A sample of material having the texture of ropy lava is shown in Fig. 3, and a chemical analysis is given in Table 1, column D. The rock contains pseudo- spherulitic grains 0-4-0-8 mm. across, each having a fine-grained centre sur- rounded by a slightly coarser margin. Rods of alpha-cristohalite, having a roughly radial orientation, are assuciated with opaque members of the spinel- magnetite family. A polished surface reveals three spinels, with differing reflec- tivities, X-ray diffraction analysis showed that the unit cell dimensions in order of abundance of the constituents were: 8-19A", 8-35A°, 8:40A°, The first of these is slightly higher than hereynite (8-14A°), and implies same substitution of ferric iron for aluminium in the octahedral positions of the lattice, siace the chemical analysis shows no significant amount of any other element which could enter the spinel structure. The unusual cell dimension suggests a metastable variéty arising by rapid cooling from a high temperature. This is confirmed by the presence of cristobalite, which does not normally form below 1470 C, Photomicrographs illustrating the textures of the thin and polished sections are shown in Figs. 4 and 5. Seme small, rounded cobbles resembling volcanic bombs haye been ob- tained (see Fig. fi), Under the microscope these were secn to possess a Similar pseudo-spherulitic texture to that of the “ropy lava”. A lower temperature vf formation is indicated by the occurrence of alplia-tridymite instead of cristo- balite, as well as the formation of cordierite in the more coarse, outer zones nf the spherical aggregates. This cordierite has refractive indices (1-56-1-58) cor- responding tu the iron-bearing member of the series, and is pleochroic From colourless to violet; the uptic axial angle is negative and low. It also vives a slightly unusual X-ray diffraction pattern. Locally, this mineral has been pini- tized lo a pale biotite, associated with chalcedony and silica class. In Fig, 7 the texture of the material in thin section is portrayed, Fig, 8 is taken from a polished surface, and shaws two members of the spinel family. Most of the grains appear to he compusites of the two and would probably all be so if the grain were viewed in three dimensivns; this suggests that unmixing has taken place. The spinel and magnetite families probably form mix-crystuls at very high temperatures. and these separate into two phases on cooling, ‘ Unit PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 253 cell dimensions similar to the extreme members in the “ropy lava” were obtained from the X-ray diffraction pattern. Similar textures are found in the massive vesicular material. But in this case the cordierite has been completely altered to a pale biotite, while silica glass separates the tridymite from the opaque fraction. Many of the cavities are lined with chalcedony, geothite, or limonite; the formation of these sub- stances, as well as the breakdown of the cordierite, was aided by the vesicular texture. Small amounts of zircon and rutile may point to a sedimentary origin for some of the material. A chemical analysis is given in Table 1, column C. Rocks containing only a few vesicles, or none at all, have been studied. The radial and “spherulitic” structures are absent and the individual crystals larger. Chemical analysis (Table 1, column E) of one containing u few vesicles gives a Si:Fe ratio approximating to fayalite. No fayalite has, however, been observed in the specimen, which consisls of an irregular network of tridymite rods with interstitial opaque grains. The latter are mostly titaniferous magnetite, which is martitized to haematite in an irregular fashion. Every grain is criss-crossed with exsolution lamellae, believed to be of another spinel, forming along definite crystallographic directions in the magnetite, and persisting unaffected in the haematite. Some of the grains are partly free of these exsolution bodies, the clear portions being composed of spinel or titaniferous haematite. The features of these opaque grains are shown in Figs. 9 and 10. Iron-bearing chalcedony fills the interstices of the tridymite rods while some of the former vesicles now contain ferric oxide in various states of hydration. Fig, 11 is a photomicrograph of a thin section taken from this material. The other variety is non-vesicular and highly magnetic. Roughly polygonal grains of the various spinels already described are set in a siliceous matrix (sec Fig. 12). No chemical analysis has been obtained for this rock-type, but it certainly has lower silica and higher iron contents than any of the other species described, TABLE I, A B Cc Db E { Highly vesicular Slightly Coal Ash from! Argilites © “'spherulitie’ | “Ropy lava | vesicular lower seam =} rock \ rok si0, 69-14 6862 | 52°23 BO 4 wG-54 ALO 20-08 22308 17-78 17-88 6-43 Ke,0, 2-18 B03 es 12:7 45-20 Fa) 1a.) 12a VT MgO 0-70 0-10 0-28 0-34 0-10 Cad 1-72 0-52 0-32 0-36 0-16 Nu,0 14d | = ~ = K,0 98 _ — | — — H,O - Nil 0-58 O31 \ 043 0-20 H,Q+ 0-24 — = — — TiO, 1°75 1-94 12 1+A8 0-92 AQ 1-4¢ 0:04 08 \ (10 0-19 Ol 0-01 0-03 Ol Or 3 0:01 MnQ Ot 0-08 Oe 1h (25 0:48 Loss on ignition ' ‘ Bedi 0-43 0-92 O-l4 Total ; 80 66 8-10 46-40 96-78 97-37 The Chemical Analyses; (Analyst P.. C. Hemingway) 23+ W, JOHNSON ann M. J. BUCKNELL The first analysis given in Table L refers to the ash from a coal seam lower in the succession. Apart from somewhat higher magnesia, lime and sulphur in the former, the coal ash and the argillite ave strikin sly similar in compositinn. Proportion of alkalies in the latter are not given, but the low lime and magnesia content is consistent with deposition in a freshwater and slightly acid environ- ment (Pettijolin, 1956). The low percentage of iron is 4 significant feature, while the high titania content is not wholly explicable in terms of the mineral com- usition. d tn column E the composition of the massive. slightly vesicular rock iflus- trated in Figs, Y-11 is given, This is cunsistent with the minerals present, Iighly significant is. the fact that e:Si ratio closely conferms to that of fayalite. ~ Amilyses of the highly vesicular ruck clescribed ahove, as well as the “ropy lava" (Figs, 3-5) are shown in columns C and D respectively. It may he sately assumed that the “bombs” illustrated in Figs. 6-8 have a kindred analysis. Columns C and D are alike, and both are intermediate in cumpousitim between A and FE; in fact, a mixture of 14-2 parts of the argillite with ene of the “fayalitic magna” would give a rock with a similar analysis. The unly component thut does net conform is the magnesium —the high content of this in C and D may be related to the subsequent development of biotite, although the sontee of this element is obsente. The tise in SO,— content from the arsillite to the “fayalitie rock” may have some hearing on the genesis of this series, Comparison with the Natural Clinker at Leigh Creek BKueker (1953) has described tour samples of clinker collected from the upper ena) seam, lobe “D") in the North basin at the Leigh Creek coalfield. This includes Jight-and-dark coloured vesicular as well as non-vesicular types; he also mentions that the associated shale has been baked and reddencd in a similar manner to the argillite from the Springfield basin. Chemical analyses of the eoal ash and of the varians clinkers are quoted; there has been a significant and not nnexpected fall in the proportion ot soda, sulphur and chlorine from the Farmer to the latter, as well as a notable rise in lime and alumina, Chemically, the clinkers vary considerably amongst themselves only in their iron and silica contents (inversely) and in the amount of residual soda and sulphur. These facts are summarized in Table 2, columns F and G, in which the analyses are reproduced for purposes of comparison, It is obyious that this material is quite different from any of the specimens from the Springfield basin that have heen analyzed. The high proportion of calcium and magnesium in the Leigh Creek clinkers would probably lead to a higher range of fusion temperatures, a mare sensitive equilibrium between liquid and solid, and a greater variety of miucrals, including pyraxencs (Litunaugite, fassaite), plagioclase and gehlenite. Baker quotes Fusion temperatures for the ash between 1250° C. and 1300° C. under reducing conditions. Also the molten ash remained within, or close to, the seam, where locally the teducing atmosphere aided the formation of native [ron and iron sulphides. In the Springfield basin the ash uppears ta have heen practically free of the more refractory elements so that a liquid of Fayalitic compositian was ob- tained it a tenmperuture of about 1205° C. (Bowen aud Schairer, 1938; Barrett, 1945). The subsequent behaviour of this liquid would depend partly on the oxida- tion-keduction potential and partly on the small amount of alumina present. The Leigh Greck clinkers carry spinel, magnetite and haematite as do the Fused rocks at Springfield, It seems that the former, by remaining in situ, became PSEUDO-IGNEOUS KOCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 253 lueally subject to more oxidizing conditions, as evidenced by the presence af haematite and magnetite. Exsolution bodies of spinel fram magnetite (see Figs. 9-10} occurring along definite crystallographic directions are reported from both, The Leigh Creek spinel would appear to be more magnesian, 25 would be expected [rom the composition of the mineral matter in the coal seam. Comparison with Overseas Occurrences Sherburne Rogers (1917) has discussed the factors conducive to spontaneous combustion of a coal seam, and describes the effect of this on strata overlying seams in various parts of Montana, U.S.A. The strata are silicified plant-bearing shales; near the scam they are red or mottled by baking, as at Springfield. Fusion has resulted in vitrified, glassy and recrystallised slags, the first some- times having a ropy lava texture and the second containing true spherulites. Both these varieties are devoid of recognisable crystals, The recrystallised material from the sendy shale has diopside and labradorite. Magnetite and almandite also ocenr; the latter should change to hereynite, iron cordicrite and fayalite above 780° C. at normal pressures (Yoder, 1955) and this would be an unusually low temperature of crystallisation, When derived from aluminous shale, the slag has sillimanite, cordierite and ? spinel. In the chimney above the coal seam is a mass of spinel and haematite, and it is suggested that iron is distilled trom the seam as ferric chloride vapour. At Springheld, however, the ash from a lower seam is practically devoid of chlorine, and this element is not significantly enriched in the pseudo-volcanics as compared to the argillite; contrast the rise in the sulphur content. The chemical analyses of the two types of Montana clinker is shown in Table 2, columns H and I, and the composition is intermediate between that of the Springfield and Leigh Creek coal ashes for most of the constituents. Fused shale from East Wyoming (Bastin, 1905) has oligoclase, pyroxene, cordierite, magnetite and haematite, while magnetile, cordierite, epidote. placio- clase, tridymite and spinel are reported in similar rocks from the Boehmischen Mittelgebirge (Hibsch, 1908). F Leigh Creek Upper Seam “D Lohe Ash (Analyst T. W. Dalwood) G Leigh Crsek Clinker-—Average and varianco of four analyses (Analyst G. C. Carlas) A Montana U.S.A. Reerystallisnd from Sandy Shale (Analyst G, C, Carlos) fF Montana U.5,A, Reerystallised from Aluminous Shale (Anolyst G. 8. Ragers) TARLE 3, | G H | ) SiO, 2-3 | 25-5 9 (ib-41 58430 ALO, 14-Bh 21-6 ag 11-94 20450 Ka, (2-3 [2-4 =8+5 7-38 4:33 Fat) = Be 2-45 0-745 | 0-46 MgO ray 4:3 —O6 1-50 | 1st CaO 14e78 Wed E18 5-02 | 4-40 Nu," Ld- 1g g-0 rad 2-R3 : 1-46 K,0 0-6 O-3 ba recy 2-28 Ho — | — fed -E0-3 O08 1-03 H,0+ = 12 70-6 0-50 1.90 TID, 1-260 1-4 “10-05 1-17 0-28 805 l4-SL Ss=2-11 261 0-22 o-U Cl 2-86 O-2 “LO = co, = 08 0-8 | 1-A7 3-37 PLO; t 1:76 20 -0+8 trace trace MnO | ay OL 0-2 a 0-18 256 W, JOHNSON ano M. J. BUCKNELI. Petrnyenesis ‘The spontaneous combustion of low-grade coal, whether at surface or in (lisused mines, is a well-known phenomenon occurring in various parts of the world. Ignition of surface exposures may arise where the surface gradient is steep, such as would arise from a quick cutting streain (Sherburne Rogers, 1917) or where the seam is capped by a fairly hard indurated rock as at Spring- field, Once the coal has ignited, it will bum away from the exposed face. As the Springfield outlier has an elliptical shape the coal would have burned tu- wards the centre, the overlying strata slamping down in the wake of the advanc- ing fire. Both low and high angle fissires were probably developed, the former acting as inlets for the air and the latter as chimneys for the combustion pro- dnets and distilled volatile constitutents. Heat accumulated owing to the con- fined space and poor thermal conductivity of the coal, and temperatures of 1200° C. fr more were attained. Reducing conditions prevailed at the level af the coal scam, so that at about 1205° C. a liquid of essentially fayalitie compusition was produced, The source of the iron necessary for this liquid is obscure, since both the ash from a lower seam and also the argillite are very deficient in this element; possibly it came from ferruginous bands within the seam or immediately above it. Coal scams alwavs fire at or near the top (Shechurne Rogers, 1917), However, a liquid of fayalitic composition would melt ont, whatever the local Si;Fe ratio, and would dissilye the residual constituent orly when the temperature was further elevated, Generally, however, it would be squeezed up into the chimney cracks by the pressure of the overlying strata, as a foaming liquid containing bubbles of dis- tillate (methane and other hydrocarbons, hydrogen), carbon monoxide, and pos- sibly some hydrogen sulphide. tn the upper fissures the addition of air led to further oxidation of the volatiles, Heat from this reaction raised the tempera- ture still further and enibled the liquid to dissolve up to twice its own weight of emintry rock. When distillation ceased this was not possible, so that the non- vesicular specimens ave poor in dissolyed_ silica. At the surface a tunperature of more than 1470° C. was sometimes attained, so that on chilling cristobalite was formed. Sudden slumping of the overburden caused the liquid to spurt up and be extruded in the form of rounded nodules or “ropy lava”. The former may have been ejected from smaller fissures, where the high ratio of surface area tu volume resulted in a higher heat loss and a iperet said temperatnre, so that tridymite mstead of cristnbalite was ormed. The change fram reducing to oxidizing conditions affected the subsequent crystallization, Goldschmidt (1954) suggests that an oxidiving potential would prevent the formation of fayalite, spinel and magnetite being produced instead, lt has been caleulated that the complete combustion of a Foot of sub- hitnminous coul would provide enough heat to raise the teraperature of 100 feet of shale by 300° C. Considerzble heat loss would arise at the level of the seam especially in the initial stayes as well as where the fused material was extruded. Tluwever, heat Inss at the ends of narrow fissures would be small compared to that conducted aut through the country rock. It therefore appears that enough heat would be evolved ta bake and redden the argillite. This process wonld carry On for some time after the material in the fissures had solidified. CONCLUSION The field evidence points tu the basult-lke clinkers and other material of igneous appearance being natural slags formed during combustion of a coal seam under a small mesa in the triassic sediments of the Springficld Basin, The PSEUDO-IGNEOUS ROCKS, SPRINGFIELD BASIN 257 petrological evidence supports this and indicates that the slags were formed by fusion of coal ash and argillite and modified by interaction between slag and unfused argillite. Combustion of the coal seam was complete due to its topographic situation, outcropping around the perimeter and some height above the base of the mesa, This probably also contributed to a rapid rate of burning and consequent tela- tive rapid rise in temperature of the rocks above the coal seam. Partial differentiation of the semi-fused: coal ash by pressure from the supcrincumbent strata accounts for some of the peculiarities of composition of the natural slags. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS This paper is published by kind permission of the Director of Mines. Thanks are also due to Mr. L. W. Parkin for encouragement and helpful discus- sion during the writing of the paper. Chemical analyses and X-ray diffraction studies were made by P. C, Hemingway and A. E. Tynan, respectively, of the Research and Development Branch, Department of Mines. REFERENCES Baker, G., 1953. Naturally fused coal ash from Leigh Creek, South Australia, ‘Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 76, pp. 1-20, Barrett, E. P., 1945. The fusion, flow and clinkering of coal ash—a survey of the chemical background, Chemistry of Coal Utilization (AH, H. Lowry, Editor), chap. 15. (John Wiley & Sons.) Bastin, E, 5,; 1905. Note on haked clays and natural slags in eastern Wyoming, Jour. Geology, 13, pp. 408-412. Bowen, N. C., and Scitamen, J. F., 1938, Crystallisation equilibrium in nepheline-albite- silica ‘mixtures with fayalite, Jour, Geology, 46, pp. 397-411. Gorpscumipt, V, M,, 1954, Gcochemistry, p, 653 (Clarendon Press), Hisscu, J. E., 1908, Geologische Karte des boehmischen Mittelgebirges; Min. pet Mitt., 27, . 35-40, Paaci, L. W., er ar., 1953. The Leigh Creek Coalfield, Bull. 31, Geol. Surv. S. Aust. Prertiyonn, F. J., 1956. Sedimentary Rocks, p. 360. (Harper and Bros.) SHERBURNE RoceRs, G., 1917. Baked slag and shale formed by the burning of coal beds. United States Geological Survey, Professional Paper 108-A. Yover, H. S,, 1955. Crust of the carth. Geol, Soc. Amer. Memoir, a. EPL A UMAQNAD TULWOYS “ARE AOE JO Wetjoas Ley | —"F ‘SI oats [RINWO N By UAB] Adoy..—'¢ “Blyy s(P YOO yoos 1 ply “aqyenay— pay 2 ~t ~ - & Fe = JOUNSON |OHNSON AND BUCKNELL PLATE 2 possibly from mivx- x Pr P=) EA Zz SI faa z wn bh S Fs ‘ = = o : * = al z 9 ~ + e . “ re je] & Re a ee 2 om z "3 8. Fig, = "3 a nf is = — a S wn # re] = = - as = rrr ~— & = 2 . 2% rai o = in 2 = — = o = @ o Sf & Z oan + a ° S je © = ct an = ¥ Fi =e Pe 56 = “4 = ~ oh 5 -~ = & 2a igo) = Ba a 5 Ke ; E te) | &h ~ ig Joutds jo surei [et NOE X “aou YOF—sBl ‘Sty JEAN 5 faa) = =] 4 4 JOHNSON A SURVEY OF THE MOSQUITOES OF COONALPYN DOWNS, SOUTH AUSTRALIA. by E. J. WATERHOUSE* [Read 9 October 1958] SUMMARY A survey of the mosquitoes of Coonalpyn Downs during the period January to March, 1952, is reported. Twelve species have been collected either as larvae or as adults; three are recorded from South Australia for the first time. The relationship of the distribution and abundance of various species of adults to the type and frequency of breeding places has been investigated. INTRODUCTION The Australian Mutual Provident Society in 1949 initiated a land develop- ment scheme in the Upper South-East of South Australia. During January to early March, 1952, at the request of this Society, the author made a survey of the mosquito fauna on a portion of the Coonalpyn Downs in the area to be developed. The primary objectives were to determine the mosquito species occurring in the area, whether these could be vectors of myxomatosis in rabbits, and how the disease could be exploited. The area surveyed was approximately 200 square miles. The present paper records some notes on the biology and distribution of the mosquitoes collected during this survey. Mosquitoes had not previously been collected from the area although Lines collected to the north-west and west during 1951-1956 (in preparation), Waterhouse in 1953-1954 made col- lections further north in the Murray Mallee in South Australia (in preparation), and Douglas collected in the north-west Mallee area in Victoria in 1955-1956 (in preparation ). Development of this land has been hindered by the low fertility of the soils and by problems of management. Settlement is now rapidly expanding, largely as a result of an increased knowledge of the fertilizer requirements of the soils and improved methods of clearing. Much of the area in this survey had not been cleared or settled. It was anticipated that an increase in the rabbit popu- lation following clearing might menace sown pastures. DESCRIPTION OF THE AREA The topography, soils, vegetation and availability of water in the Coonalpyn Downs area surveyed have been described in detail by Taylor (1933), Coal- drake (1951), Blackburn et al. (1953), and by Jackson and Litchfield (1954). The area is part of an extensive sandy plain between the South Australian coast and the Victorian border and is covered mainly by low shrubs, known col- lectively as heath, and by mallee-eucalypt rarely higher than 15 feet. The area is in the “warm temperate” zone of Davidson (1936) with a mean annual temperature of 55-60° F. and a growing season for pastures, as defined by * Wildlife Survey Section, C.S.1.R.O., Regional Pastoral Laboratory, Armidale, New South Wales. Trans, Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82. 260 E. J. WATERHOUSE Trumble (1948), from May to November. The rainfall has been analysed by Coaldrake (1951), who indicates that the greatest local variations in the monthly totals occur in the summer months. Because of the porous nature of the soils, surface streams have not developed in the area, and surface waters are restricted to shallow swamps, excavated water-holes and dams, and shallow wells. Two approximately parallel ranges of sand-covered, limestone hills, the Stirling Range and the Black Range, 100-200 feet in altitude and running north- west to Southteawt divide the area surveyed (see Fig. 1). SOUTH AUSTRALIA VICTORIA 9 4 6 MILES Fig. 1—Locality Map: Location of portion of Coonalpyn Downs in South Australia surveyed for mosquitoes—1952. Key to Hundreds: C——Cannawigara. L—Laffer. M—Marcollat. P—Pendleton. PE—Petherick. S—Stirling. SE—Senior. W—wWillalooka. WJ—Wirrega. The area south-west of the Black Range (referred to subsequently as Divi- sion 1) was relatively undeveloped at the time of the survey and is comprised largely of swampy flats. These flats are mostly very saline and carry either samphire (Salicornia spp., Arthrocnemum spp.) in the wetter areas, or cutting- MOSQUITOES OF COONALPYN DOWNS 201 grass (Cladium spp.) or red-gum (Eucalyptus camaldulensis) in those areas which are wet for only part of the year and are less saline than the samphire flats. In Division 1, during the period of the survey, most of the mosquito breeding-places were waterholes. Most swamps were dry; those which did con- tain water were relatively unproductive of mosquitoes. Between Black Range and the Stirling Range (referred to subsequently as Division 2) the area had been largely developed for agricultural purposes. The natural vegetation consists of heath (Banksia spp., Casuarina spp., and Xanthor- rhoea spp.), mallee-heath associations (Eucalyptus incrassata) on well-drained soils, mallee-broom association (E. inerassata, Melaleuca uncinata) on the moder- ately drained soils, and mallee-tea-tree associations (Eucalyptus spp. and Mela- leuca spp.) on the poorly drained soils which are liable to water-logging and are very saline. In Division 2 the potential mosquito breeding-places are of two types: (1) Shallow ground waters, which may be at the tivaes or down to 25 feet below the surface. These are saline, but provide the bulk of the mosquito breeding- places in the form of shallow wells and water-holes; (2) Much less saline waters pumped from 100 to 200 feet; these supply the stock-watering tanks and troughs, which are common. The latter potential mosquito breeding-places were of much less importance than those provided by the shallow ground waters. East of the Stirling Range (referred to subsequently as Division 3) the area covered by the survey was mainly undeveloped. The vegetation is a complex of mallee-broom-bush association (Eucalyptus incrassata, E, leptophylla- Melaleuca wncinata) and pink-gum (E. fasciculosa). In this division the only source of permanent underground water is in the marine limestone 50 to 200 feet below the surface. The salinity of the water is high. Surface waters in the form of soakages, springs and dams are not common. Gilgai zones occupying the lowest or most poorly drained sites are extensive in the Hundred of Senior and extend westward into the Hundred of Cannawigara; small areas also occur in the Hundred of Pendleton. These gilgai areas probably provide breeding places for mosquitoes during wet seasons. METHODS Ten visits were made to Division 1 from 12.1.52 to 29.2.52. Eighteen water- holes, representing approximately a third of the estimated number within the Division, were examined for mosquito larvae. Most of these were inspected only once, three were visited twice, and two were visited on three dates, at approximately weekly intervals in February. Two shallow wells, one inspected twice, and one fresh-water rain tank, one small dam, and two swamps were also examined. Of the latter group, the swamps provide the major potential breeding areas for mosquitoes. Because this Division is relatively undeveloped, wells, tanks and dams were rare. During the same period, six visits were made to Division 2 where three waterholes, nine wells, five tanks, and eight troughs were examined for mos- quito larvae; these all received one visit each. Water-holes were not as frequent as in Division 1; the important breeding places were provided by shallow wells. Only a small proportion of the total potential breeding areas was visited. Four visits were made to Division 3 from 17.1.52 to 11.3.52. Nine water- holes or soakages (practically the total number in the Division), two of which were dry, seven wells, and two dams were examined. The wells comprised approximately half those present in the area; only two could be examined for mosquito larvae as the depth to the water surface in the others was over 100 feet. 262 E. J. WATERHOUSE. Mosquito larvae were sampled by dipping from surface pools and shallow wells, and from deeper wells by lowering a conical net which had a glass tube fitted at the bottom of the net. Individual larvae were reared where possible, the resulting adults pinned, and the corresponding larval and pupal sloughs and representative samples of larvae preserved in Pampel’s fluid. Adult mosquitoes were collected in the field in a cyanide killing bottle as they came to man. RESULTS Larval Mosquitoes Five species of mosquito were collected as larvae. These were: Anopheles (Myzomyia) annulipes Walker Aedes (Finlaya) notoscriptus (Skuse) Aedes (Ochlerotatus) camptorhynchus (Thomson) Culex (Culex) globocoxitus Dobrotworsky Culex (Culex) pipiens australicus Dobrotworsky and Drummond. Of these five, An. annulipes and C. globocoxitus were commonly found to- gether and were the most widespread. ‘The latter were frequently more abun- ant (5 to 10 per dip) than An. annulipes (1 to 5 per dip). Although adults of Aedes alboannulatus were more abundant than other species of mosquitoes, the larvae were not found. Larval Habitats The main mosquito breeding-places during this survey were water-holes and shallow wells; 24 out of 28 water-holes, and 10 out of 15 shaJlow wells contained larvae. Two out of six tanks contained larvae; one of these was the only fresh- water rain tank with the top practically covered and it contained large numbers of A. notoscriptus larvae. The other was an open tank with a few C. globocoxitus larvae which were probably pumped into the tank with the water from a well. Four out of eight troughs examined contained larvae of C. globocoxitus, An. annulipes and C. pipiens australicus in that order of dominance and frequency; these four troughs were very dirty and were those with the ball-float covered so that a relatively sheltered situation was provided. The only species found in the shaded edges of the swamps examined, or in the small pools nearby, was An. annulipes in low numbers. No mosquito larvae were found in the eight dams examined; which all had relatively large expanses of exposed windswept water- surfaces with no emergent vegetation. The water in most of the breeding places ranged from non-saline to slightly saline as determined by tasting. Details of the main larval habitats are as follows: (a) Water-holes The water-holes were of two main types — natural surface pools, and holes excavated to expose the water table. The latter had three steep sides varying in height from 3 to 6 feet, and the water, which was up to 3 feet below the ground level, was directly available to stock on the fourth side. Thus the water surface along three sides was relatively well sheltered. The surface areas of these pools were rarely greater than 200 square feet. The larvae of C. globocoxitus and An. annulipes were frequently found to- gether. Neither species appeared to tolerate very saline conditions, but C. globocoxitus seemed to be more tolerant of moderately saline conditions than An. annulipes. A. camptorhynchus larvae were found only in very saline pools. (b) Wells Larvae were more common in wells in which the depth to the water surface was less than 12 feet. Larvae of C. globocoxitus were collected from wells in 7 - " MOSQUITOES OF COONALPYN DOWNS 263 which the water surface was as much as 24 feet below ground level; larvae, prob- ably of the same species, but not specifically identified, were collected in the Hundred of Pendleton (Division 3) from a well in which the water surface was 80 feet below ground. C. globocoxitus occurred in both covered and un- covered wells. In contrast, An. annulipes was found only in wells in which the surface of the water was not more than 12 feet below ground level and was exposed to sunlight. These two species were occasionally found together, and one or the other species was nearly always found to be present in the wells. Few C. pipiens australicus larvae were found, either associated with these two species or alone. Few of the larvae which were collected from wells were reared to adults i as they had a much higher mortality rate in rearing tubes than those which were collected from the sunlit water-holes. Adult Mosquitoes Eleven species of adult mosquitoes were collected. These were: Anopheles (Myzomyia) annulipes Walker Anopheles (Anopheles) atratipes Skuse Aedes (Finlaya) alboannulatus (Macquart) Aedes (Finlaya) notoscriptus (Skuse) Aedes (Ochlerotatus) camptorhynchus (Thomson) Aedes (Ochlerotatus) sagax (Skuse Aedes (Pseudoskusea) bancroftianus Edwards Aedes (Chaetocruiomyia) undescribed sp. Aedes (Macleaya) tremula (Theobald) Culex (Culex) globocoxitus Dobrotworsky Culex (Culex) fatigans Wiedemann. Of these, An. atratipes, A. bancroftianus, and an undescribed species of Aedes (Chaetocruiomyia) were recorded for the first time from South Australia. Locality and date records for these species are as follows: Anopheles atratipes Hundred of Marcollat, Section 7, “Leder Swamp”, 26.2.52. Aedes bancroftianus Hundred of Pendleton, Block H, 28.2.52. Aedes (Chaetocruiomyia) sp. (undescribed ) Hundred of Senior, Section 42, 17.1.52; Section 36, 11.3.52; Hundred of Pendleton, Section 3, 28.2.52; Hundred of Petherick, Section 2, 23.2.52. Adult mosquitoes generally, as determined by their biting of man, were present in relatively low numbers. For those species present in sufficiently large numbers to enable comparisons to be made, it appeared that in Divisions 1 and 2 A. alboannulatus was more abundant than An. annulipes. In Division 3 these two species were equally common but were much less abundant than in Divisions I and 2. The only other adult mosquito which was at all widespread or abundant was A. (Chaetocruiomyia) sp. which was largely confined to Division 3. | DISCUSSION | At the time of the survey, C. globocoxitus, An. annulipes, and A. alboannu- latus, either as larvae or adults, were widespread; these species occurred most frequently in Division 1 and least in Division 3. This is closely related to the relative availability of suitable breeding places in the three Divisions. Like- 264 E. J. WATERHOUSE wise, A. camptorhynchus larvae and adults were found only in Division 1, the only one in which very saline pools occur. C. pipiens australicus was found only in the non-saline and very slightly saline waters in Divisions 2 and 3. The wide- spread distribution of A. (Chaetocruiomyia) sp. in Division 3 suggests that its range probably extends further east and north into similar country in the “Big Desert” area in South Australia and Victoria. ACKNOWLEDGMENTS Preliminary identifications of the mosquitoes were made by Mr. F. N. Rat- cliffe, Officer-in-Charge, Wildlife Survey Section, C.S.I.R.O., and later were checked by Mr. N. V. Dobrotworsky, Zoology Department, Melbourne Univer- sity, Mr. D. J. Lee, School of Public Health and Tropical Medicine, Sydney, and Dr. E. N. Marks, Zoology Department, University of Brisbane. The helpful suggestions of Mr. D. C. Swan, head of the Entomology De- partment, Waite Agricultural Research Institute, Adelaide University, and also the special facilities made available by this Department during the course of this survey are acknowledged. Special thanks are also due to Mr. David Kentish, formerly the Research Liaison Officer of the Land Development Scheme, A.M.P. Society, for his interest and help in the initial reconnaissance of the area. Permission granted by the A.M.P. Society to publish the material contained in this paper is acknowledged. REFERENCES Buackgurn, G., LitcurieLtp, W. H., Jackson, E. A., and Lovepay, J., 1953. A survey of soils and land use in part of the Coonalpyn Downs, South Australia, C.S.I.R.O., Aust. Div. Soils, Soils Land Use Ser. No. 8. CoauprakE, J. E., 1951.—The climate, geology, soils and plant ecology of portion of the County of Buckingham (Ninety-Mile Plain), South Australia. C.S.1.R.O., Aust. Bull. No. 266, Davison, J., 1936.—Climate in relation to insect ecology in Australia. Bioclimatic zones in Australia, Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., 60, pp. 88-92. Jackson, E. A., and Lircarrerp, W. H., 1954.—Soils and land use of part of County Card- well, Coonalpyn Downs, South Australia. C.S.I.R.O., Aust. Div. Soils, Soils Land Use Ser. No. 14. Taytor, J. K., 1933.—A soil survey of the Hundreds of Laffer and Willalooka, South Aus- tralia. Counc. Sci. Industr. Res. Aust. Bull. No. 76. Trumsie, H. C., 1948.—Rainfall, evaporation and drought frequency in South Australia. J. Agric. S. Aust,, 52, pp. 55-64, AN ACCOUNT OF PLAGIORCHIS MAC ULOSUS (RUD.), ITS SYNONYMY AND ITS LIFE HISTORY IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY MADELINE ANGEL Summary A historical account of the parasitic ttematode Plagiorchis maculosus (Rud.) since its description in 1802 is given. An amended diagnosis of the species is given. It is recorded from South Australia from the birds Hirundo neoxena, Rhipidura leucophrys, R, flabellifera, Gymnorhina hypoleuca, and Pomatostomus superciliosus. Two trematodes from Grallina cyanoleuca may also be Plagiorchis maculosus. To avoid confusion in taxonomy, it is urged that authors give full details of treatment and fixation of worms. It is also desirable to know the age of the worm, and the number of specimens examined. Given details such as these, it is possible to make allowance for characters which may be variable. Tables are given, showing measurements of P. maculosus recorded by different authors since Rudolphi; of other species which are discussed for synonymy; and of South Australian specimens which have been studied in the present investigation. A history of knowledge of the life history is followed by an account of the life history in South Australia, in P. mdosus from swallows, wagtails, babblers and, experimentally, chickens. A description of the various laryal stages is given. The size of the stylet in the cercaria should not be used as a diagnostic character in this species. The synonymy is discussed. Plagiorchis clelandi, P. spatulatus, P. notubilis and P. orientalis are given as synonyms. It is suggested that examination of the types of Plagiorchis sp. from insectivorous birds, or animals which (normally or accidentally) ingest insects, may reduce the number of species still further. Plagiorchis russii is shown to be invalid, being a synonym of P. potanini. The three varieties, Plagiorchis muculosus anatis, P. maculosus citelli and P. maculosus motacillae, are discussed. The variety citelli shows no differences from the typical form, and is made a synonym. If the large size of the testes is a uniform character, the variety anutis stands, with var. motacillae a synonym. AN ACCOUNT OF PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS (RUD.), ITS SYNONYMY AND ITS LIFE HISTORY IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA by Mavrting ANcEL*® [Read 9 October 1958] SUMMARY A historical account of the parasitic trematode Plagiorchis maculosus (Rub) since its description in 1802 is given. An-amended diagnosis of the species is given, It is recorded from South Australia from the birds Hirundo neoxena, Rhipi- dura leucophrys, R, flabellifera, Gymnorhina kypoleuca, and Pomatastomus superciliosus, Two trematodes from Grallinu cyancleuca may also be Plagiorchis maculosus. To avoid confusion in taxonomy, it is urged that authors give full details of treatment and fixation of worms. It is also desirable ta know the age of ihe worm, and the number of specimens examined. Given details such as these, it is possible to make allowauce for characters which may be variable, Tables are given, showing measurements of P. maculosus recorded by different authors since Rudolphi; of other species which ure discussed for synonymy; and of South Australian specimens which have been studied in the present investigation. A history of knowledge of the life history is followed by an account of the life history in South Australia, nm P. muculosus from swallows, wagtails, babblers and, experimentally, chickens. A description of the various Jarval stages is given. The size of the stylet in the cercaria should not be used as a diagnostic character in this species. The synonymy is discussed. Plegiorchis clelundi, P. spatuletus, P. notabills and P.. orientalis are given as synonyms. It is suggested that examination of the types of Plagiorchis sp. from insectivorons birds, or animals which (norm- ay. accidentally) ingest insects, may reduce the mimber of spevics still rther. Plagiorchis russit is shown to be invalid, being a synonym of , prteanini. The three varieties, Plagiorchis maculosus anatis, P. mutulosus eitelli ancl P, maculosus motacillae, ave discussed, ‘The variety citelli shows no differences from the typical form, and is made a synonym. If the large size: of the testes is a uniform character, the variety anatis stands, with var. motacillae a synonyar INTRODUCTION In 1802, Rudolphi described Fasciola maculosa from the terminal part of the intestine of Hirwndo rustica. He gave as synonyms Fasciola hirundinis Froelich (1791) and Distema hirundinum Zeder (1800), from the rectum of Hirundo apus and H. urbica respectively, mentioning that, though their descriptions differed in many respects, the worm itsclf was very variable. In 1809 (p, 374) he referred ta it as Distoma maculosum, and in 1819 (pp, 382-3) recorded it (by this natne) fom Caprimulgus europaeus. The species was recorded or listed by various authors in the following century, but it was not until 1902 that an adequate figure was published, by Braun, who assigned the species to the genus Plagiorchis Liihe (1899).t * Departnent of Zoology, University of “Adelaide. - +On the same day that Lithe’s generic name appeared, Looss published the name Lepoderma for the same genus, Lithe did not name the genotype ¢ill later, and it would seem that Lepoderma should have had priority. However, relatively few workers have used the name since that time, and Plagiorchis. seerns now commonly accepted, although Dollfus in 1949, referring to family Lepodermatidae, gave Plagiovchidae as a synonym. Trans, Roy. Seo. 8. Aust. (1959), Vol, #2, Ye L. M. ANGEL Braun examined Rudolphi’s specimens, which he stated had deteriorated over the years, so that the species could not be sufficiently described from these specimens alone, However, they corresponded with similarly named examples from the Vienna, Munich and Kénigsberg collections, He gave figures of the dorsal and yeutral view of a specimen from Hirundo rustica from Kénigsberg. From the magnification viven the worm would be 2:7 0°'8 min. Braun gave rio real deseription of the species, but he referred to the variability in the size of the suckers (even among animals of the same size) and in the arrangement vf the yolk glands. In 1909, Lithe gave a kev and a description of 6 species of Plagiorchis, As this was the first real description of P. macrlosus to be published, a translation is given here;— "About 2-0-2:3 som. Tong: 0°5-0°7 ann. wide; oval in cross-section, Oral sneker about 0-2-3 nm. Ventral suckor approxinitels at and of first third of body Jength; about 0+15- (20 gam. in dimneter, Pharynx smaller, and ovary usually somewhat mallee, than the ventral sucker, Yolk glands lateral, extending from the pharynx to the hind end of the bodys ouly at the hind end spreading out to meet on fle dorsal surface. ‘Testes comparatively lurge, spherical, accupying about the third quarter of the body Jength. Uterus bchind testes forming no clearly detined! loops. Braun's figure and Lihe's diagnosis seem to have formed the basis of sub- sequent identifications, Table U1 lists the measurements recorded for P. maculosus from miny hosts since Liihe’s time, Tn 1929 Massino gave a kev to 24 species of the venus. This was based primarily on the position of the testes and secondarily on the relative sizes of ovary arid testes. In 1931, Schulz and Skorzow proposed two subgenera for Plagiorchis, namely, Plagiorchis and Multiglandularls, according to whether the yolk glands do not meet in front of the ventral sucker, or join to form a marked commissure. Plogiorchis maculosus was placed in the subgenus Plagiorchis In 1937 Olsen published 2 study of the Plagiorehiinae, which included a key to the subgenera und species of Plaglorchis. There were 43 species and 2 subspecies. (Olsen also listed 4 specics the descriptions of which were not available to hima.) it would seem that many of the characters given in Olsen's key are subject to a good deal of variation within any one species, and the key is, therefore, not very satisfactory. In 1932 Schulz had expressed the opinion that a critical revision of the whole genus was necessary; Plagiorchis cuntained same 50 species from various orders of vertebrates, but specimens shawed great variability, and a much-needed revision might reduce the number of species ta 15 or 20. Other authors have shared Schulz’s opinion of the desirability of a revision of the genus, but so far this has not been made. There are now some 90 described species of Plagtorchis, and the number seers likely to grow unless authors will appreciate the necessity of allowing for some considerable amount of variation of characters within a specics, whether due to differences in age, fixation or treatment, etc,, and for the possibility that some species may neeur in a mare or less wide range of hosts. Ulmer (052 in a critique of methods for the measurement of parasitic worms, thought that much of the present-day confusion in taxonomic studies night be avoided if authors would stute, as far as possible, the age of the worms, whether specimens hud previously heen fattened, and what fixatives were cm- ployed. Cover glass pressure may cause marked changes, not only in hody size, but also in the shape and relationship of non-muscular organs, such as the genitalia, which aré often of taxonomic importance. Gilford (1955) exumined 300 specimens of Allussogonaporus marginalis, wid reported that the relative positions of internal structures of the worm change PLAGIORCIUS MACULOSUS 287 during growth. Flattening during preparation for staining alsu will alter size, shape and pusitiun of these structures. Callot (1946) gave measurements for a living specimen af Lepederma macu- lastem (Rud.), and for the same specimen, fixed, These figuies are shown in Table 3. It will be noticed that though the size of tho oral sucker remained unchanged, the yentral sucker was smaller in fixed than in living material. The pharynx, tue, 140% 75 p living, was only 75 * 50 p fixed, One of the characters Olsen used in his key was the position of the ural sucker, which, according to the key, is subterminal in Plagiorchis maculosus, In his deseription, Rudolpbi stated that the mouth aperture was terminal, Among 14 specimens collected from 7 swallows from Wellington, S, Aust. in March 1956, most showed the oral sucker terminal, but in at least one it was sub-terminal, It is clear from an examination of such a series, as syell as of living animals, that the apparent position of the oral sucker may depend on tle position and state of contraction of the animal at the time of fixation. Again, too much stress should not be placed on the relative sizes of the organs (oral and ventral suckers, pharynx, ovary and testes) and of their posi- tions in the body. Descriptions of trematodes have often been given from one, or very few, specimens, and the condition of the animal (whether living, com- pressed, ete.) is seldom stated. The absence of a receptaculum seminis was given by Lihe (1909) as one of the characters of the genus Playiorchis, Olsen (1937) put P. noblei Park, 1936 inte 2 new genus (Plagiorchoides), on the grounds that it had a recepta- culum seminis, and in the same year, for this and other reasons, Mehra trans- ferred it to Neolepoderma ug. In 1939, Park suygested that if the possession af a seminal receptacle is to be a generic charkidter the study of serial sectiuns ix absolutely necessary for diagnosis. In 1943, Baer (p. 45) stated that the presence of a seminal receptacle was typical of the genus Plagiorchis; this was quoted by Dollfus (1949, p. 437) without comment. Yamaguti (1954) recorded P. maculosus trom single specimens, from Sturnia philippinensis and Passer montanus fram Macassar. The specimen from the first host was examined as a mounted specimen; there was a prepharynx and a smal] receptaculum seminis, which sugyests that the identification is doubtful. On the other hand, the excretory system was studied in the second specimen, living. The excretory formula was given as 2{(2+ 2)+(24+2)}=16, IE all the flame cells were observed, the specimen cuuld not belong to Plagiorchis, in which the flame cell pattern is 2{(3+3+93)+(3+3+3)} (McMullen, 1937). However. flame cells ave not easily seen, and with only one trematode te study, it is prubable that some were missed. The presence or absence of a receptaculum seminis seems thus to be a character of dowbtful value. Without good serial sections, it would seem unwise to be dogmatic on fits presence of absence in Plogiorchis species. It was wot observed in the present investigation, although serial sections of two specimens (from swallow and wagtail} were studied. The shape of the cirrus has been made a descriptive character, especially in the earlier accounts, Examination of a number of specimens of P. marculasus in the present investigation suggests that its apparent shape and size are variable, probably depending largely on the state uf contraction of the animal, and the extent to which the cirrus is extruded. Fig. 1 shows a relatively broad cirrus, not greatly elongated; in most specimens in which it was everted, it was very narrow, One specimen (from a chick) showed the narrow cirrus projecting a 265 L, M. ANGEL distance of 245 » from the genital pore; in another {Frost a siallow), self- fertilization was observed, the cirrus bemg inserted well into the metraterm. From records of Plagiorchis maculosus (details of which appear in the fure- golig pages und in the tables) and from observations recorded in the present paper. the following amended diagnosis has been compiled:— Plagiorchis maculosus (Rud.) Diagnosis—Mainly in fnsectivarous birds; also occasionally in other birds and in mammals, Snail bast a lymnaeid; second intermediate host an insect with an aquatic larva. Just under 1 mm.-t mm. long; 0-4-1-25 mm, wide. Suckers about the same size, or oral sucker slightly larger than acetabulum. Acetabulum at end of first third of body length, or further caudad; well behind intestinal bifureation. Pre- pharynx, if present, very short, Oesophagus present in cercaria; very short or apparently absent in adult. Intestinal cacca extend to near posterior end of body; wide, though not necessarily fixed in this position, Ovary smaller thao acetabulum, or nearly cqual to it; smaller than testes. Vitellaria extend anteriorly and laterally between pharynx and anterior border of acetabulum; posteriorly they extend to hind end of body, and Selds may remain separate or may become confluent in mid-line. The name maecntoses was evidently given by Rudolphi fur the testes and evary—two or three “light spots* behind the ventral suckers which were especially characteristic for this worm, Other authers have altributed the name to the spination of the fore part uf the body, and even to “the diffuse geitnules. which remain from the eyes af the cercaria”™. This trematode is now identified from South Australia from the swullow ( Hirteulo neoxena ), the willy wagtail (Rhipidura letwcophrys), the grey fantail (R, flabellifera), the magpie (Gymmnorhina hypoleuca) and the white-browed babbler (Pomatostomus superciliosus). Measurements of the parasite from these hosts and from two chickens infected experimentally are given in Table 1. This table also includes measurements of two specimens of Plegtarchis from the Murray magpie (Grallina cyanaleica). It is considered probable that they are Plovi. orchis maculosus, but one specimen was not well preserved and does not look quite typical, and the other showed the ovary relatively larger than in specimens from other hosts, Tu the absenve of further specimens. from this host it is per- haps safer to identify these two trematodes as Plagiorchis sp. Most of the specimens from: Pomatostomus superciliosus did not resemble the typical Plagiorchis maculosus ut first sight. They had been fixed, when alive, with- out any pressure; they were relatively short and stout, the anterfor sucker way always subterminal, and the two suckers appeared to be placed clase together, due to the curvature of the body. The skin was wrinkled and rather dark. In spite of this apparent dissimilarity it was net possible to name any essential differ- ences, and sizes of organs conformed to the pattern of P. aaculosus from other EXPLANATION OF FIGURES Figs 1-10. Plagiorchis mactlosus, Figs. 13, 4. Adults from swallow (March. 1956); N.B.—Variatlons in extent of vitellaria anteriorly, position of testes, oral sucker, eto.: 1, staimedt alum carmins. Fig. 2, T.5. Adult from wagtail, through genital pore. Figs. 3-8, Aduilis fron babbler, 6-8 fixed alive, uncompressed; 5, fixed after deutls, Pig, 9, Cerewia; fixed specimen, pusitiog vf some flane cells shown, Fie, LO, Stylet, Fiz. 4 is to the sumo scale at Pig. 3. Figs, 6, 7, 8 are to the same svale as Fin. & b, bladder; ¢, cirrus; e, cxeretory canal; v.p., genital parc; i, intestme: moct,, metruterm: m.%., Mehilis’ gland: yd., yolk duet; vg., yolk glinds: yr, yolk reservoir PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS Fe en 274) L. M. ANGEL hosts, although the distances between organs was generally reduced owing to the contracted state of the specimens, A few of the trematodes from the same col- lection had been fixed after death (Pig. 5); they were extended, were not dark in appearance, and were much more like P, mdculosus from other hosts, Of 8 specimens obtained experimentally from chicks, 4 were dissected when alive to obtain the eggs, so that measurements uf only 4 are given. The suckers of the dissected specimens were measured in formalin and are included in the measurements, LIFE HISTORY Historical As early as the 1850's there were suggestions concerning the life history of Dixtomum maculosum, Filippi’s Cercaria virgula (named in 1837), the sporo- eysts of which were found in Velevata piscinalis and Paludina impura, and which encysted in perlids and some other aquatic insect larvac, was suggested as the larva of Distomum maculosum. Filippi and Diesing, both referred to this. 1 have not had access to all of Filippis papers, but in 1901 von Linstow men- tioned that Filippi (1857) assumed, and probably rightly, that D, maculosum was the adult of these larval forms. Diesing (1858) stated that whether Cercurie viegula was the true larva of Distomum macufosum was still sub judice, These two molluscs belong to different families, neither of which is closely related to the Lymnaeidae. The more recent work of Néller and Ullrich (1927), Strenzke (1952), and the present investigation has shown a lyninaeid to be the snail intermediary for Plagiorchis maculosus. tt seems likely that Filippi was identifying two different cercariae in his Cercaria virgafe, and Chat neither ot thei was the cercaria of Plagiorchis maculosus. Von Linstow described thick-walled, oval cysts in the neuropteran, Drusus trifdes. The contained metacercaria agreed so closely with Distomum macu- losum that he considered it belonged to this species. He gave a figure af the metacercaria which showed ovary, testes and cirrus, but no uterus. The figure certainly suggests Plagiorchis, but from the description of the cyst, as well as its size, it seems unlikely that the species is mactdosa. Noller and Ullrich (1927) reported that a xiphidiocercaria of the “Armita™ group, from Limnaca stagnalis, encysted in chironomid larvac. After adult and larval chironomids had been fed to canaries, finches and other small! birds, trema- todes identified as Plagiorchis maculosus were recovered. (35 mature trema- todes were found in a canary on the 9th day.) Photographs of the various stages were given; though these do not show much detail, there is no reasen (af appearance or size) te daubt that P. maculosws was the teematode involved, Although 7-week-old clicks were fed many larvae on successive days, none be- came infected. Néller and Ullrich did not give a description of the sporocyst and cercaria, which they hoped to do Jater. Strenzke (1952) gave an account of the life history and a description of the various stages of P, maculosus in Holstein. Sporocvsts occurred in the mid-gut of Radix auricularia, the cyst was found as a natural occurrence in the larvae of Chironomus thummi and Psectrotanypus tarius, and experimentally in larvae of the midge, Chaoborus crystallinus, and Culex pipiens. Two specimens uf Aide- mosyne cantans were intected (with 85 and 262 trematodes respectively) by feeding with infected chironomids, Experiments in South Australia On 5th March, 1955, 2 of 55 Lymnaea lessoni collected at Mannum (River Murray) were found to be infected with a small xiphidiocercaria. One of these snails wus used for the following work. PLAGIOACHIS MACULOSUS 27L The cercuriae were found to encyst in mosquito larvae, From 8/3/55 the vereariae were put in small dishes eich day with a batch of mosquito larvae. As the larvae and pupae died, or the adult aaa aS hatched, they were fed to voung chickens. Two of these chickens were later found to be infected with utult trematodes which were identified as Plagiorchis maculosus, and three were uninfected.’ Must of the larvae could have contained several cysts, and some of them possibly many. The attempted infections of these five chickens may be summarised as follows:— (1) Fed with 50 larvae; died 12 days after first, and 8 days after last larvae fed. No trematodes recovered, (2) Fed with 81 larvae, etc.; killed 49 days after first and 40 days after last larvae fed. No trematodes recovered. (3) Fed with about 250 larvae, ete.; killed 40 days after Grst and 25 days alter last Jarvae fed. No trematodes recovered. (4) Fed with 227 larvae, ete; died 13 days after the first and 3 days after last larvae fed. Six adult trematodes recovered. (5) Fed with 216 larvae, ete; killed 21 days after the first and 14 days after last larvae fed. Two adult trematodes recovered. The results from chicks (4) and (5) show that the trematodes had reached maturity within 13 days, and possibly less, after the cysts were ingested. (Stronzke fed finches with infected larvae and found tematode eggs in the faeces 7 days later. In one finch he recovered 85 trematndes, and in the second 262 specimens; the birds died as a result of the infection.) The foregoing results suggest that chicks, not being the natural dehnitive hast of P, maculosus, do not become infected unless given a massive dose of the cysts uc that the infections ure lost early. The six Plagiorchis maculosus from chick (4) were left in saline from 48/4/55, and the eggs laid, with those dissected from three of the trematodes, were kept for a further seven days in boiled water, which was changed daily, No miracidia were seen during this time. On 15/4/55 the dish containing the esos was put in w small infection tank with 12 young laboratory-raised Lajmnaca lessoni, One snail was completely disintegrated when found, 32 days kiter. Of the remaining snails, 10 died, in 39, 42, 43, 45, 48, 48, 4, 53, 53 and 53 days. Sporocysts were found in all, tailed cercariae being present in those which died in 43, 48, 49, 53 and 53 days, The twelfth snail was isolated, for the first time, 56 days ufter it had been placed in contact with the eggs, and was found to be emitting cercariae; it died § days later. Eggs from the two Plagiorchis nuculosus from chick (3) were left at room temperature for 17 days before being placed with 9 young Lymnaea lessoni, It is not knuwn whether the eggs were still viable. The snails died from 42 Lo 132 days afterwards, and none was infected. Mosquito larvae were infected with cereariae trom the intected snail. Only about 50 infected larvae were available tu feed to two chicks when the suail died; the chicks were killed 7 weeks later, but were not infected- Life history studies were alsa carried ont with Plagiorchis maculosus from swallows, wagtails and babblers. Eggs laid in normal saline were collected, and others were dissected from the adult trematodes. The eggs were kept in boiled water at room Lemperature during the week, and were examined daily when the water was changed. Over week-ends they were kept at 4° C. © Rees (1952, p. 93) noted that a muuntid specimen of P. (F.) meculosus (from a turkey) in the Natural History Musenm showed na cifferences from the sume speetes reeavered fram the normal bird hosts, bf f°) 1. M, ANGE, Lyimnaed lessoni reared in the laboratory were used. Dead snails were dis- sected under binocular microscope. Results are summarised below; the result “apparently negative” means that larval stages were not seen. (Records of deaths of snails which were too disintegrated for examination are not given, ) Pomatostomus superciliosus Egys laid 13/3/56; dissected 7/3/56; put with snails 9/3/56, One snail apparently negative in 14 days. Four snails had sporocysts, but no free cercariae, at 27, 33, 34 and 39 days. Hirundo neoxena Eggs dissected from 4 trematodes 14/3/56; put with 12 snails 22/3/56, Three snails apparently negative when they died in 15, 21 and 21 davs, 1 snail had sporocysts at 21 days. One snail had numerons sporocysts and a few motile cereariae at 39 days. One snail emitted cercariae when tested at 40 days. (It had not done so when previously isolated at 26 days.) Died at 43 days. Rhipidura Jeucophrys Kuus dissected from 6 trematodes 13/3/57; and from 2 tremutodes 18/3,'57; put with. snails 23/3/57. Three snails were dead and apparently negative at 17, 24 and 36 days. Remaining 7 snails all gave abundant cercariae when first isolated at 45 days, (These snails died at 45, 46, 47, 48, 50, 69 and 73 days.) The above results show that the shortest time obseryed for the production of cereariae was 39 days (in L, lessoni subjected to infection in March), and it seems probable that this was not much longer than the actual time taken for infections at this time of year: Snails other than Lyninaea lessoni have also heen used in experirnents on a number of oveasions. In the eurlier experiments the trematode eggs were put with the snails within a day of being dissected from the trematode; although all results were negative, this cannot be regarded as sivnificant, in the absence of L. lessoni, since it is probable that the eggs would not be infective for several days after being laid or removed from the adult. However, in March 1956, § Amerianna sp. did not become infected in 21, 25, 38, 36 and 64 (4) days, in the sume tank in which 3 Lymnaca lessoni were infected with Plagiorchis maculosus from the swallow; and in the same month, 4 Amerianna sy. were uninfected after 56 and 62 (3) days, in the same tank in which 4 Lymnaea lessoni showed spore- evsts as early as 27 days. OBSERVATIONS ON STAGES IN LIFE CYCLE The Egg and Mincidium The eggs averaged about 30 » * 19 x, but the length varied From 29-31-5 a, and the breadth from 17-20 ,. There is no evidence as to the hatching of a miracidium. IE£ there is a free-swimming smiracidium, the experiments suggest that hatching does nut occur earlier than 7 days after the egg is laid. Strenzke did not find a mira- cidium. It seems probable that hatching follows ingestion of the eges by the snail host. It was not possible ta make out any detail in viable eggs under ordinary high power, though the miracidium was seen to move within the shell several days after the cogs were laid. PLACIORCHIS MACT'LOSUS eal) The Sperecyst The sporocysts were small and contained only a small wumber of cercariac. They corresponded in appearance with that shuwn in Strenzke's photograph. Formulinised specimens measured up to 0-8 * 0-14 mm, in snails infected 46 days previously; while in snails infected 39 days previously the largest sporocyst observed was 0-54 ~ 0-14 mm. Strenzke’s figures were 0-7-1) mm, ™ 0» 20-0-25 mm.; his measurements were probably of living material aud in newly Killed snails, In the present investigation sporucysts were not examined until the souil was found dead, und under these circumstances most of the cercuriae have escaped from the syarocyst, leaving it thinner in appearance. As shown by the diynensions above, the size is probubly also dependent to some extent on age. The Cercaria The cerearia has been found as a natural infection of Lymnaea lessoni from the River Murray swamps, from Wellington to Morgan, in 73 of over 8600 of the snails examined between April 1937 and March 1953 (0:85 per cent. infec- tion). It has also been found in a small pond in a garden at Tailem Bend in 37 of 1700 L. lessoni since 1943 (3-8 per cent. ). The eercariac emerged normally in the early morning (before 9.30 a.m.), Their activity diminished noticeably during the morning, and by afternaon only a fow were still swimming: the remainder were stil alive, but Iving at_the bottows ot the tube. About 4 pan. some cereariae were put at 5° C,, and 24 hours later, when brought vut to ruum temperature, they swam quite actively. Measurements of cereariae collected st different times from naturally in- fected individual L. lessuni, as well as fromm L. lessoni which had been experi- mentally infected with eggs from different bird hosts, are given in Table 3, They were fixed by adding an equal volume of boiling LO per cent. formalin to the waiter in which they were swimming. It will be noticed thut there is a slight variation in size range for the cercariae from individual hosts. This is regarded ws beinw of nu significanve, considering the number of variable factors involved, The cereariae were deliberately chosen for measurement from those which lad been fixed in the most extended position, The tle af day at which they are killed is likely also to affect the state, whether extended or otherwise, Strenzke pave the following measurements for cercariae “killed by slight heating”. Length 250-300 »; breadth 120-140 «2; diameter of oral sucker 60 jp, ventral sucker 36 p. The size vt the stvlet in this particular cercaria is somewhat variable, The stylet is also rather fragile in formalin, and splits lengthwise under even moderate pressure of a coverslip. Tt was difficult with almost all the formalinised material to find an adequate number of stylets which were in good condition aud also in a suitable position to be measnred accnrately. The actual range for length of forinatinised stylets was 21-5-24-8 x,* in the comparatively small nomber nvea- sured, while Cor living specimens it was 24-3-28-9 », In all cases measurements an stylets uf living cercariac were greater (by 1-2-3-8 J than on stylets of formaliniscd cercariae from the same sul. Strenzke gave a measurement of 25-27 », and this would probably be the normal range in oar material, though larger and smaller specimens do occur. Precise length of stylet should not be used as a diagnostic character for Plagiorchis maculosus, The stylet is shapely, 6-7 » across the shoulders, the main stem being of fairly uniform diameter except near the base, where it increases slightly, being about 4-1-4°5.. The base itself is rounded aud hus no plop. © In 1951 we reported (Johnston and Angel, 1941. p. 54) that the only pommon xiphicio- eercaria found by us in Lymnaea lessoni was a form with stylet 24 y lone "WNhia ds Te vercaria naw identified us the larva of Plagiorehis muculosus. 274 L. M. ANGEL The whole surface of the body is beset with rows of tiny spines. The accta- bului is situated in the posterior half of the body. There is an obvious pharynx, but the rest of the alimentary system is not casily seen. Sometimes there appeared to be a slight prepharyuxs if this is indeed present (and not an artefact), it is, as was noted for the adult, very short, There is a short oesophagus; this, and the alimentary caeca, were very narrow when seen at all. The excretory system is very difficult to elucidate. Treatment with intra vitam stains such as basic fuchsin in saline, improved it only slightly. The gland and vystogenous cells which oceur throughout the body are sometimes ex- tvemely opaque and murky in appearance, und it is impossible to see through them. The bladder itself can generally be seen quite clearly. It is Y-shaped, and in life is continually changing shape; the upper part of the stem sometimes contracts so strongly that the bladder appears to consist of two parts, the pas- terior One rounded, the anterior one with short, wide arms in the form of a V. MeMullen (1937) showed the main excretory vessels arising from the tips of the arms of the bladder for Plugiorchis spp. in the material examined here it was almost impossible to come to u decision. At one time the vessels would appear tn urise lerminally, at another it would seem cqually certain that they were sub-terminal. It was puinted out for FP. jaenschi (Johnston and Angel; 195) ) that the twisting of the main and accessory tubes, with other factors, made the supposed point of entry of the main vessels into the bladder a matter to be regarded with some reserve, The anterior and posterior collecting vessels diverge from the main excretory tuhe at a point level with the middle of the acetabulum, burt, of course, lateral to it. Beyond this, little detail of the exere- tory system was seen, with the exception of odd flame cells, as shown in Fig. Y. Refrachle granules are scattered throughout the body. They are not abundant, as in some cereariae; the size is variable, some being very small, The gland celly occur in about 3 rows from just anterior to the acetabulum to midway between it and the pharynx. Laterally. and also posteriurly to the acetabulum, the body is filled with cells which stain with neutral red and faintly with methy- lene blue. They may be only cystogenous cells, but if this is so it seems strange that the anterior part of the body is quite free of them. These cells stain a uniform pale pink with neutral red, some of the nuclei showing a bright red. Without stain the cells appeur greenish, finely granular, with clear nuclei. In the more darkly stained specimens the bladder shows up clearly as an unstained area. The ducts of the gland cells, which showed only in the pre-acetabular region, were greenish, finely granular, aud seemed to be only about three im mimber on each side. The genital primordium shows after staining With teutral red as a mass of small undifferentiated cells in the region of the future cirrus complex. The Cyst Cereariae encysted readily. in mosquito laryae. The cysts were fod most commonly in the head and the abdomen, and a few were found in the thorax. In the pupa it was difficult to determine the exact site of infection. One larvae which was examined after 48 hours with the hast snail contained 117 cysts—29 in the bead, 3 in the thorax, and 85 in the abchunen, The cysts resembled those figured by Noller and Ullrich (1927) and photo- graphed by Strenzke (1952). PLAGIORCHI3 MACULOSUS 275 They were small, rounded and fairly thin-walled; the dark conerctions in the excretory bladder were a regular and characteristic feature, The bladder showed through the cyst wall as a very dark Y or V shape, in which the arms and tail stem were short and stout. Cysts one day uld measured about 90-105 . x 90-08 », and three cysts of 20 dave old (which were the largest of alkomit 80 aaaeoredd ) were 106-12) p x 106-113 4. The average size of 80 cysts, most of which were from 1-6 days old, was 106-100 jx. Strenzke recorded the cysts as being usually round, seldam eval; an average of 100 cysts 128 » in diameter, the range 109-150 «. The cyst described by von Linstow which was mentioned previously in this paper, was thick-walled, oval and measured 440 * 300 4. As stated above, this Was probably another species of Plagiorchis, According to von Linstow, Filippi gave the cyst diameter as 190 jx. The natural secandary host is probably a chicouomid, though no doubt the cercaria sometimes utilizes mosquito and other insect larvae under natural conditions. Chironomid larvae were not available in the laburatury at any of the times that infections were being tried, Animals used in trial infections, from none of which were vevsts recovered, were the crustaceans, Daphnia sp., shrimp (Puratya australiense), yabbie (Cherax destructor), amphipod (¢ *hiltona subtenuis ); the molluscs Lenameria sp., Planorbis isingi, Lymmuca lessani; 2 leeches; the fish Gambusia affinis, and tadpoles ( Limnodynasies sp.). The only other xiphidiocercaria which has been found as a parasite of Lymnaea. lessoni in South Australia, Cercuria Plagiorchis jaenschi Johnston and Angel, 1951, is very similar in size and appearance to C. Plagiorchis maculosus. It is distinguishable in fresh material, without detailed microscopical examina- tion, only by the size of the stylet, which is noticeably larger (34 ») in C. Plagi- orchis jacnschi. The gland cells are more oxtensive in C, Plagiorchis maculasus. The normal secondary intermecliate host of P. jaenschi was thought to be the crustacean, Cherax destructor (in which encystation took place readily); in Plagiorchis maculosus encystation occurs in insect larvae, but satirarenaty not in crustaccans. Plagiorchis maculosus has now been recorded from a large mamber af birds, inust of which ace insectivorous, and from the rodent, Citellus musieus planicola. It was Found in 50 per cent. of the Citellus oxamined by Schulz (1932) in what was apparently a lairly wide suryey, Ht appears that Plaviorchis mactlosus has ho great specificity for its adult host, thongh fle second intermediate hast is very restricted, It seems likely that many species uf Plagiorchis have been de- serihed as new largely because they occurred in nrelated hosts, and an examina- thu of the types may indicate a large number of synonyms of P. maculosus. T have been able te examine types of P, clelandi Johnstan, 1917, and P. spatulatus Johnston, 1917 (Australian Museum W.435 and W.434 respectively), and was unable to find any points by which they could be senahiabed from the Australian specimens of P. maculosus I have examined, and measurements of which are given in this paper. ohnston stated that P. clelandi was more closely related to P. maculasus (Rud.) than to any other species. [¢ differed mainly in the arrangenient of the fields of the yolk glands, which in the Australian species vever extended as far furwards us the fork of the intestine, and always remained separate in the pas- terior region. In the type specimen the follicles of the yolk glands have taken up the stain more deeply in some parts than in others; elose examination of the a6 L. M. ANGEL dorsal surtace shaws that some follicles do extend between the two main fields and that there are even one or two follicles right in the median line, The testes are bigger than in most spevimens examined, but t do not consider this justifies the placing of the species in the varicty anetis. The inclusion of P. spetulatus as a synenym oF P, indevlosus means that the lower range for size of this species must be extended. However, there seem Te other differences by which to separate the two species, Accortling to Johnston, P. spatulatus resembled P. maculosus more closely than any other species. He separated P. elelandi from P. spatulatus on a number of pints, Lut especially in the extent of the yolk gland fields, which extended further forward, were more lateral ia front of the testes and extended further in towards the middle behind them in P. spatulatus. Johnston (p. 248) noted that wheveas P. clelandi, P. maculosus, P. nishetit were from passerine birds, P. sputiulatus wecurred in one of the Motacillidae (Anthus australis), He did not compare it with P, notabilis Nigoll, 1905, which was from Anthus obscurus and Motacilla flava, Nicoll gave as the chief diag- nostic features of the species. the short cirrus-pouch and the forward position «F the ovary. The figure is presumably drawn from the one adult specimen from Anthes obscurus, which was described first, and “the main leatures of difference in the specimen from Motaoilla” were then indicated, From the figure, the anterior part of te worm is contracted, and this seems enough to explain the apparent forward position of ovary and, with the fact that the cirrus is everted, the shortness of the eirrus pouch. Yamaguti (1954, p. 337) noted that the pasterior extent of the cirrus pouch heing subject to considerable variation in the members of this geous, does not constitute by itself a decisive criterion in specific determination. In 1954, Hertuon-Smith and Long recovered 35 trematedes fram the snuill intestine of a pullet from Scotland, which were identified as Plagiorchis notalilis by Dr. S. Prudhoe of the British Museum {Natural History). The metacercariae were found encysted in the larvae of chironomid and other fies. T can find no record of where the type is deposited, It scems probable that Plegiorchis notabilts is a synonym of P. qeerdesstis. Nicoll (1909) described from Tuwnsville, Queensland, Lepoderna nisbeti from Chibia (Dicrura) bracteata. Nicolls igure is not very detailed, and he stated that the two specimens, from which the description was made, were “somewhat macerated”. Nicoll did not designate a type, nor state where the specimens were deposited, but Mr, A. |. Bearup, of the Australian Institute of Tropical Medicine, has sent me two spirit specimens which are obviously the ones from which Nicull gave bis description (A.T.M. No. 121). Mr. Bearup tells me that the label is in Nicoll’s handwriting; the details ure similar to those given in the paper. Onc worm was in pieces, the other very dark. Though treatment with trisodium phosphate improved the intact wunn, it was not m good enough condition to enable any real description ta be given. It is not possible to say that this is a synonym of Plagiorchis maculosus, though the differences (from the description and the figure) may well be attri- butable to the poor condition of the specimens. Nicoll did not name any dif- ferential characters for the specics. Yamaguti and Mitunagea (1943) stated that it seemed probable that P- orientalis Park (1939) from the Korean Hirundo daurica nipalensis was identical with P, maculosus. Park had distinguished it from var, citelli by (1) the vitel- laria heing confluent dorsally, and (2) the fact Wat the civrus sac extended only ta the posterior margin of the acetabulum, PLAGIORGHIS MACULOSUS a7F VARIETIES OF PLEAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS In 1928 Skrjabin described P. macvlosus var. enafis, from 1 specimen found in | of 2 ducks (Casarca casarca) from Transbaikalia. A characteristic ciffer- ence belween this variety and the typical P. maculesus was the structure of the Vitelline follicles which, in the variety, were rather simall individually but very closely placed, and in the typical form “plus gros, plus grands” and fess thickly distributed. From Skrjabin's figure, the most ebviuus feature is the sizo of the lestes, which appear selatively huge. The measurements given were 0-4 mm. diameter for cach, which is appreciably larger than in any specimen pres ionsly recorded, or in any examined in the present collection. “The size of the eggs, ulso, 36 * 22 », is somewhat greater than in other P. maculosus, The condition of the animal, whether living, dead, compressed, etc., was not mentioned. To my knowledge, this variety has not been recorded since it was described, Massing, in 1929, included a description of Skejabin’s specimmen, His paper has an obvious mistake in labelling, His Fig. § which was labelled P- maculasus var. analinus, corresponds to Skrjabin’s. Fig. 2 of Plagiorchis potanini, while his Fic. 8, called P, potanini, corresponds with Skrjabin’s Fig. 1 of P. maculasngs var. eeretis, Mehra (1937), who had apparently seen Massino’s fyures and not Skrahin's, lransterred Lepoderma maculosus var. anatinus to a new species, 1. (Multi- glandularis) russti on the grounds that it did put belong to the subgenus Plagi- archis, us did P. maculosus. The species P. russii is thus invalid, being a synonym of P. potanini. P. maciulosus var. citelli was described by Schulz in 1932 from the redent Citellus musicus planicola, Sehuly, stated that it did not really differ from the typical Plagiorchis maculosus described in 1802, or from Skijabin's P. maculosus anatis (from a duck); on the other hand, it was very near to P. popawt Palinp- sestow which was described from a dog and was later found by Skworzow in apig. Schulz placed it as a separate subspecies because of its hast, but thought it possible that when more material was available and the biology of the parasite hetter knuwn, it might be necessary to synonymise these previously mentioned firms, Ju 1930 Yamuguti described P. maculosus motacillae from Motacilla cinerea easpica. He stated that it differed from the closely related Plagiorchis notabilis Nicoll, 1909, F. spafulafus Johnston, L917, and P, meculosus (Rud.), in the pos- terior position of the testes, From his figure, the anterior border of the anterior testis is at exactly the middle of the body. The posterior testis docs appear to lie nearer to the posterior end of the body than is trsual in P.. maculosus, but this is partly due to the large size of the testes, and partly perhaps to the con- tracted state of the body, which is evident fram the figure in the anterior region. Yamuguti did not mention P. maculosus anatis, in which the testes ave large and extend almost as far posteriorly as in P. maculosus motacillae. There seems no valid distinguishing feature between these twu varictics. If the large size of the testes is a uniform character, the variety dnetis should stand, with var. mota- cillae a synonym, However, anutis was described from a single specimen, and Yamagutis motacillae was described from only 3 specimens, 1-0-1+5 mm. long, in which the range of size for the testes was 0-+15-0-3L * U-15-0-28 mm., while the suckers varied only slightly. The size uf the testes may be variable, or apparent differences may be attributable to treatment or fixation. ST L. M. ANGEL ACKNOWLEDGMENTS The earlier collections of adult Plagiorehis maculosus were made by the late Professor T. Harvey Johnston. Thanks are due to Mr. H, T, Condon and to Mr. B. C. Cotton of the South Australian Museum; to Mr, Condon for advice on the identification and relationships of the birds and to Mr. Cotton for advice on the molluses. I am also indebted to the Director of the Australian Museum, Sydney, and ta Mr, A. J. Bearup, of the Australian Institute of Tropical Medicine, Sydney, for courtesy in enabling me to study type material, REFERENCES Basu, J. G., 1943. Bull. Soc. Neuchatel, Se. Nat. 68, pp. 338-84. ‘Les trématades parasites de de musaraigne dean Neomys fodiens, Braun, M,, 1902. Zool, Jahrb., Jena, Abt. Syst. 1G (1), pp, 1-162. Fascinliden der Vozul. Catto, i 1946, Ann. Parasitol, 21 (3-4), pp. 199-201. Matériaux pour servir a la Raune des Distomes de France. Dresine, K. M., 1858. Sitzungsb, K, Akad. Wissensch. Wien, Math—Natunv. CL, 32 (23), pp. 807-390. Revision der Myzhelminthen, Abtheilung: Tremuteden Doutrus, R. Ph., 1949. Ann. Parasitol, 24 (5-6), pp. 436-442. Distama rubeng F. Dujarcin, 1845 (= exasperatum Rudolphi, 1819), retronvé en France et redeécrit. be Finrppr, F., 1857. Mem. R. Accad. Se. Torino 2. 5., 16. Cl, Se. Fis..e Mut, pp, 419-142, fis. 1-21. Deuxiéme uidinoire pour servir & Vhistoire génétique dex trénatudes (Read Apr. 15, 1853), : Gitroxw, J. H, 1955. J. Parasit., 41 (6), Scot. 2, Suppl, pp. 27-24. A re-study of the genus Allassozonoporus (Olivier, 1938) Macy, (940, Homrox-Smrri, P., and Lone, P. L., 1954, Vet, Reeord., 66 (41), p. G11. The occurrence of the fluke Plagiorchis natabilis Nicoll, 1909 in the small intestine of iw domestic fowl Jounsrox, S. J., 1917. Jour, Prac. Hoy. Soe, N.S.W,, 50, pp. 187-261, Plates IN-XIX. On the tramatedes of Australian birds. Jourstow. 1. H., and Ancen, L, M.. 195). Trans, Roy. Sow. $.4., 74 (1), pp. 49-55. The lite. history of Plagiorchis jaenschi, 9 oew tremutade From the Ansteallan water rat, vow Linsrow, O. F. B. 1901. Arch. Mikr. Anat, 58 (1), pp. 182-198) pls, 8-9, figs, 1-30. Beghachtungen an Telminthen des senekenbergischen natarhistorischen Musenms, dex Breslaner zoologischer Instituts wnt! anderen. Lower, M.. 1909. Siisswasserfauma Deutschlands (Tiraner)}, Wett. 17, Vo) 217 pp. Para- sitische Plattwiirmer: I Trematodes. MoMuuton, D, B., 1937. Jour. Parasit, 23 (3), pp. 244-258, A discussione of the taxonomy of the family Plagiorchiidae Lihe, 1901, and related trematodes. Massrno, B. G., 1929. Zontralbl. Bakteriol, 2. Abt, 78 (1-7), pp. 125142. Die Trema- tuden der Gattung Plagiarchis Lithe, 1899 der Vogel Russland, Beitrag zur Kenatnis dey Helminthenfauna Russlunds. Means, H, R., 1937. Ztschr. Parasitenk. Berlin, 9 (4), pp, 429-469, ffs, Certain new and already known. distomes of the Family Lepodermatidae Odkner (Trematocda), with «a discussion on the classification of the Family. Nicora, W., 1909. Quart. J. Mier, Se. n, s., 53 (3). pp. S9L487, pis. 9-10. Studies on the strueture and classificution of the divenetic trematodes. Nicont, W.. 1914. Parasilolovy, 6 (4), pp. 333-350, pls, 23-24. The trematode parasites of North Queensland. [. Néuier, W., and Uneuricn, K., 1927. ‘Sitvungsh. Cesellsch, Naturf. br, Berlin (4-7), py. §1-96, pl. 1 (Plate hound with (8-10), issued 1928). Die Entwicklung einer Plagivrehis- Art. (Bin Buitrag zur Kenntnis der Cercariae arinatue.) Ousen, O. W., 1937. ‘tr. Am, Mier, Sov. 56 (3), pn. 311-339. A systematic study of the trematode sub-family Plagiorchiinae Pratt, 1902, Park, J, T., 1939. Keijo J. Med., 10 (1). pp. 1-6, pl. 1. Trematodes from Mammaha and Aves. II Two new teernatodes of Plagiorchidue: Plagtorehoides rhinolophi u. sp. aud Plagtorehis orientalis n. sp. from Tyosen ( Korea). Rexs, G., 1952. Purusitology, 42 (1 and 2), pp, 92-113, ‘The structure of the adult and larval stages of Plagiorehis (Multiglandularis) megalurchis mn, wam, From the turkey and an experiinental demonstration of the life history. Rupocew, ©. A,, 1803, Arch, Zool, u, Zoot, 3 (1), pp. 61-125. Forsetaing der Boo- hachtungen tuber die Kingeweidewiitmer. PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS 279 Rupotra, C. A,, 1809. Entozoorum sive vermium intestinalium historia naturalis, 2 (1) 457 pp. Ruporrur C. A., 1819. Entozoorum synopsis X + 811 pp. Scnuiz, R. E., and Skworzow, A. A., 1931. Ztschr. Parasitenk., Berlin, 3 (4), pp. 765-774. Plagiorchis arvicolue aus der Wasserratte, Scnurz, R. E., 1932, Vestnik, Mikrobiol., Epidemiol. i Parazitol., 11 (1), pp. 53-60. Trema- toden ag Gattung Plagiorchis Liihe der Nagetiere. (Russian Text, German Summary, p. 60. Sxryapin, K. 1, 1928. Ann. Parasit., 6 (1), pp. 80-87. Sur la faune des trématodes des oiseaux de Transbaikalie. Srrenzke, K., 1952, Ztschr. Parasitenk., Berlin, 15 (5), pp, 369-391. Der Wirtswechsel von Plagiorchis maculosus. Utmer, M. J., 1952. Pap. Mich. Acad. Sci. Arts and Letters. Year 1950, 36, pp. 149-152. A critique of methods for the measurement of parasitic worms. YamacutTl, S., 1935. Ztschr. Parasitenk., Berlin, 7 (4), pp. 513-514. Plagiorchis maculosus (Rud., 1802) aus der japanischen Schwalbe, Hirundo rustica gutturalis (Scopoli), Yamacutt, §., 1939. Japan. J. Zool., 8 (2), pp. 129-210. Studies on the helminth fauna of Japan. Part 25. Trematoces of birds. IV. Yamacutr, S., and Mrrunaga, Y., 1943. Tr. Nat. Hist. Soc. Taiwan (241), 33. Trematodes of birds from Formosa 1. Yamacutt, §., 1954. Acta Med. Okayama, 8 (4), pp. 329-340. Parasitic worms mainly from Celebes. Part 4, Trematodes of reptiles and birds. > ANGEL M. L. 28() pamajounha SEXP: | LT ee | LL XBS- 9-1 T Jpuag wore, meee? | orurl i nonaqounhs Ge K RG | BI-X bE | OD % FE 0% T [pring wiopey, muna | 1 | Owes ig) (gs) |e) ([BrUsuaed xy) 6L-* GOL | OF“ 9s | Ge * Fa PET $ UUM | BO-X T1- | LAL | IDX eb: OTE | Uyesp tage pax | 2 atnssaacl | orp pay ‘oars vnsouuouadis | @i-* LL) | Ob * PL | PL XFL GER | wear "pexty 9 aroysapnUog | ¥ | Gs'Ss nanajouliy AU-XGLr | LEX BS | BT SUG: | BRK GE > BE * Cer GG LT T (preg were, wugysouudlity! —T GF SEG (g) (g) (g) | TeX Fa | O8 X SH | DEX GE: | HEROS | GR * RE | GL-LY fre-L-L S /puegq welTay paafrpaquye er [ |8FO'Le FLX ST | SI-X 9s | Ot Xs | OF KBE | HB KOR a | I (puogramapey, | wafynaqhyl ar | L rre's Zr XEd | LUM BS | OS XG | GI-XO® | GE XOe | OG GT T jpueq mony | wmafjequfy | L (Le over fe Lge ~ += 4h ; z | puey shaydoonay QL-X9T: | Ta * Ms: | Ge X ea. Bex Te | Lio-st Heel | I WS]. winpeelay ey g LEST t shaydvonay | GLAST | BE XRE | 126-0 z UBS LOT, vanpadigy | T | 9oe'e sfiaydoona) LIX LE | GX Re | TeX Se | SEE | BE-NOB- | THD Genk L POTAYV A OT |Pusd wey! y, vanyniyyy | L | OF GSE (s) (g) (a) (9) (9) ousxoer II-X@I+ | G12 X8Tr | ST 4 ST- | Lo GL) | O8 * ES: | TL -La- 8 b60 OL | woqayT Cpe? Fy 9 9ore’s | | . nuawoou Uy-r0e: Sear | pause, | 9 /PMeE are opureln yy i 8F'6°S1 “uu ‘uM Barare “Wut ats it; a a Une sitters pes | , pan -aofin 94894 s1ytay jyng | syong “SHUT Sp.00G AqWAQ, | couaqsog | dows | [gto A, reat) ype | yysuoy UGLY EXIT “ONT Appear] SOL JovoN! aan 2 Oe ‘LUpBUTIO, TH paxy steumaeds ]py “‘KI@r7Pwaq TL WOAIE s1 suRFLO ayy oaMsRoUr oF ayessod Sut 4b WANT ul BuotIVEds JO LequINY oy, ‘SprRaseye YYpPIAr “Pap U pan yysiia soy syuamommsveur yo UBue ayy, '("g9Z"tl pxor Say) ‘ds siyaiodvingg, SR ATWO POYyTPUSp! wae TANI,OUD/Y WUE) WHOS] Sau WIIVHGSOV HLIOS NI SAUId WOUd SASOTQADV NH STHOdOIOrTd *l ATEVEL iaaTd sTIPHIO Jo Yuwry “SoBeAVAT SF WOATT x1 GNBBAO Jo e7Is ayy HUAALT BF YApeAa dors OaNg OU, "EN TABLE 2. RECORDED DIMENSIONS AND HOSTS OF PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS., Measurements in inverted commas estimated from drawings, or by converting ‘‘linies’’ into millimetres, Measurements, in mm, are given to nearest decimal place; in some cases, c.g. for P. orientalis, approximate measurements are estimated. Eggs Date Anthor Name Hosts No. Fixation Lenuth | breadth |Oral Sucker}! Ventral Anterior | Posterior Ovary |—————)—_——_ Sucker Testis Testis Length | Breadth Tinh. mitt. Tren, mm. mm. mm. mim. microns | microns 1802 Rudolphi | Fasciola Hirundo = — ee al “OB. maculosa rustica 0-7" 1902 Braun Plagiorehis Hirundo 1 os “66” | hoes maculosa rusticu 1909 | Lithe Plagiorchis Riparia riparia 2h | USOT] -20--30 15-20 maculose Delichon urbica Caprimulyus Tat | eruropmews__|_] 1928 Skrjabin | P. maculosus | Cusarca 1 2-2 u+75 “25 40% 40 | 40% 40 | -22e 24 36 22 Var, anus casnrca P. macnlosus | Citellus 2-0-2-6 | 6-1-0 *30--31 20.°25 138-27 -29--27 30-34 19 1932 Schalz var. citelli musicus % +26--82 | & -28-+26 * +28 * 2-27 planicola 1985 Yamaguti} P. muaculosus |Hirendo rustiet| 3 1-60- H7-)70 | -20--8o “same? ~' 25 25 16-22 32-36 20-24 guituralis 1-92 | wx 14--16 1039 Yamaguti| J. maeulosus |TTirundo rustica) ? Fixedinaeetic | 1-f-3-9 |+S6-1-25 | -20--94 -20--35 +22--50 8 - 18-943 16--34 30-39 18-24 gutturalia sublinkyte 13-+30 H, dauriva under slight nipalensis eover-wlass pressure. 1930 P. maculosus | Motacilia 3 — 1:0-1-5 | O-4-0°% | LHe Ts “14-) 15 “16-31 -15--u8 *10--19 80-33 18-19 yar. molacillae\ cinerea cospica (subglobular) rounded P. maculogus |Hirundo rustica) 6 — 1-6-1-8 ) 52-80 19-24 *20-°25 « -20--26 “15-18 30-34 18-21 crutturalis x 120--26 x 17+.20 Parus t _— 2-2-9 | -7Th-1-00) +19--30 “21-30 “21--35 « -20--35 *20-+28 33-39 18-21 atricapillya ms 20-+80 | o -21--30 3 28-+29 restricts Lepoderma Apus aps 1 ) Living 2a 0-380 “30 32 *34x%°30 | +85 & -26 “30 maculosum 1 Same specimen, 23% O85 30 125 40-32 20 fixed, 1952 Strenzke | F. maculosugs | Aidemosyne “30" mature, with | 1:6-2-0 | 0+5-0-°8 34-47 21-23 eamlans eggs with only 1+1-1-4 | 0-1-0-2 few eggs 1909 FP. notabilis Anthuz 1 - 1-6 AT 20X-18 | -16% +16 | 258-16 | “About | -1hs -12 a1 19 ohscurus game” Motacilla flave 1 — 1-4 — AZ X WH | -14e +13 | -19%+15 | 17 «+15 |} +11 % +10 aL 21 1914 Nicoll P, nishetii Chibia 2 | “Somewhat 1°25 40 226-24 | lie -14 ‘llong | “Slightl ‘ll« 11 bracteata macerated" “Elongate | larger” oval” 1916 | Johnston,| P. epatulatus | Anthus Balsam mount) #-s0+-90) 85-30 V6 13 ‘Wx-12 |-14«-12 +08 29-33 17 J. australis 1916 P, clelandi Fenthelasin 1 | Balsam mount) *2-2 “06 au 4-26 “25 “BL x -29 | +87 %-29 | -17« +23 | 30-33 17-22 ariel P, orientatia “Swallow” "20x26 | -2B8*%-22 | 16x20 | 28-34 14-19 * Type specimens. In the case of P. xpatulatus, the range of length and breadth Q)-99 mm. x 0-3 mm, is given for an unspecified number of worms; the type was PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS 251 TABLE 3. DIMENSIONS OF THE CERCARIAH OF PLAGIORCHIS MACULOSUS Length Breadth Oral Ventral = —— : | Sucker Sucker Date Host, Locality (Average) | (Average) Range Average Range _ | Average microns microns microns | microns} microns microns 17.2.41 From4Lymnaea| 151-236 180 66-106 86 36 < 36 25 x 28 Tailem Bend 6.1.51 From1 Lymnaea} 124-157 141 84-102 94 38 x41 28x31 Mannum 5.1,51 From] Lymnaea) 135-168 150 78-97 87 38 X38 26 x 30 Mannum 9.1.51 From] Lymnaea! 109-158 132 83-107 91 35 x 38 26% 30 Tailem Bend 5.3.55 From] Lymnaea) 150-236 175 81-107 ; 94 4. x41 30 x 34 Mannum 28.5.55 (Chicken) 145-191 172 81-97 91 41 «40 28 x 33 2.5.56 (Hirundo 119-147 132 74-109 86 33 x36 26 x 30 neowena) 7.5.57 (Rhipidura 142-190 167 64-87 76 40% 35 28 x 30 leucophrys) i Ca, Ce es NOTES: All measurements in microns, of 10 specirnens fixed in boiling 10% formalin. The last three sets of measurements were from Lymnaea which had been infected ex- perimentally with egg of Plagiorchis maculosus from the given hosts. ON BETTONGIA CUNICULUS OGILBY, 1838 (MARSUPIALLA) BY H. H. FINLAYSON Summary An analysis of the characters of a small series of Bettongia cuniculus Ogilby from Tasmania is made for comparison with mainland forms of B. penicillata Gray and B. lesueuri Quoy and Gaimard. ON BETTONGIA CUNICULUS OGILBY, 1838 (MARSUPIALLA) by H. H. Fixiayson {Read 9 October 1955] SUMMARY An analysis of the characters of a small series Of Beltongia cuniculus Ogilby from Tasmunia iy made for comparison with mainland forms of penicilaia Gray and B, lesueuri Quoy ancl Gaimard. This species was formerly regarded as exclusively Tasmanian in occurrence, and its supposed insularity has tended to minimise somewhat the importance in practical taxonomy of several areas of vagueness and conflict in its description. Since Brazenor (1950) confirmed the Victorian status of the species, as origin- ally claimed by Hall and Kershaw (1917), the necessity for clarifying its dis- tinctions from the well ascertained mainland species has sharpened. A small series of four skins and cleyen skulls personally collected in the district of the upper Macquarie River in eastern Tasmania, while inadequate for complete re-description, has prompted the examination summarized belaw, which may reduce these uncertainties. The comparisons instituted are vhieHly with B. peni- cillata ogilbyi of South and Western Australia, and B. lesweuri of South and Central Australia; B. gaimardi and the eastern form of B, penicillata, which may be closer to B, ctrniculus, have not been available locally, EXTERNAL CHARACTERS Rhinarium very coarsely granular, much more so than in B. penicillata and B, lesueuri, but its upper margin with a backward and upward directed spur, as in the former, Facial vibrissae weuk in comparison with body size, the mysticials reaching 37 mm. as a maxirnum; the lower rows are white, the upper brown and none black. The supra orbitals may be longer than the mysticials (max, 42 mm.) and are pale brown, as are the genals also with length ranging from 29-36 mm. Black eyelashes are present on both upper and lower eyelids, but are weakly developed, On the lower border of the orbit a crescent of stout black bristics is developed, the longest 17 mm., and there is a similar but weaker series on the upper border: the development of these bristles is very strong. in Aepy- prymnus and falls off in the order B. cuniculus, B. penicillata, B. lesueuri. Sub- mentals and interramals were not checked in the fresh material and are incom- plete in the skins; the interramals present are two in number, silvery white and from 12-17 mm. Jong, springing from a common median site about 20 mm. pus- terior to the mid poimt of the lower lip. ‘The manus is much stouter than in B. penicillata; the digital forinula is. 3>4>o0r=2>5> or =1; the 2nd digit is shorter relative to the 3rd than in that species and the 4th is much stouter than the 2nd, and its claw is both stouter and longer, so that its general size superiority over the 2nd is more decided than is indicated by the formula. The claws are straighter and wider at the base and taper more to the point in a superior view than in B. penicillata in which they are nearly parallel sided, when seen from above; 3rd claw (maxi- mam) 15:5 mm.; 4th claw 13-5 mm. Trans, Roy. Sec. 8. Aust. (1959). Vol. 82- 264 IJ, W. FINLAYSON Pes stout with short blunt digits and nails; the plantar surface is completely naked as in Aepyprymmnus, therein differing from B. lesuevri and B, penicillata in which it is more or less completely haired in the young animal; in colour of integument it is dusky though less so than in B, penieillata; granules 14 per em. nailer the midmetatarsus, as in B. lesueuri, coarser than in B. pentcillata, nails witite. The tail is stout and in the single example measured has the length about 106 per cent. of that of head and body, as in the Central Australian B. lesuecuri, and relatively Jonger than in Aepyprymnus and B.p. ogilbyi, DIMENSIONS The following figures give the dimensions in mm. of an adult male {P4M*) measured in the Hesh; head and body, 325; tuil, 345; chest givth, 180; manus lenwth, 28; nail of 8rd digit, 16; pes, 121; 4th toc. 57; nail of 4th tue, ted, ear, 43 % 23; rhinarium to eye, 46; eye to ear, 28; eve {intercanthal), 15; weighl, 1590 yg, PELAGE The texture af the coat is intermediate —crisper than in B. lesueuri, much sufter than in adults of B.p, ogilbyi; it is longer than in either but not denser as to umderfur, There is a strong overlay of guard hairs over all the dorsum, except on the nape, where the fur is longer and looser and rutf-like. General colour a pale, strongly grizzled brownish grey, with the head and tail some- what darker, and the limbs decidedly lighter than the body. In two examples a well-marked pale hip stripe is present, contrary to Thomas's statement. The composition of the pelage is similar to that of B. lesueuri. and Hp. esilbyi, but somewhat more complex. Mid-dorsally the main pile of undertur is from 20-23 mim, long; the basal three-quarters of which is Ridaway's blackish pluinheous, a subterminal band of 3-4 mm. wood brown and the points clove brows, not black. Guard hairs vary in length from 27-30 mm. and show some variation in the number of colour bands and their length. The more numerous and stouter have the normal [ow bands as in the aboye named species, ic, 20 mm, plumbeous, 4 mm. sepit, mm. ivory shading to buff and sepia, and 5 mm- sepia, The minority are more slender and the ivory band is split into two by interposition of a very narrow, durk sepia band. There is also a sparse repre- sentation of a 3rd category of very stout, all dark guards, reaching 36 mm, and medium sepia. The resulting external colour dorsally is a pale, strongly grizzled drab — the pallor due largely to the blend of ivory and ash buff, which is not much darkened by the overlay af weak sepia points. The colour is warmer un nape and crown and slightly paler on rump. Ventrum, basally deep plumbeous,. externally greyish white washed lightly with yellow buff. There are two piles— the undertur of 23 mm, ca. in which the basal half is plumbeous and the rest creamy white and the sparse guard hairs of 30 mm. in which the basal ¥ths is plumbeous, median &th sepia and terminal Sths creamy white. The sides are slightly paler than the dorsum, the subterminal colour being reduced to tilleul buff us on the rump. The head is slightly darker than the mid back with a small variable area on the muzzle bistre. The ear backs are well furred a pale tawny olive, lighter than the head, but variably darkened on the murgins; inner surfaces a pale buff; antitragoid tuft nat conspicuous. Fore aod hind limbs like the sides externally, but less grizzled; internally, like the ventrum. Manus and pes much paler than in the forms of B. lesueuri and in B.p, ogilbyi; a uniform greyish white, very faintly tinged with buf. Teil with the dorsal hairing proximally BETTONGIA CUNICULUS 285 more erect than in the species named; colour distribution much as in the latter but with the proximal russet areas dulled to buffy drab, gradually darkeniny, to bluckish brown oyer the crest which may occupy ! of the length of the tail and reach 25 mis in two specimens the terminal 12 mm. is pure white; the crest is less defined than #.p. ogilbyi and its darkest parts are still grizzled with white; the lateral surface is buff fading to buffy white on the ventral surface. Three of the skins examined were taken in mid-winter and the other in mid- summer, but though they show slight differences in general warmth of colour, degree of grizzling and density, these are not oliviously related to a seasonal or sexual factor, In comparison with B, lesuetri aad Bop. ogilbyt the pelave of B. cunloulus is gencrally conspicuous for pallor; its lighter exmples are decicdely paler, colder in tone and more canspicuously prizzled thau vither of these. Its darker variants peu them in colows, but have the further distinction of a much longer pelage, a ruff on the nape, and near white hands and fect. The diagnostic vilue of the hip stripe is doubtful. CRANIAL CHARACTERS In the 11 skulls examined, 10 are fully adult at the P‘M* dental phase aad oue is subadult and at the taath change, The series is more uniform both metric ally and non-metrically than any other Betfongia group revently examined (1958), the meant variation in 20 linear dimensions being 9 per cent. The skull is the largest of the genus, the range ol its chief dimensions vver- lapping the maxima tor B,p, vgilbyi and B, lesueuri or showing a plus clearance; with un wverage deviation of the mean values of +7 per vent. trom those of the former. The mean displacement volume is 66 cc. as against 64 oc. for B.p. agilbyi und a sage of 53-64 cc. in three popwations uf B. fesueurt recently studied. ‘The assification is light—the mean adult weight of the prepared skull being 16 gw. as in the smaller penicillata; its surfaces smooth and with muscular ridging even more reduced. {n general outline (Pl. 1, Fig. A-E) the skull is close tu Byp, ogilbyi with which comparison is chiefly made hereunder. The breadth/length ratio is +34-+37 (°55); the rostral index is -41--43 (-42), and the facial index 223-241 (232). The rostram is conical and steeply tapering, hut shallower, The praper- tions of the nasal bones are much the same, but the expanded portion is more extensive and its posterior margins bowed hackwards and gently rounded at the vueners, and commonly just reach ov slightly exceed the interorbital law. The zygomatic arches slightly wider anteriorly, their maxima at or anterior to the midpoint. Interorbital space relatively still wider, remaining quite parallel sided in the oldest skulls available, its concavity rather greater aad its edges smooth and rounded. Temporal crests very weakly developed; the interparietal per- sistent and constant, sharply triangular not sémiliar nor creseentic. Jn Jateral aspect the premayillue usually make a smaller contribution to the wall of the orbit than in B.p. ogilbyi, but with wide variation in the extent of the premaxilliary and maxilliary suture with the nasals. The orbital plate of the lachrymal is very large and the maxilliary process belww it, correspondingly reduced, sometimes to a mere splint and in three cases to extinction, In these latter skulls the lachrymal articulates directly with the palatine as in Patorous and Onychogale and many polyprotodouts. This feature is a good distinction of B. cuniculus from B. lesueuri and B. penicillata, in which as in mast Macro- podidae the orbital process of the maxilla is a substantial squarish element fre- quently more than half the area uf the lachrymal and sealing off the latter from 256 H. H. FINLAYSON contact with the palatine. The zygomata are weak and shallow as in B.p. ogilbyi. The supratympanie canal is uot completed by bone, though the process of the squamasal which is chiefly responsible for the closure in B, lesteurl is strongly developed. The squamosal frontal contact ou the temporal wall is constant, The strncteres of the palate are venerally similar, such propurtional ditter- eulees as occur being caused chiefly by the different character of the secator P4 ansl the greater parallelism of the molar rows. The anterior palatal foramina are both absolutely and relatively larger, and the breadth of palate at M* also —the latter averaging 20 per cent. of the basal length. The diastema and the pusteripr vaenities ure relatively shorter, the latter reaching to about the middle of the anterior lobe of M®; they are equally broad and ure almost entirely in- vested by the palatine, a small portion of the anterior margin only, sometimes formed by the mavillae, paired satellite vacuitics are sometimes developed in the maxillae, The bulla is much simaller, its length averaging about 10 per cent, aml its breadth 26 per cent. less than in the smaller B. penicillata skull and its volume is probably less than one-half; as in that species, however, when aged, a thin lumella descending from the ectopterygoid margin of the alisphenoid muy veach the auterointernal wall of the bulla, roofing over the foramen ovale and its attendant eroove to form a closed canal. The occipital plane ig much as in B, penicillata, the paraoccipitals and the mastoid process also, but rather stouter and the latter ure not always closely contoured to the bulla, Mandible, comparatively slight, the maximum breadth, breadth of ascend- ing provess and depth af ramus helow Mz and breadth of condyle all relatively lower; masseterie fossa and foramen with a similar range of development. but the process of the angle is shorter and more obtnse. DIMENSIONS The following figures give the range and approximate mean of the dimen- sions ina bisesal series of 9 skulls of adults at the P'M! stage: Greatest length. 7H:7-84-1 (82-2): basal length. 68:6-72'9 (71-2); zygomatic breadth, 44-0-46-6 (45-4): nasals length, 33-636-8 (34-8); nasals yreatest breadth, 13-6-16-0 (14-3), nasals least breadth, 7-0-8-3 (7-8); rostrum depth, 15-0-16-0 (13:3); interahital constriction, 19-0-21-0 (19:6); palate length, 45:°6-48:0 (46-7): palate breadth inside M*, 14:0-15.2 (14-5); anterior palatal toramina, 3-4-4-9 (4-3), diastemu, 19-5-14-2 (13-4); bulla length, 12-9-13-4 (13+1); bulla lweadth, 6-7-8-0 (7-3); basicranial axis, 20°$22-2 (21-4); basifacial axis, 484-517 (50-4): facial index, 223-241 (232); mandible maximum breadth, BY d-ble+ (40-4); depth of ramus helow Ms, 5°5-9-6 (9-41); breadth of ascend- Ing process. 12-4-13-4 (12-9). SKELETAL CHARACTERS The following data is derived from the complete prepared skeleton of the young adult male, the flesh meusurements of which are given above: Vertebrae; cervieuls, 7; tharacie, 13; lumbar, 7; sacral, 2; caudal, 22. Seapula leneth, 44: dv, maximum Treadth, 21: claviele length, 25-5; humerus length, 39; do. distal breadth, 13:7; radius Jongth, 45-5; do. maximum breadth, 3-5; ula Jength, 55-5: do. maximum breadth (coronoid), $-0; femur length, 93-7; do. proximal (tro- chanteric) breadth, 19-5; do. distal (condylar) breadth, 18-0; tibia length, 115; do. proximal breadth (inedial aspect). 19-5, fibula length, 112; do. greatest breadth (proximal), 7°9; pelvis maximum length, 58; do, iliac breadth, 51-0; do. BETTONGIA CUNICULUS S87 acetubulur bread, 52-6; do, isehtal breadth, 60-5; epipubie maximum length, 125; do, avtivukar breadth, 7-7. DENTITION The semblances of the dentition (PI. 1, Fig. F-1) are divided, the incisors favouring B, penicillata, the premolars B, lesvenri with sume degree of inter- mediacy, and the molars combining the crown features uf the former, with metrical characters quite different from both; the mean variation in linear dimen- sions Of post-ciasternal teeth is 12 per cent. The incisor rows meet at a somewhat wider angle than in B. penicillata. I isa relatively small tooth, its dimensions about as in B.p, ogilbyi and decidedly smaller than in B, lesueuri. Tate (1948) implies that this tooth is longer in cunt- eylus, though he does not quote dimensions tor it, but 1 cannot substantiate this in the present material tt is comparatively upright and the medial surfaces wre separated by a wider interval than usual, and in anterior aspect have an out- ward (lateral) curvature culminating in eversion of the tips (Pl. 1, Fig. F); dorso- ventral height 4°7-6°6 (5-8); antero-posterior breadth, 2:4.3°6 (3:0), I is larger than in penicillata but has much the same proportions; it is much narrower trunsversely and less rugged than in lesveuri. The height of its erown is much reduced in aged skulls, a condition which may exaggerate the apparent height of 1; antero posterior length, 3°0-3°2 (3-0); transverse breadth, 1:8-2-0 (1-9). I’, as represented by the scrics means, is somewhat shorter dorso-ventrally and longer anterv-posteriorly than in either of the above species, but changes in shape of this tooth are so rapid that without more age phases chan are avail- able, it is difficult to decide whether this is characteristic of the species or simply of the phase measured. Its general resemblance to that of By. ogilbyt is close, and in particular there is no inturning of (he crest as in B. lesweurt and Aepy- prymnus; dorso-ventral height, 2°5-3-6 (3-1); antero-posterior length, 2°5-3°6 (3-0). J, is a larger tooth than in peniecillata hut similarly proportioned; nar- rower than in B. lesen; anteroposterior Iength, 12-8-14-6 (13-3) and Irewdth, 3°253°6 (3-3). The nti is smaller than in B.p. egilbyi and about equal to that in the lower South Australian B. lesueuri: its alveolus lies on the mavxillo-premaxillary suture wich, as Tate has shown, often approaches it obliquely from belind rather than above; dorso-yentral height, 3-3-1-4 (3'8): Both the 3rd (anc more especially) the 4th premolars are much longer teeth) than in B.p. ogildyi and in this approximate to the standards of B. lesweseri. Their wlignment in the tooth rows is wormal, the axts in the upper teeth being nearly parallel to the midline of the palate. The profile of the crests is straight ox nearly so, though in P! when quite unworn, if may show a slight posterigr vomeavily and although the wall is higher anteriorly than posteriorly, the dis- proportion is much less than in B. penicillata. Uysodontism as gauged by the ratio of greatest beight (of enamel) to length is intermediate but much nearer to B. lesueuri, P* wairvower and less bulky than in the other species, its maximum breadth pusterior ty midpoint and with ie constriction at about its anterior 4, and its outline as seen from above more clongute and less regularly oval; grooves 5. Ps is very similar, the length as compared with its opponent, reduced by about 6 per cent. and the breadth and height by ahont 5 per cent.; grooves 5. The dimensions of u single exumple of P® and Py are respectively; length, 5-1, 4-3; breadth, 2-5, 2-4; height (of enamel wall), 3-3, 3-3, P!, the secator, is also a narrower tooth than in either B.p. ogilbyt av lesteouri, but is much longer than in the former, its length overlapping that of the 288 H, H. FINLAYSON Central Australian population of B, lesyeuwri which it resembles in general rather closely; its postero-internal talon and ledge are equally variable and may be virtually absent, but the maximum development af these features is less, and it differs in the deeper hollowing of the buccal face below the cingulum. Though the touth as a whale is nearly parallel to the intermaxilliary suture, there is some torsion of erest, with very slight cxtraversion of the anterior portion, which is aecentuated by wear. Distinct grooves 6 in 70 per cent., 7 in 30 per cent. of examples, hul additional vestiges are sumctimes present as in all the species, P, is similar in its general characters ta the upper tooth; its length is reduced by 1] per cent., but its breadth and height are both slightly increased; the over- all size reduction is therefore less than in the other bye species; a posterior talon and ledge are not developed, Grooves 6 in 30 per cent., 7 in 70 per cent, of examples; they are shorter than in the other species and lave a tendeney to hifureate in their lower course und become lost in obscnre crenellations of enamel, Range and approximate mean of dimensions in J0 slightly to moeler alely worn examples of Pt and P, respectively are: antero-posterior length, 7-5-5-9 (8-2), 7-0-7-6 (7-3): breadth, 2-7-3-1 (2-9), 9°8-3-2 (3-0); height (ol enamel), 2°9-4°2 (3°7), 3-6-4-3 (4-0). The milk premolars are larger than those of Bip. ovilhyi and B, lesueuri hut appreciubly narrower, MP! is about equal in crown area to M* and its trenchant antero-external cusp is very strongly developed; much more so than in these Lwo species and almost as in Aepyprymnus. MP, much smaller, its crown nearly triangular through reduction of the antero-external cusp. Dimensions nf a single example of MP! and MP, are respectively; antero-posterior length, 3-9, 3-5; breadth anterior lobe, 2+8, 2-4; breadth posterior lobe, 3-3, 2-8. The upper molar rows are very weakly arched, with the anterior interval but slightly greater than the posterior. The metrical characters of the molars uf B, cuniculus are markedly distinet from those of B. penteillata und B, lesuenri; absolute dimensions are hivher in most categories, the length wh Ms 1-3 in slin, exceeding the means of the comhioed South und Central series of B. lesueuri by 10 per cent. und the sum of the crown areas by 30 per cent, while the superiority aver B.p. egiliryi is still greater. In relative size as interpreted by the sectional crown areas, the 2nd ts in- variably the largest malar both above and below, while in the upper jaw M? is sometimes smaller than M*, a condition not seen in the uther species examined; My, is invariably smaller than My, The overall antero-posterior declension in size is also much less than in B. penicillata or B. lesveuri, the index of reduction being 1-5-2-1 (1-8) in the upper and 1-3-1-7 (1-4) in the lower teeth. The molar formulae and their approvimate frequencies in the upper jaw are M? > M'> M*>M" 70 per cent,, and M*> M* > Mt>M?*, 30 per cent; and in, the: Inwer jaw, My > My > My > My, 100 per cent.; the range and approximate mean uf the crown areas expressed as percentages of (hose uf the first molars are: M' (100); M* 104-123 (111); M* 90-107 (97); M* 59-72 (62); and M, FI), My 117-154 (125); My LOT-125 (114); M, 81-96 (88). In the size relations of upper and lower molars a notable feature is that M3 us well as M! and M° is invariably Jarger than its lower opponent, M, alane of fle lower series exceeding the upper tooth with a frequency of 86 per cent. Shape differences are also appreciuble; there is a general tendency towards nar- rowing o£ the molars and breadth > length occurs as a minority frequency in two molars only (M', M®@), whereas in B.p. ogilbyl and B, lesueurt this condi- tim is répresented in all molars. and is dominant in four teeth in the former species und in three of the latter. Further, the condition, posterior lobe > anterior BETTONGIA CUNICULUS 29 lobe, which is dominant in both M! and M, of the above species, is lost in M? WB. cuniculus, but persists in M; with a frequency of 100 per cent. The range and approximate mean of the antero-posterior length, breadth of wnterior lobe and breadth of posterior lobe, in the molars of a bisexual series of 11 skulls, is as follows; M', ¢-2-4-9 (4-5); 4:23-4:68 (4-5); 4-0-4-6 (42); M2, 4°6-5:1 (4:8), 4°5-5:+1 (4:7); 4-1-4-6 (4:3): M8, 4-3-5601 (4°7); 4eb-47 ‘0 (2°9); Ms? (4:3); 3:4-3-8 (3-5); 3-5-4-0 (3-8); My, 4:6-5-0 (4-8); 4:0-4:6 (4-2); 3°7-4°2 (40); My, 4-3-4°6 (4°5); 4:1-4:4 (4:3); 3-6-4-1 (3-8); My, 3-8-4-3 (4-1), 3-6-3-9 (8:8); 3-0-3-3 (3-2); Msi-g (in situ), 13-1-14-0 (13-5). In examples showing heavy wear on the crowns, interproximal wear between mulars is also appreciable, and the valwe for Ms‘ may fall to 12:3. The molars are slightly more brachydont than in B. penicillata and de- cidedly more so than in B. lesveuri and the working surface occupies a larger proportion of the crown than in cither. The crown pattern is relatively unde- veloped as in the former, the cusps and lophs being generally low and obtuse, with the longitudinal elements reduced much below the B. lesueuri condition; the midlinks well developed in that species and feebly in B. penicillate, are ithsent. The posterior lophs. on the upper 2nd and 3rd molars are scarecly de- veloped as continuous transverse ridges, the buceal and lingual cusps being almost completely separated down to base level by a longitudinal median Assure. The anterior ea af these teeth, and both anterior and posterior lophs of the lower molars nevertheless, although lower, are often more continuous and more extended transversely than in either B.p,. ogilhyi and B, lesnezri. Accessory cuspules corresponding to those of B.p, ogilhyi are very weak! developed on the Ist and 2nd upper molars in two skulls only. In one skull, M+ in one maxilla is much smaller and simpler than in the other; in all others the posterior molars are structurally and functionally normal bilobed teeth, appear- ing regularly in the succession, There are no exarnples of supernurmary molars or incisors, In the single example of the tooth change afforded by the series, P' is erupting simultaneously with M+, REFERRNCES Brazenon, C, W., 1950, “Mammals of Victoria” Melbourne, p, 46. TMintayson, IT, H.. L9BS. Tac. S. Austr, Musenm, MV, pp. 235-302 Tare, G. H, A.. i948. Bull, Am, Mus. Nat, Hist., $1_ p. 288. EXPLANATION OF PLATE 1 » Dorsal aspect of the skull of an acdale ¢ from the upper Macquarie Tver, easton Tasmania. (x 0-1.) Palatal uspect of the same, (x U-9.) Lateral aspect of the same. (x 9-9.) The pterygoid plate is not shown, Ovvipital aspect of the same. (x 0-9. Lateral aspect of right mandibular ramus wf the same. (x 1-0.) Anterior aspect of upper Ist incisors of the same. (x 4-4.) Buceal aspect of an unworn P+ of the right side in another young adult Sar locality, (x4-7.) eal wd B a r= rR oanpoae big. TH. Biuweal uspeet of slightly worn Py of the right side in another young adult. Some lovality. {x 4-3.) Fic. 1 Phe right rmasillary tooth change in oan advanced subuadult from ths same Jocality. P4 (upper) is simultaneuusyly displaeing P4 (lower right) und MP! Gower jiidedle); M! (lower left) persisting in sith, is repvesentecl hy its anterior lohe. (4 4°7,) H. H, Fintayvsonx PLATE | = SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE (MARSUPIALIA) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA BY H. H. FINLAYSON Summary Collections of cranial and dental material of subfossil Potoroinae from South Australia are reviewed and compared with recent populations. In B. lesweuri Q and G. the wide range of variation in skull characters and the sporadic dwarfism found in recent populations are confirmed in a cave series of smaller average size from Yorke Peninsula. A small form of B. penicillata Gray, close to B.p. ogilbyi Gould but with smaller 4th premolars, is noted as persisting in the Devon Downs archaeological site in the lower Murray Valley from about 5000 B.P. almost to the present. A phase of B. cuniculus Ogilby, at present an exclusively Tasmanian species, is recorded from volcanic ash beds at Tantanoola. Potorous morgani Finlayson closely allied to P. platyops Gould of Western Australia and originally described from Kangaroo Island is now recorded for the mainland of South Australia in the middle and upper levels of Devon Downs. SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE (MARSUPIALIA) FROM SOUTH AUSTRALIA by H. H. Fixcaysox [Read ¥ October 1953] SUMMARY Collections of eranial and dental material of subfossil Potoroinae from Soulh Australia are reviewed. and compared with recent populations. In B. feaveuri Q and G, the wide range of variation in skyll characters und the sporadic dwarfisny found iu recent populations are confirmed in a cuve series of sraaller average size from Yorke Peninsula, A small form of B, penicilluta Gray, close to Bip, agilbyi Gould but with smaller 4th premolars, is noted as persisting in the Devan Downs urchacologiesl site ia-the lower Murray Valley from about 5000 B.P, almost to the present. A phase of B. eunieulus Ogilby, al present an exclusively Tasmanian speciys, is recorded from volcanic ash beds at Tantanoola. Poturgus murgani Fiolayson closely allied to. P.. platyops Gould of Wesleru Australia and originally dexerihed from Kangaroo Island is now recorded for the mainland of South Australia in the middle and upper levels of Devon Downs. During a review (1958) of recent members of this sub-family, chiefly from South and Central Australia, the characters and status of its representatives in some ostedlogical material from aboriginal archaeological sites and cave deposits, have come up for consideration. The collections studied are for the most part in the Sonth Anstralian Museum and have been culled from 13 sites extending from the North Flinders Ranges to Kangaroo Island and the lower South-Eastern district, the chief collectors being Mr. N, B, Tindale and Mr. H, M. Cooper of the Anthropological Department of the Museum and the Cave Exploration Group of South Australia. Brief references by the writer in the form of provisional identifications have already appeared in contributions by the above authors, For the most part, the age of the deposits yielding the material is only vaguely known from field observations on the site; but in the case of the Deyon Downs collections, dates tor several horizons based upon Cl4 determinations have heen published by Tindale (1957) and the earliest of these, relevant here, is about 5000 B.P. Much of the collection, however, is munch more recent and some of it may he no more than a century or so old- Four species are represented, referable to described forms but providing a useful extension of Imoewledge on the variation in cranial and dental characters which must be expected within their limits. BETTONGIA LESUEUBI Q & G- The cranial material onder this head falls into two main groups; a miscella- neous assemblage of specimens consisting mostly of mandibular fragments de- rived from widely scattered sites —and a serics of relatively complete skulls from eaves in the Curramulka district of Yorke Peninsula, The latter provides the greater interest and will be dealt with first. Material from these caves was first obtained about 30 years ago and has since been augmented at intervals, most recently by the Caves Exploration Group, so that 25 skulls from the very restricted area of the site are now avail- able. The bone is heavily impregnated with deliquescent calcium and magne- sium salts, but ig otherwise unmineralized and well preserved; about 4 of the Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82, 202 H. H. FINLAYSON skulls are stained a deep choentate colour, but the remainder are almost as cleun as a recently macerated preparation, and with one possible exception, are entirely free from soft tissne and fat, The series is well balanced between adults at the P'NG phase, and-sub-adults from P*M* onwards and in these respects gives more informution on age changes than could be safely inferred from the recent series from Jower South Australia and Central Australia just studied (supra). Pleven separate mandibular rami were also taken and some of these were associated by the collectors with individual skulls; but as dental unconformities asperse the validity of this in some eases, | have disregarded it in all and studied the mmundibles separately as a nondependent group, Other genera of mamunals asso- ciated with Belfongia in the deposit are all of recent facies and include Lagur- chestes, Thylogale, Trichosurus, Thalacomys and Canis. CRANIAL CHARACTERS Metrical. The largest adult skulls are decidediy smaller than the Jargest in the recent series from lower South Australia and about equal to the largest fram Central Australia. However, the size range though considerable is less than in the other groups, and its smallest skulls are bigger than in these and there are unmucous intermediate conditions, which are indistinguishable in this regard in all theee. In detailed linear dimensions the average range is smaller than in the lower South Australian group in the proportion of 14 to 22 and in most items can) be completely merged. The approximate means, however, in 17 of 23 dimensions exiumined are lower by from 2-14 per cent. with a mean difference oF 6 per cent, Outstanding differences in the upproximate means of absolute dimensions une depth of rostcum which is less than in either; length of anterior palatal foriminu which is equal to the recent South Australian figure and 15 per cent. Wher than for Central Australia; lurge size of balla in which leneth is equal ta the recent South Australian mean and the breadth 4 per cent greater; while both are 6-7 per cent. greater than in Central Australia: and a slight mandible in whieh breadth of ascending process and cvondvle are again lower than in either, On eliminating the size factor by expressing ubsolute dimeusiuns as per- ventages of basal length a comparison of mean proportional development be- tween the three groups is possible. This indicates that the chief average dis- tinctions of the lower South Australian skull from that of Central Australia are maintained by the Curramulka series in the lower zygomatic breadth, shallower rostrum, lower facial index, shorter mandibular body and narrower condyle and asevnding process, while the distinction of the longer anterior palatal foramina is accentnated, these being both absolutely and relatively longer than in either, On the uther band, intermediate conditions occur and in a few items the agree- nent js with the Central Australian group, as for example in the falling off af relative depth of mandibular ramus and in the oxreased relative length and breadth of bulla —the last is particularly notable. The overall metrical balance arrived at by this lysonian method fivours the Central Australian condition in absolute dimensions and the lower South Aus- tralian in dimensions relative to basal length; but there are wide overlaps In many items and no clearance in the range of any. Non-metrical Morphology Features such as the taper of the rostrum and interorbital space, shape of the nasal bones, shape of the zygomatic arch, curvature of interparietal, extent and position of temporal crests and axial inclination of hulla are as variable SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE 283 here within strictly limited uge groups (as interpreted by dentition) as in the recent South and Central Australian series, and serve to connect all three by numerous links. The skull is generallhy smoothly rounded and with slight wusculur impressions and less fonst in substance and less rugged than in Central Australia. The general resemblance in non-metrical characters is possibly mure often with the South Australian series; but some of the largest and broadest skulls are a close mate for Central Australian types. The foramen ovale is partially canalized in three examples but to a fesser extent than occurs in B. cuniculus. The orbital process of the maxilla is invari- #hly present and the lachrymal is never in contact with the palatine. The fromto- sguamosal contact at the temporal pterion is constant; hut in two examples is exceedingly narrow, 2 mm. or less, and more irregular that T have yet seen it in this species. The Subacult Skull A difficulty in interpreting cranial variation in series of Beltonyid arises in the comparatively slight differences which distinguish the adult from the sub- adult skull, both in relutive proportions and in non-metrical features, This is true ol all Potoroinae in greater or less degree: but is. particularly so with short muzzled forms such as the present species, in whieh differential factors in - regional growth rate of the skull are much less responsive to age changes than in the Macropodinae. The Curramulka series consists of nearly equal numbers ef adults (P'M') and subadults of the dental categories P?M*, P*M", and PMA, and the opportunity has been taken therefore of making comparisons hetween them under more favourable conditions than obtained with other series examined. Taking the subadelts en bloc, it would appear that neither the tugial index; rustral index (length of muzzle/greatest loneth), nor breadth index (zygomatic breadth/areatest length) afford any appreciable distinction between these geoups. In long muzzled forms, such as B. penicillata, the testimony of the rostral index and facial index is often quite contradictory; the former mereasing with age. while the latter may do so or not; in B. lesueuri neither appears to respond tehably. In relative dimensions as shown by ihe percentage basal length relation, 15 items of the 21 examined show substantial arecment (less than 3 per cent. difference), while of the remainder the length of nasals, least heeadth of nasals, and breadth of palate average 6-7 per cent. lnwer in sub- adults and the breadth of condvie. ant. palatal furamina and intervrbital breadth 4-7 per cent. higher. The most consistent difference is in the relative dimensions of nasals and interorbital breadth, but here as in all not a few examples fail to conform, and a conclusion tentatively reached in earlier tests is therefore confirmed — namely. that within these dental limits a characteristic subadult skull form, if it can be said to exist at all, is largely swamped hy individual varia- tion and its metrical definition rendered impracticable, The position is similar in nen-metries) characters, and practically all shape variants hoth of the entire skull and of its constituent bones occur irrespective of age. A zygomatic outline, whieh tapers anteriorly, somewhat as in Tricho- strug, is more frequent in subadults but by uo means confined to them, Closure of the basioccipite-sphenoid suture appears to take place generully between the dental stages P'M* and PYM? but it is not reliable as an indicator of adult status: clased sutures have been observed in skulls with tinworn P#M? and open in skulls with worn P/M* With experience it is possible to sort skulls into approxi- mate age groups without reference to dentition, by employing subjective quali- tative tests not easy to define in few words, but the P*M®* coincidence is hy far the hest criterion and is not, in my present belief. liable to serious error. 294 H, H. FINLAYSON Dwarfed Skully The Curramulka material provides further evidence of the characteristic condition of sporadic dwarfism, which has already been noted in recent series of B. lesuewri both from Central and lower South Australia and in B. penicillata ogilbyi (op. cit.). The size reduction of the smallest examples as compared with the rest of the series is less extreme in the present case than in either of the recent series, but they occur with greater frequency. This has provided an opportunity of testing and confirming the tentative conclusions which were based upon the single examples which were found in the other geographically widely separated groups. The examples are fully adult skulls at P/M? and the chief dimensions of the two smallest are set out in tabular form below for comparison with their recent analogues and with a skull of the largest size group of each series, TABLE 1], Comparison of some dimensions of w skull {rom the largest size group with the smallest, in 3 series of Betton leaaeuri. (All at [4 M+) , Central Australia, Lowér Santh Cosvimulka Recent, Australia Recent Subtossil Gasal lengrh 60:0 | g4-4 65-5 54-0 61-0 | 7-2 h7-8 Zygoinatie broadth 45°6 40-6 45-7 | 39.4 44-() | 41-7 aged Nasals langth 26-2 22-8 | 29-6 ; 23-3 j 27% 25-6 | a0 Depth rosnram | TH-@ | a7 | aet | ee | 18-6 | Wek | Tes Interorbital breadth la 18-2 16-1 | 15-6 ed 137 140% Palate lengih 37°45 34-3 ay-d 43-3 373 | 34-0 34°58 Ant. palatal forurnins 2-7 SR of BH 4-2 | 2-7 a2 BF Diasterna, 73 8-3 | 7:8 | BT 7-0 | BO ras) Bulla length 17-0 | 15-1 | 183 | 146 ITB | LTB) BU Bulla brewdths ins | Mes | 18 ton ee | 1a-7 | 12-7 Sacial index Wl Ww ) 170 | 165 | 178 | 174 72 Ma'—* 13-0 | T-t | Ten 113 lS | Peel | lbeT ps 87 | 1-6 | 8-8 | TT 8-0 | na | Bs ere | SSS ecre nN Ss Examination of these figures and of their percentage relation to the respec- tive basal lengths shows a somewhat higher degree of total differentiation, both in size reduction and detailed proportion in the dwarfs of the recent series than in those from Curramulka. There is very lite correspondence in the nature of the proportional change in the three cases; the sign of the change is the same for nasals, anierior palatal foramina and diasterna, but the amount varies within wide limits and in other items is quite erratic and unpredictable. In the case of the two Curramulka dwarfs also the divergence occurs in different and unre- lated items and is sometimes of opposite sign, These quantitative relations support the qualitative morphology of the skull in denying any special com- munity of structures to the dwarfs, which are obviously as closely related ta the rest of the pavent series as they are to one another. A notable difference in the two Curramulka dwarfs is the failure of the dentition to keep pace with the cranial reduction, though the difference in this is less when the comparison in these items is extended to the range and mean for the series (infra). Similar dwarfing almost certainly exists in the subadult graup, but it is difficult ta define; inequality in general size at the same dental phase is fre- quent in young skulls, but may be due in part at Jeast to differences in growth SUBFOSSIL POTOROINAE 2h rate which would have been later equalized before reaching the adult condi- tiun; at the more or less static P*M? stave sneh differences may be safely re- gurded as permanent. Dimensions The following feures give the range and approximate mean in (1) 15 adult skulls at P*M! and (2) 12 subadults at P"M>~+ greatest length, 66-7-71-L (69-3), 63°8-68-6 (66°3); basal length, 57:2-61:6 (59°8), 55-5-60-°0 (57-5); zygomatic breadth, 40:0-44-5 (42-1), 38-8-43-8 (41-7); nasals length, 25:9-25-0 (26-6), 92°8-25-°3 (24-1); nasals greatest breadth, 11-2-13:9 (19°5), 1L-0-14-0 (123); nasals least breadth, 4:6-6°5 (5-8), 4:2-6-2 (5-2); rostrum depth, 11-8-13-2 are 11:4-12°5 (12-1); interorbital constrietion, 13:7-15°5 (14-9), 13°5-15°6 14-8): palate longth, 34-8-37-3 (35-9), 51-0-36-9 (34-4); palate breadth ins. M* 11-0-12-6 (11-7), 9-5-12-1 (10-5); anterior palatal foramina, 2+7-3°7 (3-3), 2-7-4:5 (3-4); diastema, 7-0-10-0 (62), 6-6-9°5 (7:8); bulla length, 16-1-18-5 (17-4), 16-0-18-2 (17-0); bulla breadth, 12-5-14-2 (13-2), 11-7-14-2 (12-5): basieranial axis, 21-3-93-7 (22-2), 19+0-22+3 (21-3); bast facial axis, 37: 1-41-U (38-8), 33°8-39-4 (36-6): facial index, 163-190 (174), 168-183 (173) and in 4 adult and 2 subadult mandibular rami: depth below Ms, 8-0-9-7 (8-9), §:2-8-8 (8-4); breadth ascendiig process, 13-1-L4-6 (13-8), 12°3-14-0 (13-3). DENTITION The range in dimensions in the majority of items overlaps the minima for the recent South and Central Australian series and the means are usnally below beth, though nearer the Jatter; the mean variation for post diastemal elements is 15 per cent. The dentition as a whole has a tendency to slightness, the reduc- tion in_most items being relatively greater than the skull size (basal length) demands and where there are differences in antero-posterior as compared with lransverse diameters, the change is almost always in the direction of narrow- ness, as in the South Australian group. Prediastemal teéth are too few or alveolar damage too frequent to permit of strict comparisons, but 14, and the canine tend to be smaller teeth than in either of the recent series, while F and F are intermediate. The greatest breadth (af enamel) for 9 examples of I! is 2-3-2-8 (2-6) and 7 examples of 1, give a constant value of 3 mm. P* is proportionally reduced in both length and breadth and is close to the recent South Australian condition and narrower than in Central Australia; its noves vary frem 5 te 7 —35 vecurring in 6 of the samples examined, 6 fn 4, and 7 in 2; the 7 grooved yariant has not been observed in recent material, but the extra grooves are vestigial and posterior. Py las 5 yrooves only in the 3 ex- amined, The range and approximate mean of antero-posterior length in 12 examples of P! and 3 of Ps are respectively: 4:7-5:5 (5:1), 4-d4-5 (4-4): and the maximum transyerse breadth of the same 2:5-3:0 (2-6), 2-2-2-7 (24), The secator Pt has dimensions close to the means’ for Central Australia and re- duved by 5-6 per cent. as compared with those of the recent South Australian material. Its talon development is frequently as marked as in the latter, but is equally variable and the cusp may he almost suppressed; the yatio of posterior breadth to length in the range of wear illustrated is ahout as in the recent material, but the body of the tooth is frecuently slimmer, Grooves vary from 7 tu ¥. with the maximum frequency with the latter, as is usual; a [0 grooved variant does not occur, Two examples are of interest as showing very slight extraversion of the anterior portion al the crest, reminiscent of the condition in the anomalous Frm recently referred ta tentatively as B, penicillata anhydre. 296 H. H. FINLAYSON P, is also jt} narruwer tooth than in the revent series, but its grooves are con- stantly 8 which is the higher frequency in these also, Anteroposterior length in 13 examples of P* and 4 of Py (with slight or moderate wear) are respec: tively 7'2-8-°8 (8:1). 6:5-7-0 (6-7) and maximum transverse breadth in the same 2'3-3-2 (2-8) and 2-3-3-5 (2-4), Of the milk premolars the lower tooth js reduced slightly further when com- pared with the means of the recent series than the upper one, and the posterior lobe in both is narrower especially in comparison with the Central Australian condition, dimensions in 13 examples of ME* and 3 of MPy are respectively; anteroposterior Jength, 3:3-3-8 (3:5), 3°1-3:3 (3-2); breadth anterior lobe, 2823-0 (2-9), 9.0.2-3 (2-4): and breadth posterior lobe 3:0-3-5 (32), 2:6-3'0 (2°7). The molar size as ussessed by the approximate crown area (length lalt sum of the breadth of the two lobes) is smaller in all catepories Chain in either uf the recent series; the reduction being particularly marked in M%, und M‘y as compared with recent South Australian yalues. The interrelatiuns of molars in point of size, gauged in the sume wity, is decidedly nearer the Central than the South Australian condition, The relative enlurgement of the 2 pusteriur teeth characteristic of the latter is mot shown. Both M’ and M® are large teeth which increase a collateral superiori{y of this pair over M* and M!' in the upper jaw. und in the lower, the mean increase of My, with respect to M“ is accentuated sill further than im Central Australia, The index of reduction (largest/smallest molur) is 2-4-6+3 (3-@) in the upper jaw and 2°5-3'2 (2°8) in the lower; the mean value for both is higher than in the recent South Australian series and that for the lower jww is higher than in Central Australia as well. The molar formulae and their approximate frequencies, and the percentage relation of the crown reas of the several teeth to the corresponding first molars is as follows: in the upper jaw M* > M!>M*> M! {00 per cent. (the conditions M? > M# and M*= Mt° being absent) and M! 100; M* 101-115 (108); M* 54-93 (77); M! 16-43 (32). In the lower jaw Ms >Ms>M,>My 50 per cent. and M.>M,>Ms>M, 50 per cent. (M'=M® being absent) and M; 100; M: 107-131 (124); My 88-113 (99); M, 41-53 (42). fn shape of molars as shown by the relation of antero-pasteriur length to greatest breadth and anterior to posterior lobe the agreement is with the recent South Australian condition, many of the molars beiny still narrower than in that series. The maxima for linear dimensions are here not infrequently with the sihadult group, and the following figures for antero-posterior Jength, breadth of anterior lohe and breadth of pusterior lobe are derived from 25 crania and 7 mintlibles, irrespective of age: M1 3-7-4-2 (4-0), 3-5-4-2 (3-8), 3-7-4-2 (4-0); M® 3-9-4-5 (4°32), 38-44 (4:1), 9-64-2 (3-9): M® 3-14-0 (3-6), 3-0-3°9 (3-5), 2-4-3°5 (2-0); Mt? 143-0 (2-4), 1-7-98 (2-4), 142-0 (18); My 3-6-4-0 (3-8), 303-4 (3-2), 3-5-3-9 (3-7); My 4:1-4+5 (4-4), 3°7-4-0 (3:9), 3-5-4) (3-8); My 3-6-4-0 (3-9), 3-5-4-0 (3-7), 3-135 (3:4); My 2-4-2-9 (2-6), 2-5-2-7 (2-6), 1-7-2-1 (1-9). The length of the molar rows in situ are: M.'* 10-9-12-4 (11-8); Mgrs 11-6-12-3 (11-9). The Curramulks series is of interest as confirming in a strict homupatric group of examples what may be called the normal heterogenity of B. lesweuri in cranial characters as already seen in the Central and lower Soutli Australian groups, which were drawn from much wider geographic limits, What was true for the earlier dual comparison is equally so in the present tripartite one, differ- ences being manifest in the average characters of groups rather than in indivi- duals, a large proportion of which are indistinguishable, or so dubjously so, as to be beyand the reach of a practical taxunumy, SUBPFOSSIT., POTONOINAR 297 There is ut present no information on the age of the Curramulka cave deposit, and an alternative view of the high vaviahility of the series might be based on the reasonable assnmption that the caves have been acting ws traps for a very long time during which the B. lesuerri population has undergone changes in averuge character, particularly in sizo, and that possibly the smallest adult forms represent an earlier population, and the largest, a later one. Nothing in the appearance of the material as 2 whole suggests such a stratification. The species was known to occur on Yorke Peninsula in the early days of setUlement cher but nu recent examples are available for direct comparisons, Moreover, the occurrence of similar dwarfs in recent populations of Central and South Aus- tralia would still reyuire explanation, This might perhaps be met by invoking the phenomenon of re-emergence, as accepted in the physical anthropology of Europe in explanation of the appearance of archaic types in urban populations, but there is mnch against this in the present case. While there may well be cunsideruble differences in the antiquity of dif- ferent portions of the series, its dwarfs, as pointed out earlier, do not Form i recognisable structural type apart fram the similarity in overall size, 'Uhe posi- tion adapted elsewhere (op. cit.) in discussing the same problem as it vecurs in B. penicilluta ogilbyi still seems the mure probable; namely, that the dwarfing in (his species is due to individual physiological anomulies, which either prede- tonmine the subject ta stunted maturity, or at least predispose it ta such when the life eyele is run under adverse conditions, MATERIAL FROM MISCELLANEOUS SITES For reasons developed above in connection with the normal variability of the spectes little of theoretical interest can safely be inferred from isolated spect- mens of infra specific distinction and all that can be done is to record the more warspieuaus variations which accur, irrespective of their possible significance, ‘Two such claim attention. : In the lower South-East district af the State at Mount Gambier and Tan- tanoala, in beds which have been regarded as coeval with the last phase of vulcanism there, examples oceur with a narraw P; upon which the grooves of the external face are reduced to 7, thus adding cousiderably to the difficulty of dis- Linguishing, the species from others which accompany it (infra). A specimen from the Baldina Creek in the Burra district of the mid-nerth af South Australia is remarkable for its large size. It is a nearly complete sku!! without mandible of a young adult at P'M? and is the largest example of any series of B. lesucnri measured by the writer, Most of its dimensions exceed the maxima for the recent series from lower South Australia and many of them exceed those of the available skulls from south-western Western Australia. The chief maxima are: greatest length 78-5, basal length 67-8; nasals length 30-7; rostrum depth 14-2; interorbita] breadth 17-5; anterior palatal foramina 5; diastema 10-5; bulla 18-8 * 15-0; basicranial axis 94:5; hasifacial axis 44-4. Dental dimensions ure within the recent Suuth Australian range and the molars (Ms' *, 13:0) are characteristically narrow. The Icft zvgoma is lacking, but the estimated zygomatic breadth of 44-6 yields a breadth index of +57, which is li for the species. The skull has ne claim to age and its place is obviously with the recent series; tartar crusts are still firmly adherent to the molars, and the circumstances of the find (@ fect deep in loam) which were responsible for its relegation ta the subfossil collection are not significant of age in an animal which lives {and dies} in deep burrows of its own making. 206 H. H. FINLAYSON BETTONGIA CUNICULUS Qgilby I identifying collections of mandibular fragments of Bettongia trom the lower South-East distuict of the State, the inherent difficulties due to normal overlap in dimensions are much increased by the occurrence of a 3rd species, somewhat intermediate between B. lesueurt and B. penicillata, In examples with worn dentition the difficulties of discriminating between this and B, lusueur? may be almost insuperable if the molar sets are incomplete, owing to the oecurrence of a 7-grooved and somewhut reduced variant of Py. in the latter (supra). By a fortunate chance the position was clarified by the recovery of wi unworn P, from the erypt of a mandible, which proved that the intermediute form was a somewhat microdont phase of B, cuniculus and the evidence of the premolar was then found to be supported by the molar condition, in which the seadation of the series is slight, Ms, .; being subequal and M, remarkably large —in one ease unprecedentedly so, in a mainland species, The dimensions of P, in two examples from yeleanic ash heds of Tan- tuntiola are: longth 6:4-6°7; breadth 2:6.2-7; H/L -51--54; grooves 7; Msy-s, 12:3+12 5; My crown area, 10°2-11-7. B. cuniculus as an extant species is exclusively Tasmanian; it lias been elaimed as a recent species for Victoria, but us tar as 1 am aware no evidence af its former presence. in South Atstralia has been previously adduced. BETTONGIA FPENICILLATA Gray (1) From southern districts (Kongarati, Mypolonga, Moana, ete.) come a series ol specimens broadly referable to the modern form 8. penicillata ogilbyt recently extinct in South Australia. The range of dimensions determined upon them is wider in most items than in the recent series (op. cit.), Prequently over- lapping both maxima and minima, but the means are generally equal or slightly lower, The group is not only reconcilable with B,p, ogiibyi as recently defined, bul in some structural details may be said to represent that form in excelsis. The premolar P, in particular while equal to the modern tuoth in size has several of its characteristic features accentuated. The grooves on the external wall are sumoetimes incretsed from 7 to 8 and are frequently so on the internal wall and they are deeply incised and conspicuous and continue so almost to the lower margin! of the enamel. Extraversion of the axis is marked, the crest making an angle 15° or more with the lingual margin of M, and the height of the hlade (enamel) reaches a maxbnum of 4-6 mm. in unworn tecth, yielding the very high H/L ratio of -70, The molar rows reach a maximum of 12-8 for Ms;-3 with a mean of 11-6; M, is extremely variable, its crown area ranging from 5:2-10-3 (8-1), this maxi- imam exeereding that of modern Bp. oatlbyi as represented here, The size sequence is generally Me >M, > Ma > M, as in the recent series; but there are examples of Ms > My > Mio My and these when they incorparate a large M; present a molar combination scarecly distinguishable from that of B. cunieulus of Tiwhineola, A cemarkahle feature in this group, foreshadowed in a milder form in the recent series, is the anomalous distribntion of tooth wear as between molars ant premolars in same examples, Mandibles occur in which the molar series is so worn as to be almost denmded of crown detail, even on Ma, while Ty is intact in every detail and dimension. Normally, the crowns of molars teamed with an naworn premolar are themselves scarcely touclied by wear, while on the other hand a premolar working with molars as worn as these subfussils woulel be denuded of grooves and reduced to one-half of its nascent height. A vela- tively lute tooth change was inferred {from indirect evidence) for the recent SURFOSSIL POTGROINAE 258 series (1958) and these present anomalies may be due simply to cases of extreme retardation in eruption of P;, On the other land, they may possibly indicate a revolution in the feeding habits of some individuals, either abnevrmally en- vironecl or abnormally selective of foodstuffs, (2) A cullection from the archacolugical site of Devon Downs in the lower Murray Valley is of interest as being derived from a series of stratified beds, svstematically excavated by Hale and Tindale (1930) und in part dated by C14 determinations (1957). The material corisists of about 50 fragments uf maxillae and mandibles with teeth both in situ and displaced, the mandibles being about 4 times 25 numerous as the manillaue, Rettongia ix represented in levels 1, 3, 4, 6 7, 8, 8 and LI, Wiving a lime span of approximately 5000 years, but % of the material was taken from levels 6 and 7. A selection of 33 of the best preserved examples repre- senting all the levels named has been measured and examined in detail, but in forming Conclusions as to identity, reliance has been chiefly placed upon speci- mens with premolars, as these are diagnostic to a much greater degree than molars. All premolars examined are tndaubtedly ot B. penicillata s. lato and as all mular sets sot associated with premolars show ahout the same variety as thase which are, there is a strong probability thut this is the ouly species of Betton present, The dental and mandibular characters indicate a small phase of the species ruughly intermediate in size between the moder By. ogilbyi and the small skull described as a dwact of that form (1958 op. cit. 287) and larger than the types uf Rp. francisoa and B.p. anhydra. The series is comparatively uniform and al- thengh most items measured give dimensions which overlap the minima vf the range for Bip. ogilbyi, the means are decidedly lower and after a serial eompari- son of all specimens it is considered unlikely that that form is represented any- where in the collection, nor is there evidence of any progressive change from a larger to a smuller type or vice versa with changing age of the beds. The permanent premolars of both jaws in essential structural points, such as extraversion, torsion and shape, and distribution of grooves are yery mu as in B.p. ogilbyi, but they are narcower tecth, less high anteriorly and the grooves in 50 per cent. of examples are reduced from 7 to & and on Pz from 4 to 4 The molars are also smaller: but althongh the size sequences are as in By. ogilbyi, the size gradation of M*% and M?* with respect to the subequal Mt and M? is frequently much sleeper, approaching the standard af B.p, francisce and anhyedra; a well-marked example of this trend gives the relative cruwn areas: M100; M798; M°63, M420, with a reduction ratio of 5-0, which is unequalled in B.p. ogilhyi. Some dimensions of teeth with the numbers of each measured are us tollows: P4(4) length, 6-1-7-L (64); do. hreadth, 2-5-2-8 (2-6): da. H/L, H6--64 (-60), Py(8) lenvth, 5-5-6-3 (6-0); do, breadth, 2-1-2-7 (2-4); do. T/L, +56--65 ( 62); P3(5) length, 4-6-4-0 (3-9); do. breadth, 2:1-2-5 (2-3); MP,(7) length, 2:7-3-0 (2-9); da breadth posterior Jobe, 2-3-2-7 (2:5); Ms'-8(7) 10-0-11-8 (11-3); Ms,-3(9) 10-5-11-7 (11:2); the minima for the molar rows are derived frum very worn examples. This population evidently persisted almost into modern times aml wis coeval with that of B.y, egilbyi, but not sympatric with it, so far as the Deyon Downs site is concerned. Its eaistence raises some curidus problems regarding its possible relations to the hypothetical subarid race represented by the soli- tary infantile specimen of the Waldana kurpitchi andl of which it may actually project a former south-eastern extension, 300 H. H, FINLAYSON POTOROUS MORGANI Finlayson Since this was described from caves at the western end of Kangaroo Island (1938), Mr. 11. M. Cooper has taken it in camp site debris at Pennington Bay at the other extremity of the south coast of the island. The specimen was a much-eroded fragment of a maudible, but yielded a perfect crown of Py from its crypt. It proves to be a prominently 2-grooved and 3-cusped tooth with the median cusp undivided, much smaller and distinctly lower than its fellows; the axis is straight and the body constricted to correspond to the grooves uf the crown, so that in the superior view it is distinctly trilobed with the maximum width near the middle; its length and greatest breadth are identical with those of the type, in spite of the difference in wear. The species also occurs in levels 1, 6 and 7 of the Devon Downs deposits, as mandibular purts, and comparison of these with the Kangaroo Isand man- dible may be had from the following figures, which give in tum dimensions for the single type mandible and the range in five specimens trora Devon Downs: length, dental foramen to masseteri¢ fossa, 15-5, 15-5-16-3 (15-9) (2); depth below Mo, 5-8, 6-0-6:8 (6-3) (5); P, length, 4-1, 4-1-4-2 (4-1 ca) (3); Pu breadth, 1-7, 1-8-2-0 (1°9) (3): Msv-u, 9°35, 9-7-10-3 (10-0) (5). The main- land mandible appears to be slightly heavier than in the type and the molar rows are a little longer, but there is overlapping in some items and with more insular specimens this would no doubt be increased. The premolar agreement is close, both in dimensions and general structure, though they are all too worn for fine detail to be assessed. The molar sequence is Ms > Ms > or = My > My as in the type; the single mainland example of My is a larger tooth than its Kangaroo Island counterpart, but empty alveoli in mainland jaws indicate that it may sometimes be very minute. Most of the dentitions are heavily worn and in this condition show a charac- teristic pattern, in which a remnant of the Hoor of the midvalley persists as a central island of enamel, sharply defined against the dentine by crescentic margins -- they are suggestive of the worn crowns of the (?much larger) “Hypsi- primnus” figured by Johnston in 1881 from the Tertiary of One Tree Point, Tasmania. Potorous cf tridactylus is chiefly represented by collections from cave de- posits on the Glenelg River, and will be reviewed elsewhere with the recent population. REFERENCES Funcayson, H. H_, 1938, ‘Frans. Roy. Soc, S. Aust. 62 (1), p. 152. Fustayson, H. H., 1958. Rec, S. Aust. Muscum. XITL (2), pp. 236-302. Haws, H. M., and Trxnate, N. B., 1930, Rec. S, Aust. Museum, 4, pp. 145-218. Trpaue, N. B., 1935. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Aust., LVI, p. 134. THE GEOLOGY OF THE CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE (SELLICK HILL TO YANKALILLA). BY C. ABELE AND B. MCGOWRAN Summary The Lower Cambrian rocks between Sellick Hill and Yankalilla have been divided into five formations. In the continuous Precambrian-Cambrian sequence the base of the Cambrian has been defined by the lowest known occurrence of Hyolithes in the area. The Cambrian sequence is characterized by a much greater carbonate content than the underlying Marinoan. Correlation with the Cambrian elsewhere in the State is only tentative. The Marinoan rocks in the central part of the area are thrust over the Cambrian to the north-west, and the Cambrian is now found as a series of folds lying mainly between the Black Hill Fault and the Willunga Fault. THE GEOLOGY OF THE CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE (SELLICK TILL TO YANKALILLA). C, Avrie Asp B. McGownan* [Read 9 October 1958] SUMMARY ‘the Lower Cambrian rocks between Sellick Hill and Yankahlla have been divided into five formations. In the continuous Precambrian-Cambrian sequence the base of the Cumbrian has been defined by the lowest known occurrence of Hyolithes in the area. The Cambrian sequence is characterized by a muc greater carbonate coritent than the underlying Marinoan. Correlation with the Cambriin elsewhere in the Stite is only tentative. The Marlnoan rocks in the cenlral part of the avea are thrust over the Cambrian to the north-west, and the Cambrinw is now found as a series of folds lying mainly between the Black Hill Fault and the Willunga Fault. INTRODUCTION The discoveries by Huwehin (1897) of Archaeocyatha in crystalline lime- stone at Normanville and Sellick Hill, and of “pteropod remains” (Hyolithes Bichwald) in “black marble near Normuanville’ by David (Howchin, 1597), conclusively proved that at least a part of the rocks of the Mt, Lofty Ranges was of Cambrian age. Howchin (1897) drew 4 rough geological section of the strata at Sellick Hill, dividing the rocks into argillites, limestones and quartzites. He considered the Archacocyatha to: occur at two main horizons and thut they formed “a trne coralline reef in the Cambrian seas”. Howchin admitted the possibility that the succession in the, Sellick Hill wrea was to some extent re- versed or extensively faulted. Madigan (1925) published a sketch-map of the yveolugy of the Fleurieu Peninsula, together with geological sections at Sellick Hill, Myponga Beach, Carrickalinga lead and Carrickalinga Creek. He also published a paper on fossils and the indications of organic activities within the Sellick ITill Limestone at Myponya Beach (1926). Mawson (1925) also examined this limestone, and considered that its origin was assvciated with algal activity. We measured a detailed section within the Cambrian at Sellick Hill, The idea that the stratigraphic succession was overturned at Sellick Hill wus definitely stuted in print by Mudigan in 1927. Madigan also mentiuns the possibility of an unconformity between the Cambrian and the Precambrian rocks. Seynit (1939) published a geoloyical mup with observations on the Myponga Beach area, The publication most helpful ta the writers was the geological map. of the Yankalilla sheet and its accompanying explanation by Campana, Wilson and Whittle of the Geological Survey of South Australia (1954, 1955). PHYSIOGRAPHY The north-western boundary of the area studied is formed by the Willunga Fault scarp, bordering the Willunga Basin, which is filled with Tertiary and Qnaternary sediments. * University of Adelaide. Trans. Ray. Soc. 8. Aust. (1959), Vol. 82. 3u2 C. ABELE sani B. McGOWRAN To the south of the scarp the topography is the result of rejuvenation of the old peneplained plateau of folded Precambrian and Cambrian rocks. Valley- in-valley topography, indicating at least two periods of rejuvenation, is scen in the creek to the south of the new Sellick Hill road. The drainage system is oriented approximately perpendicular to the shore line, with numerous bends und small branches at right angles to the main direction. Creeks have cnt deeply into the hills, forming steep-sided gullies. This fact, combined with the rough coincidence of the general strike of the beds with the direction of the shore line, enables good structural sections to be ob- served in the creeks. Sinee the limestone is the most common rock type, with Cambrian sand- stone practically absent, the arca consists of rounded hills. Most of the shore line, however, is characterized by steep cliffs. Where the Sellick Hill Limestone outcrops on the coast, wave-cut platforms are common; the Archaeocyatha limestme sometimes forms narrow, sandy beaches. In the southern part of the area a coastal plain, with sand dunes on its western side, separates the sea from the hills. The plain is covered with Hat- tying Quaternary and Permian sediments. STRATIGRAPHY INTRODUCTION The locality in which most previous worl on the succession has been done is Sellick Hill (Tlowchin, 1897; Mawson, 1925; etc.),. Henee the section through the relatively undisturbed Cambrian strata in this locality is considered as the type section for the Cambrian of the Willunga Scarp and the coastal areas to the south-west. The writers divided the Cambrian rocks into five formations. The lowest is referred to as the Wangkonda Formation and may be subdivided in the north into two members; the Hyolithes sandstone at the base, and the limestone member. At Carrickalinga Creek the formation is a calcareous sand- stone. The Sellick Hill Limestone succeeds this, and is for the most part a characteristically banded limestone. The Fork Tree Limestone includes the dominant Archaeocyatha limestone with a thin mottled limestone at the top. In ascending order, the rest of the succession is inclided m the Heatherdale Shales, with a lower and a thicker wpper member, and the alternating sequence of greywackes and shales of the Kanmantoo Group. TABLE f. Campana and Wilson 1955 Abele and MeGawran 1958 Groywacke Greywacke KANMANTOO || GROUP aes es = npper member upper slates with phosphatic nodules a HBATHERDALE || lower member SHALES mottled limestone ; ry FORK TREE upper Archaocyathinze limestone Archacocyat ha LIMESTONE limustone 1 mottled limestones-und calnaragis slates SELLICK HILL LIMESTONE lower Archneocyathinae limestone limestone member | WANGEKONDA -- —$ $$ FORMATION Hyalithes s8- MARINOAN i! MARINOAN sEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE 303 Geographical names used in naming the formations have been taken from a well-known topographie feature (Sellick Hill) and from local pastoral praperticy The Heatherdale farm extends over part of the area to the north, where good exposures of the shales are found; similarly the Archaeocyatha and mottled limestones are well exposed on the Fork Tree property, situated inland from Carrickalinga Head, “Wangkonda” is the aboriginal name for a salt pan south of Sellick Beach (Mr. N. B. Tindale, personal communication), Since Campana and Wilsem carried out the most detailed geological map- ping of the area previous to the writers work there, a comparison of their strati- graphic units and the ones described in this paper is tabulated in Table 1, CARRICKALINGA HREAO- NEW SELLICK HILL OLD SELLICK HILL~ ivro! A CARRICKALINGA CREEK MIFONES: EACH MYPONGA OAD MYPONG A ROAD 5 Crake = ET Aoethentlese See = 1¢ tower u Lt meecrhes r Atos tive aie a 81% a t + in ws 4 fark Tree > we ENE | 2s se 2877: |} beeprce diowestore o a e4a ye Siete Mobb 9 Formation Fig. 1—Cambrian Sequences, Sellick Mill-Carrickalinga Creek. | Sotarieartene A serics of stratigraphic sections is given in Fig; 1. The section from the new road inclides measurements of the muttled limestone and succeeding units tuken where they outcrop on the coast to the south-west. The southernmost section is also composite, and is poorly known duc to structural complications. "Thus the thicknesses of the Fork Tree Limestone and younger formations can only be indicated very roughly. MARINOAN Althouzh they haye not been specifically studied, these rocks of late Pre- cambrian age are mentioned here because of their apparently conformable re- lationship to the Cambrian strata. They occur in three structurally separated areas: at Scllick Hill in the north and at Carrickalinga Creek in the south the succession is evidently undisturbed; in the central part, from Black Hill to near Carrickalinva Hill, the racks considered to be of Marinoan age are separated from the Cambrian by the Black Hill Fault, vit ©, ANELE an» B. McGOWHAN Below the lowest known fossiliferous unit at Sellick Hill the rocks sre mainly shales and slatcs, sometimes ‘sandy and occasionally slightly calcareous, Exposure is usually fairly good in the creeks, but poor on the hills. Massive quarteites with a tendency to lense occur in the sequence, and felspathic sand- stones have been found near the top. The uppermost Precambrian is well exposed on the new Scllick Hill road, where hands of quartzite, interbedded in shales, are better developed than on the old road. The quartzite bands of Black [Till ure evidently equivalent to those on the new road, although the two localities are structnrully separated by the fault. The lithology of the sequence beneath these is fairly uniform. Slates are most common. often phyllitic and often calcareons. Small hands and lenses of sandy material may occur in the argillites, and the coarser matevial is frequently cross- bedded. The sequence contains lensing hands of well sorted quartzite, und also of dense blue limestone. In comparison with the Marinoan at Sellick Hill, # higher carbonate content is evident, The rocks below the Wangkonda Formation in the neighbourhood of Car- rickalinga Creek are highly calcareous, These beds, considered to be of upper Marinoan age, and to be in un undisturbed sequence, include slates, commonly caleaveous, limestones, both massive and slaty, and quartzites. A trend of overall increase in the carbonate content in rocks af this age, from nerth-exst to south-west is evident. However, the trend is in the opposite direc- tign in the Myponga Creek area, and the facies change to the south, toward the highly calcareous Myponga Creek section, is very pronounced. CAMBRIAN WANGKONDA FORMATION A peculiar heterogeneous sandstone outcrops above the Marinoin on the new road, It persists to the north-east beyond Sellick Till and is found below a massive limestone tu the south of Black Hill, The rock consists of quartz and felspar grains, mainly angular, and contains dark discontinuous bands and streaks uf clay, the whole being set in a carbonate matrix in fresh material. In most outcrops, however, the rock is leached of carbonate. It is slightly more than fifty feet thick on the new road, An important feature is the occurrence of a deeply weathered band of clay containing numerous Hyolithes. ‘This band, found on the new road, is only a few inches thick and may be of very limited lateral extent, Although Hyolithes has not been found elsewhere in the poorly outcropping unit, the latter is referred to as the Hyolithes sandstone because of the importance of this earliest fossil occurrence in the area, and is mapped as the lower menber of the formation, The second member differentiated in the Sellick Hill region corresponds in put to the “lower Archaeacyathinae” lirnestone of Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1954, 1955) and is called the limestone member. It consists of massive, mainly blne-grey and grey recrystallized limestone, with « median band rich in quartz grains, ‘The: hewer cuntact of the member is gradational in some places, chang- ing upwards from a thin, discontinuous layer of banded rock to massive lime- stone, [n other localities the contact is weil defined, The member is cut off by the Black Hill Fault to the north of Black Hill. An isolated outcrop occurs to the south of Black Hill, possibly terminated by a fault at one end and covered by Permian at the other. Another isolated outcrop of the member, surrounded by younger formations, occurs slightly more than a mile tu the west, GEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDF B05 The outcrops of the Wangkonda Formation in the south of the area are separated from those in the north, described above, by a distance of several males, South af Myponga Creek, the northernmost occurrence of rock auteraps, correlated with the limestone member, is withm a loop of outcropping quartzite to the north of the sharp bend in the Myponga Beach-Normanville road. These isclated outcrop patches consist of massive limestone. Tfowever, the pre- duminant rock Lype in the Carrickalinga Creek and neighbouring areas is a calcareous sandstone consisting of abundant quartz grains in a calcareous matrix. it usually weathers to a light buff or greyish colour; fresh surlaces are most commonly dark bluc, but less often a light bruwn, colour. It is essentially a stratified rock, ulthough usually the bedding fs poor and parts are quite massive. Less common rock types include pale grey massive limestone and reddish-brown, cuarse, arkosic sandstone, The calcareous sandstone is stratigraphicully immedialely below the Selick Hill Limestone and is correlated with the two members of the Wangkonda Formation at Sellick Hill (Fig, 1). Because of the geeat difference in lithology of the sequence Lelow the Sellick Hill Limestone in the northern and southern part of the area respectively, the correlation of the base of the Wangkonda Formation is not as vonclusive as desirable, The thicknesses of the subdivisions of the limestine member were measured as Follows; On the hill above the new Sellick Hill ruad: Upper massive limestone - 100 Ft. Median band . ; . Lower massive band ~ , 210 ft, At Sellick Hill: Upper massive limestone be ‘ 105 fr. Median band . 7 , 75 ft. Lower massive band _, ' “4 200 ft. The median band is a markedly lensiny unit. The thickness of the Wang- konda Formation in Carrickalinga Creek was estimated by pacing as approxi- mately 300 feet. It increases sornewhat inconsistently towards the north. The writers have failed to find any fossils either in the calcareous sandstune or in the limestone member, though microscopic Archacocyatha were recorded in the latter by Campana, Wilson and Whittle (1955, p. ah These, however, were stated to average 0-25 mm, in diameter, ie. much smaller than the earliest known growth stages of this group (Dr. B. Daily, persinul communication ). SELLICK HILL LIMESTONE This formation, like the Archaeocyatha limestone ubove it, is persistent and easily traced over nearly the whole length of the Cambrian in this arca, It characteristically consists of an alternation of bands of pale or dark grey crystal- line limestone with buff, shaly bands (Pl. 1, Fig. 4). There is a wide variation in the thickness, clastic/non-clastic ratio and degree of lateral extension of the bands, and the sharpness of contacts hetween them. The “shaly” bands are commonly largely calcarcous and only relatively mare shaly than the “calcareous” bands, Weathering exaggerates the difference in composition, The average thickness of the bands is approximately 2-3 om.; however, bands as thick as 10 cm. occur. The calcareous and the shaly bands are not always of the same magnitude: sometimes the thicknesses of the shaly bands exceed those of the calcareous bands or vice versa. The shaly layers usually form continuous bands. The calcareous layers are more variable. They are of irregular thickness, showing pinching and swelling, and often disappear- 306 C_ ABELE anv B. MeGOWRAN ing entirely For short distances. Commonly the shaly bands are crudely bedded; the limestone Jayers show such lamination only rarely, Thin sections were made of part of the ruck where the caleareous bands were discontinuous and Junyps of limestone were surrounded by more shaly rock. In must sections the shaly laminae drape around the limestone lumps toa some extent (this is often observed in the unit at Myponga Beach, sha Bak, dingy planes, marked by a concentration of small Hyolithes (Pl. 1, Fig. 2) ex- hibit wodulutions parallel to the Irregular upper surface of the limestone hands), er end against the shale-limestone bouncy. In only cue section the calcareous portions are weakly laminated, The thickwesses enclosed between any two luminge are less in the shaly part than those between the correspunding laminac in the caleareous lamps. In the Sellick Hill area the formation consists of a lower, mainly clastic part, characterized by an abundance of angular quartz yrains (from silt to sand size) in a calcareous matrix. The upper part exhibits better developed banding. ‘The boundary between the two subdivisions is rarely distinctly obsery- able; hence the formation was mapped as a single unit. At Myponga Beach and neighbouring areas the base of the Sellick Hill Lime- stone is cavered by the sea. The exposed part exhibits well developed banding. Bands rich in coarse quartz grains occur at some horizons, as well as internally Drecetated layers, In cuterops in the Carrickalinga Head region the formation commonly corgisty of bands of massive, dark blue or purplish-black limestone and finely laminated shale. Weathering produces a characteristic serrated surface — pro- jeeting, more or less, consistently thick banels are separated by recessed layers. Generally speaking, the formation is more shaly towards its base vertically and tewards the south horizontally. The thickness of the formation, as measured at Sellick Hill, is 580 feet. In Cavrickalinga Creek it is about 310 feet; in the two creeks to the north it is approximately 400 and 500 feet respectively (calculated from aerial photo- graphs), At Myponga Beach a thickness of over 400 fect is exposed; the rest is covered by the sea. At Sellick Mill the tormation contains Hyolithes at various horizons from just above its buse to 26 feet above il, as well as worm casts and burrows. At M ypongs Beach a remarkably rich concentration of large Hyolithes is associated with several layers of internally breceiated rock, each approximately 10 em. thick, recording minor diastems within the unit, At this same general horizon (ap- proximately 300 feet below the contact with the Archacocyatha limestone) less notable concentrations of small Hyolithes occur at various levels within the shaly bands. This is the best known locality for [fyolithes. The gastropod Helcionella Grabau and Shimer and brachiopods (Dr. M. F. Glaessner, personal communi- cation; Daily, 1956) also occur here. Hyolithes has been found at approximately the same horizon to the east of Myponga Beach. Sponge spicule fragments (Chancelloria Walcott) were discovered just below the contact with the Archaeocyatha limestone in the creek about a mile to the south from Myponga Beach, and a solitary Archaeotyathid within a caleareous band of the formation. Hyolithes was found at an undetermiaable horizon within the formation to the sunth-west of the isolated outerop of Archacocyatha limestone about a mile east of Carrickalinga Head. FORK TREE LIMESTONE Taiwer member—Archaecocyatha limestone, Of Wl the Cambrian tock nnits in the region the outerops of Archacocyatha limestoue necupy the largest area. The major anticline, of which the Archaeocyatha limestone is the thickest cam- GEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SGUTH OF ADELAIDE OF petent member, is the dominant structural feature. The Archaeocyatha hme- stone unit is Litholugically remarkably uniform, The limestone is most commonly light grey to moderately dark blue on fresh surtaves. It weuthers to a pale grey, nearly white or somewhat light brownish colour. JE is generally a very pure, finely crystalline limcstonc, with invre than 90 per cent, of carbonate minerals, A small amount of detrital minerals js present, quartz being the most common, It is probably dolomitized to a certain extent in various pacts. The limestone is characteristically massive and occasionally jointed. The thickness of the unit was measured as 570 feet at Sellick Till, Im the Myponga Beach region the thickness is approximately 700 feet; in the southern part no reliable measurements can be obtained of the total thickness becanse of folding and faulting (in Carrickalinga Creek the observable thickness was esti- mated by pacing as about 380 feet). The limestone thus varies in thickness (Fig. 2), thinning to the north beyond Sellick Ail. Upper member—mottled limestone. Towards the top of the Fark Tree Limestone a marked change in lithology from a massive ta a mottled limestone js observed, The characteristic appearance of this mottled limestone is that of dark bluc (sometimes approaching black) angular lumps of Jimestone sur- rounded by yellow-brown (sometimes reddish), somewhat more shaly material, Characteristically the distribution of the two components is highly irregular, olten indicating breeciations sometimes a degree of parallelism of the two distinct lithologies is exhibited, here is only a slight differential weathering of the two components. The member is observed. or, in Some creeks, inferred, to extend as a eon- tinuous bund from north of Sellick Hill to about two miles north of Myponga Beach. The mottled limestone does nol outcrop between this locality and Myponga Creek, to the south of which it continues for approximately twu miles, until it is cut of by the Black Hill Fault, It reappears on the other side of the majur anticline in the neighbourhood of Carrickalinua Mead, truncated by the sea at its northern and by the inferred continuation of the Black Hill Fuult at its southern extremity. The thickness of the member was measured as 38 feet on the ald Sellick Hill road, and 60 fect near the coast west of Bluck Hill, Near Carrickslinga Head it is wpproximetely 100 feet thick. Even though the mottled limestone is much thinner than the Archaeocyatha limestone, its greatly different lithology am persistence and ease of mapping justifies its separation as an upper member of the ork Tree Limestone. Spicules of Chancelloria were found in this unit at Mt. Terrible Cully. A brachivpod has also been found in the same locality by Dy. B, Daily (personal eomumiinieation ), , THEATHERDALE. SHALES This formation can be divided inta two members. Lower member, The top of the mottlad limestone is taken as the formation boundary. In some localities the contact is marked by an abrupt change in weathering, The shales are here less resistant to leaching, and Ure member is found as an alternation of very I'visble shales and more resistant limestone. On the other hand, in other localities the lower few fect consist of highly caleareous banded rock which does not disintegrate sa easily. The shales are usually brightly coloured (red, pink), with colour banding, The beds may he sandy and sometimes (rarely) show cross-bedding on a small smile, The mure or less regular dark-blne bands of limestone which sltemate with these tend to be replaced by large nodules tawurd the top of the member. JOS C. ABELE ano B. MceGOWRAN On the old road at Sellick Ifill this member does not outcrop. To the south, the mottled limestone is succeeded by a well-bedded and banded sequence of blue limestone and yellow or pink shaly limestune. Soft pink shales with blue nodules follow these. To the north of the old road similar shales imme- diately suceced the mottled limestone. In Mt. Terrible Gully and the next creek to the south the rocks are deeply weathered. The sequence is apparently almost complctcly clastic, and often sandy, There is little indication of the abundant carbonate which characterizes this horizon in other parts of the area. The uppermost few feet, especially in the creek to the south, contain numerous ovoid hollows, which obviously once contained limestone nodules. Still further south-west (on and near the coast to the west of Black Hill) the rocks are highly caleareous. Dark blue limestone is found in bands, some- times broken and a few centimetres thick, The shale/limestone ratio varies con- siderably but in the sixty feet developed in this section there i. a definite but irregular upward increase in the clastic component. Large ovoid nodules then SANSS EY Fig. 2,—Structural sections, Sellick Hill-Carrickalinga Head. The location of each Section is shown on the map (Fig. 4). Topography accurate; vertical seale not exaggerated. GEOLOGY OF CAMBRIAN SOUTH OF ADELAIDE 309 PERMIAN CAMBRIAN Greywacke Heatherdale Shale fork Tree Limestone Selick Hit) Limestone Bey Wen 7g kondse Formation [-J---] PROTEROZOIC Ee SCALE 'N CHAINS te] 40 80 120 a eee Se ae See | oun C, ABELE axp BL McCOWRAN appear and become common toward the top of the member. Many are 15 inches or more: in diameter (the largest found is over 3 feet across), Distorted lutninations may be traced around these nodules, although the latter sometimes sli laminations. A concentric structure is seen in thin sections of the nadules which, although not phosphatic, contain quartz and some fine opaque dark naterial, probably organic, The niodnles are arranged in rows: certain bedding planes inay he traced for several yards with nodules regularly placed about six feet apart. Where well preserved the shales at the top of the member are black aml @ecasionally pyritic. Small phosphatic nodules and elongated segregations veeur in the upper part of the member, Many of these features are found at Myponga Creck, ‘The beds there are deeply weathered, however, and large nodules are fomd only in a lew bands immediately below the brinwwn shales of the upper member. At Carrickalinga Head the member is aguin highly caleareous throughout. In the cliffs about one-quarter of a mile to the north there is a sequence of black nibbly limestone layers separated by black shales, with the latter deeply recessed by weathering. This rock-+type ts found when occurring inland. to be similar to the alternating limestone and shale bands described above. Shales with urge nodules are again found above the hands, and they are pyritic when well preserved, The member is about 250 feet thick to the south of Sellick Hill; 225 feet west of Black Mill; and about 200 feet (an estimation only) at Myponga Beach. The incompetently folded seqneace at Carrickalinga Head could net be properly measored: however, the unit is thicker here than to the north. Abundant small ribbed yastropods were found as internal and external moulds in the creek immediately south of the new road, They occur in the deeply weathered shales about fifty feet above the uppermost outcrop. of Arcbedeyatl limestone (the mottled limestone does not outcrop here). ‘The gastrapods are un undeseribed species of Helicionella. Myolithes was found just abuve this level, on hovizons a few inches apart. The fossils seem to be pre- sorved largely as iron oxides, also in a deeply weathered matiix, and cach bedding plane contains a large number of specimens. This indicates aceumu- lation and sorting during the time break represented by each bedding plane. Although flattened and altered, they are rather large, and are possibly H. plano- cénvexn (Tate) (Dr. B, Daily, personal communication). Hyolithes is also present al the same level (approximately). north of Sellick Hill; west of Black Hill, wt Carrickalinga Head (found by Dr. 5. Daily), and on the coast abont tHiree- ' are in arrears. ate Date oF = Tinsorary RAR LLOWS Election Election Hona ¥ FE ah 1855 1949 *CLeLanp, Pror. J. B., M.D., Dashwood Road, Beaumout, $.A.—Verco Medal, 1933; Council, 1921-26, 1932-37; President, 1937-28, 1940-41; Vice-. President, 1926-27, 1941-42. 1905 1955 "Mawson, Pror. Sm Dovcuas, O.B,.E., DSc, B.E,, F.R.S., University of Adelaide—Verco Medal, 1931; President, 1924-25, 1944-45; Vice-President, 1924-35, 1925-26; Counsil, 1941-43. (Sir Douglas Mawson died on 14th October, 1958, ) 1913 1955 *Osnonn, Pror. T. G, B., D.Sc. St Mark’s College, Pennington Terrace, North Adelaide-Couneil, 1915-20, 1922-34: President, 1025-26; Vice- President, 1924-25, 1926-27. i9t2 1955 *Wanv, L. K., LS.0., B.A. B.E., D.Se., 22 Northumberland Street, Heath- poal, Marryatville, S,A—Council, 1924-27, 1933-35; Vice-President, 1927-28: President, 1928-30. Date of : Election FELLows 1946. Annir, Prov, A. A, M:D,, D-Se., Ph.D., University af Adelaide. 1958. Anere, K., Dr. Phil. (Marburg), Dr.Phil.Nat. (‘artu-Dorpat), M.Sc. (Riga), 42 Kildonan Road, Warradale Park, S.A. 1953, Apcocg, Miss A., 4 Gertrude Street, Norwood, S.A. 1927. *AupERMAN, Pror. A. R., Ph.D., D.Se,, F.G.S., Department of Geology, University of Adelaide—Council,, 1937.42, 1954-57. 1951. Awnrrson, Mrs. S, H., BSc., 3) Lakeman Street, Narth Adelaide. 1935, *Anparwartua, H. G., M.Ag.Sc., D.Sc, Zoology Dept., University of Adelaide — Council, 1949-50: Vice-President, 1950-51, 1952-53: President, 1951-52. 1935. °AnnrewArTHa, Mrs. H, V., B-AgrSe., M-Se. (nee IT. V. Steele), 29 Claremont Avenue, Netherby, 5.A. 1929. °AnceL, F. M., 34 Fullerton Road, Parkside, §.A. 1939. ®AnceL, Miss L, M., M,Se., c/o Mrs. C, Angel, 2 Moore ‘Street, Toorak, Adelaide, S.A. 1945. °Bantiett, H. K., L.Th., 2 Abbotshall Road, Lower Mitcham, S.A. ‘ 1950. Bec, R. G, B.Ag.Sc., RD.A, Lynewood Park, Mil-Lel, yia Mount Gambier, S.A. 1932. Brac, P. R., D.D.Sc., L.D.S., Shell House, 170 North ‘Terrace, Adelaide. . D.Se., F.A.CL, Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag), Adelaide. |: A.S.A.S.M., M.I.M.M., 36 Woodaroft Avenue, St. Georges, §.A. 1934. Brack, E, C., M.B,, B.S., Magill Road, Tranmere, Adelaide. 1950. Gownin, N, J., M.B, BS., F-RG.S. (Fing.), F.R.A.C.S., 40 Barnard Street, North 1940, Bowxron, Sm J, Lavincron, 263 East Terrace, Adelaide, . 1945. *Boomsaa, C. D., M.Sc., B.Sce,For., 6 Celtic Avenue, South Road Park, S.A, 314 Date «ul Blewiun L037. 1939, 1937. Lot, 1925, 1958. TA22, 1953. 1957. 1829, 1958. 1940. 1928S 1936, 19356, 1951 1958. LIST OF FELLOWS *Brooxes, Miss H. M., Waite Institute (Private Mail Bag, No. 1), Adeluida, Brookman, Mrs. KR. D. (neo A. Harvey), B.A. Meadows, S.A, Buicx, W. G., B.A. ¢/o Country Lending Service, Poblic Tdbyary, South Australia. sByesner, Miss N. T,, MSc. CS.LR0., Div. Plant Industry, P.O, Box 109, Can- erra, A.C.T. Benoon, Kh. §., D.Sc,, University of Adelaide—Couneil, 1946-47, 1947-45, 1Od8-19 Boring, L., 54 Richmond Road, Warradale Park, S.A. °Camparnt, Prop, '!', D,, D,D.Se., D.Sc, Dental Dept., Adelaide Huspital, Adelawle— Gouneil, 1928-32, 1935, 1942-485: Vice-President, L942-34; President, 1930-45. Canren, A, N., B.bc., 70 Madeline Street, Burwood, E.13, Victoria. *CrrpeNpALE, G. M,, B.Sc, Lindsay Avenue, Alice Springs, N